The URL can be used to link to this page

Specifications (2) CALLISON PROJECT MANUAL BID /PERMIT SET RECEIVED AUG - 5 2008 CITY OF TIGARD BUILDING DIVISION NORDSTROM goos- City of Tigard Ap• rove • Plans By A Date 1 7 6 Tic 2 C/JA4 NORDSTROM Washington Square (057) Remodel Tigard, Oregon Project No. 207245.00 44 / July 21, 2008 V . ERIE O. STONE via pG ' C�J p%�.✓� • OFFICE COPY • (1›:. ALE YALLEY� �A ,� Callison Archnecls, P.0 7 1420 FIFTH AVENUE #2400 SEATTLE. WASHINGTON 98101 -2343 •- T 206 623 4646 F 206 623 4625 www calllson.com NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 000101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000114 PROJECT DIRECTORY 002215 BIDDER REQUIREMENTS 003152 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES 003153 OWNER PAID TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES CONTRACT 004144 BID FORM - ALTERNATE AND UNIT PRICE 006313 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION FORM 006319 REQUEST FOR TRANSFER OF DOCUMENTS FORM 006325 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 006333 OVERAGE AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS INVENTORY FORM 006336 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTY FORM 006339 WARRANTY SERVICE REQUEST FORM 007300 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ARCHITECTURAL SCHEDULES DOOR SCHEDULE DOOR SCHEDULE LEGEND ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE INTERIOR FINISH LEGEND GRAPHICS SCHEDULE ELECTRICAL DEVICE AND COVER PLATE SCHEDULE DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 012000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012200 UNIT PRICES 012300 ALTERNATES 013119 PROJECT MEETINGS 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013546 CARPET RECLAMATION 014500 QUALITY CONTROL 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 000110 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 030133 CONCRETE SLAB AND DECK REPAIR 035416 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT DIVISION 04 - MASONRY NOT USED DIVISION 05 - METALS 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 06 - WOODS, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY 064116 PLASTIC- LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 070183 REPLACEMENT FIREPROOFING 078400 FIRESTOPPING 079200 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081400 WOOD DOORS 083100 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 087300 DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTALLATION 088000 GLAZING 088323 UNFRAMED GLASS MIRRORS 088326 WOOD FRAMED GLASS MIRRORS 000110 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 000110 — TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 09 — FINISHES 092200 SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 092700 PLASTER FABRICATIONS 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 093000 TILING 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 096500 RESILIENT FLOORING • 096800 CARPETING 097200 WALL COVERINGS 097233 PLASTIC LAMINATE WALL COVERINGS 097723 FABRIC - WRAPPED PANELS 098100 ACOUSTIC INSULATION 099000 PAINTING AND COATING DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 101413 INSTALLATION OF SIGNAGE 102111 PLASTIC- LAMINATE -CLAD TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102813 TOILET ACCESSORIES 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 105636 RECONFIGURATION OF STORAGE ASSEMBLIES 106013 FIXED HANGROD 109013 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES DIVISION 11 — EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS 122213 DRAPERIES 123559 DISPLAY CASEWORK (Will be issued with Casework Drawings) 123563 DRESSING ROOM CASEWORK (Will be issued with Casework Drawings) 123565 BACKROOM CASEWORK (Will be issued with Casework Drawings) 123661 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT USED 000110 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 210000 FIRE SUPPRESSION DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR - CONDITIONING (HVAC) 230013 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL 230713 DUCT INSULATION 230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 233000 HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 255500 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF HVAC DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260013 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260583 METAL CLAD FLEXIBLE CABLE - COPPER 260586 ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS 260653 LIGHTING ORDER FORM 260656 LIGHTING NOTES 265000 LIGHTING DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 270000 COMMUNICATIONS 270813 OPTICAL FIBER TEST FORM 274133 AUDIO EQUIPMENT 274136 VIDEO EQUIPMENT 274139 MUSIC, PAGING, AND INTERCOM EQUIPMENT 274143 MASTER TELEVISION ANTENNA 000110 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 281600 INTRUSION DETECTION 282300 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283173 FIRE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM RECORD OF COMPLETION FORM 283176 FIRE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM INSPECTION AND TESTING FORM DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK NOT USED DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS NOT USED DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES NOT USED DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION NOT USED DIVISION 35 - WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTEGRATION NOT USED DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 42 - PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT NOT USED 000110 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 44 - POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 45 - INDUSTRY - SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 48 - ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION NOT USED END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON DOCUMENT 000114 — PROJECT DIRECTORY OWNER NORDSTROM, INC. (206) 303 -4300 1700 Seventh Avenue, Suite 700 FAX (206) 303 -4319 Seattle, WA 98101 -4407 Contact: Randy Olsen, Project Coordinator (206) 303 -4392 NORDSTROM R&H CONSTRUCTION (503) 228 -7177 GENERAL 1530 SW Taylor St. FAX (503) 224 -3638 CONTRACTOR Portland, OR 97205 Contact: Dave Gunsul, Project Manager ARCHITECT CALLISON ARCHITECTS, P.C. (206) 623 -4646 1420 Fifth Avenue, Suite 2400 FAX (206) 623 -4625 Seattle, WA 98101 Contact: Lisa Kirby, Project Manager Caela Beene ELECTRICAL/ HARGIS ENGINEERS, INC. (206) 448 -3376 PLUMBING 600 Stewart Street, Suite 1000 FAX (206) 448 -4450 ENGINEER Seattle, WA 98101 Contact: Robert D. Olson, Principal Ranillo Malapitan, Electrical Engineer Scott Miller, Plumbing Engineer HVAC DESIGN/ PSF MECHANICAL, INC. (206) 764 -9663 BUILD CONTRACTOR 9322 14th Avenue South FAX (206) 762 -8381 Seattle, WA 98108 Contact: Ginger Imel, Mechanical Engineer Mark Kaminsky, Design Engineer FIRE PROTECTION SCHIRMER ENGINEERING (301) 220 -1212 CONSULTANT 6305 Ivy Lane, Suite 220 FAX (301) 220 -2256 Greenbelt, MD 20770 Contact: John Devlin, Regional Manager LeJay Slocum, Design Engineer 000114 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON DOCUMENT 000114 — PROJECT DIRECTORY VERTICAL LERCH BATES & ASSOCIATES (425) 205 -2205 TRANSPORTATION 19515 North Creek Parkway, Suite 304 FAX (425) 205 -2209 CONSULTANT Bothell, WA 98011 Contact: Jack Tornquist, Area Manager Kevin Egli, Project Manager DOOR HARDWARE CONTRACT HARDWARE, INC. (206) 298 -4770 CONSULTANT 945 Elliott Avenue West FAX (206) 298 -4777 Seattle, WA 98119 Contact: Dale Garrett, President Leo Morgan SOUND SYSTEM LEIBOLD COMMUNICATIONS, INC. (206) 286 -8981 CONSULTANT 1448 Elliot Avenue West FAX (206) 286 -9031 Seattle, WA 98119 Contact: Nick Leibold, President Brad Holmes s 000114 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON DOCUMENT 002215 — BIDDER REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - General 1.1 SUMMARY A. By proposing a price to complete the work, the Contractor agrees: 1. That any ambiguities discovered in the Specifications and Drawings or questions with regard to the Bid Documents shall have been brought to the attention of the Architect in writing prior to submitting the bid. 2. To receive the prices set forth in its proposal as full compensation for furnishing all the materials and labor which may be required in the completion of all work required under the Contract Documents, and in all respects to complete the contract work to the satisfaction of the Architect. 3. That there may be changes to the scope of work and that any proposal submitted for performance of additional work over and above that required by the basic Contract will include all costs to the contractor associated with such change including but not limited to labor, materials, subcontracts, equipment, taxes, fees, schedule impact, loss of efficiency, supervision, overhead and profit. 1.2 SUB - BIDDER REQUIREMENTS A. By submitting a bid, all sub - bidders acknowledge: 1. That they have familiarized themselves with the provisions of the General Conditions of the Contract, and that they have examined all the Drawings and Specifications, as they pertain to his work. 2. That they have reviewed the project progress schedule with the General Contractor, fully understand the schedule, and have verified, prior to submitting a bid, availability of all necessary labor and materials including supervision and office backup, and can comply with the schedule requirement. 3. That they understand that submittals of material and equipment to the Architect is for the purpose of establishing intent, and that any review undertaken by the Architect does not relieve the subcontractor of responsibility for cooperation with other contractors, subcontractors, or designers to ensure that materials and equipment provided under the subcontract will comply with Contract Document requirements, will fit properly, and be suitable for the purpose intended. 1.3 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Mechanical Work: By submitting a bid on the mechanical system, or a portion thereof, all mechanical sub - bidders acknowledge ... 1. That they fully understand the Contract requirements (including requirements of architectural site, utility, structural, and electrical drawings and specifications, as they may pertain to mechanical work) and have determined to their satisfaction that the Contract Documents adequately describe the complete mechanical system, and that they can provide a complete finished and operable system in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents. 2. That the routing of the elements of the mechanical system included in the Drawings is schematic only and that offsets and rerouting probably will be required in installation, and labor materials have been included for such in his bid. 3. That they have consulted with all affected utilities and included in their bids all labor and materials to meet all requirements which may be imposed by each utility and also included in their bids all costs and fees to be paid to such utilities, including temporary services and temporary and permanent connections unless specifically excluded in basic Contract Documents. 4. That they are required to coordinate their work with that of all other trades and that the responsibility for coordination includes the rerouting, offsets, etc. to fit work in the structure in a manner that is compatible with the work of other trades in the same area. PART 2- PRODUCTS Not Applicable 002215 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON DOCUMENT 002215 — BIDDER REQUIREMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF DOCUMENT A 002215 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON DOCUMENT 003152 — TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES i t • 1.1 SUMMARY A. In addition to testing performed by the Contractor for its own convenience, and testing and inspection required under the Contract Documents, tests as described in the Document 003153 - Owner -Paid Testing and Inspection Services, are to be performed under separate contracts. B. The Owner reserves the right to modify testing and inspection requirements described herein. C. Related Section: 014500 - Quality Control: Cooperation and coordination with work described in this document; Contractor convenience testing; general quality control requirements. END OF DOCUMENT 003152 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON DOCUMENT 003153 — OWNER PAID TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES CONTRACT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish testing and inspection services for the subject project: NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE. Reference to "testing laboratory" in singular shall not be construed to limit work under this document to a single testing agency." C. Comply with requirements of the jurisdictional Code authorities. D. Definitions: 1. Where the terms "Testing Laboratory," are used, they mean and refer to the designated firm employed by the Owner (Nordstrom). E. Inspection and Test Reports: Prepare reports giving results and observations of tests, and stating compliance or noncompliance with Contract Documents. Include records of observations and tests performed, and other items as specified, herein. F. Duties and Responsibilities of the Testing Laboratory. 1. Submit written reports of inspections and tests to the Owner, Architect, and other parties designated by the Owner. 2. Submit copies of inspection reports to the jurisdictional building department, as required. 3. Upon request, provide interpretation of test results. 4. Submit final signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of the testing and inspection agency inspect knowledge, in conformance with the Contract Documents and the applicable workmanship provisions of the jurisdictional Code authorities. G. Testing Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 1.2 EQUIPMENT A. Furnish all equipment to perform the required tests and inspections, except as required to be furnished by the General Contractor as described in the Construction Documents. 1.3 REQUIRED TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Concrete Floor Flatness: 1. Measure flatness of concrete floor slabs to ascertain compliance with specified tolerance requirements. Refer to section 033000 - Cast -In -Place Concrete for specific tolerance requirements. 2. Test flatness using the 10 foot straight edge method. Concrete floor tolerance compliance tests shall be performed and all defective areas identified as soon as practical after placement but not later than 72 hours after installation. B. Sprayed Fireproofing: 1. Test and inspect fireproofing for thickness and density at randomly selected locations. 2. Perform tests in accordance with requirements of ASTM E605 - Standard Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire - Resistive Material Applied to Structural Members. C. Additional Special Testing and Inspections: In addition to the above requirements, comply with the special tests and inspections required by the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). END OF DOCUMENT 003153 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON DOCUMENT 004144 — BID FORM — ALTERNATE AND UNIT PRICE TO: Randy Olsen, Project Manager NORDSTROM, Inc. Store Planning And Architecture 1700 Seventh Avenue, Suite 1000 Seattle, WA 98101 -4407 I have received the Documents for the above titled work, including Drawings and Project Manual, dated: and including Addenda Nos. . I have examined the Documents, and submit the following prices, to furnish and install items as described in Sections 012300 - Alternates and 012200 — Unit Prices, and itemized in the following schedule, including equipment, tools, permits, layout, coordination, and supervision. Items for which unit prices are required shall be separate from the maximum contract price for project construction. The Owner is understood to be under no obligation to purchase the noted quantities; adjustments to contract price will be based on the quantity actually required for each Construction Change Directive. Payment for items listed in this Section shall be in accordance with Section 012000 - Price and Payment Procedures. In submitting this proposal, I agree: 1. To hold unit prices open until scheduled time of store opening. 2. To comply with applicable specification Sections for each item required. The attached prices include subcontractors' overhead and profit, but do not include State Sales Tax. By: Title: Firm: Date: Phone: Alternates, as described in Section 012300, will be included for the additional costs (credits) as follows: ALTERNATES SCHEDULE NO. 1 — Recycling of Construction Waste $ NO. 2 — Carpet Reclamation $ NO. 3 — Flex Drop for Sprinkler Heads. $ Unit Prices, as described in Section 012200, will be added to contract price for quantities greater than, and deducted from contract price for quantities less than those noted. UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE ITEM ADD DEDUCT 1. Self leveling cementitious underlayment, per sq. ft. $ 2. Floor tile installation, per sf $ ($ ) 3. Grout release, per sf $ ($ ) 4. Additional crack isolation membrane, per sf $ 5. Moisture barrier under wood flooring, per sf $ ($ ) 6. Carpeted base, per If $ ($ ) 7. Wood Veneer -Faced Doors, ea. $ ($ ) 8. Plastic Laminate -Faced Doors, ea. $ ($ ) 004144 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON DOCUMENT 004144 - BID FORM - ALTERNATE AND UNIT PRICE 9. Access doors, ea.: A. Fire rated wall access door,12" x 12" size $ , Al. Fire rated wall access door, 22" x 22" size .. $ B. Non -rated wall access door,12" x 12" size... $ 61. Non -rated wall access door,22" x 22" size... $ C. Non -rated drywall ceiling door, 12 x 12" size $ C1. Non -rated drywall ceiling door, 22 x 22" size $ 10. Screening film at flush doors with vision lites $ ($ ) 11. Paint partition, psf $ ($ ) 12. Paint light cove, plf $ ($ ) 13. Paint door frame, ea $ ($ ) 14. Paint cased opening, ea $ ($ ) 15. Stainless steel guards for wood door frames $ ($ ) 16. Install new wallcovering, psf $ ($ ) 17. Sealer for stone floor tile, psf $ ($ ) 18. Install carpet, psy $ ($ ) 19. Install carpet border, plf $ ($ ) 20. Provide resilient base, plf $ ($ ) 21. Ramping or tapered underlayment, plf $ ($ ) 22. Masonite floor protection, psf $ ($ ) 23. Stone base, plf $ ($ ) 24. Light Cove Baffle, plf $ ($ ) 25. Unframed Mirrors $ ($ ) 26. Patching of existing drywall (wall & clng), psf $ ; 27. Removal /Replacement of ACT, psf $ ($ ) 28. Paint ACT, psf $ ($ ) 29. Remove /Replace wallcovering, psf $ ($ ) 30. Sawcut concrete slab / Trenching, plf $ ($ ) 31. Modify GWB ceilings for lighting and others, ea.... $ ($ ) 32. Modify GWB ceilings /walls for display hooks, ea .. $ ($ ) r _ 33. Additional return air grilles, ea $ ($ ) 34. Concrete infill of slab trenches, plf $ ($ ) 35. Install display hooks in ACT ceilings, ea $ ($ ) . _ 36. Metal Screed with Undercutting, plf $ ($ ) 37. Remove And Cart Partitions, plf $ ($ ) 38. Remove And Cart Ceiling, Soffits, Fascias, plf $ ($ ) 39. Remove And Cart Light Coves, plf $ ($ ) 40. Remove And Cart Wall Finishes, Mirrors, plf $ ($ ) 41. Remove And Cart Doors, Frames, Cased Openings, ea $ ($ ) 42. Remove And Cart Stone Tile, psf $ ($ ) 43. Remove And Cart Carpet, psf $ ($ ) 44. Remove And Cart Casework, Cashwraps, plf $ ($ ) 45. Remove And Cart Fitting Rooms, plf $ ($ ) 46. Scarify Slab After Stone Tile Removal, psf $ ($ ) 47. Scarify Slab After Carpet Removal, psf $ ($ ) 48. Disconnect & Remove Plumbing Pipe, plf $ ($ ) 49. Fluorescent lay -in fixture $ ($ ) 50. Downlight fixture $ ($ ) 51. Fluorescent chain -hung fixture, ea. $ ($ ) 52. Exit light fixture, ea $ ($ ) 53. Fluorescent cove fixture, ea $ ($ ) 54. Surface light track, ea. $ ($ ) -- 004144 -2 07/21/08 • NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON DOCUMENT 004144 — BID FORM — ALTERNATE AND UNIT PRICE 55. Light switch, ea. $ ($ ) 56. Duplex receptacle, ea. $ ($ ) 57. Fourplex receptacle, ea $ ($ ) 58. Flush floor box — single service, ea $ _ ($ ) 59. Flush floor box with receptacle, ea $ ($ ) 60. Flush floor box — dual service, ea $ ($ ) 61. Flush three gang floor box, ea $ ($ ) 62. Poke -thru device, ea.. Concealed work beneath casework $ ($ ) 63. MC cable 3 #12 THWN, per ft $ ($ ) 64. MC cable 4 #12 THWN, per ft $ ($ ) 65. MC cable 3 #10 THWN, per ft $ ($ ) 66. MC cable 4 #10 THWN, per ft $ ($ ) 67. 1/2" EMT, per ft $ ($ ) 68. 3/4" EMT, per ft $ ($ ) 69. #12 COPPER WIRE, per ft. $ ($ ) 70. #10 COPPER WIRE, per ft. $ ($ ) 71. 30A, 8 pole lighting contactor, ea $ ($ ) 72. 1/2" EMT and two gang box, ea $ ($ ) 73. Additional Category 5E data cable and data outlet: (Datalloice Contractor Unit Price) A. Installed before ceiling tile is installed, per drop $ B. Installed after ceiling tile is installed, per drop $ 74. Additional FTV Security Camera Cable, per drop . $ 75. Additional PTZ Security Camera Cable, per drop . $ 76. Pendant Lighting Fixtures, ea $ 77. Additional single gang plaster ring & pull string, ea $ 78. Data Communication special store opening services, per hour $ ($ ) 79. Cast iron piping, above grade, per ft 2" $ ($ ) 3" $ ($ ) 4" $ ($ ) 6" $ ($ ) 8" $ ($ ) 80. Cast iron. piping, below grade, per ft 2" $ ($ ) 3 " $ ($ ) 4" $ ($ ) 6 ., $ ($ ) 8" $ ($ ) 81. Type "L" copper piping, per ft 1/2" $ ($ ) 3/4" $ ($ ) 1" $ ($ ) 1 -1/2" $ ($ ) 2" $ ($ ) 2 -1/2" $ ($ ) 3', $ ($ ) 4,' $ ($ ) 82. Natural gas piping, per ft 1/2" $ ($ ) 3/4" $ ($ ) 1" $ ($ ) 1 -1/4" $ ($ ) 1 -1/2" $ ($ ) 2 " $ ($ ) 2 -1/2" $ ($ ) 3" $ ($ ) 004144 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON - DOCUMENT 004144 — BID FORM — ALTERNATE AND UNIT PRICE 83. Black steel piping, per ft 1/2" $ ($ ) 3/4" $ ($ ) 1 " $ ($ ) 1 -1/2" $ ($ ) 2" $ ($ ) 84. 1 inch core drill, ea $ ($ ) 85. Core drill ( >1 "), ea 2" $ ($ ) 3 " $ ($ ) 4" $ ($ ) 6" $ ($ ) 8" $ ($ ) _ 10" $ ($ ) 86. Carrier and rough -in: A. For Fixture P -1 Water Closet, ea $ ($ ) B. For Fixture P -3A Wall Mount Lavatory, ea... $ ($ ) 87. Floor /drain sink: A. Floor drain FD -1, including core drill, ea $ ($ ) B. Floor sink FS -1, including cutting and patching, ea $ ($ ) 88. Wall hydrant, ea $ ($ ) 89. New watercloset, ea $ ($ ) 90. New lavatory, ea $ ($ ) 91. New urinal, ea $ ($ ) 92. New mop /service sink, ea $ ($ ) 93. New water cooler, ea $ ($ ) 94. Sprinkler head design, per head $ ($ ) 95. Sprinkler head installation, per head: , A. Gypsum board ceiling $ , B. Suspended acoustic ceiling $ C. No finished ceiling $ _ 96. Sprinkler head relocation, per head: A. Gypsum board ceiling $ B. Suspended acoustic ceiling $ C. No finished ceiling $ 97. Fire Hose Connection, ea $ ($ ) END OF PROPOSAL __ 004144 -4 07/21/08 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION RFI 00 NORDSTROM — Washington Square (057) Remodel TO: Callison Architects, P.C. FROM: Contractor 1420 Fifth Ave. #2400 Street Address Seattle, WA 98101 City, State Zip PHONE: (206) 623 -4646 PHONE: FAX: (206) 623 -4625 FAX: ATTN: Lisa Kirby BY: Project Engineer lisa.kirby @callison corn name @contractor.com PROJECT NO. 207245.00 DATE: SUBJECT: SUB: SPEC. REF. TRADE: DWG. REF. JOB NO. PLEASE PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION /CLARIFICATION: Type description here BY: Project Engineer DUE DATE: RESPONSE: Type response here BY: Project Architect RESPONSE DATE: ATTACHMENTS: List attachments here DISTRIBUTION: (For CALLISON Use Only) Nordstrom, Inc. Callison Architects, P.C. PSF Lerch Bates Invisible Circus ❑ R. Olsen ❑ E Stone ❑ G. Imel ❑ K. Egli ❑ J Aitken ❑ S. Morton ❑ L. Kirby ❑ M. Kaminsky ❑ Casework Coordinator ❑ C. Beene Leibold Comm. Innovative Marble 8 Tile ❑ Datalloice Coordinator ❑ N Bentley Trane ❑ N Leibold ❑ R. Gregory ❑ File No. 207245.00 ❑ M Hogan ❑ B. Holmes Contractor Others ❑ Project Executive Hargis Schirmer Contract Hardware ❑ ❑ R . Mala itan ❑ J. Devlin ❑ L. Morgan ❑ ❑ Construction Manager p ❑ L S locum g ❑ Project Manager ❑ S Miller ❑ ❑ Superintendant Form RFI -N1 © 2008 Callison Architects, P C All nghts reserved 006313 REQUEST FOR TRANSFER OF DOCUMENTS FORM NORDSTROM — Washington Square (057) Remodel TO: Callison Architects, P.C. 1420 Fifth Ave. #2400 Seattle, WA 98101 Attn: Lisa Kirby We hereby request the following documents of the above titled project for purposes of: Document Description: Date of Documents: The use of information requested and transferred herewith, whether in print or electronic format, is at the recipient's sole risk, and such information may only be used for the project for which such Information was prepared. The Information may not include final data or represent exact as -built conditions. The accuracy of the Information, or the viability of electronic files, is not guaranteed and the recipient shall be solely responsible to verify and check all field conditions against the Information and to make all adjustments necessary to utilize such Information for its work. If a conflict between the print copy and electronic information exists, the print copy will have control. The recipient agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Callison, from any and all claims, expenses, damages and liability, arising out of use or modification of such Information. In no event shall Callison be liable for any loss of profit or consequential damages arising from the use or modification of the Information transferred herewith. Firm Name: Address: Telephone: Request submitted by: Name E -mail Address Signature: Date: Title Form RTD-N1 ® 2008 Callison Architects, P C All nghts reserved 006319 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM NORDSTROM — Washington Square (057) Remodel TO: Callison Architects, P.C. FROM: 1420 Fifth Ave. #2400 Seattle, WA 98101 Attn: Lisa Kirby PHONE: (206) 623 -4646 PHONE: FAX: (206) 623 -4625 FAX: PROJECT NO. 207245.00 DATE: We hereby submit the following for your consideration in lieu of the specified item(s) for the above project: Specification Section: Paragraph: Referenced Drawing(s): Specified Item: Proposed Substitution: Reason for Substitution: 1. Describe the differences between the proposed substitution and the specified item(s): 2. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings? ❑ YES ❑ NO If yes, indicate changes: 3. What effect does the substitution have on other trades? 4. What effect do applicable code requirements have on substitution? 5 Do manufacturer's warranties differ between proposed and specified items(s)? ❑ YES ❑ NO If yes, explain differences: Attachments: Projected lump sum installed cost difference between proposed substitution and least expensive specified item: $ (Decrease) Increase Submitted By: Title: Signature: Date: Signature shall be by a person having authonty to legally bind the firm to the above terms. Firm: Telephone: Address: The undersigned hereby: • Certifies that the proposed substitute item has been fully investigated and has been determined to be equal or superior to that specified in all respects; that the same or greater warranty will be fumished, that required maintenance service and source for replacement parts are available, and that incorporation of the proposed substitute item will not negatively affect other work. • Warrants that coordination, installation, and changes to the project as necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution shall be the Contractor's responsibility, that use of the substitute item(s) will not delay project completion, and that claims for additional costs related to its incorporation which may become subsequently apparent will be borne by the Contractor, including design services caused by its incorporation. Approved for Architect's Review: Date: General Contractor's Signature ❑Substitution Recommended ❑Substitution Recommended As Noted ❑Substitution Not ❑Substitution Returned — Subject to Owner's Consent Subject to Owner's Consent Recommended Insufficient Information Comments: Date: By: Callison Architects, P C. Signature Title Owner's Consent: ❑ Yes ❑ No Date: By: Nordstrom Signature Title END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Form SR -N1 ® 2008 Canon Archnecis, P C All nghts reserved 006325 OVERAGE AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS INVENTORY FORM NORDSTROM — Washington Square (057) Remodel w o U w (I) 0 Ce Q O 0 0 w W Q CC > > 0 U w w ITEM P.O. SCHED # DEPARTMENT QUANTITY REMARKS O o N � Form OMMI -N7 © 2008 Calhson Architects, P C All nghls reserved 006333 - Page SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTY FORM NORDSTROM — Washington Square (057) Remodel To: NORDSTROM, Inc. Store Planning and Architecture 1700 Seventh Avenue, Suite 1000 Seattle, WA 98101 -4407 I, the undersigned, hereby certify that work installed by , at (Name of Subcontractor) NORDSTROM — Washington Square — Tigard, Oregon (Name and Location of Project) has been performed in full accordance with the Contract Documents and that said Work as installed will fulfill or exceed all the Warranty and Guaranty requirements. We agree to repair or replace Work installed by us, together with any adjacent Work which is displaced or damaged by so doing, that proves to be defective in workmanship, material, or operation for a period of year(s) from (date of Store Opening), and will correct, without delay or additional expense to the Owner, and at a time convenient to the Owner, all defects which are not the result of acts of God, or misuse, and agree to pay all expenses, including Attorney's fees, incurred by the Architect and Owner, resulting from failure of the guarantied work. In the event of our failure to comply with the above mentioned conditions within a reasonable time period determined by the Owner, after notification in writing, we the undersigned, all collectively and separately, hereby authorize the Owner to have said defective Work repaired and /or replaced and made good, and agree to pay the Owner upon demanding all monies that the Owner may expend in making good said defective Work, including all collection costs and reasonable attorney fees. Signed: Date: (Authorized Signature of the Firm) Title: Firm: Address: Form SG -N1 02008 Callison Architects, P C All nghts reserved 006336 WARRANTY SERVICE REQUEST FORM NORDSTROM General Contractor: Washington Square (057) Remodel Address. City, State Zip Telephone: DATE OF REQUEST: REQUESTED BY: WSR #: OWNER: NORDSTROM, INC. DESCRIPTION OF WARRANTY WORK REQUESTED: COPIES TO: SERVICE PERFORMED: SERVICE PERFORMED BY: DATE CORRECTED: CHECKED BY: ACCEPTED BY: DATE: 006339 Form WSR -N1 O 2008 CALLISON ARCHITECTS, P.0 All nghis reserved NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 007300 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Except for revisions included in the following Supplementary Conditions, the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction "AIA Document A201 -1997 is hereby incorporated into the Work. All unaltered provisions of the General Conditions shall remain in affect. ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Revise Subparagraph 1.2.1 to read as follows: "1.2.1 The intent of the contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and /or reasonable inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results." B. Revise the third sentence of Subparagraph 1.6.1 to read as follows: "Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants." ARTICLE 2 OWNER A. Delete Subparagraph 2.2.1 and substitute the following: "2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the written request of the Contractor, prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligation under the Contract." ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR A. Delete subparagraph 3.3.1 and substitute the following: "The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the contract, unless the contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the contract documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures." B. Delete Subparagraph 3.7.1 and substitute the following: "3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract documents, the Contractor shall secure at the Owner's expense the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. Contractor's business licenses and registration fees will not be paid for by the Owner." C. Revise the first sentence of Subparagraph 3.11.1 to read as follows: "3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, As -Built Record Drawings, and other Modifications,..." 007300 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 007300 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS D. Revise the last sentence of Subparagraph 3.12.10 to read: "The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents, unless Contractor knows or should know of such inadequacies or deficiencies and fails to inform Architect and Owner of same." E. Revise the first sentence of Subparagraph 3.14.2 to read as follows: "3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner, adjacent property owner, or separate contractors by cutting, patching,..." F. Revise the first sentence of Subparagraph 3.18.1 to read as follows: "3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted bylaw, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including loss of use resulting therefrom; but only to the extent caused by the wanton or negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,..." ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT A. Delete Subparagraph 4.1.3 and substitute the following: "4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a new Architect whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect." B. Delete Subparagraph 4.2.5 and substitute the following: "4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and approve the amounts due the Contractor and will issue a Letter of Approval for such amounts." C. Delete Subparagraph 4.2.8 and substitute the following: "The Contractor will prepare Change Orders for approval by the Architect and Owner, and the Architect will prepare Construction Change Directives and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in paragraph 7.4." D. Revise Subparagraph 4.2.9 to read: "4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial completion and the date of final completion, will receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner's review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will approve a final Application for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents." E. Revise the first sentence of Subparagraph 4.2.10 to read as follows: "4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide, from time to time, one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site." 007300 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 007300 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS F. Revise the last sentence of Subparagraph 4.2.12 to read: "When making such interpretations and initial decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, and will not show partiality to either." G. Revise the third sentence of Subparagraph 4.3.1 to read as follows: "Claims must be made by written notice." H. Revise Subparagraph 4.3.2 to read as follows: "4.3.2 Time limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be made by written notice to the Architect and the other party." I. Add Subparagraph 4.3.7.3 which reads as follows: "4.3.7.3 Contractor shall make no claim for additional cost for a failure to complete the work earlier than the time limits current under the Contract Documents (Contract Time), regardless of the cause(s) therefore." J. Delete Subparagraph 4.3.10 and insert the following: "4.3.10 Claims for Additional Time and /or Additional Cost. Under no circumstances shall Contractor be entitled to receive more than actual cost plus 2.5% fee." K. Revise Subparagraph 4.4.5 to read as follows: "The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the reasons therefore and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both." L. Delete Subparagraph 4.4.6 in its entirety. M. Revise Subparagraph 4.4.8 to read as follows: "If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filling deadlines prior to resolutions of the Claim by the Architect, by mediation or by litigation." N. Revise Subparagraph 4.5.1 to read as follows: "4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 9.10.4 and 9.10.5 may, after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party." O. Revise Subparagraph 4.5.2 to read as follows: "4.5.2 The parties may endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Requests for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of litigation but, in such an event, mediation shall proceed in advance of legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order." 007300 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 007300 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS P. Revise Subparagraph 4.5.3 to read as follows: "4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in King County, Washington, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreement in any court having jurisdiction thereof." Q. Revise the title of Paragraph 4.6 to read "Litigation ". R. Delete Subparagraph 4.6.1 and insert the following: "4.6.1 Any claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 9.10.4 and 9.10.5, may, after decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be subject to litigation. Prior to litigation, the parties may endeavor to resolve disputes by mediation in accordance with the provisions or paragraph 4.5. The litigation shall be held in the place where the project is located or King County, Washington." S. Delete Subparagraph 4.6.2 and insert the following: "4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation may be decided by litigation." T. Revise the first sentence of Subparagraph 4.6.3 to read as follows: "4.6.3 Litigation shall be commenced within the time limits specified..." U. Delete Subparagraphs 4.6.4, 4.6.5, and 4.6.6 in their entirety. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS No Modifications ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS A. Delete Subparagraph 6.1.1 and insert the following: , "The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with the other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Condition of the contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver or subrogation. If Owner performs construction or operation related to the Project with the Owner's own forces or awards separate contracts as anticipated by this section subsequent to execution of this Agreement by Contractor and if the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such claim as provided in Paragraph 4.3." B. Revise Subparagraph 6.2.4 to read as follows: "6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage caused by the Contractor..." ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Delete Subparagraph 7.2.1 and insert the following: "7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Contractor from information provided by the Owner or Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following:" 007300 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 007300 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS B. Revise the first sentence of Subparagraph 7.3.8 to read as follows: "7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work order may be included in Applications for Payment..." ARTICLE 8 TIME A. Revise Subparagraph 8.3.1 to read as follows: "8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation or litigation, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine." ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION A. Delete clause 9.3.1.1 and substitute the following: "9.3.1.1 Such application may not include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives but not yet included in Change Orders." B. Revise the second sentence of Subparagraph 9.3.3 to read as follows: "The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application of Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall be free and clear of liens, claims, secunty interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, material and equipment relating to the Work." C. Revise the title of Subparagraph 9.4 to read "APPROVAL OF APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT ". D. Revise Subparagraph 9.4.1 to read as follows: "9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue a Letter of Approval to the Owner, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding approval in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1." E. Revise the first sentence of Subparagraph 9.4.2 to read as follows: "9.4.2 The issuance of a Letter of Approval will constitute..." F. Revise the third sentence of Subparagraph 9.4.2 to read as follows: "The issuance of a Letter of Approval will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified." G. Revise the fourth sentence of Subparagraph 9.4.2 to read as follows: "However, the issuance of a Letter of Approval will not be..." 007300 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 007300 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS H. Revise the title of Subparagraph 9.5 to read "DECISIONS TO WITHOLD APPROVAL ". I. Revise the first sentence of Subparagraph 9.5.1 to read as follows: "The Architect may withhold issuance of a Letter of Approval in whole or in part..." J. Revise the second sentence of Subparagraph 9.5.1 to read as follows: "If the Architect is unable to approve payment..." K. Revise the third sentence of Subparagraph 9.5.1 to read as follows: "If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Letter of Approval for the amount for which..." L. Revise the fourth sentence of Subparagraph 9.5.1 to read as follows: "The Architect may withhold a Letter of Approval or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or part of a Letter of Approval previously issued,..." M. Add the following clause to Subparagraph 9.5.1: ".8 failure to keep as -built record drawings current to work in progress as required by subparagraph 3.11.1" N. Revise the first sentence of Subparagraph 9.6.1 to read as follows: "After the Architect has issued a Letter of Approval, the Owner..." O. Revise Subparagraph 9.6.6 to read as follows: "A Letter of Approval, a progress payment, or..." P. Revise the last sentence of Subparagraph 9.6.7 to read as follows: "Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor." O. Revise the first sentence of Subparagraph 9.7.1 to read as follows: "9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Letter of Approval, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor with the time established in the Contract Documents the amount approved by the Architect or agreed to in mediation, then the Contractor may upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received." R. Revise the second sentence of Subparagraph 9.8.5 to read as follows: "Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner may make payment of retainage..." 007300 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 007300 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS S. Revise Subparagraph 9.10.1 to read as follows: "9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of the final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Letter of Approval stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architects on -site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the contractor and noted in the final Letter of Approval is due and payable. The Architect's final Letter of Approval will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled." T. Revise the first sentence of Subparagraph 9.10.3 to read as follows: "9.10.3 If after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and approval by the Architect, and..." U. Revise Subparagraph 9.10.5 to read as follows: "Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of Claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment." ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Revise the first sentence of Subparagraph 10.2.5 to read as follows: "10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub - subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and /or for which the Contractor is responsible..." B. Revise the last line of Subparagraph 10.3.3 to read as follows: "...provided that such damage, loss or expense is not due to the negligence of a party seeking indemnity." ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS A. Delete Subparagraph 11.1.2 and replace with the following: "11.1.2 The insurance required by the Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less that the following limits of liability, or greater if required by law. By requiring insurance herein, Owner does not represent that coverage and limits will necessarily be adequate to protect Contractor, and such coverage and limits shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in this contract. The insurance shall be primary over all other insurance of any additional insured, shall be written on an occurrence basis and shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment." 007300 -7 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 007300 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS B. Add the following Clause 11.1.2.1 to 11.2.1: "11.1.2.1 The limits of Liability for insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be: 1. Workers' Compensation: Statutory. Employer's Liability $10,000,000 each occurrence. 2. Commercial General Liability and Umbrella Liability, minimum limits as noted below: a. Bodily Injury and Property Damage $10,000,000 per occurrence $10,000,000 aggregate limit per location Coverage shall include, but not be limited to: Premises Operations Underground, Explosion & Collapse Hazards Products Completed Operations Blanket Contractual Liability Independent Contractor's Protective Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations b. Personal Injury Liability: $10,000,000 per offense. c. Completed Operations and Products Liability shall be maintained for a period not less than one year after final payment. 3. Automobile Liability, including owned, hired and non -owned autos. a. Bodily Injury and Property Damage: $10,000,000 Combined Single Limit. C. Revise the second sentence of Subparagraph 11.1.3 to read as follows: "These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverage afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Owner." D. Add the following Clause 11.1.3.1 to 11.1.3: "11.1.3.1 Any language in a Certificate of Insurance qualifying cancellation or reductions of coverage requirements by "shall attempt" to notify the certificate holder in the event of cancellation or reduction of coverage is not acceptable." E. Delete Subparagraph 11.2.1 and substitute the following: "11.2.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing an Owner's Protective Liability insurance policy with the coverage and amounts indicated in Subparagraph 11.1.2.1. This requirement may be waived if the Owner, the Architect and all of the Owner's and Architect's consultants, and the Property Owner, Property Developer, Mall Managers and any other party as their interest may appear are named as additional insured on the Contractor's Commercial General Liability, Automobile Liability and Umbrella Liability Policies, and these policies include cross liability clauses. The Contractor shall cause the Contractor's Liability policies to be endorsed as primary insurance over any other valid and collectible insurance which the additional insured may have. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner a copy of the aforesaid endorsement or evidence of the aforesaid endorsement satisfactory to the Owner prior to commencement of any Work. The Contractor's failure to provide this endorsement or evidence of the endorsement shall not be deemed to be a waiver of the obligation to endorse the policies as required within." 007300 -8 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 007300 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS F. Delete Paragraph 11.3 in its entirety. G. Revise the first sentence of Subparagraph 11.4.1 to read as follows: "Unless otherwise provided, ... in the jurisdiction in which the Work is located, ...comprising total value for the entire Work at the site..." H. Revise the last sentence of Subparagraph 11.4.1 to read as follows: "This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors in the Work." I. Revise Subparagraph 11.4.1.1 to read as follows: "Property insurance shall be on an "all -risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, falsework, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements." J. Delete Subparagraph 11.4.1.3 and substitute the following: "11.4.1.3 The Builders Risk Property Insurance is written with a deductible of $50,000 per occurrence. The Contractor shall pay the first $5000 of any single loss caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractor and /or Sub - subcontractor. Any deductible paid by the contractor shall be a non - reimbursable expense. K. Delete Subparagraph 11.4.2 in its entirety. L. Delete Subparagraph 11.4.3 in its entirety. M. Add the following sentence to the end of Subparagraph 11.4.4: "Unless agreed to in writing by the Owner these costs shall be non - reimbursable." N. Delete Subparagraph 11.4.6 and substitute the following: "11.4.6 Upon request, the Owner shall file with the Contractor, Certificates of Insurance evidencing the insurance coverage required by Paragraph 11.4. Each Certificate of Insurance shall contain a provision that coverage will not be cancelled or allowed to expire, and that the limits will not be reduced, until at least forty -five (45) days prior written notice has been given to the Contractor." O. Delete Subparagraph 11.4.9 in its entirety. P. Delete Subparagraph 11.4.10 and replace it with the following: "11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers." ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK A. Delete the second and third sentences of Subparagraph 12.2.2.1. B. Revise Subparagraph 12.2.2.2 to read as follows: "12.2.2.2 The one year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Store opening by the period of time between Store opening and the actual performance of the Work." 007300 -9 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 007300 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS C. Revise Subparagraph 12.2.2.3 to read as follows: "12.2.2.3 The one -year period for correction of Work shall be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Paragraph 12.2." ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Delete Subparagraph 13.1.1 and insert the following: "13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the State of Washington. In the event of dispute, venue shall be King County, Washington or the Western District Court, as appropriate. Contractor consents to Washington jurisdiction for all purposes (personal and subject matter)." B. Revise the second sentence of Subparagraph 13.2.1 to read as follows: "Neither party to the Contract shall assign Contract as a whole..." C. Delete Subparagraph 13.2.2 in its entirety. D. Revise the second sentence of Subparagraph 13.5.1 to read as follows: "Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority." E. Revise the last sentence of Subparagraph 13.5.1 to read as follows: "The Owner shall bear the costs of tests, inspections or approvals." F. Revise the first sentence of Subparagraph 13.5.2 to read as follows: "13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph 13.5.1, the Architect will instruct the Contractor..." G. Revise Subparagraph 13.7.1 to read as follows: "13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor per applicable State law." H. Delete clauses 13.7.1.1, 13.7.1.2 and 13.7.1.3 in their entirety. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT A. Revise clause 14.1.1.3 to read as follows: "14.1.1.3 because the Architect has not issued a Letter of Approval and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding approval as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Letter of Approval within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or" 007300 -10 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 007300 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS B. Revise Subparagraph 14.1.3 to read as follows: "14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Subparagraph 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages, not to exceed those specified in paragraph 4.3." C. Revise clause 14.2.2.3 to read as follows: ".3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient." D. Revise the second sentence of Subparagraph 14.3.2 to read as follows: "Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include fee." E. Revise Subparagraph 14.4.3 to read as follows: "14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination." END OF SECTION 007300 -11 07/21/08 NORDSTROM, INC. NORDSTROM WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) 2009 REMODEL TIGARD, OR DOOR SCHEDULE DOOR FRAME FINISH DETAILS NUMBER NOMINAL TYPE MTL TYPE MTL HEAD JAMB SILL DOOR FRAME KICK FINISH TYPE RATING REMARKS OPENING OPENING SIZE � � � PUSH HW HW FIRE Floor 1 1003A 4' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 - -- - -- P -5 - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 1003B 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- --- - -- - -- - -- G9 /A -810 ' ' - -- - -- • -- - -- CLEAN EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME 1003C 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- G9 /A -810 -•- - -- - -- - -- 'CLEAN EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME 1004 4' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- 'P -5 - -- - -- - -- - -- 'PAINT EXISTING CASED OPENING 1005A 6' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 - -- - -- S -6 - -- • -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 1005B 6' -0" x 7' -0" V PL - -- - -- - -- - -- G9 /A -810 PL -12 'P -9 PL -12 26D - -- 60 MIN 'PAINT EXISTING HM FRAME, HDBD ON PUSH SIDE, SCFM 1006 4' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 3S /A -802 - -- - -- 5 -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 1010A 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -• - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- ' "P -28 - -- - -- - -- - -- *CLEAN EXISTING DOOR, "PAINT EXISTING HM FRAME 1016 3'-0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- '5 -6 '5 -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- 'RESTAIN EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME 1023 3' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 G5 /A -802 - -- - -- S -6 --- --- --- --- CASED OPENING 1024 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL - -- --- - -- - -- 313/A -810 PL -6 'P -11 PL -1 26D - -- - -- 'PAINT EXISTING HM FRAME, SCFM 1025A 4' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 G5 /A -802 - -- - -- S -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING 1025B 4' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 G5 /A -802 - -- - -- S -6 - -- - -- --- - -- CASED OPENING 1026 6' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- ' - -- - -- - -- - -- 'TOUCH UP STAIN AT EXISTING CASED OPENING 1027 3' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- "S -6 'P -11 PL -1 - -- - -- - -- 'PAINT EXISTING HM FRAME, "RESTAIN EXISTING DOOR 1032A 3' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - - -- J11 /A -810 "S -6 'P -11 PL -1 - -- - -- - -- 'PAINT EXISTING HM FRAME, "RESTAIN EXISTING DOOR 1032B 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL - -- - -- - -- - -- 35 /A -810 PL -12 'P -9 PL -12 26D - -- 20 MIN •PAINT EXISTING HM FRAME, SCFM 1033 4' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 35 /A -802 - -- - -- S -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 1035 3' -0" x 7' -0" F PL A MA G5 /A -802 35/A -802 E5 /A -810 PL -6 S -6 PL -1 26D - -- - -- SG 1036 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL - -- - -- - -- - -- G9 /A -810 PL -6 'P -11 PL -1 26D - -- 60 MIN 'PAINT EXISTING HM FRAME, SCFM 1037 3' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 - -- - -- S -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG PERMIT /BID SET Page 1 of 5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM, INC. NORDSTROM WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) 2009 REMODEL TIGARD, OR DOOR SCHEDULE DOOR FRAME FINISH DETAILS OPENING OPENING SIZE PUSH HW HW FIRE NUMBER NOMINAL TYPE MTL TYPE MTL HEAD JAMB I SILL DOOR FRAME KICK FINISH TYPE RATING REMARKS 1038 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 G5 /A -802 37 /A -810 - -- 5 -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING 1040 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 J9 /A -810 PL -7 5 -8 PL -3 26D - -- - -- SCFM, SG 1044 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA GS /A -802 )5 /A -802 J5 /A -810 - -- S -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 1045 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL A MA G5 /A -802 35 /A -802 )9 /A -810 PL -6 S -6 PL -1 26D - -- - -- SCFM, SG 1047 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 - -- - -- 5 -8 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING 1048 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 35 /A -802 J5 /A -810 - -- 5 -8 • -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 1049 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 - -- - -- S -8 - -- - -• - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 1050 6' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- --- G9 /A -810 'P -11 'P -11 'PL -1 - -- --- - -- 'PAINT EXISTING HM DOOR AND HM FRAME 1051 3' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 E5 /A -810 - -- S -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 1052 3' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- G9 /A -810 "S -6 'P -11 PL -1 - -- - -- - -- 'PAINT EXISTING HM FRAME, "RESTAIN EXISTING DOOR 1053 6' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 )5 /A -802 - -- - -- S -8 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 1054 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 35 /A -802 - -- - -- S -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 1056 4' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5/A•802 35 /A -802 - -- - -- 5 -8 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 1058 3' -0" x 7' -0" F PL A MA G5 /A -802 G5 /A -802 - -- PL -6 5 -6 PL -1 lOB - -- - -- DV 1060 3' -6" x 7' -0" F PL A HM G5 /A -802 )5 /A -802 - -- PL -9 P -12 PL -9 - -- - -- - -- MHO, SG 1065 3' -6 "x 7' -0" V MA A MA G5 /A -802 )5 /A -802 J9 /A -810 5 -6 5 -6 PL -1 26D - -- - -- SCFM, SG 1067 3' -6" x 7' -0" V PL A HM G9 /A -802 )5 /A -802 G9 /A -810 PL -6 P -11 PL -1 26D - -- 20 MIN SCFM, SG 1071 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 • -- --- S -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 1072 3' -0" x 7' -0" F PL A MA G5 /A -802 )5 /A -802 - -- PL -6 5 -6 PL -1 26D - -- - -- (2) COAT HOOK, SG 1073 3' -0" x 7' -0" F PL A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 - -- PL -6 S -6 PL -1 26D - -- - -- (2) COAT HOOK, SG 1074 3' -0" x 7' -0" F PL A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 - -- PL -6 S -6 PL -1 26D - -- - -- (2) COAT HOOK, SG 1076 3' -0" x 7' -0" V MA A MA GS /A -802 )5 /A -802 )13 /A -810 S -6 S -6 PL -1 26D - -- 60 MIN SCFM, MHO, SG PERMIT /BID SET Page 2 of 5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM, INC. NORDSTROM WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) 2009 REMODEL TIGARD, OR DOOR SCHEDULE DOOR FRAME FINISH HW HW FIRE OPENING ' NUMBER OP NOMINAL TYPE MTL TYPE MTL HEAD DETAILS JAMB I SILL DOOR FRAME P KICK FINISH TYPE RATING REMARKS 1D21 6' -8" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 l5 /A -802 - -- - -- S -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 1S4 3' -6" x 7' -0" F HM - -- - -- - -- - -- G9 /A -810 P -9 'P -9 - -- 26D - -- 90 MIN AA, 'PAINT EXISTING HM FRAME Floor 2 2005 4' -0" x 7' -0" V MA A MA G5 /A -802 JS /A -802 J13 /A -810 S -6 S -6 PL -1 26D - -- - -- SCFM, SG 2009 3' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- 'S -6 '5 -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- 'RESTAIN EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME 2013 3' -0" x 7' -0" V MA - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- 5 -6 'P -11 - -- 26D - -- - -- COAT HOOK, *PAINT EXISTING FRAME 2020 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL A MA G5 /A -802 G5 /A -802 35 /A -810 PL -6 S -6 PL -1 26D - -- 20 MIN SCFM, MHO 2028 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL A HM G9 /A -802 G9 /A -802 J5 /A -810 PL -6 P -11 PL -1 26D - -- 20 MIN SCFM 2029 3' -0 "x 7' -0" V PL A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 J13 /A -810 PL -6 S -6 PL -1 26D - -- - -- SCFM, SG 2031 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 )5 /A -802 - -- - -- S -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2035 3' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 )5 /A -802 - -- - -- S -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2040 3' -0" x 7' -0" F PL A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 E5 /A -810 PL -6 S -6 PL -1 26D - -- - -- SG 2042 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 - -- - -- 5 -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2043 3' -0" x 7' -0" F PL A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 ES /A -810 PL -6 5 -6 PL -1 26D - -- - -- SG 2044 4' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 )5 /A -802 - -- - -- 5 -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2051 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA GS /A -802 G5 /A -802 35 /A -810 - -- P -5 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING 2052 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL A MA G5 /A -802 )5 /A -802 J13 /A -810 PL -6 S -6 PL -1 26D - -- - -- SCFM, SG 2053A 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 JS /A -802 - -- - -- S -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2053B 3' - x 7' - V HM A HM G9 /A - 802 G9 /A - 802 J11 /A - 810 P - 11 P - 11 PL - 1 26D - -- - -- SCFM 2054 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 J7 /A -810 - -- 5 -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2056A 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 J13 /A -810 PL -6 S -6 PL -1 26D - -- - -- SCFM, SG 20568 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 39 /A -810 PL - 5 - PL - 26D - -- - -- SCFM, SG PERMIT /BID SET Page 3 of 5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM, INC. NORDSTROM WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) 2009 REMODEL TIGARD, OR DOOR SCHEDULE DOOR FRAME FINISH DETAILS OPENING OPENING SIZE _ PUSH HW HW FIRE NUMBER NOMINAL TYPE MTL TYPE MTL HEAD JAMB SILL DOOR FRAME KICK FINISH TYPE RATING REMARKS 2058 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA GS /A -802 J5 /A -802 )5 /A -810 - -- S -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2061 5' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA GS /A -802 35 /A -802 - -- - -- S -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2063 3' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 35 /A -802 - -- - -- S -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2064A 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL A MA GS /A -802 )5 /A -802 J9 /A -810 PL -6 S -6 PL -1 26D - -- - -- SCFM, SG 20648 4' -0" x 7' -0" V PL - -- - -- - -- - -- J9 /A -810 PL -1 'P -11 PL -1 26D - -- - -- 'PAINT EXISTING HM FRAME, SCFM 2066 6' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- 'P -11 - -- - -- - -- "PAINT EXISTING HM CASED OPENING 2071 3' -6" x 7' -0" V PL - -- - -- - -- - -- J9 /A -810 PL -1 'P -11 PL -1 26D - -- - -- 'PAINT EXISTING HM FRAME, SCFM 2074 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 )5 /A -802 J7 /A -810 - -- P -5 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2082 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 )13 /A -810 PL -6 S -6 PL -1 26D - -- - -- SCFM, SG 2083 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA GS /A -802 35 /A -802 - -- - -- P -S - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2084 6' -0" x 7' -0" V PL - -- - -- - -- - -- G9 /A -810 PL -12 'P -9 PL -12 26D - -- 20 MIN AC, SCFM, 'PAINT EXISTING HM FRAME AND HM MULLION 2088 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL A MA G5 /A -802 35 /A -802 J13 /A -810 PL -15 P -5 PL -13 26D - -- - -- SCFM, SG 2089 6' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 35 /A -802 - -- - -- P -S - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2092 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 )5 /A -802 - -- - -- P -5 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2093 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 313 /A -810 PL -15 P -5 PL -13 26D - -- - -- SCFM, SG 2094A 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 J5 /A -802 J7 /A -810 - -- P -5 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2094B 3' -0" x 7' -0" FP MA A MA GS /A -802 G5 /A -802 - -- P -5 P -5 - -- 26D - -- - -- - -- 2094C 3' -0" x 7' -0" FP MA A MA GS /A -802 G5 /A -802 - -- P -5 P -5 - -- 26D - -- - -- - -- 2094D 3' -0" x 7' -0" FP MA A MA GS /A -802 G5 /A -802 - -- P -5 P -5 - -- 26D - -- - -- - -- 2094E 3'-0" x 7' -0" FP MA A MA GS /A -802 G5 /A -802 - -- P -5 P -5 - -- 26D - -- - -- - -- 2094F 3' -0" x 7' -0" FP MA A MA GS /A -802 G5 /A -802 - -- P -5 P -5 - -- 26D - -- - -- - -- 2095 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL A MA G5 /A -802 JS /A -802 J13 /A -810 PL -7 S -8 PL -3 26D - -- - -- SCFM, SG PERMIT /BID SET Page 4 of 5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM, INC. NORDSTROM WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) 2009 REMODEL TIGARD, OR DOOR SCHEDULE DOOR FRAME FINISH DETAILS NUMBER NOMINAL TYPE MTL TYPE MTL HEAD JAMB SILL DOOR FRAME KICK FINISH TYPE RATING REMARKS OPENING OPENING SIZE I PUSH HW HW FIRE 2097A 3' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 GS /A -802 - -- - -- S -8 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING 2097B 3' -0" x 7' -0" FP MA A MA G5 /A -802 GS /A -802 - -- 5 -8 S -8 - -- 26D - -- - -- - -- 2097C 3' -0" x 7' -0" FP MA A MA GS /A -802 GS /A -802 - -- S -8 S -8 - -- 26D - -- - -- - -- 2097D 3' -0" x 7' -0" FP MA A MA GS /A -802 G5 /A -802 - -- S -8 S -8 - -- 26D - -- - -- - -- 2098 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- - -- - -- * * C7 /A -810 - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- `SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS, SG 2099A 3' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA GS /A -802 G5 /A -802 C7 /A -810 - -- P -5 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING 20990 3' -0" x 7' -0" FP MA A MA G5 /A -802 GS /A -802 - -- S -8 S -8 - -- 26D - -- - -- - -- 2099C 3' -0" x 7' -0" FP MA A MA G5 /A -802 GS /A -802 - -- S -8 S -8 - -- 26D - -- - -- - -- 2099D 3' -0" x 7' -0" FP MA A MA G5 /A -802 G5 /A -802 - -- 5 -8 5 -8 - -- 26D - -- - -- - -- 2102A 3' -0" x 7' -0" --- --- A MA G5 /A -802 )5 /A -802 J7/A-810 - -- S -8 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2102B 3' -0" x 7' -0" FP MA A MA GS /A -802 GS /A -802 - -- S -8 S -8 - -- 26D - -- - -- - -- 2102C 3' -0" x 7' -0" FP MA A MA GS /A -802 GS /A -802 - -- S -8 5 -8 - -- 26D - -- - -- - -- 2102D 3' -0" x 7' -0" FP MA A MA G5 /A -802 GS /A -802 - -- 5 -8 S -8 - -- 26D - -- - -- - -- 2103 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL A MA GS /A -802 J5/A-802 G9 /A -810 PL -1 S -8 PL -1 26D - -- - -- SCFM, SG 2104 3' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA GS /A -802 )5 /A -802 17 /A -810 - -- S -8 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2105 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA G5 /A -802 15 /A -802 - -- - -- P -5 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2107 3' -6" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA GS /A -802 )5 /A -802 - -- - -- P -5 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2108 3' -0" x 7' -0" V PL A MA G5 /A -802 )5 /A -802 )13 /A -810 PL -15 P -5 PL -13 26D - -- - -- SCFM, SG 2117A 6' -0" x 7' -0" V PL A HM G9 /A -802 G9 /A -802 G9 /A -810 PL -12 P -9 PL -12 26D - -- 20 MIN HDBD ON PUSH SIDE, EDGE GUARDS, SCFM 2118 6' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- A MA GS /A -802 )5 /A -802 - -- - -- S -6 - -- - -- - -- - -- CASED OPENING, SG 2S3 6' -0" x 7' -0" - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- )9 /A -810 `P -11 "P -11 - -- - -- - -- - -- 'PAINT EXISTING HM FRAME AND HM MULLION PERMIT /BID SET Page 5 of 5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM DOOR SCHEDULE LEGEND WASHINGTON SQUARE (0257) TIGARD, OR AA AUDIBLE ALARM AC ALARM CONTACT / ,' CGL CLEAR GLASS / SEE SEE CH CHERRY / DETAILS DETAIL CWGL CLEAR WIRE GLASS DV DOOR VIEWER \ ® E9 r \ \ 1 ® E G G E DDGE U S \ A 802 A 802 A 802 HDBD HARDBOARD (DOOR PLATE) HM HOLLOW METAL F FLUSH FP FLAT PANEL MA MAPLE (WOOD) MET METAL (FERROUS) MHO MAGNETIC HOLD OPEN PA POWER ACTIVATED (DOOR) / PL PLASTIC LAMINATE SEE PW PAINT -GRADE PLYWOOD / DETAILS SCFM SCREENING FILM \ \ ® E9 SS STAINLESS STEEL \ A -802 A -802 ABBREVIATION v VSION W E LEGEND DOOR TYPE LEGEND A 3 -SIDED FRAME TYPE LEGEND PERMIT /BID SET JULY 21, 2008 NORDSTROM, INC. NORDSTROM WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) 2009 REMODEL TIGARD, OR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM ROOM NAME FINISH I BASE NISH ,I FINISH .I CEILING I ISH FRNT PTN INT.PTN .1 , ' . i — — — — — F.00rl j 1003 VESTIBULE CT -1P RB -8 * * - -- *EXISTING TO REMAIN, CLEAN EXISTING PLAM 1004 BP. SHOES VESTIBULE 0030 RB -8 * * - -- - -- *EXISTING TO REMAIN, CLEAN EXISTING PLAM * *CARPET PAD * *0001 - 1005 VESTIBULE CT -1P RB -1 *P1 -12 * *P -9 - -- - -- *FULL HEIGHT PLAM WALLS* *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP * * *AT FEC * * *p-9 1006 MEN'S SHOES VESTIBULE 0285 RB -8 ** ** - -- - -- *CARPET PAD * *EXISTING TO REMAIN, CLEAN EXISTING PLAM *0001 1010 STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 1017 ELEVATOR LOBBY *ST -7HH - -- P -1 P -1 - -- - -- *EXISTING TO REMAIN, PATCH AT NEW WORK TO MATCH EXISTING *ST -7HH LAYOUT, AS NEEDED 1018 SOUTH ENTRY 0690 - -- *ST -7HH P -1 - -- - -- *EXISTING TO REMAIN, PATCH AT NEW WORK TO MATCH EXISTING P-1 LAYOUT, AS NEEDED 1019 SOUTH ENTRY VESTIBULE *ST -7HH P -1 P -1 - -- - -- *EXISTING TO REMAIN, PATCH AT NEW WORK TO MATCH EXISTING *ST -7HH LAYOUT, AS NEEDED 1023 MEN'S CLOTHING DRESSING ROOM 0270 RB -4 *0273 * * *P -9 0272 0273 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET PAD ** *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP * *0001 1025 MEN'S CLOTHING FITTING ROOM 0270 * * * * *5 -6 * *0273 * * * *P -9 - -- - -- *CARPET AT MIRROR PLATFORM* *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING *0271 INCLUDING UNDERSIDE OF SOFFIT AT MIRROR AND CENTER ** *0001 WALL ** *CARPET PAD * ** *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP * * * * *4 1/2" HIGH BASE AT FITTING ROOM ONLY, EXTENT PER DRAWINGS 1026 MEN'S CLOTHING VESTIBULE 0270 S -6 *0273 * * *p -9 - -- - -- *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET PAD ** *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP * *0001 1027 WILL CALL 0270 RB -4 P -1 - -- - -- - -- *CARPET PAD *0001 1033 VESTIBULE CT -1P RB -1 * *P -9 *0-9 - -- - -- *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP * *AT WALLS AND FEC 1035 MEN'S TOILET ROOM CT -2M CT -2M *CT -3P * *P -2 - -- - -- *EXTENT PER TOILET ROOM ELEVATIONS* *SEMI -GLOSS SHEEN *0760 *P -2 1036 STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 1037 MEN'S TOILET VESTIBULE CT -1P S -6 0681 * *P -2 - -- - -- *AT ACCESS PANEL AND FEC* *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP *P -27 1038 MEN'S SPORTSWEAR DRESSING 0315 RB -4 *0317 * * * *P -9 0316 0317 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET PAD ** *CARPET AT ROOM * *0001 * * * * *S -6 PLATFORM * ** *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP * * ** *WOOD BASE AT BUILT -IN ** *0321 PLATFORM 1039 WEST ENTRY 0690 P -1 P -1 - -- - -- *EXISTING TO REMAIN, PATCH AT NEW WORK TO MATCH EXISTING *ST -7HH LAYOUT, AS NEEDED . PERMIT /BID SET Page 1 of 9 07/21/08 NORDSTROM, INC. NORDSTROM WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) 2009 REMODEL TIGARD, OR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM r - WALL 10EILING IFRNT RK _ - - � � # ROOM NAME I FLOOR BASE FINISH FINISH FINISH ' FINISH PTN INT PTN _REMARKS 1040 STOCK CS -1 RB -2 *F1-2 - -- - -- - -- *AT NEW CONSTRUCTION * *AT EXISTING WALLS TO REMAIN ■ *p-1 1041 WEST ENTRY VESTIBULE *ST -71-IH - -- * *p -1 P -1 - -- - -- *EXISTING TO REMAIN, PATCH AT NEW WORK TO MATCH EXISTING *ST -7HH LAYOUT, AS NEEDED* *EXTENT PER DRAWINGS 1043 THE RAIL DRESSING ROOM * *0570 RB -4 *0572 * * *P -20 0571 0572 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES ** *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP 1044 THE RAIL LOUNGE * *0570 RB -4 *0572 * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT ** *0575 PER DRAWINGS ** *CARPET AT MOVEABLE PLATFORM * * * - *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP 1045 STOCK CS -1 RB -2 *FT -2 - -- - -- - -- AT NEW CONSTRUCTION * *AT EXISTING WALLS * *P-1 1046 STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 1047 KIDS' WEAR BOYS DRESSING ROOM *0197 RB -2 ** *0202 - -- 0201 0202 *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, * *0199 * * * *S -8 QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES* *CARPET AT PLATFORM ** *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING * ** *WOOD BASE AT BUILT -IN PLATFORM 1048 KIDS' WEAR VESTIBULE *0197 RB -2 * *0202 - -- - -- - -- *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES* *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING 1049 KIDS' WEAR GIRLS DRESSING ROOM *0212 RB -2 * *0216 - -- 0215 0216 *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES* *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING 1051 WOMEN'S TOILET ROOM CT -2M CT -2M *CT -3P * *P -2 - -- - -- *EXTENT PER TOILET ROOM ELEVATIONS* *SEMI -GLOSS SHEEN *0795 *P -2 1053 WOMEN'S TOILET VESTIBULE CT -1P S -6 0681 * *P -2 - -- - -- *AT FEC* *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP *P -27 1054 WOMEN'S LOUNGE 0765 5 -6 0766 * *P -2 - -- - -- *CARPET PAD* *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP ** *SEE DRAWINGS FOR FLOORING *0001 EXTENT * * *CT -1P 1056 KIDS' SHOES VESTIBULE *0189 RB -6 * *PL -9 P -12 - -- - -- *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES* *FULL HEIGHT PLAM WALLS 1058 SECURITY * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 1060 KIDS' SHOES STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK * *AT WORK BENCH * * *AT * *0003 STAIR LANDING * * *RF -1 1062 NORTH MALL ENTRY *ST -7HH -- P -1 P -1 - -- - -- *EXISTING TO REMAIN, PATCH STONE TO MATCH EXISTING AT NEW *ST -7HH WORK AS NEEDED 1065 STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 1067 CORRIDOR CS -1 RB -2 FT -2 - -- - -- - -- - -- 1071 BEAUTY SERVICES VESTIBULE CT -1P 5-6 0009 - -- - -- - -- - -- 1072 BEAUTY SERVICES STUDIO CT -1P CT -1P 0009 *P -16 - -- - -- *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP PERMIT /BID SET Page 2 of 9 07/21/08 NORDSTROM, INC. NORDSTROM WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) 2009 REMODEL TIGARD, OR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM FLOOR BASE , . CEILING ROOM NAME FRNT PTN INT PTN , REMARKS , , . i # I FINISH FINISH ' FINISH _ FINISH — - — — — 1073 BEAUTY SERVICES STUDIO CT -1P CT -1P 0009 *P -16 - -- - -- *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP 1074 BEAUTY SERVICES STUDIO CT -1P CT -1P 0009 *P -16 - -- - -- *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP 1075 STOCK * * * --- - -- - -- *EXISTING TO REMAIN * *AT STAIR LANDING * *RF -1 1076 STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *EXISTING TO REMAIN * *AT STAIR LANDING * *RF -1 1077 STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 1081 EAST MALL ENTRY *ST -7HH - -- P -1 P -1 - -- - -- *EXISTING TO REMAIN. PATCH STONE TO MATCH EXISTING, AT NEW *ST -7HH WORK, AS NEEDED 1D01 SALON SHOES SALES FLOOR 0435 *0435 ** * * * * * * *P -20 --- - -- AT COLUMNS* *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS ** *CARPET ** *0001 * * * * *ST -41 FT -1 PAD * ** *STONE BORDER * * * * *AT BACKWALL * * * * * *AT GWB BUMPS, * * * *ST -4P * * * * * *P -5 EXTENT PER DRAWINGS * * * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 1D02 WOMEN'S SHOES SALES FLOOR 0610 *RB -3 * ** * * * * *P -20 - -- _ - -- AT BACKWALL * *AT COLUMNS ** *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY * ** *0001 * *0610 FT -1 OTHERS * ** *CARPET PAD * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 1D03 BP. SHOES SALES FLOOR 0030 *RB -3 * ** * * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- AT BACKWALL * *AT COLUMNS ** *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY * ** *0001 * *0030 OTHERS * ** *CARPET PAD * * * * *AT GWB BUMPS, EXTENT PER * * * * *S -6 DRAWINGS * * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 1D04 MEN'S SHOES SALES FLOOR 0285 *RB -4 * ** * * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *AT BACKWALL * *AT COLUMNS ** *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY ** *0001 * *0285 OTHERS * ** *CARPET PAD * * * * *AT GWB BUMPS, EXTENT PER * * * * *5 -6 DRAWINGS * * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 1D06 MEN'S CLOTHING SALES FLOOR 0270 *0270 * *S -50 - -- - -- - -- AT COLUMNS* *EXISTING CASEWORK TO REMAIN, TOUCH UP ** *0001 * * * *S -6 EXISTING STAIN. SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS FOR NEW WORK ** *CARPET PAD * * * *AT GWB BUMPS, EXTENT PER DRAWINGS 1D07 MEN'S FURNISHINGS SALES FLOOR 0280 *0280 * *5 -50 - -- - -- - -- *AT BACKWALL AND COLUMNS* *EXISTING CASEWORK TO REMAIN, ** *0001 * * * *5 -6 TOUCH UP EXISTING STAIN. SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS FOR NEW WORK ** *CARPET PAD * * * *AT GWB BUMPS, EXTENT PER DRAWINGS 1D08 MEN'S SPORTSWEAR SALES FLOOR 0315 *0315 - -- * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- AT COLUMNS* *CARPET PAD ** *WOOD ACCENT AISLE PER * ** *0315 DRAWINGS * ** *CARPET AND PAD AT CASHWRAP * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT * *0001 ACP * * *WF -1 1D09 MEN'S FURNISHINGS SALES FLOOR 0280 *0280 * *S -50 - -- - -- - -- *AT BACKWALL AND COLUMNS* *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY ** *0001 * * * *S -6 FT -1 OTHERS ** *CARPET PAD * * * *AT GWB BUMPS, EXTENT PER DRAWINGS 1D11 THE RAIL SALES FLOOR * *0570 * * *RB -4 * * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS* *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND * * * *5 -6 FT -1 START POINTS PER DRAWINGS, QUARTER TURN CARPET TILES * * *AT BACKWALL AND COLUMN * * * *AT GWB BUMPS, EXTENT PER DRAWINGS * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 1D12 THE RAIL SALES FLOOR *0570 * *RB -4 - -- * * *P -20 - - -- - -- *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINTS PER DRAWINGS, QUARTER TURN CARPET TILES * *AT COLUMNS ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP PERMIT /BID SET Page 3 of 9 07/21/08 • NORDSTROM, INC. NORDSTROM WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) 2009 REMODEL TIGARD, OR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE • ROOM 1 FLOOR BASE WALL 1 1 CEILING ROOM NAME FRNT PTN INT PTN REMARKS . # FINISH FINISH FINISH • FINISH • 1D13 KIDS' WEAR BOYS SALES FLOOR *0197 * *RB -2 * *P -20 - -- - -- - -- *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, * ** QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES * *AT BACKWALL AND COLUMNS, PAINT EXTENT PER DRAWINGS ** *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS 1D14 KIDS' WEAR GIRLS SALES FLOOR *0212 * *RB -2 - -- * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, ** *0213 QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES * *AT COLUMNS ** *CARPET TILE ACCENT AISLE, EXTENT PER DRAWINGS * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 1D16 KIDS' WEAR BABIES/ TODDLERS *0220 * * * *RB -3 * *0222 - -- - -- - -- *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, SALES FLOOR * * * * *5 -8 * ** QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES * *WALLCOVERING EXTENT PER DRAWINGS ** *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS * * * *AT BACKWALL AND COLUMNS * * * * *AT GWB BUMPS, EXTENT PER DRAWINGS 1D17 KIDS' SHOES SALES FLOOR *0189 * *RB -2 * *P -20 - -- - -- - -- *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, * * * *5 -8 * ** QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES * *AT BACKWALL AND COLUMNS, PAINT EXTENT PER DRAWINGS ** *SEE CASWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS * * * *AT GWB BUMPS, EXTENT PER DRAWINGS 1D18 COSMETICS SALES FLOOR *0098 * *RB -3 - -- - -- - -- - -- *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES * *AT COLUMNS 1D19 MEN'S FRAGRANCE /COSMETICS *0098 * *RB -3 * ** * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, SALES FLOOR * * * *5 -6 FT -1 QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES * *AT BACKWALL AND COLUMNS ** *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS * * * *AT GWB BUMPS, EXTENT PER DRAWINGS * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 1D21 BEAUTY SERVICES VESTIBULE CT -1P *S -6 0009 * * *P -20 - -- - -- *AT GWB BUMPS, EXTENT PER DRAWINGS * *AT FEC ** *FLAT PAINT AT * *P -16 ACP 1D22 HANDBAGS SALES FLOOR 0155 *0155 ** * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *AT COLUMNS* *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS ** *CARPET ** *0001 RB -4 FT -1 PAD * * * *AT GWB BUMPS, EXTENT PER DRAWINGS * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT * * * *S -6 ACP 1D23 ACCESSORIES SALES FLOOR 0151 *0151 - -- - -- - -- - -- *AT COLUMNS* *CARPET PAD * *0001 1D24 DESIGNER HANDBAGS SALES ST -4P *ST -4P P -1 * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *AT BACKWALL AND COLUMNS * *AT GWB BUMPS, EXTENT PER FLOOR * *P -14 * ** DRAWINGS ** *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS * * * *AT - * ** *0124 COLUMNS * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP . FT -1 1D24 -A DESIGNER HANDBAGS SALES ST -4P *ST -4P ** P -1 - -- - -- *AT BACKWALL AND COLUMNS* *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY FLOOR SHOP A P -1 OTHERS * * *AT COLUMNS ** *0124 FT -1 1D24 -B DESIGNER HANDBAGS SALES ST -4P *ST -4P ** P -1 - -- - -- *AT BACKWALL AND COLUMNS* *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY FLOOR SHOP B P -1 OTHERS * * *AT COLUMNS ** *0124 FT -1 1D26 FINE JEWELRY SALES FLOOR 0173 * *0173 - -- - -- - -- - -- *CARPET PAD * *AT COLUMNS *0001 PERMIT /BID SET Page 4 of 9 07/21/08 NORDSTROM, INC. NORDSTROM WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) 2009 REMODEL TIGARD, OR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM FLOOR BASE WALL I CEILING ROOM NAME FRNT PTN I INT PTN REMARKS ✓ jJ FIISH , FINISH FINISH 1027 FASHION JEWELRY SALES FLOOR 0173 * *0173 - -- - -- - -- - -- *CARPET PAD * *AT COLUMNS *0001 1D28 ESCALATOR SEATING 0710 CT -1P * * *P -1 *P -1 - -- - -- *FLAT PAINT* *CARPET PAD * * *AT WALLS AND FEC * *0001 1D29 CASHWRAP 0030 *RB -3 ** - -- - -- - -- *AT BACKWALL* *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS ** *CARPET ** *0001 * * * *FT -1 PAD * * * *AT NEW BACKWALL 1D30 ESCALATOR SEATING 0710 CT -1P P -1 *P -1 - -- - -- *FLAT PAINT* *CARPET PAD * *0001 - Floor 2 -- — — – — --STOCK — — 2005 CS -1 RB -2 *FT -2 - -- - -- - -- *AT NEW CONSTRUCTION * *AT EXISTING WALLS TO REMAIN * *P -1 2006 ELEVATOR LOBBY * *ST -7HH - -- *0681 * * *P - -- - -- *EXTENT PER DRAWINGS* *EXISTING TO REMAIN. PATCH STONE TO * *ST -7HH * * * *P -2 MATCH EXISTING, AS NEEDED ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP * * * *AT LIGHT TRIM RINGS 2007 STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 2008 ENTRY VESTIBULE CT -1P 5 -6 *0681 P -1 - -- - -- *EXTENT PER DRAWINGS * *AT FEC * * *AT LIGHT TRIM RINGS * *P -27 * * *P -2 2010 ENTRY 0690 - -- P -1 P -1 - -- - -- - -- 2011 CUSTOMER SERVICE CT -1P 5 -6 *0661 * *0661 - -- - -- *EXTENT PER DRAWINGS * *ON BOTTOM AND SIDES OF SOFFITS, * * *P -2 EXTENT PER REFLECTED CEILING PLAN * * *AT LIGHT TRIM RINGS * ** *WRAP LOWER COUNTERTOPS AND FRONT EDGE WITH PL -3. NEW PLAM ON ALL VISIBLE (FROM THE SALES FLOOR) PLAM SURFACES ON MAIN COUNTER. REPLACE PURSE LEDGE WITH MP -6 * * ** *DARKEN EXISTING STAIN TO MATCH S -6 2012 CUSTOMER SERVICE 0660 RB -1 0661 *0661 - -- - -- *ON BOTTOM AND SIDES OF SOFFIT EXTENT PER REFLECTED CEILING * *0001 * * *P -2 PLAN* *CARPET PAD * * *AT LIGHT TRIM RINGS * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP * *. *p-1 2020 CORRIDOR * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 2028 CORRIDOR * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK* *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 2029 STOCK * RB -2 * *FT -2 - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK * *AT NEW * * *P -1 CONSTRUCTION * * *AT EXISTING WALLS TO REMAIN 2031 LINGERIE DRESSING ROOM 0225 RB -7 *0228 - -- 0227 0227 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET PAD * *0001 2035 WOMEN'S TOILET ROOM CT -2M CT -2M *CT -3P * *P -2 - -- - -- *EXTENT PER TOILET ROOM ELEVATIONS* *SEMI -GLOSS SHEEN *0795 *P -2 2040 WOMEN'S LOUNGE 0765 S -6 0766 * *P -2 - -- - -- *CARPET PAD* *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP *0001 PERMIT /BID SET Page 5 of 9 07/21/08 NORDSTROM, INC. NORDSTROM WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) 2009 REMODEL TIGARD, OR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM FLOOR BASE WALL , CEILING . ROOM NAME [ FRNT PTN INT PTN , REMARKS # FINISH ( FINISH FINISH FINISH . 2042 MOTHERS ROOM CT -2M CT -2M * *0766 *P -2 - -- - -- *FLAT PAINT AT ACP* *EXTENT PER TOILET ROOM ELEVATIONS * *P-2 2043 FAMILY ROOM CT -2M CT -2M *CT -3P * *P -2 - -- - -- *EXTENT PER TOILET ROOM ELEVATIONS* *SEMI -GLOSS SHEEN *0761 2044 WOMEN'S TOILET VESTIBULE CT -1P S -6 0681 *0681 - -- - -- *AT BOTTOM AND SIDES OF SOFFIT, EXTENT PER RCP* *FLAT PAINT AT * *P -2 ACP * * *AT LIGHT TRIM RINGS * * *P -27 2047 EMPLOYEE LOUNGE STORAGE ROOM * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 2049 EMPLOYEE LOUNGE * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 2051 WOMEN'S ACTIVE DRESSING ROOM * *0585 RB -2 *0590 * * * *P -20 0589 0590 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET AND TILE LAYOUT AND START ** *0586 POINT PER DRAWINGS ** *CARPET AT MOVEABLE PLATFORM * ** *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP 2052 STOCK CS -1 RB -2 FT -2 - -- - -- - -- --- . 2053 VESTIBULE 0410 RB -2 *0412 - -- - -- - -- *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING 2054 POINT OF VIEW DRESSING ROOM 0410 RB -2 *0412 * ** *0428 0411 0412 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET PAD ** *CARPET AT * *0001 * * * * *5 -6 PLATFORM * ** *DRAPERY * * ** *WOOD BASE AT BUILT -IN PLATFORM ** *0427 2056 STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 2058 CHAMBER ROOM * *0545 RB -2 *0547 - -- - -- - -- *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES 2059 t.b.d. DRESSING ROOM * *0545 RB -2 *0547 - -- 0546 0547 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT ** *0564 * * * *5 -8 PER DRAWINGS, QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES ** *CARPET AT PLATFORM * ** *WOOD BASE AT BUILT -IN PLATFORM 2061 BEDROOM *0014 RB -4 * *0016 - -- - -- - -- *NON DIRECTIONAL INSTALLATION, START POINT AS INDICATED ON * * *P -8 DRAWINGS* *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING ** *PAINT OVER PERIMETER WALLCOVERING 2063 BP. DRESSING ROOM * *0013 RB -4 *0016 - -- * * ** *0015 0017 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT ** *0024 * * * * * *S -6 * * * *P -8 * * * * *0015A PER DRAWINGS, QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES ** *CARPET AT * * ** *00156 PLATFORM * ** *PAINT OVER PERIMETER * * * * *0015C WALLCOVERING * * ** *ALTERNATE PATTERNS ON EACH PARTITION AS REVIEWED IN PRE - INSALLATION MEETING * * * ** *WOOD BASE AT BUILT -IN PLATFORM 2064 STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 2066 VESTIBULE *0028 RB -4 * *P -11 --- --- - -- *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES * *AT WALLS AND FEC 2074 PETITE FOCUS DRESSING ROOM 0392 RB -4 *0394 * * * * *P -20 0393 0394 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET PAD ** *CARPET AT * *0001 * * * *5 -6 PLATFORM * ** *WOOD BASE AT BUILT -IN PLATFORM * * ** *FLAT PAINT ** *0404 AT ACP 2082 STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK PERMIT /BID SET Page 6 of 9 07/21/08 • NORDSTROM, INC. NORDSTROM WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) 2009 REMODEL TIGARD, OR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE — — r ROOM I ROOM NAME [ FLO O R J FNISH FINISH — C FINISH CFRNT PTN IN N � T PT I + y REMARKS � �� y i 2083 ENCORE DRESSING ROOM 0125 RB -4 *0127 * * * * * *P -20 0126 0127 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET PAD ** *CARPET AT * *0001 * * * * *5 -6 * ** *0128 PLATFORM * ** *DRAPERY * * ** *WOOD BASE AT BUILT -IN ** *0138 PLATFORM * * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 2088 STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 2089 VESTIBULE CT -1P RB -1 *P -9 * *P -9 - -- - -- *AT WALLS AND FEC* *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 2092 INDIVIDUALIST DRESSING ROOM 0160 RB -3 *0162 - -- 0161 0162 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET PAD ** *CARPET AT * *0001 * * * *S -6 PLATFORM * ** *WOOD BASE AT BUILT -IN PLATFORM ** *0172 2093 STOCK CS-1 RB -2 FT -2 - -- - -- - -- - -- 2094 SAVVY DRESSING ROOM 0475 P -5 *0478 * *P -5 0477 0478 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP ** *CARPET PAD ** *0001 2095 STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 2097 COLLECTORS DRESSING ROOM 0070 S -8 *0072 * * * * *P -6 * *0071 0072 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *SQUARE EDGED FABRIC WRAPPED ** *0001 PANELS ** *CARPET PAD * ** *CARPET AT MOVEABLE * ** *0088 PLATFORM * * ** *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP 2098 COLLECTORS SALON 0070 S -8 0072 * *P -6 - -- - -- *CARPET PAD* *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP *0001 2099 ST. JOHN DRESSING ROOM 0495 S -8 *0497 * *P -6 * * ** *0496 0497 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP ** *CARPET ** *0001 PAD * ** *CARPET AT PLATFORM * * ** *SQUARE EDGED FABRIC WRAPPED * ** *0508 PANELS 2102 VIA C DRESSING ROOM 0810 S -8 *0813 * * *P -21 0811 0812 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET PAD ** *FLAT SHEEN AT ACP * *0001 2103 STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 2104 STUDIO 121 /SPECIAL OCCASION 0515 RB -6 *0517 - -- 0516 0517 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET PAD ** *CARPET AT DRESSING ROOM * *0001 * * * *S -6 PLATFORM * ** *WOOD BASE AT BUILT -IN PLATFORM ** *0529 2105 VESTIBULE CT -1P S -6 *0517 - -- - -- - -- *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING 2107 NARRATIVE DRESSING ROOM 0330 RB -5 *0332 * * * * *P -20 0331 0332 *PERIMETER WALLCOVERING* *CARPET PAD ** *CARPET AT * *0001 * * * *S -6 PLATFORM * ** *WOOD BASE AT BUILT -IN PLATFORM * * ** *FLAT PAINT ** *0347 AT ACP 2108 STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 2117 CORRIDOR * * * - -- - -- - -- *MATCH EXISTING FINISHES AT NEW WORK 2118 VESTIBULE CT -1P RB -1 *PL -12 * * *P -9 - -- - -- *FULL HEIGHT PLAM ALL WALLS * *AT FEC ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP * *P -9 2D01 LINGERIE SALES FLOOR 0225 * *RB -2 * * * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS * *AT BACKWALL AND ** *0001 * * * * *S -6 * ** *0230 COLUMNS ** *CARPET PAD * * * *AT COLUMNS * * * * *AT GWB BUMPS, FT - 1 EXTENT PER DRAWINGS * * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 2D02 LINGERIE SALES FLOOR 0225 *RB -2 *0230 * * *P -20 - -- - -- *AT COLUMNS* *CARPET PAD ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP * *0001 PERMIT /BID SET Page 7 of 9 07/21/08 NORDSTROM, INC. NORDSTROM WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) 2009 REMODEL TIGARD, OR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM FLOOR ' BASE WALL CEILING ROOM NAME ; (FRNT PTN INT PTN • REMARKS 1 # FINISH FINISH ; FINISH FINISH 2D03 HOISERY SALES FLOOR 0225 * *RB -2 * ** * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *CARPET PAD * *AT BACKWALL AND COLUMNS ** *SEE CASEWORK *0001 * ** *0230 DRAWINGS BY OTHERS * * * *AT COLUMN * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP FT -1 2D04 WOMEN'S ACTIVE SALES FLOOR *0585 * *RB -3 - -- * * *P -20 - -- - -- *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES * *AT COLUMNS ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 2D06 WOMEN'S ACTIVE SALES FLOOR * *0585 * * *RB -3 * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS* *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND FT -1 START POINT PER DRAWINGS, QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES * * *AT BACKWALL AND COLUMNS * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 2D07 POINT OF VIEW SALES FLOOR 0410 *0410 * * * *P -2 - -- - -- - -- *AT COLUMNS* *ACCENT AISLE ** *CARPET PAD * * * *AT FEC AT * *WF -1 MIRRORED COLUMN ** *0001 2D08 POINT OF VIEW SALES FLOOR 0410 *0410 * ** * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *AT COLUMNS * *AT BACKWALL ** *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY * ** *0001 * *RB -3 FT -1 OTHERS * ** *CARPET PAD * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 2D09 DRESSES *0410 *0410 * ** * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *AT COLUMNS * *AT BACKWALL ** *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY * *0001 * *RB -3 FT -1 OTHERS * ** *CARPET PAD * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 2D11 t.b.d. SALES FLOOR * *0545 *RB -3 - -- * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *AT COLUMNS* *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER ** *0563 DRAWINGS, QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES ** *ACCENT AISLE, CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, INSTALL MONOLITHICALLY * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 2D12 t.b.d. SALES FLOOR ** *0545 RB -6 ** * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *AT COLUMNS* *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS ** *CARPET TILE * ** *0563 *RB -3 FT -1 LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, QUARTER -TURN CARPET TILES * ** *ACCENT AISLE, CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINT PER DRAWINGS, INSTALL MONOLITHICALLY * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 2D13 BP. SALES FLOOR *0029 * * *RB -4 * * *P -20 * * * *P -1 - -- - -- *ACCENT AISLE CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINTS PER * *0028 * * * * *P -5 * * * * * *P -20 DRAWINGS. QUARTER TURN TILES* *CARPET TILE LAYOUT AND START POINTS PER DRAWINGS, QUARTER TURN CARPET TILES * * *AT BACKWALL AND COLUMNS * ** *GWB AT SOFFIT * * * * *AT GWB BUMPS, EXTENT PER DRAWINGS * * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 2D14 PETITE FOCUS SALES FLOOR 0392 *RB -3 * ** - -- - -- - -- *AT BACKWALL * *AT COLUMNS ** *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY * ** *0001 * *0392 FT -1 OTHERS * ** *CARPET PAD * * * * * *AT GWB BUMPS, EXTENT PER * * * * *1 DRAWINGS 2D16 ENCORE SALES FLOOR 0125 *RB -3 * ** - -- - -- - -- *AT BACKWALL * *AT COLUMNS ** *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY * ** *0001 * *0125 FT -1 OTHERS * ** *CARPET PAD 2D17 INDIVIDUALIST SALES FLOOR 0160 *0160 - -- - -- - -- - -- *AT COLUMNS* *CARPET PAD * *0001 2D18 INDIVIDUALIST SALES FLOOR 0160 *RB -3 * ** *** * * - -- - -- *AT BACKWALL * *AT COLUMNS ** *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY * ** *0001 * *0160 FT -1 OTHERS * ** *CARPET PAD * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP , 2D19 SAVVY SALES FLOOR *0476 * *ST -4P * * *P -5 * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *CARPET AND PAD INSERT AT CASHWRAP * *AT BACKWALL AND ST -4P FT -1 COLUMNS * * *AT COLUMNS * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP *0001 2D21 COLLECTORS SALES FLOOR ST -4P * * *ST -4P * * *P -1 - -- - -- *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS * *AT GWB SOFFITS * * *AT * * ** FT -1 EXPOSED BACKWALL AND GWB BUMPS * ** *CASEWORK BASE . ' PERMIT /BID SET Page 8 of 9 07/21/08 NORDSTROM, INC. NORDSTROM WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) 2009 REMODEL TIGARD, OR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM I ROOM NAME J FIN FINISH I FNISH I FINISH I CFINISH IFRNT PTN` INT PTN I REMARKS 2D22 VIA C SALES FLOOR ST -4P * *ST -4P - -- - -- - -- - -- *CARPET AND PAD INSERT AT CASHWRAP * *AT COLUMNS ** *FLAT *0824 PAINT AT ACP *0001 2D23 ST. JOHN SALES FLOOR ST -4P * *ST -4P * ** * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *CARPET AND PAD INSERT AT CASHWRAP * *AT EXPOSED *0492 FT -1 BACKWALL ** *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS * ** *FLAT PAINT *0001 AT ACP 2D24 STUDIO 121 SALES FLOOR 0515 *0515 - -- - -- - -- - -- AT COLUMNS* *CARPET PAD * *0001 2D26 SPECIAL OCCASION 0330 *RB -3 ** * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *AT BACKWALL* *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS ** *CARPET ** *0001 FT -1 PAD * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 2D27 NARRATIVE SALES FLOOR 0330 *R8 -3 * ** * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *AT BACKWALL * *AT COLUMNS ** *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY * ** *0001 * *0330 FT -1 OTHERS * ** *CARPET PAD * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 2D28 NARRATIVE SALES FLOOR 0330 *0330 - -- - -- - -- - -- *AT COLUMNS* *CARPET PAD * *0001 2D29 at HOME SALES FLOOR 0152 *RB -3 ** * * * * *P -20 - -- - -- *AT BACKWALL* *SEE CASEWORK DRAWINGS BY OTHERS ** *CARPET ** *0001 * * * *5 -6 FT -1 PAD * * * *AT GWB BUMPS, EXTENT PER DRAWINGS * * ** *FLAT PAINT AT ACP 2D31 ESCALATOR SEATING CT -1P CT -1P - -- *P -1 - -- - -- *FLAT SHEEN AT CEILING, EXTENT PER DRAWINGS Elevator E001 ELEVATOR CAB * * PL -16 * - -- - -- *EXISTING TO REMAIN E002 ELEVATOR CAB * * PL -16 * - -- - -- *EXISTING TO REMAIN Upper Level Stock U1060 STOCK * * * - -- *EXISTING TO REMAIN * *AT STAIR LANDING * *RF -1 U1075 STOCK * * * - -- - -- - -- *EXISTING TO REMAIN * *AT STAIR LANDING * *RF -1 PERMIT /BID SET Page 9 of 9 07/21/08 NORDSTROM WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) TIGARD, OR FINISH LEGEND COLOR ASI CODE MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION SIZE /FINISH COMMENTS /PR# ACOUSTICAL PANELS AP -1 Not Used CONCRETE SLAB CS -1 Concrete Sealed CS -2 Not Used CS -3 Not Used CERAMIC TILE (reference drawings for specific cut size) CT -1S Not Used CT -1P Not Used CT -1P Innovative Marble Ence Actual Size: Finish • Polished Use grout G -2 & Tile Inc Porcelain 11 23/32" x 11 Use sealant SE -2 23/32" x 3/8" CT -2M Daltile Veranda Color Body Actual size: P501 Gravel Use grout G -2 Chuck Hill, Porcelain 12 7/8" x 12 7/8" x Finish: Matte Use sealant SE -2 206 767.2265 3/8" Sanitary Coved Base Actual size: 12 7/8" x 6 1/4" CT -3P Daltile Diamante Color Body Actual size: P024 Sabbie Use grout G -1 Chuck Hill, Porcelain 11 11/16" x 11 Finish: Polished Use sealant SE -1 206 767 2265 11/16" x 1/4" FIRE TAPING FT -1 Fire Tape only FT -2 Fire Tape and prime GROUT G -1 Laticrete Cementitious Grout 27, Hemp International Inc OR Bostik Hydroment, H143, Kahlua Cream OR Cementitious Grout Mapei Corporation Keracolor S, sanded 16, Malt grout or Keracolor U, unsanded grout G -2 Laticrete Cementitious Grout 24, Natural Grey International Inc OR Bostik Hydroment, H151, Taupe OR Cementitious Grout Mapes Corporation Keracolor S, sanded 11, Sahara Beige grout or Keracolor U, unsanded grout G -3 Laticrete Cementitious Grout 78, Sterling Silver International Inc. OR Bostik Hydroment, H144, Misty Grey [Permit/Bid Set] FINISH LEGEND -1 07/21/08 COLOR ASI CODE MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION SIZE /FINISH COMMENTS /PR# OR Cementitious Grout Mapei Corporation Keracolor S, sanded 02, Pewter grout or Keracolor U, unsanded grout G-4 Not Used G -5 Not Used INTERIOR MOLDED STONE IMS -1 Not Used IMS -2 Not Used METAL FINISHES (refer to display casework drawings for specific locations) M -1 US15 Satin Nickel (Referenced from display Plated (clear) casework drawings only) To be bid as alternate Tn- Valent Satin Chrome M -2 Satin Stainless Steel (Referenced from display casework drawings only) M -3 US10B Bronze — Light (Referenced from display casework drawings only) M -4 Etched and blackened (Referenced from display Cold Rolled Steel with casework drawings only) matte clear polyurethane top coat M -5 DA 5 Minute Nickel (Referenced from display Finish casework drawings only) M -6 Polished Stainless (Referenced from display Steel ( #8 grade) casework drawings only) M -7 Hot or Cold Rolled (Referenced from display (blackened) Steel with casework drawings only) Clear Powder Coat M -8 DuPont Powder Spartan Bronze (Referenced from display Coatings PFJ- 507 -A5 casework drawings only) M -9 DuPont Alesta Sun Gold (Referenced from display Powder Coatings EFD400m9 casework drawings only) MOLDED PLASTIC MP -1 Conan Surfaces by Color Cameo White (Referenced from display DuPont Finish Polished casework drawings only) MP -2 Conan Surfaces by Color Glacier White (Referenced from display Dupont Finish Polished casework drawings only) MP -4 Hudson Surfaces Mystera, Infinity • Color: Almond Truffle, ESI HS -109 Jay Dyson Finish Matte 1- 253 - 395 -7002 MP -5 Hudson Surfaces Color: White Carrara (Referenced from display HS -117 casework drawings only) ESI Finish. Polished Jay Dyson 1- 253 - 395 -7002 MP -6 Conan Surfaces by Color Night Sky [Permit/Bid Set] FINISH LEGEND -2 07/21/08 COLOR ASI CODE MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION SIZE /FINISH COMMENTS /PR# DuPont Finish: Polished MP -7 Not Used MP -8 Avonite Color: Biscotti, FI -9033 Finish Polished PAINT P -1 Benjamin Moore OC -121, Mountain Peak White P -2 Benjamin Moore 965, Temporal Spirit P -3 Not Used P -4 Not Used P -5 Benjamin Moore OC -19, Seapearl P -6 Benjamin Moore OC -62, Baby's Breath P -7 Open P -8 Wolf Gordon No exceptions Scuffmaster Smooth Pearl G5050711 SP001 P -9 Sherwin Williams SW 7038, Tony Taupe P -10 Benjamin Moore 1557 P -11 Benjamin Moore 2114 -10, Bittersweet Chocolate P -12 ICI 578, Forest Black P -13 Not Used P -14 Bernyl Strong Match Benjamin Moore, OC -20, Pale Oak Finish: Semi -gloss P -15 Not Used P -16 ICI 20YY 42/200, Camel coat P -17 Benjamin Moore First coat: polyurethane Tudor Brown, Exterior (Referenced from display paint to match Tudor Ready -Mixed casework drawings only) Brown Second coat: polyurethane clear top coat, semi -gloss sheen P -18 Benjamin Moore 2052 -60, China Blue (Referenced from display casework drawings only) P -19 Sherwin Williams No exceptions at 6991, Black Magic Display Window Only P -20 Sherwin Williams No exceptions at SW7006, Extra White Display Window Only For BP Casework Only First coat: polyurethane paint to match Extra White Second coat* polyurethane clear top coat, semi -gloss sheen P -21 Benjamin Moore AC -34, Cape Hatteras Sand P -22 Custom To match Loop (Referenced from display Polyurethane paint Textiles, Patt: casework drawings only) Eurosuede, Color: 017 [Permit/Bid Set] FINISH LEGEND -3 07/21/08 • COLOR ASI CODE MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION SIZE /FINISH COMMENTS /PR# Twine P -23 ICI 30YY 05/044, The Dark Side P -24 Open P -25 Open P -26 Custom Urethane To match S -6 (Referenced from display paint casework drawings only) P -27 ICI 30YY- 62/127, Water Chestnut P -28 Match Architect's To match existing PLAM door Sample 1010A PLASTIC LAMINATE PL -1 Pionite Decorative Color: ST604 -S, Laminate Nubian Brown Finish: Suede PL -2 Wilsonart Color D96-60 International Shadow PL -3 Wilsonart Color 1595 -60, Black International Finish: Suede PL-4 Not Used PL -5 Nevamar Color: S -211QT Decorative Basic Surfaces Finish Textured PL -6 Pionite Decorative Color: WX421 -H, Laminate Witchcraft Finish Hi Brite PL -7 Interlam -Arpa Color: 0509, Black Finish Smart PL -8 Formica Color: 899 -58, Desert Beige Finish: Matte PL -9 Wilsonart Color: D91 -60 International Slate Grey PL -10 Wilsonart Color: 6277(419), (Referenced from display International Alumasteel casework drawings only) PL -11 Pionite SW811 White (Referenced from display Finish: Suede casework drawings only) PL -12 Pionite Decorative Color ST606, Taupe Laminate Finish Suede PL -13 Wilsonart Color: 1573 -60, Frosty International White PL -14 Not Used PL -15 Interlam -Arpa Color: 001, White Finish Smart PL -16 Wilsonart Color: 4791 -60, International Willowstone Finish Suede RESILIENT BASE RB -1 Armstrong 75, Desert Sand RB -2 Johnsonite 40, Black RB -3 Roppe TP -P122 Natural RB-4 Johnsonite 47, Brown RB -5 Johnsonite 45, Sandalwood RB -6 Johnsonite 63, Burnt Umber RB -7 Johnsonite 135,Chinese Jade RB -8 Match Architect's Sample RESILIENT FLOORING RF -1 I I See Project Manual [Permit/Bid Set] FINISH LEGEND -4 07/21/08 COLOR ASI CODE MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION SIZE /FINISH COMMENTS /PR# Section 096500 RF -2 Not Used RF -3 Not Used RF-4 Not Used STAIN S -1 Open S -2 "Clear" to match (Reference from display architect's sample casework drawings only) S -3 "Honey Brown" to (Reference from display match architect's casework drawings only) sample S -4 "White -ish" to match (Reference from display architect's sample casework drawings only) S -5 Not Used S -6 "Dark Brown" to match architect's sample S -7 "Brown -ish" to match (Reference from display architect's sample casework drawings only) S -8 "Black" to match architect's sample Piano Finish at WD -1 Flat Finish at WD -2, WD -10 S -9 "Yellow" to match (Reference from display architect's sample casework drawings only) S -10 "Brown -ish with (Reference from display weathered white casework drawings only) accent" to match architect's sample S -11 "Brown -ish" to match (Reference from display architect's sample casework drawings only) S -12 Non fill stain on SF -10, (Reference from display "White -ish" to match casework drawings only) Benjamin Moore, OC- 19, Seapearl, see architect's sample S -13 "Brownish" with custom (Reference from display stencil pattern to match casework drawings only) architect's sample S -50 Match architect's To match existing Men's sample Clothing and Men's Furnishings backwall casework stain SEALANT [Permit/Bid Set] FINISH LEGEND -5 07/21/08 COLOR ASI CODE MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION SIZE /FINISH COMMENTS /PR# SE -1 Pecora Corporation Color -Flex 47, Sierra Tan Use with G -1 SE -2 Pecora Corporation Color -Flex 48, Dark Grey Use with G -2 SE -3 Pecora Corporation Color -Flex 53, Stone Grey Use with G -3 SE-4 Not Used SE -5 Not Used SPECIAL FINISHES SF -1 Not Used SF -2 ASI Antique Mirror Name Grigio Argento (referenced from display 1- 800 - 793 -0224 #SPAQM032 casework drawings only) SF -3 Clear acrylic mirror (Reference from display (.236 thick) with 3M casework drawings only) �+ Scotchal electrocut crystal film series 7725SE, dusted crystal #7725 -314 applied to face SF -4 Altuglas Frosted Plexiglas Frosted colorless (Reference from display casework drawings only) SF -5 Not Used SF -6 Open SF -7 Patterned Acrylic: Knoll Imago Color Progeny Blonde (referenced from display with 3M image # I Mprog 01 casework drawings only) graphics diffuser with 3M image graphics diffuser color White 30% Scotchcal Diffuser Film # 3635 -30 SF -8 Peter David Studio Antiqued Distressed #HYLT (referenced from display Inc. Mirror (A " thick) casework drawings only) 206 -547 -2868 SF -9 MDF Panels Corrugated MDF Color Metallic gray (referenced from display panels Finish: faux metal casework drawings only) SF -10 Architectural Exotexture Panels (Reference from display Systems, Inc. casework drawings only) 1- 800 - 793 -0224 STONE (INTERIOR) (reference drawings for specific cut sizes) ST -1P Not Used ST-1F Not Used ST-1LH Not Used ST -2P Not Used ST -3P Not Used ST4 -H Not Used ST -4P Innovative Marble Calacatta Actual size: Finish: Polished Use Grout G -3 & Tile Greensborough 18" x 18" x 3/8" Use Sealant SE -3 (carrara stone) (Collectors sales floor, Designer Handbags sales floor) Border: 5 7/8" x 18 "x3/8" Base 18" x 4 7/8" x 3/8" 12" x 12" x 3/8" [Permit/Bid Sell FINISH LEGEND -6 07/21/08 COLOR ASI CODE MANUFACTURER _ DESCRIPTION SIZE /FINISH COMMENTS /PR# (Salon Shoes sales floor border and Designer Handbags stone accent pad) Base: 12" x 4 7/8" x 3/8" ST -5P Not Used ST -5H Not Used ST -6P Not Used ST -7HH Match architect's To match existing orange sample stone URETHANE FLOORING OF -1 I Not Used WOOD SPECIES WD -1 Maple WD -2 Ash (referenced from display casework drawings only) WD -3 Fir Plywood ACX Grade (referenced from display casework drawings only) WD -4 Flat Cut Plain - Sliced (referenced from display White Oak casework drawings only) WD -5 Open WD -6 Basswood (referenced from display casework drawings only) WD -7 MDF (referenced from display casework drawings only) WD -8 Walnut (referenced from display casework drawings only) WD -9 Rift -cut White Oak (referenced from display casework drawings only) WD -10 Makore (referenced from display casework drawings only) ADHESIVE SET WOOD FLOORING WF -1 Listone Giordano Field & Border 39 " -78" Random Finish Naturplus, LG Original Plus (pre- Lengths x Matte finish with wire finished) 5 1/2" Wide x brush San Juan 9/16" Thick Hardwoods Species White Oak David Maxey with single plank border for strip pattern (360) 297 -5333 per plans 9P (360) 297 -6845 fax (360) 981 -957 cell 0000- Purchase Order 9999 Items as described in Purchase order (PO) H \ ProlecisWordstrom \Resource\ProjMgmt\2_Design- Production \Intenors\all inienor finish legend info\ 2009 MASTER INTERIOR FINISH LEGEND [Permit/Bid Set] FINISH LEGEND -7 07/21/08 COLOR ASI CODE MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION SIZE /FINISH COMMENTS /PR# END OF SECTION 7 [Permd/BidSeQ FINISH LEGEND -8 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) TIGARD, OR GRAPHIC (FOIC) INSTALLATION SCHEDULE GRAPHIC SCHEDULE NOTES 1. Verify location of all graphics on site with Architect prior to installation. 2. Unless otherwise noted, all text to be Interstate Light font. 3. Brown to match: Pratt and Lambert 0229A. 4. Peacock Blue to be stock blue on file with Messenger Graphics. 5. Silver vinyl to be stock silver metallic. 6. Nordstrom poly nickel to match sample provided by Architect. 7. Silver at back painted acrylic to be 50% light poly nickel with 50% dark poly nickel. 8. Refer to Graphic Detail Sheet A -821 for text/image layout. 9. Remodels only - Reference department names and quantities for temporary department graphics - FOIO (furnished by owner installed by owner). 1. DEPARTMENT GRAPHIC - Install per details J7 /A -821, J9 /A -821, G5 /A -821, and per plans Unless otherwise noted: 5 inch high x 1/2 inch thick dimensional acrylic, upper case letters in the "NORDSTROM" font, to be painted Nordstrom poly nickel. Apply on GWB with double stick foam tape. (B) Designation after the quantity indicates color to be black. Location I TEXT J Color I Qty First Floor "SALON SHOES" 1 "WOMEN'S SHOES" 1 "BP. SHOES" 1 "MEN'S SHOES" 1 "MEN'S CLOTHING" 1 "MEN'S FURNISHINGS" 2 "THE RAIL" (Black) 1 "KIDS' WEAR" (on backwall) 2 "KIDS' SHOES" 1 "COSMETICS" 1 "FINE FRAGRANCE" 1 "HANDBAGS" 1 "SUNGLASSES" 1 "MEN'S SPORTSWEAR" 1 Second Floor "LINGERIE" 1 "HOSIERY" 1 "WOMEN'S ACTIVE" 1 "POINT OF VIEW" 1 "DRESSES" 1 "t.b.d." 1 "PETITE FOCUS" 1 "ENCORE" 1 "INDIVIDUALIST" 1 "SAVVY" 1 "COLLECTORS" 1 ST. JOHN (logo on file 1 (logo) with Messenger — Stacking height of 5" tall) "via C" FOIO "SPECIAL OCCASION" 1 "NARRATIVE" 1 "at HOME" 1 [Permit /Bid Set] Graphics Schedule -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) TIGARD, OR GRAPHIC (FOIC) INSTALLATION SCHEDULE 2. SUB GRAPHIC — Install per detail J3 /A -821 and J13 /A -821 Unless otherwise noted: 3 -1/2 inch high x 1/2 inch thick dimensional acrylic, upper case letters in Interstate Light font to be painted Nordstrom poly nickel. Location I Text I Height 1 Qty. First Floor "SOUTH ENTRANCE" 1 "WEST ENTRANCE" 1 "MALL ENTRANCE" 2 "ELEVATORS" "RESTROOMS" 2 Second Floor "PARKING ENTRANCE" 1 "CUSTOMER SERVICE" 1 "ELEVATORS" 1 " RESTROOMS" 2 3. SUB - DEPARTMENT GRAPHIC - Install per details J7 /A -821 and J9 /A -821 Unless otherwise noted: 3 -1/2 inch high x 1/2 inch thick dimensional acrylic, upper case letters in "NORDSTROM" font to be painted Nordstrom poly nickel. Location I Text 1 Height 1 Qty. First Floor "KIDS' WEAR" • 2 "MEN'S FRAGRANCE" 1 Second Floor "STUDIO 121" I I 2 4. SECONDARY GRAPHICS AND DRESSING ROOMS - Install per details G5 /A -821 and J11 /A -821 Unless otherwise noted: 2 inch high x 1/4 inch thick dimensional acrylic upper case letters in Interstate Light font to be painted Nordstrom poly nickel. Location I Text I Color I Qty. — First Floor Men's Clothing (1026) "DRESSING ROOMS" 1 Centered above cased "RESTROOMS" 1 opening (1037) Men's Sportswear (1037) "DRESSING ROOMS" 1 Centered above cased "MEN'S RESTROOM" 1 opening (1035) The Rail (1044) "DRESSING ROOMS" (Black) 1 Kids Wear Boys and Girls "GIRLS' & BOYS' 1 (1048) DRESSING ROOMS" Install above the Crib or vestibule entry — stack letters as noted to the right Kids Wear dressing rooms "BOYS" 1 (1047) Install on wall into dressing room — used only when girls and boys share Kids Wear dressing rooms "GIRLS" 1 (1049) Install on wall into dressing room — used only when girls and boys share [Permit/Bid Set] Graphics Schedule -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) TIGARD, OR GRAPHIC (FOIC) INSTALLATION SCHEDULE Babies and Toddlers "BABIES AND TODDLERS" 1 Install under "Kidswear" department graphic Boys "BOYS' 4 -7" 1 Install under "Kidswear" department graphic VERIFY SIZES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION Boys "8 -20" 1 Install under "Kidswear" department graphic VERIFY SIZES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION Girls "GIRLS' 4 -6X" 1 Install under "Kidswear" department graphic VERIFY SIZES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION Girls "7 -16" 1 Install under "Kidswear" department graphic VERIFY SIZES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION Centered above cased "WOMEN'S LOUNGE" 1 opening (1053) Centered above cased "WOMEN'S LOUNGE" 1 opening (1054) Beauty Services Studio "BEAUTY SERVICES" 1 Centered above cased "STUDIO" opening (1D21) Centered above at GWB "ELEVATORS" 1 portal to Vestibule 1017 Second Floor Lingerie (2031) "DRESSING ROOMS" 1 Centered above cased "RESTROOMS" 1 opening (2044) Centered above cased "WOMEN'S LOUNGE" 1 opening (2040) Centered above cased "FAMILY ROOM" 1 opening (2043) Women's Active (2051) "DRESSING ROOMS" 1 Point of View (2054) "DRESSING ROOMS" 1 t.b.d. (2058) "DRESSING ROOMS" 1 BP. (2061) "DRESSING ROOMS" 1 Petite Focus (2074) "DRESSING ROOMS" 1 Encore (2083) "DRESSING ROOMS" 1 Individualist (2092) "DRESSING ROOMS" 1 Savvy (2094A) "DRESSING ROOMS" 1 Collectors (2098) "DRESSING ROOMS" 1 [Permit/Bid Set] Graphics Schedule -3 07/21/08 • NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) TIGARD, OR GRAPHIC (FOIC) INSTALLATION SCHEDULE St. John (2101) "DRESSING ROOMS" 1 via C /Studio 121 /Special "DRESSING ROOMS" 1 Occasion (2105) Studio 121 (2104) "DRESSING ROOMS" 1 Narrative (2107) 'DRESSING ROOMS" 1 5. OPEN 6. DRESSING ROOM DOOR GRAPHIC — Install per detail G7 /A -821 and G9 /A -821 Unless otherwise noted: provide (1) each 1 -1/2 inch high silver vinyl numbers on the corridor side of each dressing room door underneath the acrylic sleeve. Location I Text I Color I Qty. First Floor (Numerals only as indicated below) Dressing Room 1023 "1" through "10" 1 set Dressing Room 1038 "1" through "12" 1 set Dressing Room 1043 "1" through "6" 1 set Dressing Room 1047 "1" through "4" 1 set Dressing Room 1049 "1" through "4" 1 set Second Floor Dressing Room 2031 "1" through "11" 1 set Dressing Room 2051 "1" through "6" 1 set Dressing Room 2054 "1" through "12" 1 set Dressing Room 2059 "1" through "12" 1 set Dressing Room 2063 "1" through "17" 1 set Dressing Room 2074 "1" through "7" 1 set Dressing Room 2083 "1" through "5" 1 set DR 2083 - Dump /Hold Door "Employees" 1 each Dressing Room 2092 "1" through "11" 1 set Dressing Room 2094 "1" through "5" 1 set Dressing Room 2097 "1" through "3" 1 set Dressing Room 2099 "1" through "3" 1 set Dressing Room 2102 "1" through "3" 1 set Dressing Room 2104 "1" through "6" 1 set Dressing Room 2107 "1" through "10" 1 set 7. SWIMWEAR DRESSING ROOM GRAPHIC 1/2 inch high upper and lowercase letters silver reverse silk- screened on back of 1/8 inch KSH (colorless matte acrylic). Paint back face of acrylic P -1. Install one sign in each scheduled dressing room cubicle with double -stick tape; mount centered 2 inches above "Dressing rooms monitored by Nordstrom Personnel" sign. Location I Text I Color I Qty. First Floor Men's Sportswear "Undergarments are 12 Dressing Rooms 1038 required while trying on swimwear" Second Floor or Third Floor Women's Active "Undergarments are 6 Dressing Rooms 2051 required while trying on swimwear" 8. EMPLOYEE ENTRANCE GRAPHIC — Not Used 9. SPA LOGO — Not Used [Permit/Bid Set] Graphics Schedule -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) TIGARD, OR GRAPHIC (FOIC) INSTALLATION SCHEDULE 10. GENERAL INFORMATION GRAPHIC AT DOORS — Install per detail G11 /A -821 Unless otherwise noted: 1 -inch high upper and lower case silver vinyl letters. Graphic to be on push side of door unless otherwise noted. Door No. / Side I Text I Color I Qty. First Floor 1003B (pull) "Employees" 1 1003C (pull) "Employees" 1 - 1005B (pull) "Employees" 2 1010A "Employees" 1 1016 (pull) "Employees" 1 1024 "Employees" 1 1027 "Employees" 1 1032A "Employees" 1 1032B "Employees" 1 1035 "Men" 1 1036 "Employees" 1 1040 "Employees" 1 1045 "Employees" 1 1050 "Employees" 2 1052 "Employees" 1 1058 "Loss Prevention" 1 1065 "Employees" 1 1067 "Employees" 1 1072 "Studio" 1 1073 "Studio" 1 1074 "Studio" 1 1076 "Employees" 1 1S4 "NE Stair" 1 "Alarmed Door Emergency Exit Only" Second Floor 2005 "Employees" 1 2009 "Employees" 1 2013 "Employees" 1 2020 "Employees" 1 2028 "Employees" 1 2029 "Employees" 1 2040 "Women" 1 2043 "Family Room" 1 2052 "Employees" 1 2053B (pull) "Employees" 1 2056A "Employees" 1 2056B "Employees" 1 2064A "Employees" 1 2064B "Employees" 1 2071 "Employees" 1 2082 "Employees" 1 2084 "Employees" 2 2088 "Employees" 1 2093 "Employees" 1 [Permit /Bid Set] Graphics Schedule -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) TIGARD, OR GRAPHIC (FOIC) INSTALLATION SCHEDULE 2S3 "NW Stair" 1 "Employees" each 2095 "Employees" 1 2103 "Employees" 1 2108 "Employees" 1 2117A "Employees" 2 11a. NORDSTROM LOGO DECAL— Install per details C5 /A -821 and E5 /A -821 1 -1/2 inch high reverse cut shiny gold vinyl "NORDSTROM" logo in the Interstate Light font in all upper case letters to be ap lied to designate fixed glass panels. Location Text Qty. Each Total Entry _ First Floor South Entrance "NORDSTROM" 4 8 West Entrance 4 Second Floor - South Entrance "NORDSTROM" 6 6 ,r . 11b. STORE HOURS GRAPHIC — Install per detail E5 /A -821 1 -1/2 inch high reverse cut shiny gold vinyl upper and lower case letters for store hours in the Interstate Light font applied to the inside of the glass. Verify store hours message with Nordstrom Store Planning Project Manager prior to installation. Location Text for Store Hours Qty. Each Total Entry First Floor South Entrance "Store Hours" 2 4 West Entrance "Mon — Fri 9:30am - 9:30pm" 2 "Sat 9:30am - 9:00pm" "Sun 10:00am - 7:00pm" Second Floor South Entrance "Store Hours" 2 2 "Mon — Fri 9:30am - 9:30pm" "Sat 9:30am - 9:00pm" "Sun 10:00am - 7:00pm" 12. UNLOCKED DOORS GRAPHIC - Install per details C5 /A -821 and E5 /A -821 1 -inch high P -1 vinyl upper and lower case letters. Install above outer set of doors on transom at each required entry. Location I Text j Qty. • First Floor South Entrance "These doors to remain unlocked during business hours" 2 West Entrance Second Floor South Entrance "These doors to remain unlocked during business hours" 1 13a. FIRE EXTINGUISHER SIGN 1 -inch high upper and lowercase silver letters, reverse silk- screened on back of 1/8 inch KSH [Permit/Bid Set] Graphics Schedule -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) TIGARD, OR GRAPHIC (FOIC) INSTALLATION SCHEDULE (colorless matte acrylic). Paint back face of acrylic to match P -1. Install with double -stick foam tape. Location I Text I Qty. First Floor Sales Floor 1005, 1033, 1037, 1053, "Fire Extinguisher" 5 1D21 Second Floor Sales Floor 2008, 2066, 2089, 2118, "Fire Extinguisher" 5 Column D7 13b. FIRE EXTINGUISHER SIGN AT CASHWRAP — Not Used 14. STAIRWELL SIGN — Not Used 15. ROOM CAPACITY SIGN — Not Used 16. NO STORAGE SIGN — Not Used 17. OPEN DOOR SLOWLY SIGN Unless otherwise noted: provide (1) each 3/8 inch high upper and lower case red letters, silk- screened on 1/8 inch KSH (colorless matte acrylic). Paint back face of acrylic P -1. Location Text Qty. On push side of accessible stall door in "Open door slowly" 5 Men's Toilet 1035 (1) Women's Toilet 1051 (2) Women's Toilet 2035 (2) On push side of doors "Open door slowly" 6 1003B, 1003C, 1005B (2), 1016, 2053B 18. NO PARKING SIGN — Not Used 19. NO SMOKING AT DOCK SIGN — Not Used 20. SHOE SHINE STAND SIGN — Not Used 21. MULTI - LINGUAL AREA MONITORED BY AUDIO AND VIDEO SIGN 1 -1/4 inch high Interstate Light font silver letters reverse silk- screened on back of 1/8 inch, non - glare, KSH (colorless matte acrylic). Sign to be 8" H x 11" L with 1 /4" radius corners. Paint back face of acrylic P -1. Signs are to be located by the Loss Prevention manager at each store. Location I Text I Color I Qty. Holding room "AREA MONITORED BY 2 AUDIO AND VIDEO (typical RECORDING all EQUIPMENT" stores) "ESTE SITIO ES SUPERVISADO POR EL EQUIPO DE GRABACI3N AUDIO Y VIDEO" 22. ROOF ACCESS SIGN — Not Used 23. TAILOR ALTERATIONS CALENDARS — Install per detail E3 /A -821 [Permit/Bid Set] Graphics Schedule -7 07/21/08 • NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) TIGARD, OR GRAPHIC (FOIC) INSTALLATION SCHEDULE ^ Upper and lower case letters in interstate light font (size varies) reverse silk- screened on back of 15" x 16" x 1/8" KSH (colorless matte acrylic). Letters to be silver. Paint back face of acrylic P -1. 1/8" thick Sintra cleat mounted with double -stick tape to back of calendar for installation screw in loose 1/8" sintra cleat to wall /substrate for mounting. Location Text Qty. Install on wall near mirror "NORDSTROM" 13 centered 2" above phone at each "LIST OF ALTERATION SERVICES" fitting room "TODAY'S ALTERATIONS WILL BE READY ON" 1025(2), 1038 (1), 1044(1), DAY OF WEEK, MONTH, DATE 1047(1), 2054(1), 2059(1), 2063(1), 2074(1), 2083(1), 2092(1), 2104(1), 2107(1) Order one per dressing room 7 without fitting room (including Girl's, Lingerie, Women's Active, Collector's, Savvy, ViaC, St. John) and install in the nearest stock room VERIFY FINAL LOCATION WITH NORDSTROM STORE PLANNING 1049(1), 2031(1), 2051(1), 2094(1), 2098(1), 2099(1), 2102(1), 24. IN USE SIGN Unless otherwise noted: 1/2 inch high upper and lower case letters applied to plastic laminate laminated to 1/8 inch acrylic with sliding plastic laminate panel to cover and uncover "In Use" message. Letters to be silver. Unless otherwise noted, Plastic Laminate to be PL -12. Install with double -stick foam tape. Mount on wall adjacent to latch side of door on nearest adjacent wall at 5' -0" AFF to centerline outside of room 2" from jamb. Location Text P. Laminate Qty. Beauty Studio 1072, 1073, 1074 "In Use" PL -15 (at S -6) 3 25. EMPLOYEES MUST WASH HANDS SIGN 1/4 -inch high upper and lower case silver letters reverse silk- screened on back of 1/8 inch KSH (colorless matte acrylic). Paint back face of acrylic P -1. Install with double -stick foam tape. In Family Room align and install 1" above Lavatory sign. In Women's and Men's Restroom align with Lavatory sign and install centered between each set of sinks on the splash. In Mother's Room, align with Lavatory sign and 1 /2' left from center of sink. Location Text Qty. Men's Restroom 1035 1 Women's Restroom 1051 "Employees must wash hands before 2 Women's Restroom 2035 returning to work" 2 Mother's Room 2042 1 _ T Family Room 2043 1 -- 26. ADDITIONAL RESTROOMS SIGN 3/4 -inch high upper and lower case silver letters reverse silk- screened on back of 1/8 inch KSH _ (colorless matte acrylic). Sign to be 9" H x 6" W with 1 /4" radius corner. Paint back face of acrylic P -1. Install with double -stick foam tape, 1" from and aligned next to the accessible restroom sign. Location I Text I Color I Qty. Second Floor [Permit/Bid Set] Graphics Schedule -8 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) TIGARD, OR GRAPHIC (FOIC) INSTALLATION SCHEDULE Family Room 2043 "Additional men's 1 restrooms available on the 1st floor" 27. LAVATORY SIGN 1/4 -inch high upper and lower case silver letters reverse silk- screened on back of 1/8 inch KSH (colorless matte acrylic). Paint back face of acrylic P -1. Install with double -stick foam tape. In Family Room align bottom edge with shelf and install 1" from side of mirror. In Women's and Men's Restroom install centered on sink and centered between top and bottom of splash. In Mother's Room, install '/2" right from center of sink and centered between top and bottom of splash. Location Text Qty. Men's Restroom 1035 2 Women's Restroom 1051 _ "Place hands under 4 Women's Restroom 2035 faucet to start 4 Mother's Room 2042 water flow" 1 Family Room 2043 1 28. DRINKING WATER SIGN — Not used 29. FLUSH TOILET SIGN '/4 inch high upper and lower case silver letters reverse silk- screened on back of 1/8 inch KSH (colorless matte acrylic). Paint back face of acrylic P -1. Install with double -stick foam tape centered +/- 4 inches above water closet valve ( +/- 4 inches above grab bar at accessible stalls). Location Text Qty. • Men's Restroom 1035 "Push button if 2 Women's Restroom 1051 toilet does not 6 Women's Restroom 2035 flush automatically" 7 Family Room 2043 1 30. ACCESSIBLE SIGNS - See Detail A7 /A -821, A9 /A -821, All /A -821, and C9 /A -821. Install per Detail G3 /A -821. 5/8 inch high x 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) thick raised upper case letters and Grade 2 Braille (where applicable) permanently laminated to show subsurface with color blue under review background and white letters silk- screened copy on 3 mil. Sintra with a matte finish. Pictogram dimensions are 6" W x 6" H. Typical graphic to be installed on wall adjacent to latch side of door or nearest adjacent wall. Install with double -stick foam tape. Location Detail Text Qty. At Cased opening 1. "RESTROOMS" 3 1037, 1053, 2044 1035 2A. "TO ACCESSIBLE RESTROOM" (Men) 1 1054, 2040 2B. "TO ACCESSIBLE RESTROOM" 2 (Women) 2044 2C. "TO ACCESSIBLE RESTROOM" (Men 1 and Women) Doors 1035 3. "MEN" 1 (At Men's accessible toilet rooms) Cased Opening 4. "WOMEN" 2 1051, 2035 (At Women's accessible toilet rooms) [Permit/Bid Set] Graphics Schedule -9 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) TIGARD, OR GRAPHIC (FOIC) INSTALLATION SCHEDULE Door 2043 5. "FAMILY RESTROOM" 1 (At Family Room) Near Women's 6. "WOMEN'S LOUNGE" 2 Lounge 1054, 2040 Near Mother's Room 7. "MOTHER'S ROOM" 1 2042 (International Breastfeeding Symbol) Boys 8. NO TEXT 1 With left arrow Girls 8. NO TEXT 1 With right arrow Install on wall or 9A. "DRESSING ROOMS" 17 (2 extra) -- casework at the =19 Total entrance to all fitting /dressing rooms from sales floor Install on dressing 10A. "ACCESSIBLE" (6" x 6 ") 14 room front partitions adjacent to the 1 Floor = 5 accessible dressing 2 Floor = 9 room (except those under Graphic 10B) - 1023, 1038, 1043, 1047, 1049, 2051, 2054, 2059, 2063, 2074, 2083, 2092, 2104, 2107 Install on front of 10B. "ACCESSIBLE" (3" x 3 ") 11 partition at latch side of door at 1 Floor = 4 Accessible Toilets 2 " Floor = 7 and on accessible dressing room front partitions that are too small to fit those under 10A). 1035(2), 1051(2), 2035(2), 2031, 2094, 2097, 2099, 2102 Stair 4 at door 1 S4 11. "STAIRS" 1 - -- Stair 3 at door 2S3 "STAIRS" 2 OPEN 12. OPEN 13. OPEN 14. Verify locations per 14A. "EXIT" 5 store 14B "EXIT" 3 With Universal Acc Symbol Verify locations per 15A. "EXIT" 2 store With left arrow "EXIT" 1 With right arrow 15B. "EXIT" 2 With left arrow and Universal Acc Symbol [Permit/Bid Set] Graphics Schedule -10 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) TIGARD, OR GRAPHIC (FOIC) INSTALLATION SCHEDULE "EXIT" 1 With right arrow and Universal Acc Symbol Verify locations per 16. "EXIT STAIRS" 8 store 31. ACCESSIBLE ENTRANCE DECAL - Install per Details E5 /A -821 and C5 /A -821 1/2 inch high black letters on a yellow background, 3/4 inch high white letters on a black background _ and 1/2 inch high white letters on a blue background. Double sided decal with 6 "x 8" pictogram. Install centered on glass at 5' -0" AFF to centerline of yellow back ground. Location Text I Qty. First Floor South Entrance "AUTOMATIC /CAUTION /DOOR" (4) + (1)extra West Entrance AND "ACTIVATE SWITCH Total : (5)Double "ek TO OPERATE" Sided Decals Second Floor Bridge Entrance "AUTOMATIC /CAUTION /DOOR" (2) + (1)extra AND "ACTIVATE SWITCH Total : (3)Double TO OPERATE" Sided Decals 32. SHOPLIFTERS SIGN 1 -1/4 inch high Interstate light font upper case silver letters reverse silk- screened on back of 1/8 inch, non - glare, KSH (colorless matte acrylic). Sign to be 5" H x 12" L with 1 /4" radius corner. Paint back face of acrylic P -1. Install near every dressing room entrance 4" from light switch and align top of graphic with top of light switch. For better Women's dressing rooms install 4" from phone and 48" high to centerline of graphic. Location Text I Color I Qty. First Floor Inside dressing rooms near to entry "SHOPLIFTERS 5 WILL BE PROSECUTED" Second Floor Inside dressing rooms near to entry "SHOPLIFTERS 14 WILL BE PROSECUTED" 33. CAUTION SIGN AT STOCK ENTRIES — Not Used 34. AREA MONITORED BY VIDEO SIGN — Not Used 35. NO STORAGE ON FLOOR SIGN — Not Used 36. AQUARIUM GRAPHIC — Install per detail G1 /A -821 Din Bold font upper and lower case silver vinyl letters. Location Text Color Qty. Kid's Shoes Aquarium "Enjoy those fun 1 fisheys behind the glass wall. But don't climb on the table...we don't want you to fall." 37. DRESSING ROOMS MONITORED SIGN 3/8 -inch high upper and lower case silver letters reverse silk- screened on back of 1/8 inch KSH (colorless matte acrylic). Paint back face of acrylic P -1 overall store color. Installation: Install with double stick foam tape centered 2 inches above pin pad in each Stylmark and partial height dressing room. [Permit /Bid Set] Graphics Schedule -11 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) TIGARD, OR • GRAPHIC (FOIC) INSTALLATION SCHEDULE Location Text Qty. "Dressing rooms monitored 147 by Nordstrom personnel" 38. SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL SIGN 'A inch high upper and lower case silver letters reverse silk- screened on back of 1/8 inch KSH (colorless matte acrylic). Paint back face of acrylic P -1. Install with double -stick foam tape centered +/- 4 inches above sanitary napkin disposal box ( +/- 4 inches above grab bar at accessible stalls). Location Text Qty. Women's 1051 _ "Please use the disposal box 6 Women's 2035 for all feminine protection products" 7 — Family Room 2043 1 39. FAMILY ROOM PRIVACY SIGN 1/4 -inch high upper and lower case silver letters reverse silk- screened on back of 1/8 inch KSH (colorless matte acrylic). Paint back face of acrylic P -1. Install with double -stick foam tape so visible upon entry into room. Needs to be visible upon entry into room. Location Text Qty. In Family Room 2043 "Please lock door to ensure 1 your privacy" 40. FAMILY ROOM USAGE SIGN 1 /4 inch high upper and lower case silver letters reverse silk- screened on back of 1/8 inch KSH (colorless matte acrylic). Paint back face of acrylic P -1. Installation: Install with double -stick foam tape centered 1 inch below the accessible graphic outside the door. Location Text Qty. Outside of family room 2043 "This family room is provided 1 for children, or others, needing the assistance of an adult" 41. LAPTOP PC USAGE GRAPHIC — Not Used 42. CUSTOMER SERVICES SIGN — Not Used 43. SPA SIGNS — Not Used 44. SPA ENTRY SIGN — Not Used 45. NO SMOKING SIGN - Install per detail E5 /A -821 Reverse cut shiny gold vinyl upper and lower case letters applied to the inside of the glass. Align and install 6" under Store Hours Graphic. VERIFY WITH ARCHITECT BEFORE PRINTING. Location Text Qty. Each Total Entry First Floor South Entrance "NORDSTROM 1 2 West Entrance is a smoke free 1 establishment. Smoking is prohibited Second Floor [Permit/Bid Set] Graphics Schedule -12 07/21 /08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (025) TIGARD, OR GRAPHIC (FOIC) INSTALLATION SCHEDULE South Entrance - "NORDSTROM 1 1 is a smoke free establishment. Smoking is prohibited • • 46. MAIN ALARM PANEL SIGN = Not Used 47. FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION SIGN — Not'Used END OF SECTION H \ Projects\ Nordstrom\ Resource\ProjMgmt\2_Design - Production \Intenors\2007 master graphics schedule.doc.doc - • • ■ • • [Permit/Bid Set] Graphics Schedule 13 07/21/08 CALLISON ELECTRICAL DEVICE AND COVER -PLATE SCHEDULE Nordstrom Washington Square (025) July 21, 2008 Washington Square Shopping Center, Tigard, OR 97223 Project # 207245.00 Permit/Bid Set Back office /stock areas Ivory DRESSING ROOMS BP. Dressing Rooms WHITE Collectors Dressing WHITE (wrapped in wallcovering) Encore Dressing Rooms BROWN Individualist Dressing Rooms Ivory Kids Wear Girls Dressing Rooms WHITE Lingerie Dressing Rooms Ivory Men's Clothing Dressing Rooms and Fitting Room BROWN Men's Sportswear Dressing Rooms BROWN Narrative Dressing Rooms Ivory Petite Focus Dressing Rooms Ivory Point of View /Dresses Dressing Rooms BROWN Rail Dressing Rooms BROWN Savvy Dressing Rooms Ivory (wrapped in wallcovering) St. John Dressing Rooms WHITE (wrapped in wallcovering) Studio and Studio Vestibule Ivory Studio 121/ Special Occasion Dressing Rooms Ivory t.b.d. Dressing Rooms BLACK via C Dressing Rooms BLACK (wrapped in wallcovering) Women's Active Dressing Rooms WHITE PUBLIC SPACES Kidswear Sales Floor Backwall (Boys, Girls, WHITE Babies/Toddlers, and Shoes) Kidswear Sales Floor Columns (Boys and Girls) WHITE Savvy Sales Floor Backwall WHITE BP. Sales Floor Columns WHITE Lingerie Sales Floor Columns WHITE Savvy Sales Floor Columns Ivory Columns with casework WHITE at light casework (S -4) BROWN at dark casework (S -6 & S -8) All other Sales Floor Columns Ivory Mirrored columns on sales floor with mirror Chrome cover plate, ivory device to match existing mounted receptacles Exterior Entries, Escalator Columns, Mall Entry, Ivory (on wallcovering and existing stone) Entry Vestibules, and Elevator Lobby Shoe Vestibules (men's and women's) Ivory or *match existing finishes if to remain (submit sample to architect for approval) Display Windows BLACK Customer Service Ivory Family Room Ivory Men's Public Toilets Ivory CALLISON ARCHITECTURE, INC. 1420 FIFTH AVENUE 92400 SEATTLE WASHINGTON 98101 -2343 T 206 623 4646 F 206 623 4625 www calIison corn ELECTRICAL DEVICE AND COVER -PLATE LIST (CONT.) Women's Lounge Ivory -- Mother's Room Ivory Women's Public Toilets Ivory Men's and Women's Public Toilet Room Vestibules - Ivory • nicole •Users•nicolebentley•Desktop :025 -WASQ- PERMIT BID 025- WASQ_Electrlcal Device and Coverplate Legend.doc -- 1\ • NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General description of work. 2. Work by others. 3. Emergency Response Contact List. 4. Special work requirements. 5. Existing utilities. 6. Owner furnished Contractor installed products. 7. Coordination. 8. Reference standards. 9. Applicable codes. • 10. Document format. 11. Document organization and interpretation. 12. Communication. 13. Request for interpretation. 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. A general description of the Scope of Work is included on the General Information Sheet A -001 of the Drawings. 1.3 WORK BY OTHERS A. Work indicated "NIC" is "Not In Contract" and will be performed by others. B. Coordinate with the separate contractors as necessary to integrate their work into the work of this Contract. C. The Owner will move all merchandise, portable furniture, and fixtures in the areas to be affected by construction operations. Give the Owner a minimum of 5 working days notice for each area which requires moving of such elements. 1.4 EMERGENCY RESPONSE CONTACT LIST A. Provide an Emergency Response Contact List of appropriate parties to notify in the event of a jobsite emergency. B. Distribute the List to the following before work commences: 1. Subcontractors. 2. Project Managers. 3. Superintendents. 4. Work crew leaders. C. Personnel or Services to be Listed: 1. 911. 2. Nordstrom Project Manager. 3. Callison Project Manager. 4. General Contractor Project Manager. 5. Consulting Engineer Project Managers. 6. Store Manager. 7. Store Maintenance Manager. 8. Store Security Manager. 9. Local Emergency Services (in addition to 911). D. Means of Contact Should Include: 1. Office phone number. 2. Mobile phone number. 3 Home phone number. • 011000 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 011000 — SUMMARY 1.5 SPECIAL WORK REQUIREMENTS A. Limit use of premises to only those areas involved in the construction operations and as required for - access. B. Perform work during normal working hours, except noisy, dusty, foul smelling, or otherwise offensive operations shall be performed only while the store is closed. C. Coordinate use of premises under direction of the Owner, and in accordance with the requirements of - jurisdictional code authorities. D. Owner Occupancy Requirements: Owner will occupy portions of the premises during entire period of construction. Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflict, and facilitate Owner's operations. E. Noise Producing Activities: 1. Unless approved otherwise, limit excessive noise producing activities to non - business hours. 2. Use saws and hydraulic impactor equipment instead of pneumatic tools and compressors to reduce noise. 3. Equipment shall be muffled for quiet operation not to exceed 50 decibels at a distance of 20 feet from the source. F. Sequencing: 1. Sequence and schedule the work as necessary to minimize the time that a Department is affected by construction operations. 2. In areas where new or relocated cashwraps are to be installed, install the carpet continuously over the floor and install the cashwrap over the carpet. G. Phase the Work as necessary to affect the minimum number of Departments for each portion of work. H. Prior to commencing construction, submit a detailed description of the methods proposed to perform the Work to the Owner and the Architect. Address scheduling, utility shutdown times, demolition procedures, shoring methods, protective enclosures, barricading, construction sequencing, work times, public access, security, signage and merchandise relocation, and all other construction issues which would affect the operation, use, and appearance of the store. Update and resubmit each -- month. 1.6 EXISTING UTILITIES A. The Architect assumes no responsibility for the completeness or accuracy of existing utility line information provided by the serving utilities and shown on the Drawings. Utility information shall be verified by the Contractor. B. Unless otherwise required, maintain all existing water, sewer, gas, and irrigation lines, lighting, power, and telephone wires or conduits, plus any other surface or subsurface utilities, and their connections to structures, undisturbed during progress of work. C. Where temporary utility shutdown is required for the performance of the work, schedule and coordinate with the Owner. Should the Contractor in the performance of the work, disturb, disconnect or damage any existing utilities required to remain in service, all expense arising from such disturbance, replacing or repair thereof shall be borne by the Contractor. D. Maintain and operate utilities systems to assure continuous service, except as otherwise approved by the Owner and the Developer. Give not less than 14 days notice of proposed utility shutdowns. E. Obtain approval from the Owner prior to cutting any utility lines. 1.7 OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. The Owner will furnish various products as indicated on the Drawings, specified in the technical Sections, and as listed below: 1. Accessible dressing room benches. 2. Draperies. 3. Identifying Devices and Graphics. 011000 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 011000 — SUMMARY B. Owner's Responsibilities for Owner Furnished Products: 1. Arrange for and deliver product data, shop drawings, samples, manufacturer's instructions, and other pertinent data to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site, unless otherwise specified. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage. 5. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items. 6. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service. C. Contractor's Responsibilities for Owner Furnished Products: 1. Indicate submittal and delivery dates for each product in the Progress Schedule. 2. Review product data, shop drawings, samples, and other submittals as requested, and as necessary to facilitate installation. 3. .Forward reviewed submittals to Architect with notification of any observed discrepancies due to non - compliance with the Contract Documents. 4. Receive and unload products at the Owner's warehouse; inspect - deliveries jointly with the Owner and Architect; record shortages, damages, and defective items. 5. Unless directed otherwise by Owner, initiate freight claims for damaged and missing products; order replacement and missing products in a timely manner. 6. Transport products from the warehouse to the Project site and unload. 7. Handle, store, install and finish products, in compliance with Contract Documents and manufacturer's instructions, as applicable. 8. Protect products from damage and from exposure to the elements. 9. Repair or replace items damaged by Work of this Contract; replace items lost by Contractor. 10. Coordinate all work required to accommodate Owner furnished items. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Cutting and Patching: 1. Execute cutting and removal operations to uncover ill- timed, defective, or non - conforming work. 2. Patch all areas damaged by cutting and removal operations to original condition. Seal all penetrations, unless indicated or approved otherwise. 3. Penetrations through fire rated construction shall be sealed to maintain the rating of the construction. 1.9 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Materials and equipment specified by reference to standard specifications, trade association publications, and manufacturer's catalogs and installation recommendations, shall refer to the latest issue in effect at the date of Contract, except where specifications or governing building codes refer on specific items to an earlier issue. B. In case of conflict between the project specifications and referenced standards, the one having the most stringent requirements shall govern. 1.10 APPLICABLE CODES A. Perform work in accordance with the requirements of the local jurisdictional Code authorities and the Codes listed on the Drawings. 1.11 DOCUMENT FORMAT A. Preliminary Issues: 1. Specifications issued prior to the General Bid set are partial and may contain requirements and references not applicable to the subject document package. 2. In general, where the final bid set incorporates modifications to previously issued documents, the cost of such modifications shall be itemized and incorporated into the final bid price. B. Modifications to text in specifications which have been previously issued are indicated as follows: 1. Deleted text is Overstr-usk. 2. New text is Underlined. 3. Modifications affecting work being bid or previously bid includes a flag in the right margin [ *] 011000 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 011000 — SUMMARY 4. No flag is included for modifications affecting work that was not bid at time of document issue. 5. Designations: Bracketed markers located in the page margins indicate revisions as follows: a. A bracketed number with prefix such as [A1], [A2], etc indicates a revision made by Addendum. The number corresponds to the Addendum number. b. A bracketed number with a PR prefix such as [PR1], [PR2], etc indicates a revision made by Proposal Request. The number corresponds to the PR number. c. A bracketed number with an ASI prefix such as [ASI1], [ASI2], etc indicates a revision made by Architect's Supplemental Instruction. The number corresponds to the ASI number. C. Modifications to drawings which have been previously issued are indicated by a "cl ud" around the current modified portion of the drawing. 1.12 PROJECT MANUAL ORGANIZATION AND INTERPRETATION A. Sections of Division 1 - General Requirements govern the execution of all sections of the specifications. B. Except as otherwise provided in the Agreement, documents numbered 00000 through 006999, and bound in front of the 'General Conditions of the Contract for Construction' in the Project Manual, consist of introductory pages, forms, and information available to the Contractor, and are not part of the Contract. C. Specifications and notes are written in imperative and abbreviated form. Imperative language of the technical sections is directed at the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. Incomplete sentences shall be completed by inserting "shall," "shall be," "the Contractor shall," and similar mandatory phrases by inference. The words "shall be" shall be supplied by inference where a colon (:) is used. D. Where "as shown," "as detailed," "as indicated," or words of similar meaning are used, references to - the Contract Documents are intended unless stated otherwise. Where "as directed," "as required," "as selected," "approved," or words of similar meaning are used, it shall be understood that "by the Architect" follows unless stated otherwise. "Furnish" means "Contractor shall procure, pay for, and deliver "; "install" means "Contractor shall set in position and connect or adjust for final use"; "provide" means "Contractor shall furnish and install." E. The terms 'Installer,' 'Fabricator,' and 'Supplier' shall mean the Contractor, a subcontractor, or a sub - subcontractor." 1.13 COMMUNICATION A. Copies or memos of all direct communications between the Owner and Contractor facilitating contract administration shall be promptly transmitted to the Architect by the party initiating the communication. 1.14 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION A. Allot time in construction scheduling for liaison with Architect; establish procedures for handling queries and clarifications. B. Use an electronic version of the "Request for Interpretation" for requesting interpretations from the Architect. An example of the form is bound into this manual in Division 00. Upon request, Architect will furnish the electronic version of the form to expedite the processing of data. C. Allow sufficient time in construction schedule for Architect's response to the RFIs. END OF SECTION 011000 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012000 — PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Application for Payment. - - 2. Change Order Procedures. B. Related Sections: 1. 005200 - Owner- Contractor Agreement. 2. 007200 - General Conditions of the Contract - AIA Document A201. 3. 010100 - Summary. 4. 012300 - Alternates. 5. 016000 - Product Requirements: Substitutions. 6. 017700 - Closeout Procedures: Project Record Drawings. C. This Section supplements the General Conditions. 1.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Format and Data Required: 1. Submit Applications for Payment to Architect in accord with the schedule established by Conditions of the Contract and Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. 2. Submit applications in the form required by Owner, with itemized data typed on 8 -1/2 x 11 inch continuation sheets providing itemized data following accepted Schedule of Values format. B. Preparation of Application for Each Progress Payment: 1. Application Form: a. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed prior to date of submittal of application. b. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continuation sheets. c. Execute application with signature of a responsible officer of contract firm. 2. Continuation Sheets: a. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item number and scheduled dollar value for each item. b. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been performed or products stored. Round off values to nearest dollar, or as specified for Schedule of Values. c. List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission, at the end of the continuation sheets. List by Change Order Number, and description, as for an original component item of work. C. Substantiating Data For Progress Payments: 1. When the Owner or the Architect requires substantiating data, submit suitable information, with a cover letter identifying: a. Project. b. Application number and date. c. Detailed list of enclosures. d. For stored products: 1) Item number and identification as shown on application. 2) Description of specific material. 2. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application. D. The Architect's certification will be based on observations of the Work, and is limited to Work shown on Contract Documents prepared by the Architect and its consultants. E. Preparation of Application For Final Payment: 1. Fill in Application form as specified for progress payments. 012000 -1 07/21/08 • NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012000 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 2. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as specified in Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures. F. Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit Applications for Payment to Architect at the times stipulated in the Agreement. 2. Number: Two copies of each application. 3. When Architect finds application properly completed and correct, he will transmit Certificate for Payment to Owner, with a copy to Contractor. - 1.3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. Definitions: 1. Change Order: See General Conditions. 2. Proposal Request: a. An instrument submitted by the Architect to the Contractor which describes proposed changes in the Work, and requests a proposal from the Contractor consisting of: 1) The total change to the Contract price, if any. 2) An itemization of costs related to the proposal. 3) Changes to the Contract Time, if any. b. A proposal request is not an authorization for a change in the Work, but may be incorporated into the Contract by Construction Change Directive, or by Change Order. 3. Construction Change Directive: Issued by Architect; signed by Owner. Interim order to proceed with changes based on description of work required and estimated maximum price (or minimum credit). Upon agreement of adjusted price and time, as applicable, description of changes will be incorporated into a Change Order. 4. Architect's Supplemental Instructions: Clarification issued by the Architect. Requires signature by the Contractor to acknowledge no change in cost. B. Timing and Authorization: 1. A proposal shall be submitted by the General Contractor within 7 calendar days of the issuance of each proposal request. 2. Promptly implement change order procedures. a. Provide full written data required to evaluate changes. b. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time -and material basis. c. Provide full documentation to Architect on request. 3. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization: - a. Who is authorized to accept changes in the work. b. Who is responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of the authorization of changes in the work. c. Who is authorized to execute Change Orders. C. Preliminary Procedures: 1. Owner or Architect may initiate changes by submitting a Proposal Request to the Contractor containing the proposed change. Request will include: a. Detailed description of the change, products, and location of the change in the Project. b. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications. c. The projected time span for making the change, and a specific statement as to whether overtime work is, or is not, authorized. d. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. e. Such request is for information only, and is not an instruction to execute the changes, nor to stop work in progress. 2. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written request to Architect, containing: a. Description of the proposed changes. b. Statement of the reason for making the changes. c. Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. d. Statement of the effect on the work of separate contractors. e. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time, as appropriate. 012000 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012000 — PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES D. Documentation of Contractor Proposals and Claims 1. Support each quotation for a lump -sum proposal, and for each unit price which has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating data to allow Architect to evaluate the quotation. 2. On request provide additional data to support time and cost computations: a. Labor required. b. Equipment required. c. Products required. 1) Recommended source of purchase and unit cost. 2) Quantities required. d. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. e. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented. f. Overhead and profit. g. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 3. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time - and - material basis with documentation as required for a lump -sum proposal, plus additional information: a. Name of the Owner's authorized agent who ordered the Work, and date of the order. b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. c. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid. d. Receipts and invoices for: 1) Equipment used, listing dates and times of use. 2) Products used, listing of quantities. 3) Subcontracts. 4. Illegible documentation will be considered cause for rejection. 5. Document requests for substitutions for products as specified in Section 016000. E. Changes in the Work 1. A Clarification which will have no impact on the project price will be issued by the Architect under Architect's Supplemental Instructions. 2. Change Orders a. The Contractor shall prepare each Change Order on AIA Document G701 incorporating previously approved Proposal Requests and Construction Change Directives. b. Change Orders shall describe changes in the work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change. c. Change Orders shall provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract Sum and in the Contract Time. d. Content of Change Orders shall be based on, either: 1) Proposal Requests and Contractor's responsive cost proposal as agreed between Owner and Contractor. 2) Contractor Proposal for a change, as recommended by Architect and approved by the Owner. e. Owner and Architect will sign and date each Change Order as authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes. f. To indicate agreement with the terms therein, Contractor shall sign and date the Change Order. F. Correlation With Contractor's Submittals 1. Periodically revise Schedule of Values and Request for Payment forms to record each change as a separate item of work, and to record the adjusted Contract Sum. 2. Periodically revise the Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time, and revise sub - schedules to show changes for other items of work affected by the changes. 3. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in Record Documents. PART 2- PRODUCTS Not Applicable 012000 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012000 — PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 012000 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012200 — UNIT PRICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Identification and description of Unit Prices. B. Related Specification Sections and Other Documents: 1. General Conditions: Procedures for changes in the work. 2. Section 012000 - Price and Payment Procedures: Change Orders. 3. Sections of Specifications identified in each Unit Price description. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unit prices will be exercised at the option of Owner. B. Prices stated for each unit price shall include all costs for the construction covered by the unit price including overhead and profit. C. Unit prices shall be valid for the duration of the Contract. D. The Construction indicated on the drawings constitutes the Basic Bid Work. Amounts stated for unit prices constitutes the amounts to be added or subtracted to the Contract Price for changing the Basic Bid Work. 1.3 UNIT PRICE DESCRIPTIONS A. General: State the unit price for adding and /or subtracting the unit price item, as applicable, based on the units of measure and the estimated quantities required. NO. 1 - SELF - LEVELING CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT a. Item: Self- leveling underlayment, as specified in Section 035416 — Hydraulic Cement Underlayment, as necessary to correct slab level suitable for subsequent installation of tile as specified in Section 093000 and other similar finishes. b. Unit price shall not include trowelable underlayments as indicated on the Drawings to achieve ramps or pitches to drain. c. Unit price shall include slab preparation as necessary for bond of underlayment, but shall not include removal of existing finishes, grinding to remove high areas, or removal of adhesives, residues, and other materials to be removed as part of demolition work. d. Unit of Measure: Per square foot for an average of 1/4 inch of underlayment thickness. e. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a minimum of 25,000 square feet of underlayment. NO. 2 - FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION a. Item: Installation of floor tile, including coordination, mobilization, materials handling, slab preparation, mortar materials and installation, tile setting, grout and grout installation, curing, and protection, all in accordance with Section 093000. Unit price shall not include screeds, or cutting b. Unit of Measure: Per square foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 500 square feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 3 - GROUT RELEASE a. Item: Grout release agent applied to installed tile prior to grouting, to prevent grout staining of stone tiles, as specified in Section 093000. b. Unit of Measure: Per square foot c. Base unit prices on a minimum of 500 square feet. 012200 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012200 — UNIT PRICES NO. 4 - ADDITIONAL CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE a. Item: Provide additional crack isolation membrane over cracks in concrete floors to receive tile at locations determined by Architect and as specified in Section 093000. b. Unit of Measure: Per square foot. NO. 5 - MOISTURE BARRIER UNDER WOOD FLOORING a. Item: Provide moisture barrier over concrete to receive wood flooring when warranted by vapor emission testing, at locations determined by Architect, and as specified in Section 096429. b. Unit of Measure: Per square foot. NO. 6 - CARPETED BASE a. Item: Installation of carpet base, 5 inches high to casework kicks, as specified in Section 096800. The unit price shall include all cutting, adhesives, and coordination work. b. Unit of Measure: Per lineal foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base price on a quantity of approximately 1000 lineal feet of carpet base. NO. 7 - WOOD VENEER -FACED DOORS a. Item: Wood Veneer -Faced Doors, as specified in Section 081400. The unit prices shall include - only the cost of the flush door itself. b. Unit of Measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on quantity of wood and plastic laminate flush doors indicated on the door schedule. NO. 8 - PLASTIC LAMINATE -FACED DOORS a. Item: Plastic Laminate -Faced Doors, as specified in Section 081400. The unit prices shall include only the cost of the flush door itself. b. Unit of Measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on quantity of wood and plastic laminate flush doors indicated on the door schedule. NO. 9 - ACCESS DOORS a. Item: Access doors, as specified in Section 083100. The unit prices shall include all support framing, installation, finishing with adjacent finish materials, and painting as specified in Section 099000. b. Unit of Measure: Per each. A: Fire rated interior wall access door, 12" x 12" size. Al: Fire rated interior wall access door, 22" x 22" size • B: Non -rated wall access door, 12" x 12" size. B1: Non -rated wall access door, 22" x 22" size. _ C: Non -rated drywall ceiling access door, 12" x 12" size. C1: Non -rated drywall ceiling access door, 22" x 22" size. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on quantity of one of each type of access door more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 10 - SCREENING FILM AT FLUSH DOORS WITH VISION LITES • a. Item: Provide screening film at flush doors with vision panels as specified in Section 088000 with locations as indicated on the Door Schedule. b. Unit of Measure: Per flush door vision panel. _ c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base price on providing screening film at 6 additional vision panels with location as directed by Owner or Architect. 012200 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012200 — UNIT PRICES NO. 11 - PAINT PARTITION a. Item: Painting of interior wall surfaces. b. Unit of measure: Per square foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 500 square feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 12 - PAINT LIGHT COVE a. Item: Painting of sales floor light cove (inside and out). b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 100 lineal feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 13 - PAINT DOOR FRAME a. Item: Painting of new or existing doorframes. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 10 units more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 14 - PAINT CASED OPENINGS a. Item: Refinishing of new or existing cased openings. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 10 units more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 15 - STAINLESS STEEL GUARDS FOR WOOD DOOR FRAMES a. Item: Provide 9 -inch, 22 gage stainless steel for the protection of wood door frames as described in Section 055016. b. Unit of measure: Per door opening (1 pair). c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on approximately 100 openings with a potential for 20 more or less. NO. 16 - INSTALL NEW WALL COVERING a. Item: Installation of Owner - provided wall covering, including wall surface preparation. b. Unit of measure: Per square foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 500 square feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 17 - SEALER FOR STONE FLOOR TILE a. Item: Provide sealer for stone floor tile. b. Unit of measure: Per square foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 500 square feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 18 - INSTALL CARPET a. Item: Install Owner - provided carpet, pad and accessories. b. Unit of measure: Per square yard. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 500 square yards more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 19 - INSTALL CARPET BORDER a. Item: Install Owner - provided border - carpet, pad and accessories. b. Unit of measure: Per square foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 500 square feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. 012200 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012200 — UNIT PRICES NO. 20 - PROVIDE RESILIENT BASE a. Item: Provide resilient base. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 100 lineal feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 21 - RAMPING OR TAPERED UNDERLAYMENT a. Item: Provide ramping or tapered underlayment, include substrate preparation. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 100 lineal feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 22 - MASONITE FLOOR PROTECTION a. Item: Masonite floor protection, including taping of butt-ends and daily tear -down & set -up. b. Unit of measure: Per square foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 500 square feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 23 - STONE BASE a. Item: Installation of stone base. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 100 lineal feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 24 - LIGHT COVE BAFFLE a. Item: Installation of sheet metal angle in light cove to block view of the fixture as indicated in detail J1 /A -807. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit price on a possible range of 100 to 300 lineal feet of installed baffle. NO. 25 - UNFRAMED MIRRORS a. Item: Provide mirrors at locations indicated on the Owner - provided "Mirror Location Plan" and as described in Section 088323 — Unframed Glass Mirrors. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit price on a quantity of 150 mirrors. NO. 26 - PATCHING OF EXISTING DRYWALL a. Item: Perform patching and repair of existing drywall walls and ceilings as described in Section 092900. b. Unit of Measure: Per square foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on approximately 5,000 square feet. NO. 27 - REMOVAUREPLACEMENT OF ACT a. Item: Replacement of acoustical ceiling tile. b. Unit of measure: Per square foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on 250 tiles more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 28 - PAINT ACT a. Item: Painting of acoustical ceiling tile. b. Unit of measure: Per square foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on 250 tiles more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. 012200 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012200 — UNIT PRICES NO. 29 - REMOVE /REPLACE WALL COVERING a. Item: Removal, disposal and subsequent replacement of wall coverings. b. Unit of measure: Per square foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 500 square feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 30 - SAWCUT CONCRETE SLAB / TRENCHING a. Item: Trenching and Sawcutting existing concrete slab. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on 100 lineal feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 31 - MODIFY GWB CEILINGS FOR LIGHTING AND OTHER DEVICES a. Item: Prepare for Installation of new light track, downlights, speakers, cameras, etc. into existing GWB ceilings. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on installation of 25 fixtures more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 32 - MODIFY GWB CEILINGS/WALLS FOR DISPLAY HOOKS a. Item: Prepare for Installation of new display hooks into existing GWB ceilings and walls. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on installation of 25 units more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 33 - ADDITIONAL RETURN AIR GRILLES a. Item: Installation of new return air grilles into existing GWB ceilings. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on installation of 25 units more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 34 - CONCRETE INFILL OF SLAB TRENCHES a. Item: Concrete infill of trenches sawcut into existing concrete slabs. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on 100 lineal feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 35 - INSTALL DISPLAY HOOKS IN A.C.T. CEILINGS a. Item: Prepare for and install new display hooks into ACT ceilings. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on installation of 25 units more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 36 - METAL SCREED WITH UNDERCUTTING a. Item: Provide metal screed at existing tile. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 100 lineal feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 37 - REMOVE AND CART PARTITIONS a. Item: Demo and dispose of partitions. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 100 lineal feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. 012200 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012200 — UNIT PRICES NO. 38 - REMOVE AND CART CEILING, SOFFITS, FASCIAS a. Item: Demo and dispose of ceiling, soffits, fascias. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 100 lineal feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 39 - REMOVE AND CART LIGHT COVES a. Item: Demo and dispose of light coves. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 100 lineal feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 40 - REMOVE AND CART WALL FINISHES, MIRRORS a. Item: Demo and dispose of wall finishes, mirrors. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 100 lineal feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO.41 - REMOVE AND CART DOORS, FRAMES, CASED OPENINGS a. Item: Demo and dispose of doors, frames, cased openings. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 10 -20 units more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 42 - REMOVE AND CART STONE TILE a. Item: Demo and dispose of stone tile. b. Unit of measure: Per square foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 500 square feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 43 - REMOVE AND CART CARPET a. Item: Demo and dispose of carpet. b. Unit of measure: Per square foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 1000 square feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 44 - REMOVE AND CART CASEWORK, CASHWRAPS a. Item: Demo and dispose of casework and cashwraps. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 100 lineal feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 45 - REMOVE AND CART FITTING ROOMS a. Item: Demo and dispose of fitting room partitions, doors and casework. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 100 lineal feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 46 - SCARIFY SLAB AFTER STONE TILE REMOVAL a. Item: Scarify slab after stone tile removal, in preparation for installation of new finishes . b. Unit of measure: Per square foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 500 square feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. 012200 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012200 — UNIT PRICES NO. 47 - SCARIFY SLAB AFTER CARPET REMOVAL a. Item: Scarify slab after carpet & pad removal, in preparation for installation of new finishes. b. Unit of measure: Per square foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 1000 square feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 48 - DISCONNECT & REMOVE PLUMBING PIPE a. Item: Disconnect & remove plumbing pipe. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 100 lineal feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 49 - FLUORESCENT LAY -IN FIXTURE a. Item: Owner furnished Fluorescent Fixture Contractor installed in an acoustical ceiling or gypsum board ceiling, including all supports, terminations and other items as noted on the fixture schedule. b. Base prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. c. Unit of Measure: Per each. NO. 50 - DOWNLIGHT FIXTURE a. Item: Owner furnished recessed downlight Fixture Contractor installed in an acoustical or gypsum board ceiling connected to a lighting junction box, including all supports, terminations and other items as noted on the fixture schedule. b. Unit of Measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 51 - FLUORESCENT CHAIN HUNG FIXTURE a. Item: Owner furnished Fluorescent Fixture Contractor installed at 12 feet A.F.F., chain suspension attached to structure connected to a lighting junction box, including all supports, terminations and other items as noted on the fixture schedule. b. Unit of Measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 52 - EXIT LIGHT FIXTURE a. Item: Contractor furnished Exit light fixture Contractor installed on an acoustical or gypsum board ceiling including all supports and terminations. b. Unit of Measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% items more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 53 - FLUORESCENT COVE FIXTURE a. Item: Owner furnished Fluorescent Cove Fixture Contractor installed in a typical light cove, including all supports, terminations and other items as noted on the fixture schedule. b. Unit of Measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 54 - SURFACE LIGHT TRACK a. Item: Owner furnished 8 foot long section of surface light track. Contractor installed on a grid ceiling or gypsum board ceiling, connected to a lighting junction box including all supports, terminations. b. Unit of Measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 1% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. 012200 -7 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012200 — UNIT PRICES NO. 55 - LIGHT SWITCH a. Item: Light switch installed in a gypsum board and metal stud wall, including all terminations. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 56 - DUPLEX RECEPTACLE a. Item: Hubbell 5262 in a 4 sq. box installed in a gypsum board and metal stud wall, single gang mud ring including all terminations. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 57 - FOURPLEX RECEPTACLE a. Item: Two Hubbell 5262 in a 4 sq. box installed in a gypsum board and metal stud wall, single gang mud ring including all terminations. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 58 - FLUSH FLOOR BOX — SINGLE SERVICE a. Item: Floor box and coverplate, installed in a metal deck or concrete slab with threadless couplings included. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. • NO. 59 - FLUSH FLOOR BOX WITH RECEPTACLE a. Item: Duplex 20A receptacle in a floor box with cover plate installed in a metal deck or concrete slab including all terminations. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 60 - FLUSH FLOOR BOX — DUAL SERVICE a. Item: Floor box and coverplate, installed in a concrete slab with all terminations. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 61 - FLUSH THREE GANG FLOOR BOX a. Item: Floor box and coverplate, installed in a concrete slab with all terminations. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 62 - POKE -THRU DEVICE a. Item: Concealed below casework — Hardwired connections installed including core drill and all terminations. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. 012200 -8 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012200 — UNIT PRICES NO. 63 - MC CABLE 3 #12 THWN a. Item: Type MC cable with 3 #12 THWN, supported to structure. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the Basic Bid quantities indicated. NO. 64 - MC CABLE 4 #12 THWN a. Item: Type MC cable with 4 #12 THWN, supported to structure. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the Basic Bid quantities indicated. NO. 65 - MC CABLE 3 #10 THWN a. Item: Type MC cable with 3 #10 THWN, supported to structure. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the Basic Bid quantities indicated. NO. 66 - MC CABLE 4 #10 THWN a. Item: Type MC cable with 4 #10 THWN, supported to structure. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the Basic Bid quantities indicated. NO. 67 - 1/2 INCH EMT a. Item: 1/2 inch EMT with threadless connectors supported to structure. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 68 - 3/4 INCH EMT a. Item: 3/4 inch EMT with threadless connectors supported to structure. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 69 - #12 COPPER WIRE a. Item: #12 THW copper wire, installed in conduit (conduit is separate unit cost). b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 70 - #10 COPPER WIRE a. Item: #10 THW copper wire, installed in conduit (conduit is separate unit cost). b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 71 - 30A, 8 POLE LIGHTING CONTACTOR a. Item: Mechanical Contractor furnished 30A, 8 pole mechanically held lighting contactor. Contractor installed in a panel group and connected to eight branch circuits and the EMCS. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. 012200 -9 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012200 — UNIT PRICES NO. 72 - 1/2" EMT AND TWO GANG BOX a. Item: 10' -0" of 1/2 inch EMT, and 4 square J -box with single gang mud ring for a low voltage device. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 73 - ADDITIONAL CATEGORY 5E DATA CABLE AND DATA OUTLET a. Item: Outlet, terminations and Category 5e cable supported to structure. b. Unit of measure: Per 295 foot drop. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 74 - ADDITIONAL FTV SECURITY CAMERA CABLE a. Item: FTV coax and power cable supported to structure and terminations. b. Unit of measure: Per 300 foot drop. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 75 - ADDITIONAL PTZ SECURITY CAMERA CABLE a. Item: PTZ composite cable supported to structure and terminations. b. Unit of measure: Per 300 foot drop. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5% more than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 76 - PENDANT LIGHTING FIXTURES a. Item: Owner furnished pendant luminaire. Contractor installed in an acoustical or gypsum board ceiling connected to a lighting junction box, and other items as noted drawings or on the fixture schedule. Junction box shall be supported from building structure. b. Unit of Measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 50 items more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 77 - ADDITIONAL SINGLE GANG PLASTER RING AND PULL STRING a. Item: Single gang plaster ring for a low voltage device installed in a non - insulated stud wall at an average height of 18 inches A.F.F. b. Unit of measure: Each c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 5 more than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 78 - DATA COMMUNICATIONS SPECIAL STORE OPENING SERVICES a. Item: Special store opening services, as specified in Section 270000 - Communications. b. Unit of Measure: Per hour. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 8 hours more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. 012200 -10 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012200 — UNIT PRICES NO. 79 - CAST IRON NO -HUB PIPING - ABOVE GRADE a. Item: No -hub piping, with hangers and insulation as specified, installed at an average height of 15 ft. A.F.F. for the following sizes: 2 ", 3 ", 4 ", 6 ", 8 ", 10 ", 12 ". Include one coupling and one elbow (including insulation) for each twenty lineal feet of piping. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 200 feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 80 - CAST IRON HUB AND SPIGOT PIPING WITH RUBBER GASKETS - BELOW GRADE a. Item: Hub and spigot piping with 2 coats of Hi -Mil Sher tar as specified, installed at an average depth of 3 ft. below finished floor for the following sizes: 2 ", 3 ", 4 ", 6 ", 8 ". Include one coupling and one elbow (including insulation) for each twenty lineal feet of piping. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 200 feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 81 - TYPE "L" COPPER PIPING a. Item: Type "L" copper piping, including hangers and insulation (based on exposed applications)as specified, installed at an average height of 15 ft. A.F.F. for the following sizes: 1/2 ", 3/4 ", 1 ", 1 -1/2 ", 2 ", 2 -1/2 ", 3 ", and 4 ". Include one coupling and one elbow (including insulation) for each twenty lineal feet of piping. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 200 feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 82 - NATURAL GAS PIPING - ABOVE GRADE a. Item: Natural gas piping with hangers and bracing as specified, installed at an average height of 15 ft. A.F.F. for the following sizes: 1/2 ", 3/4 ", 1 ", 1 -1/4 ", 1 -1/2 ", 2 ", 2 -1/2 ", and 3 ". b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 200 feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 83 - BLACK STEEL PIPING (STEAM and STEAM CONDENSATE SERVICE) a. Item: Black steel steam and steam condensate piping with hangers, bracing and insulation as specified, installed at an average height of 10 ft. A.F.F. for the following sizes: 1/2 ", 3/4 ", 1 ", 1- 1/2", and 2 ". Include one coupling and one elbow (including insulation) for each twenty lineal feet of piping. b. Unit of measure: Per foot. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 200 feet more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 84 - 1 INCH CORE DRILL a. Item: 1 inch diameter core drill through structural flooring consisting of metal deck and 4 inch concrete topping. b. Unit of measure: Per each c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 50 items more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 85 - CORE DRILL - VARIOUS SIZES a. Item: Core drill through structural flooring consisting of metal deck and 4 inch concrete topping (top of slab to lower flute), for each of the following diameters: 2 ", 3 ", 4 ", 6 ", 8 ", and 10 ". b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 20 items more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. 012200 -11 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012200 — UNIT PRICES NO. 86 - CARRIER AND ROUGH -IN a. Item: Carrier and rough -in plumbing for restroom fixtures, installed, as specified. A: For Fixture P -1 Water Closet. B: For Fixture P -3A Wall Mount Lavatory. b. Unit of Measure: Per each. NO. 87 - FLOOR DRAIN /SINK a. Item: Floor drain or floor sink installed in tile floor, including trap primer, as specified, and associated waterproof membrane and tile work, as specified in Section 093000 - Tiling. A: Floor drain FD -1, including core drill. B: Floor sink FS -1, including concrete cutting and patching. b. Unit of Measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of price. Base unit prices on addition of one floor drain and one floor sink. NO. 88 - WALL HYDRANT a. Item: Wall Hydrant WH -2, as specified, installed, including thirty feet of piping, with associated couplings and insulation, mounting hardware, sealing of penetration, and modifications to adjacent construction. b. Unit of Measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of price. Base unit prices on addition of one wall hydrant. NO. 89 - NEW WATER CLOSET a. Item: Provide new water closet. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 10 units more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 90 - NEW LAVATORY a. Item: Provide new lavatory. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 10 units more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 91 - NEW UNRINAL a. Item: Provide new urinal. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 10 units more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 92 - NEW MOP /SERVICE SINK a. Item: Provide new mop sink or service sink. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 1 -5 units more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. NO. 93 - NEW WATER COOLER a. Item: Provide new water cooler. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 1 -5 units more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. 012200 -12 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012200 — UNIT PRICES NO. 94 - FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER HEAD DESIGN a. Item: Design or redesign of a portion of the sprinkler system, as described in Section 210000, whether or not such design is implemented. b. Unit of Measure: Per each sprinkler head. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit price on system design involving configuration of a single sprinkler head. NO. 95 - FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER HEAD INSTALLATION a. Item: Addition of a sprinkler head, as specified in Section 210000; include sprinkler head and accessories, hangers, branch piping to main sprinkler line, coordination, and installation in ceilings, as applicable. b. Unit of Measure: Per each sprinkler head. A: Recessed type in gypsum board ceiling. B: Recessed type in suspended acoustic ceiling. C: Upright type in areas with no finished ceiling. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on addition of 6 sprinkler heads. NO. 96 - FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER HEAD RELOCATION a. Item: Relocation of a sprinkler head, as specified in Section 210000. The unit prices shall include removal of sprinkler head, reconfiguration of associated branch line, patching of existing finishes, coordination, and reinstallation in ceilings, as applicable. b. Unit of Measure: Per each sprinkler head. A: In gypsum board ceiling. B: In suspended acoustic ceiling. C: In areas with no finished ceiling. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on relocation of 6 sprinkler heads, not more than 24 inches from original installation; for relocation in an acoustic ceiling, include replacement of one ceiling tile in unit price; base prices on relocation in ceilings prior to painting. NO. 97 - FIRE HOSE CONNECTION a. Item: Relocation of existing or installation of new fire hose connection. b. Unit of measure: Per each. c. Basis for Determination of Price: Base unit prices on a maximum of 2 -5 units more or less than the basic bid quantities indicated. PART 2- PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 012200 -13 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 012300 — ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Identification and description of Alternate work. . B. Related Sections: 1. Owner - Contractor Agreement: Alternates accepted by Owner for incorporation into the Work. 2. Sections of Specifications identified in each Alternate. C. This Section supplements the General Conditions. 1.2 PROCEDURES A. Alternates will be exercised at the option of Owner. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required to complete the Work, including changes under each Alternate, when acceptance is designated in Owner- Contractor Agreement. 1.3 ALTERNATE DESCRIPTIONS A. ALTERNATE NO. 1 — RECYCLING OF CONSTRUCTION WASTE 1. Under Base Bid: Provide the standard waste removal services and coordination with the Owner's waste management service as specified in Section 015000. 2. Under Alternate No. 1: Coordinate recycling of construction waste with the Owner's waste management service, as described in Section 015000. B. ALTERNATE NO. 2 — CARPET RECLAMATION 1. Under Base Bid: Dispose of existing, used carpet, and new carpet waste in accordance with local jurisdictional requirements. 2. Under Alternate No. 2: Reclaim existing, used carpet, and new carpet waste, as described in Section 013546. C. ALTERNATE NO. 3 — FLEX DROPS FOR SPRINKLER HEADS 1. Under Base Bid: Provide the standard hard connection to sprinkler heads as specified in Section 210000. 2. Under Alternate No. 3: Provide a flexible arm -over drop to sprinkler heads as needed to reach the center of a ceiling tile or other similar location, as described in Section 210000. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 012300 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 013119 — PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Meeting requirements. 1.2 GENERAL MEETING REQUIREMENTS A. Make physical arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for all participants, and preside at meetings B. Unless otherwise required, notify the participants a minimum of fourteen calendar days prior to each scheduled meeting. Submit the proposed agenda to the participants a minimum of 5 calendar days prior to the meeting date. C. All representatives attending meetings shall be authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. D. Architect will attend meetings to ascertain the work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules. E. It shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to take minutes at all progress meetings and pre - installation conferences. Within three days after each meeting, copy and distribute minutes to all attendees and to other parties, as appropriate 1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Contractor shall schedule and administer a general pre- construction meeting within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed at a central site, convenient for all parties, designated by Contractor. B. Require the following parties in attendance: 1. Owner's Representative. 2. Architect. 3. Architect's professional consultants, as appropriate. 4. Resident project representative. 5. Contractor's superintendent. 6. Major subcontractors (including installers who will actually perform the work). 7. Major suppliers. 8. Others as appropriate. C. Suggested Agenda: 1. Introduction and identification of major subcontractors and suppliers. 2. Projected Construction Schedules and critical work sequencing. 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 4. Project coordination, including designation of responsible personnel, their authority and limitations, order of communications. 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions. b. Proposal requests. c. Contractor initiated change requests. d. Change Orders. e. Applications for Payment. 6. Method of distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents. 8. Use of premises; project office, work and storage areas; Owner's use of premises. 9. Locations of temporary utilities. 10. Safety, first -aid, and security procedures. 11. Procedures for fire protection during construction. 12. Housekeeping procedures. 13. Site visits and job meeting procedures, timing, inspections, and attendance requirements. 14. Schedule of pre - installation meetings. 013119 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 013119 — PROJECT MEETINGS 15. Shop drawing submittal and checking procedures, timing, copies required, format, and substitution policy. 16. Mock -up scheduling requirements. 17. Access panel locations. 18. Transformer locations and clearance requirements, including effect on stock shelving locations, as applicable. 1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer regular meetings twice monthly, unless otherwise mutually agreed to. 1. Require the following in attendance: a. Contractor. b. Architect's professional as appropriate. c. Subcontractors and suppliers as appropriate. 2. The Owner's representative and /or the Architect will attend progress meetings approximately monthly, at their discretion. B. Meeting Location: General Contractor's field office, unless approved otherwise. C. Suggested Agenda: 1. Review work progress since previous meeting. 2. Discuss field observations, problems, conflicts, problems which impede Construction Schedule. 3. Review off -site fabrication, delivery schedules. 4. Discuss corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 5. Update Construction Schedule and schedule of pre - installation meetings, if appropriate. 6. Review progress, schedule, during succeeding work period. 7. Coordinate schedules. 8. Review submittal schedules. 9. Maintenance of quality standards. 10. Discuss pending changes and substitutions. 11. Review proposed changes for effect on: a. Construction Schedule. b. Completion date. c. Other Contracts of the Project. 12. Allow time for other business. 1.5 BUILDING ENVELOPE CONFERENCE A. Schedule and administer a "building envelope" pre - installation conference a minimum of 7 calendar days prior to commencement of installation of exterior cladding system components. B. Meeting Location: General Contractor's field office. C. Require in attendance the following parties: 1. Owner's representative. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor's superintendent. 4. Authorized representative and actual installers of the Subcontractor for each of the following components: a. Exterior sealants. b. Roofing repairs /replacement. D. Suggested Agenda: 1. Review sealing and flashing systems. 2. Review testing and inspection procedures. 3. Other items of concern as appropriate. 1.6 PRE - INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Where required in a specification Section, schedule and administer a pre - installation conference prior to commencing work of the Section. 013119 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 013119 — PROJECT MEETINGS B. Unless otherwise required, notify the Owner and the Architect a minimum of seven calendar days prior to each scheduled meeting. C. Require the attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by, the work of the Section. D. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related work. END OF SECTION 013119 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 013300 — SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submittal form criteria. 2. Submittal schedule. 3. Contractor responsibilities. 4. Pre - approved submittals. 5. Submittals required prior to starting construction. 6. Submittals required during construction. 7. Submittals required on completion of construction. 1.2 SUBMITTAL FORM CRITERIA A. Provide the following, as applicable, on each submittal: 1. Present and previous submissions dates. 2. The Project title and number. 3. Contract identification. 4. The names of: a. Contractor. b. Supplier. c. Manufacturer. 5. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. 6. A blank space for Contractor and Architect stamps. 1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Make submittals to the Architect as specified, and as required to cause no delay in the work. B. Allow 14 days from receipt, for the Architect to review each submittal. C. Schedule submittals to allow sufficient time for possible revision and resubmittal of the rejected submittals, without interfering with construction schedule. 1.4 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals prior to submission. Verify specified requirements of products, field measurements, and field construction requirements. B. Stamp and sign each submittal as certification that ghthe submittal has been reviewed by the Contractor. C. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. D. Notify the Architect in writing, at time of submission, of any deviations in the submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Make copies of all approved shop drawings and product literature available for use in the project. 1.5 PRE - APPROVED SUBMITTALS A. The Architect will provide a CD ROM containing product data information and an index of all included products. B. Notify the Project Architect via transmittal or email confirming your use of each pre- approved item. 1. Include model numbers and other pertinent information that identifies the item accurately. 2. Use the Nordstrom standard submittal numbering system when confirming use of the pre - approved product, for tracking purposes. C. If the project manual calls for a product data submittal and the manufacturer or product selected for this project is not available on the CD, then said submittal is required and standard submittal procedures must be followed. 013300 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 013300 — SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES D. The Contractor is not relieved from providing information required for samples, shop drawings, record drawings, O &M manuals, guarantees and warrantees. Product information from the CD ROM, while waived from the product data submittal, must be included in the O &M manual as appropriate, when required. 1.6 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED PRIOR TO STARTING CONSTRUCTION A. Immediately following Contract signing and prior to starting construction submit the following: 1. All certificates of insurance required in the Contract Conditions indicating the extent of coverage. 2. Schedule of Values: Itemized construction contract cost breakdown showing cost per Contract section and total Contract cost in a form acceptable to the Owner. 3. List of subcontractors and suppliers proposed for the principal work parts; include addresses, phone numbers, and name of office contact person. 4. Construction schedule. B. Construction Schedule: 1. Submit schedule showing commencement and completion dates proposed for each subdivision of work. 2. Prepare schedule in the form of a bar graph or a network planning system (CPM) for scheduling and controlling the work. 3. Coordinate with the Owner's schedule, showing all Contract activities of work including their start, duration, completion, float and critical path. 4. Update and submit monthly, reflecting actual start and completion of all scheduled activities. 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Certifications: As required in each specification section. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings required by individual Sections of the Specifications, and as otherwise required for proper performance of the work. 2. Illustrate fully the requirements of the Specifications and the Contract Drawings, and accurately show quantities, kinds of materials, methods of assembly, and all data required for fabrication, erection, and installation. 3. Show the relationship of adjoining work, relevant field conditions and dimensions; coordinate with affected subcontractors and suppliers if in conflict. Where specific items such as field dimensions, clearances, adjacent construction, mounting configurations, access requirements, structural calculations, etc. are required by the technical specification Sections, failure to provide such information on the shop drawings may be cause for rejection without review. 4. Submit to the Architect three copies of drawings for review. 5. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for conformance to the design concept, only. 6. The Architect will return the one copy to Contractor with corrections, notations and Architect's stamp indicating action to be taken. 7. In the case of rejected Shop Drawings, the Architect will keep a copy and return a copy to the Contractor for his use in the preparation of revised drawings for resubmittal. 8. Should discrepancies become evident, immediately notify Architect for resolution before proceeding with shop work. 9. CADD generated drawings may be obtained from the Architect only for use in preparation of shop drawings for this Project. a. Release of CADD information will be restricted to the following categories: 1) Structural Framing Plans. 2) Architectural floor plans. 3) Site plan. 4) Exterior elevations. 5) RCP's /Roof Plan. 6) Low - voltage system electrical drawings including: Sound, security, fire alarm, and telecommunications plans. b. The CADD drawings will contain only the background information; reference symbols, and other similar data will not be included. 013300 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 013300 — SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES c. The CADD files are generated on PC hardware with Microstation software. Architect has the capability to develop CADD output of the following file formats: 1) MicroStation (.dgn) 2) AutoCAD (.dwg) 3) Drawing Interchange Format (.dxf) d. When requesting CADD drawings, specify the output form required. e. Request documents by submitting an executed copy of the "Request for Transfer of Documents." Example of the form bound in this manual following this Section. Use of such documents implies Contractor's and subcontractors' agreement to the terms described on the form. Fully describe requirements for each request. f. Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for CADD drawings, $200.00 per request of all or any categories listed above. g. Contractor shall maintain a log of requests and shall submit the final log for review at Project Closeout. C. Product Data: 1. Preparation: a. Clearly mark all copies to identify pertinent products or models. b. Show performance characteristics and capacities. c. Show dimensions and clearances required. d. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. e. Identify product with specification section. 2. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: a. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is not applicable to the work. b. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the work. 3. Number of copies: Four unless otherwise required, of which three sets will be returned to the Contractor; two to be maintained at the site and one set to be forwarded to the subcontractor or • supplier for his use. The Architect will retain one record set in the Architect's office. D. Samples: 1. Where color, texture, or pattern is not specified, or is specified to be selected by the Architect, submit full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect's selection. 2. Unless otherwise required, submit three of each required sample of each item proposed for the work. 3. Include product identification, including manufacturer and model number, finish, if applicable, and specification Section number, attached to each sample; note applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. 1.8 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED ON COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION A. Requirements of Section 017700 - Closeout Procedures END OF SECTION • 013300 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 013546 — CARPET RECLAMATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Procedures for removal and reclamation of waste carpet. B. Related Sections: 1. 012300 - Alternates: Descriptions of Alternates. 2. 024119 - Selective Structure Demolition: Procedures for general demolition. 3. 096800 - Carpeting: Floor Preparation and Carpet Installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed dust - control measures. B. Proposed packing and transportation measures. C. Schedule of carpet reclamation activities indicating the following: 1. Detailed sequence of removal work. 2. Inventory of items to be removed and recycled. D. Reclamation agency records indicating receipt and disposition of used carpet. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reclamation Agency: Firm providing used carpet recycling under the INVISTATM Reclamation Program, or approved equivalent. B. Carpet Remover: Firm providing carpet removal services for recycling purposes. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing regulations. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Certification: 1. Reclamation Agency and Carpet Remover shall certify in writing that used carpet was removed and recycled in accordance with this Specification. 2. Record off -site removal of debris and materials and provide, to the Architect, the following information regarding the removed materials: a. Time and Date of Removal. b. Type of Material. • c. Weight and Quantity of Materials. d. Final Destination of Materials. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Obtain approval of Owner before performing operations that generate contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET RECLAMATION AGENCY A. Invista Reclamation Program, Invista Inc.; Contact: Julia Gutt (206/409- 3491). B. Interface ReEntry Program, Interface Inc., Atlanta, GA; (800/336- 0225). 2.2 CARPET REMOVERS A. As approved by the Reclamation Agency. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Adhesive Removal Solvents: Comply with Carpet and Rug Institute Publication 104. B. Used Carpet: Maintain possession of removed used carpet. Immediately remove from Site and place in container or trailer. 013546 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 013546 — CARPET RECLAMATION C. Carefully remove, store, and protect designated materials and equipment for re- installation under other Sections or to be retained by Owner. D. Carpet Pad: Provide recycling of carpet padding where locally available or as designated by Reclamation Agency. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed, and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, and maintain barricades, lighting, and guardrails as required to protect general public, workers, and adjoining property. B. Vacuum used carpet before removal. 3.3 CARPET REMOVAL A. Remove used carpet in large pieces, roll tightly, and pack neatly in container. Include carpet scrap and waste from subsequent, new installation. B. Deposit only clean, dry used carpets in containers. Clean shall be defined as carpet free from demolition debris or asbestos contamination, garbage, and tack strips. C. Remove adhesive according to recommendations of the Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI). 3.4 CONTAINER DISPOSAL A. Place used carpet in 40 -yd 3 (30.5 m 3) container supplied by reclamation agency. Containers are fully enclosed, front (end) loading. Place only used commercial carpeting in collection container. Container shall be kept locked or supervised. B. Use effective packing techniques to maximize the amount of material in the container. On average, container holds 2000 to 3000 yd 2 (1672 to 2508 m 2). C. Neatly stack carpet tiles or repack in cardboard boxes prior to placing in container. D. When container is full, contact reclamation agency to coordinate pickup and drop -off of replacement container. If container is locked for security purposes, remove the lock prior to pickup. 3.5 TRUCK TRAILER DISPOSAL A. Place used carpet in 53 -foot (16 m) trailer supplied by Reclamation Agency. The same packing techniques should be followed for packing a container. B. Comply with Department of Transportation regulations for weight limits. Typical maximum weight of used carpet on the trailer is 45000 Ibs (24112 kg). C. If packing carpet tiles, do not stack higher than 6 feet (1.8 m). 3.6 INTERIOR OPERATIONS A. Contaminants from work that occurs within a single room may be contained by sealing doors and other openings with duct tape at head, jamb, and sill. B. Use window exhaust systems to establish negative pressure in contaminant - producing work area, ensuring continuous flow of air into work area. Do not open windows in work area except when an exhaust fan is used. Close windows at end of each work shift. C. Seal exhaust system ductwork that might leak into building or mechanical systems. 013546 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 013546 — CARPET RECLAMATION D. Damp mop hard surface floors in work area daily to minimize tracking of contaminants from work area. In carpeted areas, protect carpet with plastic and plywood; provide hard - surfaced area at entrances for daily damp mopping. • END OF SECTION 013546 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General quality control. 2. Workmanship. 3. Special installation procedures. 4. Manufacturer's instructions. 5. Field samples and mock -ups. 6. Manufacturers' field services. 7. Testing laboratory services. 1.2 QUALITY CONTROL, GENERAL A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. 1.3 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. When, in the opinion of the Contractor, materials or procedures are indicated or specified which are contrary to best trade practice for obtaining the desired quality, notify the Architect. C. Unless greater standards are required by the Contract Documents, perform all work by skilled mechanics in accordance with established standards of workmanship in each of the various trades. D. Preparation: Prior to installing any item or material, verify that surfaces to receive such item or material are plumb, level, true -to -line and straight to the degree necessary to achieve tolerances specified or required. E. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. F. Tolerances: Unless indicated otherwise, install all items plumb, level, flat and straight throughout their entire extent, within limits of tolerances specified. Where tolerances are not specified, install all items in accordance with requirements for each application, in compliance with published trade standards and specifications in each industry. G. All blocking necessary for reinforcement of substrates to adequately support items shall be provided whether or not indicated on the Drawings or in the specifications. H. All joints in finish materials shall be tight, straight, even and smooth in appearance. I. All operable items shall operate properly, within manufacturer's specifications. 1.4 SPECIAL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES A. Steel Decking: 1. Where fastening into bottom of steel decking is required, drill or shoot only into lower flutes. 2. Do not use fasteners in steel deck which penetrate more than 1 inch. 3. Do not shoot into steel roof deck. Where anchorage to structural framing members is impractical, supports for items such as suspended ceiling systems, ductwork, and aluminum conduit 1 -1/2 inches or less may be supported from steel roof decking by sheet metal screws, screwed into the bottom of the insulated roof deck, and in sufficient quantity to adequately support the load. Equipment supports, display supports, hangers for mechanical piping and other items requiring more than incidental support, shall not be secured to the roof decking. B. Make no attachment to structural concrete or steel members in the building in such a way as to overload or impair the structural integrity of the member. 014500 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL 1.5 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS A. For each product or material, comply with the respective manufacturer's handling, installation, and start-up instructions in full detail, as applicable, including each step in sequence. Should instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. 1.6 FIELD SAMPLES AND MOCK -UPS A. Provide field samples and mock -ups as specified in the individual specification sections. Provide additional mock -ups, as required by the Architect, until approval is obtained. B. Scheduling: Schedule mock -up construction to allow sufficient lead time for review, and correction if necessary, prior to commencement of fabrication and /or construction, as applicable. Comply with Section 013300 requirements for schedule submittal. C. For each mock -up, provide conditions which will replicate the conditions of the actual installation, including lighting, to the greatest reasonable extent. D. Do not proceed with fabrication until approval of the field sample and mock -up, where applicable, is obtained. E. Approved mock -up or field sample shall be the standard of workmanship and materials for the remainder of the work. F. Maintain mock -up in approved condition, until directed otherwise. G. Unless approved for incorporation into the work, remove mock -up or field sample as directed by Architect. 1.7 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified, require product manufacturer to provide qualified personnel to observe field conditions and quality of workmanship, and to provide recommendations, certifications, and other specified services. B. Representative shall submit written report to Architect listing observations and recommendations. 1.8 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. The Owner may pay for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to inspect and test the Work to verify compliance with the contract documents. B. Reports will be submitted to Architect, giving results and observations of tests, stating compliance or noncompliance with contract documents. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Cooperate with Testing Laboratory personnel, and furnish tools, samples, certifications, test reports, design mixes, equipment, storage, and assistance as requested by the Testing Laboratory. 2. Notify Architect and Testing Laboratory 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing. When tests or inspections cannot be performed, through the fault of the Contractor, reimburse the Owner for the additional costs incurred. 3. Remove and replace all work found not complying with the Contract Documents. Remedies shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents and code requirements. 4. If initial tests and inspections indicate deficient work, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the costs of all subsequent tests and inspections related to the deficiency. 5. All damage which may occur to the work as a result of normal testing operations shall be repaired to match surrounding surfaces. 6. Schedule testing and inspection so that the work of testing and inspection personnel will be as continuous and brief as possible. 014500 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL D. Testing Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. END OF SECTION 014500 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 015000 — TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Requirements for temporary facilities and controls necessary to execute the Work. 1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Temporary facilities and controls shall be in accordance with the requirements of the local jurisdictional code authorities. 1.3 CONTRACTOR DESIGNATED AREAS A. The Owner will provide an area for Contractor's use as field office through all phases of construction. Provide the following accommodations. 1. Minimum 4' x 8' plan table with adequate lighting for the review of drawings. 2. Plan racks for filing drawings. 3. Office furnishings and equipment as necessary for the orderly management of the work. 4. Conference area with table and chairs to accommodate a minimum of twelve people. B. Maintain a current set of Drawings, Specifications, and approved shop drawings incorporating all addenda and all changes and revisions to the Contract, a set of all approved manufacturers' product data, and a set of all approved product samples at the field office. C. The Owner will allocate space on site for the storage of materials. Coordinate storage requirements with the Owner, and furnish additional off -site storage as may be required. D. Equip the Office with the following: 1. Copier: Contractor's preference. 2. Facsimile Machine: Contractor's preference. Connect to public phone lines as required for communication with Architect's office and Contractor's home office. 3. Internet Service: Provide an Internet Service Provider account (ISP) with high- speed, broadband (cable or DSL) and components to facilitate the networking of the computers. 4. Dedicated Line: Provide separate dedicated analog, universal single plug, telephone line for use with DSL service. 5. Computers: PC's with associated printer; two systems required. One printer shall have 11 x 17 inch graphics capability. 6. Windows operating system and Microsoft Office for each computer. 7. Adobe Acrobat Exchange, at least one station for initiating documents. 8. Adobe Acrobat Reader for each computer. (Free software) 9. Document scanner. 1.4 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Electricity, lighting, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, telephone, water, sanitary facilities and fire protection are available on site and will be paid for by Owner. B. All temporary modifications and connections to, and services not provided by, the Owner's existing systems, and required for construction, shall be provided by the Contractor. C. Restroom Facilities: 1. Existing employee restrooms, or public restrooms in the area of work, may be used by construction personnel. 2. The Owner will perform scheduled daily restroom cleaning. The Contractor shall be responsible for additional cleaning required to ensure that restroom facilities are clean for daily store operations. 1.5 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Temporary Clean -Up Facilities: 1. Store plumbing fixtures are not to be used for construction cleanup. 2. Provide temporary service sink on each floor and waste piping to the exterior of the Store, for cleanup of plaster, paint, grout, and other similar clean -up operations. 015000 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 015000 — TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 3. Locate the system as required for the Project, as coordinated with all trades. 4. Provide waste piping to the exterior grade with an indirect connection to sewer via solids interceptor. 5. Temporary sink shall be TUF -TUB Model SF -1 -F by Fiat, or equal. Faucet shall be selected by Contractor as appropriate for the use intended. 6. Upon completion of the Project, remove the temporary system and restore the surfaces to match adjacent conditions. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION AIDS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide construction aids and equipment necessary to facilitate execution of the work. B. Rubber -tired Equipment: All carts, trucks, wheelbarrows and similar wheeled conveyances used in or on any portion of the structure shall be equipped with pneumatic tires unless otherwise expressively authorized by the Architect. C. Unless approved otherwise, the building passenger elevators shall not be used for construction hoisting. The building freight elevator may be used when approved by the Owner. Do not exceed the rated capacity of the elevator. 1.7 SAFETY BARRIERS A. Provide and maintain, all lawful and necessary barricades, railings, flooring, lights, warning signs, signals, and precautions as may be required to safeguard persons from injury. 1.8 SECURITY A. Owner will furnish security program throughout construction period. Coordinate with the Owner's security program. 1.9 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Waste Handling: 1. Initiate and maintain a program to prevent accumulation of debris. 2. Schedule daily collection and disposal of debris to a legal off -site location. 3. Provide additional collections and disposals of debris whenever excessive accumulation occurs. B. Maintain all occupied spaces free of dust and other contaminants prior to daily store opening. Cleaning shall include, without limitation, vacuuming, dusting, stain and dirt removal, and cleaning of glass and merchandise. 1.10 TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Dust Control: Provide all methods, materials, and equipment, including the erection and maintenance of dustproof enclosures, as necessary to prevent migration of dust and contaminants, to other parts of the building. Maintain exiting in accordance with Code and store operation requirements. If directed, remove dust control provisions daily to accommodate store operations. B. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means and facilities required by law to prevent contamination of soil, water or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. C. Smoking, Eating, and Drinking shall be prohibited in all interior spaces. D. Noise: 1. Use of portable sound equipment audible from occupied spaces, shall be prohibited. 2. Performance of nose- producing activities shall be only outside normal store operating hours, except as otherwise approved or directed by the Owner. Performance of "quiet work," which does not require use of power or impact tools will be unrestricted, except as otherwise approved or directed by the Owner. 1.11 TEMPORARY INTERIOR DUST CONTROL ENCLOSURE A. Construct a temporary, isolated work area for tasks that generate dust. Temporary enclosure walls may be constructed of framing materials including metal, wood, and PVC pipe. Walls shall be tape - sealed with one layer of 4 -mil polyethylene sheeting overlapping in alternate layers, affixed to the temporary framework of the enclosure. 015000 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 015000 — TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS B. If floor finishes are present, the floor within the enclosure should be covered with a minimum of one layer of 6 -mil polyethylene sheeting. Each layer should be taped at all edges. C. If ceiling finishes are present, enclosures should be constructed with a ceiling of polyethylene sheeting. D. Provide a "negative pressure system" or "pressure differential system" consisting of a HEPA filtered fan unit to maintain a negative pressure differential between the work area and adjacent areas of the building. Only filtered air may be discharged from the enclosure E. Careful installation, regular inspections, and frequent filter replacement should be performed to ensure the ventilation equipment does not release construction debris into uncontaminated areas of the building. F. The negative pressure systems should continuously operate while work is in progress. Damage and defects in the enclosure system are to be repaired immediately upon discovery. 1.12 TEMPORARY FINISH MATERIALS A. Temporary Interior Partitions: 1. Erect 8 foot high temporary partitions with polyethylene plastic closure to the ceiling to separate public areas from work areas. Provide on a unit price basis as described in Section 012200. 2. Temporary partition shall consist of 3 -5/8 inch metal framing with studs at 24 inches on center, and 5/8 inch thick 4 x 10 ft vinyl faced gypsum board cladding arranged vertically. Vinyl color shall be as selected by the Owner from manufacturer's standard line. 3. Include 6 foot high surface mounted shelf standards at 24 inches on center at vertical framing members. Provide all temporary supports, anchors, and bracing as necessary to hold firmly in position. 4. Artwork, signage, and shelves and support brackets on temporary partition will be the responsibility of the Owner. 5. Removal: Coordinate with Owner. Remove upon completion of new finish work, and as required for tie -in to existing work; delay removal as long as practical. After removal, repair damage to finishes to remain, as necessary. 1.13 OWNER STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. The Owner may procure and maintain a warehouse facility for receipt and offsite storage of materials to be used in construction. Coordinate with the Owner: 1. Owner - furnished merchandising /display fixtures, furnishings, and specialties. 2. Owner- furnished light fixtures. 3. Owner- furnished stone tile and other floor finish materials. 4. Owner - furnished wall coverings. 5. Overage and excess materials returned to the warehouse, as specified. 6. Additional items per mutual agreement between the Owner and the General Contractor. B. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Advise the Owner of general requirements for space and access requirements. 2. Furnish the Owner with preliminary schedule of delivery of Contractor - furnished products to be stored offsite in the Owner's warehouse. 3. Provide the minimum 24 hours notice of each delivery and of each requirement for removal. 4. Inspect deliveries of items furnished under this Contract; maintain responsibility for as- delivered condition of all such items. 5. Cooperate with the Owner with regards to unloading, access and removal. 6. Load and transport materials to the site. 7. Procure (at Owner's expense) replacements for all Contractor - furnished items damaged while under the Owner's control. 8. Notify Owner for identification of surplus materials remaining at the site to be retained at the store; repackage, label, and return all other usable overage materials removed from the Owner's warehouse, but not incorporated into the work. C. Owner's Responsibilities: Receive, catalog, and dispatch items per mutual agreement between the Owner and General Contractor. 015000 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 015000 — TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.14 PROTECTION A. Protect existing and new construction from damage caused by construction operations; provide protective covering to protect surfaces, as applicable. 1.15 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required, and when they interfere with store operation. B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities. C. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to original condition, unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 015000 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 016000 — PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: General requirements for products. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Products include materials, equipment, and systems. B. Products employed for construction purposes, such as temporary lighting fixtures, lamps, piping or wiring shall not be permanently installed in the Work. C. Products shall be of the size, make, type and quality specified, unless approved otherwise. D. All products that are similar in configuration and application shall be the same model, type and style for the same use throughout the project. This requirement applies to products furnished under one, or several sections of the Specifications. E. Product Options: 1. For products specified only by reference standard, provide a product meeting that standard. 2. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers with condition "no substitution," provide one of the named products. 3. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers, provide any one of the named products, or provide a product approved in accordance with the specified procedures for product substitutions. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Furnish the Architect with all data required to evaluate the proposed substitution. B. Substitution Request Form: Submit a separate request for each Product, using an electronic version of the approved form. Support the request with complete data, drawings and samples as appropriate to fully describe : 1. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution to that specified. 2. Changes required in other elements of the work because of the substitution. 3. Effect on the construction schedule. 4. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product specified and the amount of any net change to the Contract Sum. 5. Any required license fees or royalties. 6 Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement materials. C. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that the Contractor: 1. Has investigated the proposed Product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. Will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the Product specified. 3. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the work, and make such other changes as may be required to make the work complete in all respects. 4. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, which may subsequently become apparent. D. The Architect will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness, and will give notification of the decision to accept or reject the requested substitution as follows: 1. If the request for substitution is accepted by the Architect prior to Contract award an Addendum to the Bid Documents will be issued by the Architect for submission to all qualified bidders. 2. If the request for substitution is approved by the Architect after Contract Award, the Architect will issue the appropriate change order. 3. If the request for substitution is disapproved by the Architect, the Contractor may be notified in wnting of the rejection. 016000 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 016000 — PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 2.3 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Schedule deliveries and store materials in such a way as to not impede the progress of construction or disrupt the Owner's conduct of business. B. Deliver Products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. C. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that Products are properly protected and undamaged. D. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to Products or packaging. E. Deliver materials in the proper erection sequence, including all necessary fastenings and other required connections. 2.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. [The Owner will allocate limited space on site for the storage of materials. Coordinate storage requirements with the Owner, and furnish additional off -site storage when on -site storage is unavailable.] B. [The Owner will allocate limited space on site for the short term storage of Contractor furnished materials prior to installation. Coordinate storage requirements with the Owner. Provide additional off -site storage when on -site storage is unavailable. The Owner will provide off -site storage facilities for owner furnished items and some Contractor furnished items as specified in Section 015000.] C. Store Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Where no storage instructions are given, store products as required to prevent damage or deterioration. D. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. E. Provide adequate protection from damage due to corrosion, exposure to weather, mishandling or abuse, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, etc. Be responsible for the condition of each item at the time of installation. END OF SECTION 016000 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 017329 — CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Patching of existing construction. B. Related Sections: 1. 011000 — Summary: Cutting and patching to remove ill- timed, defective, or non - conforming work. 2. 015000 — Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary enclosures, protection of installed work; cleaning during construction. 3. 024119 — Selective Structure Demolition: Removal and storage of products to be reinstalled. 4. 030133 — Concrete Slab And Deck Repair: Patching of concrete slab -on -grade trenches. 5. 070183 — Replacement Fireproofing: Restoration of damaged fireproofing. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless indicated otherwise, patching, extending, or matching shall be performed as necessary to make the Work complete, with all components matching and consistent. B. Patching materials shall meet the requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities. C. Major patching procedures shall be reviewed with the Architect, prior to proceeding. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Patching Materials: Match the existing construction, unless approved otherwise. B. Non - shrink Grout for Patching Abandoned Core Drills: Premixed compound consisting of non - metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; minimum compressive strength of 7000 psi in 28 days. Conform to the following: 1. Grout shall be non - bleeding. 2. ASTM C1107, Grade B. 3. Fluid consistency (flow cone) as measured by 25 -30 second flow per ASTM C939 at temperature extremes or 40 degrees F and 90 degrees F. 4. Working time not less than 30 minutes at both of the noted temperature extremes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that demolition is complete and that existing surfaces are ready for patching. B. Coordinate installation of new materials with the patching and repair of existing construction. C. Beginning of restoration work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. D. Determine type and quality of existing products by inspection or non - destructive testing. Destructive testing may be performed when approved by the Architect. Patch all test locations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovations work; replace and restore at completion. B. Contact the architect when unsuitable materials not marked for removal - such as rotted wood, rusted metals, and deteriorated concrete and masonry are discovered. C. Provide additional construction and materials as required to support patching. 017329 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 017329 — CUTTING AND PATCHING D. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. E. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and new finishes. 3.3 PATCHING A. Patch and refinish existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, missing, or showing other localized imperfections directly or indirectly caused by work under this contract. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. B. When existing finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. C. Provide a neat and smooth transition to new construction. Where finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition to new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division. Review condition with the Architect. D. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finishes; refinish trimmed areas. E. Where existing items are indicated as cut or reconfigured, cap and finish all exposed edges to match the existing construction to remain. Provide new or relocated supports spaced to be consistent with the installation. F. Patching of Abandoned Core Drills: 1. Patch with non - shrink grout. 2. Trowel flush with adjacent concrete surfaces. Match adjacent finish. END OF SECTION 017329 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 017700 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Requirements for contract closeout. B. This Section applies to all Technical Specification Sections, and supplements the General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. When Contractor considers the work to be substantially complete, the Contractor shall submit to Architect a written notice that the work, or designated portion thereof, is substantially complete, along with a list of those items still to be completed or corrected. B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, Architect will make an inspection to determine the status of completion. C. Should Architect determine that the work is not substantially complete: 1. Architect will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, giving the reasons therefore. 2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the work, and send a second written notice of substantial completion to the Architect. 3. Architect will re- inspect the work. D. When Architect concurs that the work is substantially complete, the Architect will. 1. Prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion on AIA Form G704, accompanied by Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, as verified and amended by the Architect. 2. Submit the Certificate to Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. When Contractor considers the work is complete, the Contractor shall submit written certification that: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owner's representative and are operational. 5. Work is completed and ready for final inspection. B. Architect will make final inspection to verify the status of completion with reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification. C. Should Architect consider that the work is incomplete or defective: 1. Architect will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work. 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send a second written certification to Architect that the work is complete. 3. Architect will re- inspect the work. D. When the Architect finds that the work is acceptable under the Contract Documents, he shall request that the Contractor make the closeout submittals, including the following: 1. Affidavits. 2. Warranties and guarantees. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Project record drawings. 5. Certifications from public authorities. 6. Verification of potable water and waste water pipe cleaning procedures. 7. Certification of Warranties for roofing work. 8. Final adjustment of accounts. 9. Final application for payment. 017700 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 017700 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1.4 AFFIDAVITS A. Use the following AIA documents for the submission of Affidavits: 1. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims, AIA Document G706. 2. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens, AIA Document G706A. General Contractor shall submit an executed release of liens. Separate releases or waiver of liens will also be required from each subcontractor. 3. Consent of Surety to Final Payment, AIA Document G707. 1.5 SURPLUS, MAINTENANCE, AND OVERAGE MATERIALS A. All materials and products purchased for incorporation as components of the building or site under this Contract, and for which the Contractor receives payment from the Owner, shall become property of the Owner upon project completion, except as described herein. B. Within 10 day of Project Substantial Completion, submit to the Owner a copy of the Overage and Maintenance Inventory Form, with copy to the Architect, indicating the inventory of all surplus building materials in the Contractor's possession, including specified maintenance and overage materials, and materials purchased by the Owner for installation by the Contractor. Form is bound in this Manual after this Section. C. Owner reserves the right to inspect all such materials at the Contractor's warehouse. D. Owner will identify those items to be retained on the Overage and Maintenance Inventory Form and return it to the Contractor. Contractor shall tag each corresponding item with the store name, Purchase Order Schedule item number if applicable, department name if applicable, and quantity for each item. E. Within 30 days after Project Substantial Completion, deliver all items that have been identified by the Owner to be retained by the store, or to the Owner's regional Distribution Center, in accordance with the Inventory Form F. Unless otherwise excepted by mutual agreement, items designated on the Inventory Form "HOLD AT WAREHOUSE (To be sold by Owner)" shall be maintained at the Contractor's warehouse until 60 days after Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner to allow access, display, and disposal of such items during that time. G. Unless excepted by subsequent mutual agreement, all surplus materials designated "DISCARD" on the Inventory Form shall become property of the General Contractor. 1.6 MANUFACTURERS' WARRANTIES A. Furnish one original of each manufacturer's warranty executed to the Owner. B. Include table of contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover. C. Contractor shall submit warranties prior to final application for payment in accordance with Section 013300. For components accepted prior to substantial completion, submit warranty within 10 days after acceptance. For items delayed materially beyond substantial completion, submit warranty within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. D. Furnish manufacturers warranties as specified in the technical sections. 1.7 GUARANTIES A. Contractor Guaranty: Furnish a one -year guaranty covering the Work, in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract. B. Subcontractor Guaranties: 1. Furnish from each subcontractor, a one -year guaranty executed to the Owner, covering each subcontractor's work. 2. In addition, furnish from each subcontractor, a separate guaranty for each portion of work requiring a special guaranty as specified in the technical sections. Unless otherwise approved, each guaranty shall extend to the specified term commencing from the date of Store Turnover. 017700 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 017700 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 3. Each guaranty shall be submitted on the Subcontractor Guaranty form. Form is bound in this manual after this Section. C. Submit triplicate copies; include table of contents and assemble in sets with each set bound in a separate binder with durable plastic cover. Include complete list of all subcontractors in each binder. D. Each guarantee shall be submitted on the Subcontractor Guarantee form. Form is bound in this manual after this Section. 1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain a set of record documents which clearly and neatly indicate all changes to the Contract Documents, and all uncovered existing conditions that will be subsequently concealed. B. Record documents shall include: 1. Contract drawings. 2. Reviewed product data, shop drawings, and samples. C. Record drawings shall be corrected daily in a neat, legible manner showing all changes from the original Drawings and Specifications. Record drawings shall be used for no other purpose and shall be stored separate from those used for construction. D. Record drawings shall indicate exact installed locations of the concealed work, including existing conditions discovered during the course of the work, conduit, piping, ducts, mechanical and electrical equipment. Indicate depths, sizes, and dimensional plan locations for all piping below grade or under floor slabs. All changes in architectural and structural work shall be similarly shown. E. Prior to approving each request for partial payment, Architect or his representative reserves the right to inspect the record drawings. All corrections or changes that have occurred in the work to the date of payment request shall be shown on the record drawings prior to each payment request. F. At the conclusion of the work, Architect will furnish the Contractor a set of drawings. 1. Information provided will be based on design drawings and may not necessarily represent exact as -built conditions. 2. Contractor shall revise drawings as necessary and incorporate all record data on the drawings in a clearly legible manner, utilizing the symbols of the Contract Drawings. G. As a condition for final acceptance of the work, the record drawings shall be certified to be actual representation of work as installed. Each completed record drawing shall be signed, dated and delivered to the Architect not more than 60 days after Store Turnover. H. Electronic Record Drawings: In addition to signed originals, provide scanned record drawings, in PDF format, on CD -ROMs or DVD -ROMs; five sets of discs. Each CD /DVD case shall bear labeling indicating the project name, the Architect, and the contents. I. Where shop drawings and installation drawings show details of construction not indicated on Contract Drawings, Contractor shall, upon request, provide certified installation drawings for those portions of the work. This requirement shall include equipment layout and installations; mechanical and electrical piping, wiring, conduit, etc.; elevator and escalator wiring, control, and installations; and any other systems as directed. Copies of approved shop drawings, accurately annotated to reflect as -built conditions, may be used for this purpose wherever applicable. - J. Permit drawings and documents reflecting permit approval shall be turned over to the store maintenance manager. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals covering all mechanical and electrical equipment installed on the project; furnish manuals for all other materials and equipment when so required by the technical sections. Whenever special maintenance procedures are required to assure the proper operation and durability of the material, equipment or finish, manuals describing such procedures shall be furnished whether specified or not. 017700 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 017700 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES B. Arrangement of Manuals: Manuals shall be electronic, in PDF format with bookmarking according to manufacturer, and provided on CD -ROMs or DVD -ROMs. Each CD /DVD case shall bear labeling indicating the volume number, the project name, the Architect, and the contents. C. Include the following in each set of CDs or DVDs: 1. Names and addresses of Contractor, subcontractor, installer, manufacturer, and service organization. 2. Set of approved product data and shop drawings. 3. Wiring and piping installation diagrams as applicable. 4. Maintenance schedules and safety precautions. 5. Operating instructions. 6. Copy of the warranties and guarantees. D. Number of Copies: 1. One preliminary set of O &M Manual CDs or DVDs shall be provided to the Architect for approval, approximately 3 weeks prior to Store turnover for use during the Operations Walk- through and Store Turnover. 2. Submit 2 final sets within 60 days of Store Turnover. Each set, as submitted, shall be completed and shall incorporate all required data on a labeled CDs or DVDs. 3. Provide a transmittal to LP stating that the O &M's have been given to the Store and Regional Maintenance managers. E. Manuals shall be submitted to the Owner through the Architect. 1.10 OPERATION INSTRUCTION A. In addition to specific requirements in the specifications, instruct the Owner's maintenance and operation personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of all equipment as directed after the installation is complete and in working order. 1.11 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit a final statement of accounting to Architect. B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum: 1. The original Contract Sum. 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: a. Previous Change Orders. b. Allowances, when applicable. c. Unit Prices. d. Deductions for uncorrected work. e. Penalties and bonuses. f. Deductions for liquidated damages, when applicable. g. Deductions for re- inspection payments. h. Other adjustments. 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted. 4. Previous payments. 5. Sum remaining due. C. Contractor will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to the Contract Sum which were not previously made by Change Orders. 1.12 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements stated in the conditions of the Contract. 1.13 FINAL CLEANING A. Immediately prior to final inspection, clean all exposed interior and exterior surfaces affected by the Work of this Contract as follows: 1. Remove temporary labels, stains, and foreign substances. 2. Hand dust, clean, and polish transparent and glossy surfaces. 017700 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 017700 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 3. Power vacuum carpet and soft surfaces in affected work areas using hepafilter type vacuums. 4. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. 5. Clean or replace filters of mechanical equipment. 6. Clean roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. 7. Clean site, including sweeping paved areas and raking clean other surfaces. 8. Hand dust and clean all shelving, cabinets, casework, and similar built -in items both installed under this Contract, or existing. 1.14 NORDSTROM LIFE SAFETY /FIRE ALARM TEST A. Provide services of the Fire Protection, Fire Alarm, and Elevator job superintendents at the store approximately one week prior to store turnover to support the Nordstrom Life Safety /Fire Alarm Test. B. Superintendent's time shall be based on a 4 -hour period to allow for setup, staging, and witness of the test. C. Test date shall be coordinated by the General Contractor and approved by Nordstrom. 1.15 KEYS A. Deliver properly identified and tagged keys and hardware maintenance tools to the Owner, at the completion of each pad or department, including those specified in Sections 087100 and 102713. B. Obtain itemized receipt for all keys and tools. C. Send all master keys by registered mail directly 'from manufacturer to Owner's representative as later directed. 1.16 WARRANTY SERVICE REQUESTS A. Complete the General Contractor contact information on the form, for use by Nordstrom Maintenance personnel, and deliver to the store maintenance manager upon completion of work. B. Edit an electronic version of the "Warranty Service Request" form. Example of the form is bound in this manual following this Section. Architect will furnish the electronic version of the form upon request. END OF SECTION 017700 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 024119 — SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal from the site of existing construction to accommodate the new construction. 2. Removal of existing components for reinstallation. 3. Salvaging of existing materials. 4. Capping and identification of utility lines. 5. Contractor design of shoring and bracing. 6. Patching of existing construction to remain. B. Related Sections: 1. 011000 - Summary: Owner occupancy requirements and Special work requirements. 2. 013546 - Carpet Reclamation: Removal and recycling of existing carpet. 3. 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary enclosures, guardrails, barriers, barricades, lighting and dust control. 4. 017329 - Cutting and Patching: Cutting and patching of existing construction. 5. 017700 - Closeout Procedures: Project record documents. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain free and safe passage to and from occupied portions of the existing building, in accordance with Code and the Owner's occupancy requirements. B. All occupied areas shall remain operational during normal business hours, unless approved otherwise. Notify the Owner a minimum of 48 hours prior to affecting the normal operation of existing occupied spaces. C. Perform demolition to minimize interference with adjacent occupied and public spaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300, unless specified otherwise. B. Submit description of demolition procedures and sequences as a part of work description submittals as specified in special work requirements in Section 011000. C. Submit certification that temporary shoring, support, and restraining systems have been designed by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the state where Project is located. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the applicable health and safety regulations of the jurisdictional authorities. B. Obtain and pay for all permits required for the demolition work. C. Obtain approval of demolition procedures that affect the normal operation of Owner occupied spaces. D. Pre -bid Inspection: Visit the Site to determine existing conditions, and as much as possible to determine the extent of demolition required. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Patching Materials: Materials used to patch existing construction shall match the existing construction, unless noted otherwise. 024119 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 024119 — SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect existing conditions and verify that the work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin demolition until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective demolition caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide and maintain all temporary barriers and security devices necessary for the demolition work. Conform to requirements specified in Section 015000. B. Provide protection to all surrounding public spaces. Perform work and provide temporary construction as approved by the local jurisdictional code authorities. C. Protect existing construction that will not be subject to demolition. 3.3 DEMOLITION A. Perform demolition as indicated and as required to accommodate the new work. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner and in accordance with the demolition procedures and sequences approved by the Owner. Where demolition exceeds that indicated, verify such demolition with the Architect prior to proceeding B. Protect existing structural members. Contact the Architect prior to modifying structural members beyond the extent indicated. Cease operations and notify the Architect immediately if continued demolition operations might endanger the existing structure. C. During demolition operations, notify the Architect of all conditions that differ substantially from those indicated, specified, or expected. Notify the Architect if previously unknown operational, or potentially operational elements, are uncovered during demolition operations. Perform no demolition in such areas, unless approved by the Architect. D. Provide Contractor designed temporary shoring as required to support existing construction against movement or overload during demolition operations, until permanent supports are in place. _. E. Except where noted or specified otherwise, take possession of materials being demolished, and immediately remove from site. Do not overload existing construction to remain with demolished materials. F. Carefully remove, store, and protect all materials and components to be reused. G. Where removal of materials indicated to remain is necessary to facilitate new construction, carefully remove, store, and protect such materials for future reinstallation. H. Carefully remove, protect, and turn over as directed, materials and components claimed by the Owner for salvage. Prior to demolition, contact the Owner to determine which items will be claimed. I. Where cut edges of the,existing construction will be visible in the completed work, cut in uniform straight lines. Concrete and masonry shall be sawcut or coredrilled. J. Repair all demolition performed in excess of that required, at no additional cost to the Owner. K. Remove all disconnected utility lines. Cap remaining ends. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected utilities. Indicate location of disconnected utilities on the Project Record drawings as specified in Section 017700. L. Pay for and coordinate the work performed by public utilities. Notify the affected utility company well in advance of the scheduled work. M. Dust producing demolition operations shall be sprinkled in areas not subject to water damage. Provide other approved means of controlling dusting in areas subject to water damage. 024119 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 024119 — SELECTIVE DEMOLITION N. Electrical Demolition Requirements: 1. Remove electrical system components as indicated on the electrical drawings, and /or as outlined below. In addition, within areas of demolition, remove the following items: a. Sound system. b. Security and fire alarm systems. c. Energy Management and control conduit, wiring, and hardware. d. Telephone conduit and cable. e. Point of sales data cables from each register to terminal backboards. 2. Abandoned underslab conduit shall and cut off below the finished surface line, and all conductors shall be removed. Patch and fill the opening flush with the finish. 3. Abandoned electrical conductors shall be removed back to the branch circuit panel, unless indicated otherwise. Abandoned conduit that is exposed and readily accessible shall be removed. Leave abandoned conduit that is concealed in existing construction to remain. 4. Existing electrical equipment that is not shown on the Drawings shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Architect. Such equipment shall remain unless required to be removed or relocated to accommodate the remodel work. 5. All existing low voltage cabling disconnected and abandoned shall be fully removed from the project. 6. Electrical demolition drawings are generally diagrammatic. Complete extent of required electrical demolition that effects completion of work is not shown. In addition to verification of existing site conditions, coordinate with new and existing Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Fire Protection, Stock Shelving, and Casework Drawings. 7. All electrical services to equipment that is indicated to be removed shall be fully removed. 8. Retain removed light fixtures for relocation and reuse as indicated. All light fixtures not to be reused shall be delivered to the Owner. O. Plumbing Demolition Requirements: 1. Abandoned underslab piping shall be cut off flush with the floor line and sealed. Patch flush with the floor. 2. Abandoned piping that is exposed and readily accessible shall be removed. 3. Leave abandoned piping that is concealed in existing construction to remain. P. Acoustical Ceiling Demolition Requirements: 1. Reuse ceiling system components where feasible. Where existing materials are of questionable quality, obtain the judgment of the Architect. 2 Where mineral fiber acoustical ceiling panels are indicated for removal, such panels shall be kept separate from other debris and delivered for reclamation in accordance with Armstrong World Industries Inc. Ceilings Reclamation Program (800/448- 1405), or other plan for recycling mineral fiber products. Q. Wall Covering: Remove existing wall covering from all surfaces indicated for new wall covering materials. Use techniques to minimize damage to substrate; repair all damage and leave ready for repriming or sizing as specified in Section 099000. R. Existing Tile: 1. Remove existing tile finish materials and underbeds to receive new tile finish materials. New tile shall not be installed over existing finish materials unless indicated otherwise. 2. Scrape and grind substrate surfaces as necessary to produce a uniform surface ready to receive shot blast treatment specified in Section 093000. Surfaces shall be walkable for normal pedestrian traffic after demolition operations. S. Removal of Bonded Floor Finishes: 1. Scrape, grind and otherwise remove existing floor finish and bonding materials as necessary to receive new floor finishes. 2. Prepared surface shall present a uniform flat surface ready to receive the new floor finishes free of telegraphing and other surface irregularities. 3. New floor finishes shall not be installed over existing floor finish materials unless approved otherwise by the Architect. 4. Coordinate removal of existing bonded floor finish materials with installation requirements and recommendations from manufacturers of new floor finishes. 024119 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 024119 — SELECTIVE DEMOLITION T. Existing Carpet: 1. Remove existing carpet to receive new finish materials; dispose of existing removed carpet in accordance with Section 013546 . 2. Scrape and grind substrate surfaces as necessary to produce a uniform surface ready to receive new finish. 3. Coordinate removal of existing carpet and carpet adhesive with installation requirements and recommendations from manufacturers of new floor finishes. U. Wood Trim: At locations where wood trim is indicated for reuse, remove and store to prevent damage. Retain for reuse only those materials identified by the Owner to be free from damage and significant wear. V. Signage: Existing signage indicated for relocation, and signs mounted to surfaces indicated for repainting shall be removed and stored for reinstallation under Section 101473. Remove tape residues from sign backs and substrate surfaces, as applicable. W. Leave site in a condition acceptable to the Owner at all times. Remove demolished materials from site daily as work progresses. Do not overload existing structure with demolished materials. X. Obtain written permission from the Mall Management when outriggers or swing cranes will have to traverse other mall structures. Y. Refer to Demolition Plan General Notes on the drawings. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Comply with Section 015000. B. Special Protection Requirements For Adjacent Surfaces: 1. Floors: Lay down non - staining curing paper lapped and sealed at joints and edges with Nashua Brand Duct Tape. Do not use polyethylene or products containing bituminous materials. 2. Walls: Provide sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to adequately protect surfaces not to be demolished from damage caused by this work. 3.5 CLEANUP A. After each demolition phase, leave the area broom clean and ready for the work of other Sections. B. Occupied spaces which receive demolition work shall be thoroughly and completely cleaned prior to daily operations. Cleaning shall include, without limitation: vacuuming, dusting, stain and dirt removal, and cleaning of glass and countertops merchandise. END OF SECTION 024119 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON ■ SECTION 030133 — CONCRETE SLAB AND DECK REPAIR PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Patching of concrete slab -on -grade trenches. B. Related Sections: 1. 024119 - Selective Structure Demolition: Removal of existing concrete slabs for trenching. 2. 035416 - Hydraulic Cement Underlayment: Concrete slab preparation for installation of finishes. 3. 312000 - Earth Moving: Trenching of slabs -on- grade. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 301 - Specifications of Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. C33 - Concrete Aggregates. 3. C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete. 4. C150 - Portland Cement. 5. C494 - Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit data for materials and procedures proposed for the work. 1.4 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials: 1. Cement: ASTM C150, normal - Type 1 portland cement. 2. Normal Weight Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33. 3. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 4. Admixtures: a. Water Reducer Normal: ASTM C 494, Type A; Master Builders Inc. "Pozzolith /Polyheed," Euclid Chemical Co. "Eucon WR 75 ". b. High Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G and shall be of the second or third generation type. Shall be batch plant added, extend plasticity time, reduce water 20 to 30 percent. Master Builders Inc. "Rheobwld," Euclid Chemical "Eucon 37 ". c. Accelerator: ASTM C 494, Type C or E, non - corrosive, non - chloride, non - chloride; Master Builders "Pozzutech 20," Euclid Chemical Co. "Accelgard 90 ". d. Set Retarder: ASTM C494, Type B. B. Reinforcing Steel: 1. ASTM A615, grade 60, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete. 3. Fabricate as indicated and in accordance with ACI 315. 030133 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 030133 — CONCRETE SLAB AND DECK REPAIR 4. Dowel into existing slab at minimum 18 inches on center but in not less than 2 places along long side of concrete patch area. 5. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. 6. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on the drawings at points of minimum stress. C. Accessories: 1. Bonding Agent: Acrylic type; Sonneborn "Sonnocrete ", W.R. Grace "Duraweld C ", Euclid Chemical Co. "Flex- con ". 2. Curing Materials: Waterproof sheet: ASTM C171; minimum 4 -mil polyethylene sheet or reinforced waterproof kraft paper. 2.2 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Admixtures: 1. All concrete shall contain the specified water reducing or high range water reducing admixture. 2. All concrete placed in ambient temperatures from 40 degrees F to 20 degrees F, and all slab concrete placed in ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F, shall contain an accelerator at the manufacturer's required dosage. -` 3. All concrete placed in ambient temperatures of 90 degrees F or above, shall contain a set retarder at the manufacturer's required dosage. C. Provide minimum 3000 psi 28 day compressive strength, unless indicated otherwise. D. Concrete shall have a water cement ratio of .42 or Tower. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place in accordance with ACI 301. B. Bonding Agent: Mix thoroughly and apply strictly in accord with the manufacturer's instructions; do not use when ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F. Place concrete in contact immediately while bonding agent is still tacky. C. Finishes: Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings provide the following: 1. Finish concrete slabs level and even with existing floor. 2. Full trowel finish interior floor slab surfaces, unless specified otherwise. 3. Light steel trowel finish interior floor slab surfaces scheduled to receive tile. D. Curing: Moisture cure all concrete for a minimum of 7 days, unless approved or specified otherwise. END OF SECTION 030133 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 035416— HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Leveling of existing cast -in -place concrete slabs. 2. Repair of slabs damaged during removal of bonded finishes. 3. Ramps and tapers as necessary to correct levels between dissimilar finishes. B. Related Sections: 1. 012720 - Unit Prices. 2. 024119 — Selective Structure Demolition: Removal of existing floor finishes. 3. 093000 - Tiling: Substrate tolerance requirements. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. 1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in their original unopened packages and protect from freezing, direct sun exposure, and exposure to moisture. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Keep traffic out of area in which underlayment is being applied or cured. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Fast - Setting Self Leveling Underlayment System: Self- leveling, pourable, cement based material, minimum 28 day compressive strength 4,500 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C109; minimum bond strength 200 psi; one of the following. 1. "Ultraplan 1 Plus" or "Novo /Plan M20" (as appropriate for the conditions) by Mapei Corporation; 800- 42- MAPEI. 2. "SDL" Self- Leveling Underlayment Concrete by Ardex Inc.; 412 - 264 -4240. 3: "Level -Right FS -10" by Maxxon; 800 - 356 -7887. B. Fast - Setting Trowelable Underlayment System: 1. "Quickcem Top 102" by Mapei Corporation; 800 -42- MAPEI. 2. "SD -P" Fast - Setting Underlayment. by Ardex Inc.; 412 - 264 -4240. 3. "Euco- Speed" by Euclid Chemical Company; 800 - 321 -7628. C. Accessories: Furnish primers, patching compounds, and aggregate fillers as recommended by the underlayment manufacturer for the conditions of the project. 2.2 MIXING A. Thoroughly mix underlayment materials for each type of product in proper proportions to achieve smooth homogeneous mix, free of lumps. 035416 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 035416 — HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. With the exception of areas where leveling can be accomplished by use of latex underlayment, as specified in other sections, install cementitious underlayment to concrete slabs as indicated on the Drawings, and as necessary to level slabs or bring substrates to proper elevation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Inspect floor to verify that demolition is complete to the point where work may progress. B. Repair divots, gouges, and other damage associated with removal of existing bonded finishes. C. Survey floor as necessary to set screeds and reference points. Identify construction joints, control joints, and expansion joints. Prepare for underlayment at all locations where floor does not meet specified tolerance requirements. — D. Ensure that subfloor is clean, dry, hard, sound, and free of oils or other substances which would adversely affect proper bonding and curing. E. Abrade or shotblast as necessary to achieve a clean surface. F. Verify that all areas to be leveled are at or below final design elevation. G. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Install trowelable underlayment at locations where slopes are indicated and at other locations as appropriate to installation conditions; install self leveling underlayment at other locations as necessary to correct slab flatness and levelness. B. Set screeds, markers, and reference blocks. Set screeds at all construction and control joints to establish weakened plane joints in underlayment. C. Install patching compounds in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where subsequent finishing of the material is required, float to level surface. Do not trowel. D. Apply primer to all areas to receive underlayment; repeat application if necessary to achieve proper build. E. Mix materials and pour or pump and squeegee into place to achieve appropriate thickness. • F. Provide tapered fill thickness as necessary to align adjacent floor surfaces. G. Finish to a smooth level surface within tolerances specified for concrete floors. H. Cure in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. • I. Tolerances for Existing Concrete Slabs to be Corrected: 1. Typical Interior Slabs: Flat to within 0.31 inch in 10 feet. 2. Interior Slabs to Receive Thin -set Tile (Stone, Quarry, Ceramic, Porcelain and Other Similar - Materials) Flooring: Flat to within 0.25 inch in 10 feet. 3. Interior Areas Indicated For Slopes And Pitches To Drain: Slopes shall be flat to the requirements specified above. 3.4 CLEANING A. As work proceeds, clean up excess materials, rubbish, and splash. it END OF SECTION 035416 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 055000 — METAL FABRICATIONS • • PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Custom fabricated ferrous metal items indicated on the Architectural Drawings and scheduled at the end of this Section. B. Related Sections 1. 099000 - Painting: Finish coatings for metal fabrications. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES • A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A36 - Structural Steel. 2. A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated Welded and Seamless. 3. Al23 - Zinc (Hot- Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4. A307 - Low - Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners. 5. A500 - Cold- Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 6. A569 - Specification for Commercial Quality Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent) Steel. 7. A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. B. American Welding Society : AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. C. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): "Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications." 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Support Systems: 1. Provide structural design for support systems performed by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the State where the project is located. 2. Design channel support systems to support the following minimum Toads: a. Video Projector: 100 lbs. b. Pendant Lights: 100 lbs. c. Chandeliers: 150 lbs. and 500 lbs.; refer to Section 265000 for locations. 3. Design other support systems to support the following minimum loads: a. Display Window Ceiling Metal Gridwork: 10 lbs. per linear foot. b. Display Window Light Pipes: 10 lbs. per linear foot. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agencies: Conform with requirements of the Code authorities having jurisdiction. B. Welder Qualifications: Use only welders with proper AWS certification for shielded arc process for all welding performed in connection with the work of this section. C. Conflicting Requirements: In the event of conflict between pertinent Codes and the regulations and requirements of standards referenced herein, the provisions of the more stringent shall govern. 1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 055000 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 055000 — METAL FABRICATIONS PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Materials: 1. General: All steel materials shall be new and free from rust. 2. Tubing: ASTM A500. 3. Pipe: ASTM A53. 4. Plate, Bars, Shapes: ASTM A36. 5. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A653, gage as specified. C. Electrodes: Use electrodes specifically recommended for the purpose by the American Welding Society. D. Non - shrink Grout: Hallemite "Por -Rok" cement, Sonneborn Building Products "Sonogrout "; non - shrink grout mix. E. Standard Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust - inhibitive primer compatible with the finish coats specified in Section 099000 - Painting. VOC compliant where required to meet applicable regulations. F. Cold Galvanizing Compound: "Galv - Weld," "Galvican," "ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound," or equivalent zinc -rich primer. G. Other Materials: Provide all other materials required for a complete fabrication and installation. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General Fabrication Requirements: 1. Form steel to accurate sizes and shapes, with clean lines and angles. 2. Punch and shear to leave clean surfaces. 3. Provide holes and other provisions for the work of other trades. 4. Fabricate metal fabrications in strict accordance with the approved Shop Drawings and the reference standards. B. Joints and Fastenings: 1. Detail for ample strength and stiffness. 2. Where exposed to weather, form to exclude water. Exterior fastenings and interior work subject to moisture to be hot -dip galvanized. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, weld permanent connections wherever possible. When bolts are used in exposed locations, use countersunk heads. Nick bolt threads to prevent loosening. 4. Make joints and intersections tightly fitting and securely fastened. C. Welding: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, weld shop connections. 2. Welds at surfaces to be exposed to view, with the exception of neatly formed fillet welds, shall be ground smooth; remove weld spatter. D. Holes: Drill or punch holes required for the attachment of work of other trades and for bolted connections. Burned holes are not acceptable. E. Pipe Railings, and Guardrails 1. Fabricate of steel pipe, 1 -1/4 inch NPS unless indicated otherwise. 2. Fit and shop assemble sections in largest practical sizes, for delivery to site and installation. 3. Make joints tight, smooth, and accurately fitted. 4. Weld all shop joints, except as otherwise indicated. 5. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 6. Return terminating ends to within 1/2 inch of wall; finish wall handrail ends with standard "Code" returns and caps. F. Wood Door Frame Guards: 1. Approved Fabricator: Kingdon Sheet Metal, Inc., Salt Lake City, UT; (801) 262 -4412; Contact: Dave Emery. 055000 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 055000 — METAL FABRICATIONS 2. Fabricated from stainless steel sheet, 22 gage thickness. 2.3 SHOP FINISHING A. Shop prime all steel except: 1. Steel to be encased in concrete. 2. Surfaces to be welded. 3. Interior fabrications which will be concealed by interior finish. • 4. Steel specifically designated to remain unfinished or uncoated. 5. Where galvanizing is specified. B. Standard Primer Finish: 1. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC -SP1. Remove rust and scale by wire brushing, scraping, and sanding down to bare metal in accordance with SSPC -SP2 and SP3. Where SP2 and SP3 measures are insufficient, provide commercial blast cleaning in accordance with SSPC- SP6. Immediately apply specified prime coat. 2. Apply prime coating at minimum 2.5 mil dry film thickness. 3. Provide at locations scheduled at the end of this Section. C. Galvanizing: 1. Galvanize in accordance with ASTM Al23. 2. Provide at locations scheduled at the end of this Section. D. Touch -up shop prime coats using the same prime paint used during shop priming. E. Protect factory finished fabrications from damage. Protect metal to be encased in concrete to prevent accumulation of deleterious foreign material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Carefully examine the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the • point where fabrication and installation of the work of this section may properly commence. B. Make field measurements as necessary to ensure proper fit of miscellaneous metal items. C. Discrepancies: 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect in writing. 2. Do not proceed with fabrication or installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General Installation Requirements: 1. Install metal fabrications secure, square, plumb, level, and in accurate alignment as indicated on the Drawings or the Architect reviewed shop drawings. 2. Coordinate installation schedule with the schedules of other trades to ensure orderly and timely progress of the total work. B. Grouting: 1. Use non - shrink grout in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Protect adjacent finished surfaces from defacement. 3. Provide at handrails inserted into concrete construction with embedment sleeves, and other locations where indicated. C. Touch -Up: 1. After installation of each metal fabrication item, touch -up shop prime coats damaged during transportation and erection, using the prime paint specified for shop priming. 2. Touch up galvanized surfaces damaged in erection with specified cold galvanizing compound. 055000 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 055000 — METAL FABRICATIONS 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS A. The following is a list of the principal metal fabrication items and their respective finishes. Fabricate and install each item to the general fabrication and installation requirements, and to any additional fabrication requirements which might be listed below. Refer to Drawings for additional items not specifically scheduled. 1. Display Window Ceiling Metal Gridwork: Fabricate of 3/8 inch diameter steel bars, weld bars at each juncture; prime paint and finish paint all members flat black. 2. Channel Support Systems or Ceiling Mounted Equipment and Fixtures: All connections bolted and clamped; factory finish (touch -up not required). 3. Interior Metal Corner Guards: 16 gage galvanized sheet steel; leg dimension and length as indicated; exposed countersunk oval head screw fastenings equally spaced; all edges eased. 4. Partial Height Partition Support: Prime painted. 5. Vanity Countertop Supports: Prime painted. 6. Diaper Bar Supports: Prime painted. END OF SECTION 055000 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 061000 — ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concealed blocking and nailers for support of wall mounted items. 2. Plywood sheathing. 3. Terminal backboards for telephone, POS, and electric panels. B. Related Sections: 1. 092200 — Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board: Metal backing plates. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Plywood Association (APA): "Grades and Specifications." B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA). D. National Bureau of Standards U.S. Product Standards: 1. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. 2. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) F. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL). G. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). H. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLB): "Standard Grading Rules, No. 16," latest edition. 1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 01770. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Section 01600. B. Storage: Store lumber off the ground in a well drained area. Stack to insure proper ventilation. PART 2- PRODLJCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Lumber: 1. Grade stamped by the WCLB or WWPA and shall be manufactured in accordance with PS 20. 2. Maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 3. Grades: a. Lumber - 2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 4 inches wide: Hem -Fir; stud or standard and better grade. b. Lumber - 2 to 4 inches thick, 6 inches and wider: Hem -Fir; No. 2 or better grade. B. Plywood: 1. Standard: Graded and stamped by APA in accordance with the requirements of PS 1; Group 1 species; grades and as specified below; thicknesses as indicated. 2. Exterior Plywood Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing; CD Grade Exterior; 5/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. 061000 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 061000 — ROUGH CARPENTRY 3. Interior Plywood Sheathing and Blocking: APA C -D Grade Exposure; 5/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Nails, Spikes, and Staples: Galvanized for exterior and high humidity locations, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations; size and type to suit application. B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, and Screws: Medium carbon steel; size and type to suit application; galvanized for exterior locations, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations. C. Miscellaneous Fasteners: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel. 2.3 WOOD TREATMENT A. Fire Retardant Treatment: - 1. All fire retardant treated wood materials shall bear a UL "FR -S" label, or a label from an approved inspection agency certifying that the material meets the requirements of AWPA C -20 Type A for lumber and AWPA C -27 Type A for plywood. 2. Approved Interior Fireproofing Products: Clear finish product, Hickson Corporation "Dricon ", Hoover Treated Wood Products "Pyro- guard," or Osmose "FirePRO ". 3. Fire retardant treat all rough carpentry wood materials, including without limitation, wood and plywood blocking, plywood sheathing, and plywood terminal backboards, unless indicated or specified otherwise. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully examine installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Plywood Sheathing and Flooring: 1. Fasten to framing members with self tapping screws at a maximum 8 inches on center in the • field, 6 inches at the edges. 2. Allow 1/8 inch space between panels. 3. All edges shall be supported. B. Nailing Strips and Plates: Provide as indicated and as necessary to complete the work. Securely fasten in position. Bolt and screw in connection with metal work indicated. C. Wood and Plywood Blocking: 1. Unless indicated otherwise, provide fire retardant treated wood blocking to receive mechanical fasteners for support of plumbing and electrical fixtures and equipment, casework/cabinets /shelves, display casework (refer to Display and Backroom Casework Drawings), door stops, wall mounted electro- magnetic door holders, wood base, wainscots, coat hooks, coat racks, toilet and bath accessories, handrails, purse shelves, toilet partitions, chair rails, presentation rails, mirror clips, dressing room partitions, benches and accessories for dressing room partitions, and other wall mounted and supported equipment and components. Provide as indicated or required to complete the work, securely anchored to framework. 2. Metal backing plates may not be used in lieu of fire treated wood blocking. D. Plywood Terminal Backboards: 1. Install fire retardant treated plywood terminal backboards for telephone, POS, and electric panels where indicated on the Electrical Drawings. 061000 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 061000 — ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Install in full sheets where practical over gypsum wallboard, screwed through directly to studs, blocking, or furring, as applicable. 3. Install panels with "A" face exposed to view and with long dimension vertical. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS A. The following is a list of specific support items to be provided. Refer to Drawings for additional items not specifically scheduled: 1. Provide plywood backing prior to GWB installation where monitors are to be located in Loss Prevention. 3.4 CLEANUP A. During progress of the work, the premises shall be kept reasonably free of all debris and waste materials resulting from the work of this section. Upon completion and before final acceptance of the work, all debris, rubbish, unused materials, tools and equipment shall be removed from the site. END OF SECTION 061000 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION — 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standing and running trim, not included with display casework. 2. Wood door frames, not included with display casework. 3. Plywood substrate at counter tops to receive molded plastic finishes. 4. Hardboard wainscot paneling. 5. Hardboard door plate at wood doors. 6. Hardboard column cladding. 7. Shop - applied transparent finishes. 8. All other finished wood items indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required for a complete assembly. B. Related Sections: 1. 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Custom fabricated steel supports for counter tops. 2. 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking. 3. 064116 - Plastic- Laminate -Clad Architectural Cabinets: Plastic laminate surfaced counter tops, shelving, diaper bar, and trim. 4. 081400 - Wood Doors: Coordination with frame installation. 5. 087300 - Door and Hardware Installation. 6. 099000 — Painting and Coating: Transparent finishes for finish carpentry. 7. 123559 - Display Casework - Construction: Paneling, display rails, door frames, casings, and other finish carpentry elements furnished under the Display Casework section. 8. 123661 - Solid Surfacing Countertops: Countertops over plywood supports. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Where proprietary products are specified, proposals for alternate products and methods for applications indicated may be considered by the Architect, subject to requirements of Section 016000, system performance requirements, jurisdictional requirements, and applicable requirements of this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards (ANSI) 1. A208.1 - Standard for Mat Formed Wood Particle Board 2. A208.2 - Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard B. American Plywood Association (APA). C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA): 1. C20 - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. 2. C27 - Plywood Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. E. The Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, latest edition. F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 723 - Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Refinishing Of Existing Items: 1. Touch -Up: For door casings, wall base, and other running trim that require only minor surface repair, including filling minor chips and scratches, and re- touching of stain to match existing color. 062000 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION — 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY 2. Refinishing: For items needing more extensive repairs or a change in finish, provide a complete refinish as scheduled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: Show all architectural woodwork and construction details. Indicate locations, wood species, grain directions, and cut. Indicate relationship to adjacent construction, including relation to - Owner furnished casework. C. Samples: 1. Transparent Finish Samples: a. Prior to submittal, request that the Architect transmit samples of each transparent finish and species combination for matching. b. Submit samples of each wood species and transparent finish combination. Submit • minimum 12 x 12 inch size for veneer samples, and minimum 4 x 12 inch size for solid stock samples. c. Where color and graining variations will be significant, submit samples in sets illustrating the full range of these variations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cutting and fitting of trim and finish material, shall be performed by finish carpenters thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required, completely familiar with the materials involved and the manufacturer's recommended methods of installation, and thoroughly familiar with the requirements of this work. B. Special Coordination Requirements: 1. When finish carpentry elements are adjacent to display casework, coordinate detailing and lumber selection with the Owner for matching with the display casework. 2. Prior to fabrication, obtain Owner's approval of transparent finished wood proposed for use as standing and running trim in Sales areas. 1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Do not deliver millwork to building until "wet work" such as concrete, plaster, and gypsum board work have been completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium. B. Storage: Store materials in a dry place with adequate air circulation. Store wood materials in the general areas within the building where they are to be installed. Stack using spacers, stickers, or other devices to permit air circulation. Allow to stabilize for a minimum of 48 hours prior to installation. C. Handling: Protect millwork from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. — 1.8 SITE CONDITIONS A. Building HVAC system shall be fully operational prior to installation of finish carpentry elements. B. Provide ventilation to prevent accumulation of fumes and dust in accordance with Section 015000. r PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER; STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Moisture Content: Conform to AWI recommendations for the optimum moisture content for the location of the Project. B. Solid Wood for Transparent Finish (Exposed Applications): 1. Defects: Limit in accordance with AWI lumber grade I. 2. Maple: Select white hard maple (Acer saccharum); selected for absence of figure (birdseye; fiddleback, etc.) and exposure of flat cut in the principle exposed face. 062000 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION — 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY 3. Unless otherwise indicated, veneer wrapped medium or high density wood fiberboard or veneer wrapped high density wood particle board may be furnished in lieu of transparent finish standing and running trim at the Contractor's option, subject to Architect's approval of grain, profile, and detailing of trim sections. C. Trim for Opaque Finish: 1. Defects: Limit in accordance with AWI lumber grade I. 2. Species: Natural birch, maple, yellow poplar, or other approved closed grain hardwood. 3. Medium or high density wood fiberboard may be used in lieu of wood for interior trim applications indicated for opaque finish. D. Miscellaneous Lumber for Concealed Applications: AWI Grade III or better; species Contractor's option. 2.2 SHEET PANELS A. Plywood for Interior Applications (Concealed): 1. Typical: Softwood veneer, species Group 1 through 3, APA grade stamped; B -C EXT, or better for other applications, unless otherwise noted. 2. Substrates for Molded Plastic Counter Tops: APA MARINE A -A; 3/4 inch thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Particleboard: 1. ANSI A208.1; grade M -2; thickness as indicated on the Drawings. C. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 Class MD; Medite II by SierraPine (Roseville, CA; 800- 676- 3339); thickness as indicated. D. Hardboard: 1. Wainscot: Tempered pressed wood fiber board; 4'x8' sheets: smooth surface one side; UL listed flame spread index <200; 1/4 inch thick. 2. Door Plate: Tempered pressed wood fiber board; smooth surface one side; UL listed flame spread index <200; Duron by Wood Fiber Industries, Chicago, IL (312/634- 2763); 1/8 inch thick. 3. Column Cladding: Tempered pressed wood fiber board; 4'x8' sheets; smooth surface one side; UL listed flame spread index <200; 1/4 inch thick. E. Special MDF Material for Installation in Exit Corridors: Medite FR by SierraPine (Roseville, CA; 800- 676- 3339), Class 1 fire rating in accordance with ASTM E84; 1/4 inch thick. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Proprietary Fire -Rated Door Frames: 1. Manufacturers: Doranson a Division of Door Systems, Inc., North Vancouver, B.C., Canada (604/987- 6262); Eggers Industries, Two Rivers, WI (414/793- 1351); The Maiman Company, Springfield, MO (800/641- 4320). 2. Construction: Solid maple and maple veneer as standard with the manufacturer; fabricate to match profile of non -rated frames, as detailed. 3. Provide UL label for each rated assembly. B. Adhesives: Products of a reputable adhesive manufacturer; types as recommended by the manufacturer for the application; invisible in the finished work. C. Finishing nails and trim head screws shall be properly sized for adequate penetration into substrate. D. Furnish fasteners, metal braces, cleat systems, shims, hardware, sealants, and other materials as necessary for complete and functioning installation. 2.4 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT A. All fire retardant treated wood materials shall bear a UL "FR -S" label, or a label from an approved inspection agency certifying that the material meets the requirements of AWPA C -20 Type A for lumber and AWPA C -27 Type A for plywood. 062000 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION — 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY B. Approved Interior Fireproofing Products: Clear finish product, Hickson Corporation "Dricon ", Hoover Treated Wood Products "Pyro- guard," or Osmose Wood Preserving Co. of America, Inc. "Flame Proof LHC ". C. Treated materials shall be kiln dried to maximum 15 percent moisture content for plywood and 19 percent for lumber. 2.5 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY A. Fabricate finish carpentry items in accordance with applicable AWI standards, premium grade in Sales (public) areas; custom grade in other areas. B. Fabricate items to detail, in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. Shop assemble to the — greatest practical extent. C. All cuts shall be smooth and exact, with joints accurately matched, tightly fitted, and securely attached. D. Section Profiles: Minor variations from the profiles indicated, will be accepted when specifically indicated on the Shop Drawings, subject to Architect's approval. E. Gluing: Exposed glue lines shall be free of squeeze -out for pieces to receive transparent finish; do not use pieces from which glue cannot be removed without affecting penetration of finish. F. Sanding: Unless otherwise indicated, ease exposed edges of wood trim to a uniform 1/16 inch radius. Sand fabricated components with 120 grit or finer paper, free of splinters and cross grain scratches. Sand joints smooth; cut and sand plugs flush. G. Standing and Running Trim: 1. Door Frames and Casings: a. Laminated composite construction consisting of veneer, medium or high density wood fiberboard, or high density particleboard core and minimum 1/8 inch thick veneer exposed face may be furnished at the Contractor's option, subject to Architect's approval of grain, profile, and detailing. b. Coordinate with Sections 084100 and 087300 for door installation requirements and locations for door hardware. 2. Wall Base: Solid lumber; kerfed on back side to minimum depth of 3/8 inch. H. Substrates to Receive Molded Plastic Countertops: Fabricate from marine plywood to conform to the configurations indicated. 2.6 SHOP - APPLIED TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Shop finish wood surfaces and wood doors indicated to receive transparent finish. B. Sand exposed and semi - exposed wood surfaces smooth, always sanding in the direction of the wood _ grain. C. Sand exposed transparent finish wood surfaces to AWI "Premium " grade standards. Sand all semi - exposed transparent finish wood surfaces to AWI "Custom" grade standards. D. Fill depressions and imperfections with color matched putty, except imperfections shall not exceed AWI Premium grade standards. E. Transparent Finish Coating: Transparent finish wood doors shall be shop finished as a part of the work of Section 099000. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. 062000 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION — 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD DOOR FRAMES, AND STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Install wood frames and trim straight, true, level, plumb, square, and firmly anchored in place in accordance with good trade practice, approved Shop Drawings. B. Jointing: Make joints to conceal shrinkage; miter corners, except that inside corners of wall base shall be butted and coped; scarf end -to -end joints at a 45 degree angle; install trim pieces as long as practical, jointing only where solid support is obtained. Make each continuous run of 8' -0" or less from single piece without joints; locate butt joints no less than 4' -0" from corners or ends of trim. C. Select wood for transparent finish to match approved samples, and select for uniformity of appearance, grain, and color match between adjacent pieces. D. Use random lengths, minimum 8' -0" long, for continuous runs of running trim. E. Fastening: 1. Install items straight, true, level, plumb, square, and firmly anchored in place. Coordinate with other trades to ensure placement of all required backing and blocking in a timely manner. 2. Use trim head screws or nail trim with finishing nails of proper dimension to hold the member firmly in place without splitting the wood. 3. Anchor solid panels and wide pieces with provisions for movement perpendicular to grain. 4. On exposed finish work, set all nails and trim head screws for putty. 5. Screw, do not hammer -drive, all wood screws. Pre -drill if necessary to prevent splitting. 6. Align and space fasteners for uniform pattern where possible, no "shotgun" patterns will be accepted. 7. Countersink and plug flathead screw holes using wood plugs with grain parallel and coloring similar to piece being secured. F. Rated Wood Door Frames: Install in accordance with the fabricators instructions for maintenance of required fire rating. G. Site Finishing: 1. Set all exposed fasteners. 2. Apply matching wood filler to exposed fastener indentations. and other minor imperfections. 3. Retouch as necessary items which have been shop finished to conceal all damage and blemishes. Replace with new complying items those which cannot be successfully repaired. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Hardboard Wainscot Paneling: 1. Install over gypsum board using bugle head drywall screws•at 12 inches o.c. vertically, driven into metal studs behind, set screws flush with surface of fiberboard; space fiberboard edges 1/8 inch apart. 2. Wainscot height as indicated on Drawings. B. Hardboard Door Paneling: 1. Where doors are scheduled to receive hardboard, secure hardboard with #10 x 1 -1/4 inch oval head sheet metal screws or full thread wood screws, with trim washers, maximum 12 inches o.c., each way. 2. Trim hardboard facing even with door edge guards which are installed at both door edges under Section 087300, or install hardboard over door edge guards and hold -back 3/4 inch from door edges to accommodate frame stop. C. Hardboard Column Cladding: 1. Install over metal support framing, or shelving supports when applicable, using bugle head drywall screws at 12 inches o.c. vertically. Set screws flush with surface of fiberboard; space fiberboard edges 1/8 inch apart. 2. Cladding height as indicated on Drawings. 062000 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION — 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY D. Counter Top Substrate: Install plywood firmly screwed in place, flat, and level. Use single panels for each distinct vanity top. E. Install all other items in strict accordance with the Drawings, and the published recommendations of the manufacturer of the item, anchoring firmly in place at the prescribed location, straight, plumb, level, square, and securely anchored. 3.4 CLEANING UP A. Maintain the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly condition at all times during execution of this portion of the work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut -ends, and debris. B. At the end of each working day, or more often if necessary, thoroughly sweep and /or vacuum surfaces where refuse from this portion of the work has settled. C. Repair or replace or otherwise restore to new condition all items damaged by work of this Section. END OF SECTION 062000 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 064116 — PLASTIC- LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic laminate counters, splashes, and related work. 2. Plastic laminate diaper bars. 3. Plastic laminate lavatory counters and plumbing screens. B. Related Sections: 1. 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Support framing. 2. 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, latest edition. B. American Plywood Association (APA). C. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): Standard Publication No. LD -3. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate plans and elevations, details, dimensions, materials, and construction details. Include adjacent construction, blocking requirements, and methods of attachments. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI Specifications for "Custom" grade construction. B. Plywood: Provide grade and trademark identification of the American Plywood Association (APA). 1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver casework to building until "wet work" such as concrete, plaster and gypsum board work have been completed and cured. B. Storage: Store materials in dry place with adequate air circulation, avoiding excessive moisture, limiting average moisture content of wood to 8% or less at delivery time. C. Replacement: In the event of damage to components, immediately make all repairs or replace as necessary, to the approval of the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Concealed Framing Lumber: AWI Grade III, species at Contractor's option. B. Plywood: 1. APA, AC INT, species Group 1 or 2 at Contractor's option, 3/4 inch thickness unless otherwise indicated; touch sanded. 2. APA MARINE A -A; 3/4 inch thickness unless otherwise indicated. 064116 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 064116 — PLASTIC- LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS C. Particle Board: 1. Meeting Commercial Standard CS 236, Type 1, Density B, Classes 1 and 2; composed of wood particles bonded together with urea - formaldehyde, isocyanate or phenolic resin, with added sizing agents, under high temperatures and pressures into solid, uniformly thick boards, thickness as indicated on Drawings; in compliance with HUD standard 24CFR Part 3280.308 for formaldehyde emissions; Timblend by Weyerhaeuser, or equal. 2. Except for use in damp areas, minimum 45 -pcf density particle board or wood flakeboard in may be furnished in lieu of plywood for concealed components, at Contractor's option. D. Plastic Laminate: 1. Standard: NEMA LD3. 2. Types: a. General Purpose Grade: 0.050 inch thick for horizontal applications. b. Vertical Grade: 0.020 inch thick for vertical applications. c. Backing Grade: 0.020 inch thick, undecorated, for balanced construction. 3. Manufacturers, Colors, and Finishes: As scheduled. E. Accessories: 1. Furnish adhesives, fasteners, hardware, and other similar components for a complete installation. 2. Diaper Bar Straps (either of the following): a. "BCSK -100" by Brocar (800/827- 1207). b. "CRB- 1099NT -236" by Safe -Strap Company, Inc. (800/356- 7796). 3. Diaper Bar Pad: a. Foam: 1 inch thickness, minimum 2.9 Ib. density, sized to provide 1/2 inch gap at all four sides of diaper pad. b. Fabric: Naugahyde Spirit Millenium, 54 inches wide; Color: US -404 "Bone "; by Keyston Brothers; Tukwila, WA; Contact: Ken Sandahl, (206/575- 1113). c. Zipper: Boxed with top stitched seams, zipper in back boxing, 2.5cf nylon zip chain with finished edges. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components in accordance with relevant AWI standards, Custom Grade, and as specified below. B. Fabricate diaper bars and countertops from plywood, except countertops to receive plumbing fixtures shall be fabricated from MARINE plywood. C. Miscellaneous shelving shall be fabricated from plastic laminate covered particleboard, unless indicated otherwise. D. Fabricate wall panels for passenger elevator cab interiors from fire rated particleboard. E. Provide backing sheet on underside of all plastic laminate covered counters and to back side of _ _ plastic laminate faced wall panels for a balanced construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install items accurately, scribed plumb, square, and level, and permanently secured in precise position as indicated on the Drawings and approved shop drawings. B. Installation shall be made complete with all required fastenings, clip angles, braces, anchors, and other appurtenant fitting as required to render the work rigid and secure. C. Coordinate with work of other Sections for blocking requirements, installation of plumbing fixtures, connection to power, communications, and protection of installed work. D. Provide mechanical means of clamping fixtures so as to draw together individual fixtures forming group assembly using concealed or semi - concealed removable devices suitable for the purpose. 064116 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 064116 — PLASTIC- LAMINATE -CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS E. Exercise extreme care to avoid damaging finished surfaces. F. Repair blemishes arising from such operations, or other causes, or otherwise make good, in a manner approved by the Architect. G. Vanities and Diaper Bars: Scribe to fit; anchor securely to blocking and supports provided under other Sections. END OF SECTION 064116 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 070183 - REPLACEMENT FIREPROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Surface preparation and coordination work for patching of existing and incidental new fireproofing work. 2. Fireproofing materials. B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. C. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. E119 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. E605 - Standard Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire - Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members. 4. E736 - Standard Test Method for Cohesion /Adhesion of Sprayed Fire - Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members. 5. E759 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Deflection on Sprayed Fire- Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members. 6. E760 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Impact on Bonding of Sprayed Fire - Resistive Material Applied to Structural Members. 7. E761 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Sprayed Fire - Resistive Material Applied to Structural Members. 8. E859 - Standard Test Method for Air Erosion of Sprayed Fire - Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members. 9. E937 - Standard Test Method for Corrosion of Steel by Sprayed Fire- Resistive Material Applied to Structural Members. 10. G21 -80 - Standard Test Method to Evaluate Resistance of Synthetic Polymer Materials to Fungi. B. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Fire Resistance Directory (Latest Edition). C. AWCI Publication: Inspection Procedure for Field Applied Sprayed Fire Protection Materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers' Data: Instructions for proper application of sprayed replacement fireproofing. B. Test Data: Submit laboratory test results for the following performance criteria specified, upon request: 1. Bond Strength per ASTM E736. 2. Compressive Strength per ASTM E761. 3. Deflection per ASTM E759. 4. Bond Impact per ASTM E760. 5. Air Erosion per ASTM E859. 6. Corrosion Resistance per ASTM E937. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fireproofing work shall be performed by a firm acceptable to the sprayed replacement fireproofing materials manufacturer. B. Products, execution and fireproofing thicknesses shall conform to the applicable code requirements for the fire- resistance ratings called for. 070183 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 070183 - REPLACEMENT FIREPROOFING 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Section 016000. B. Material shall be delivered in original unopened packages, fully identified as to manufacturer, brand or other identifying data, and bearing the proper Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. labels for fire- resistance classification. C. Material shall be stored (above ground), under cover and in a dry location until ready for use. All bags that have been exposed to water before use shall be found unsuitable for use and discarded. Stock of material is to be rotated and used prior to its expiration date. 1.6 PROJECT /SITE CONDITIONS A. Maintain air and substrate temperature of 40 (4.4 minimum for 24 hours before, during and for 24 hours after application of the sprayed fireproofing. If necessary for job progress, provide enclosures with heat to maintain temperatures. B. Provide ventilation to allow for proper drying of the fireproofing during and subsequent to its application. In poorly ventilated areas lacking natural ventilation, forced air circulation shall be required to achieve a total air exchange rate of 4 times per hour until the material is substantially dry. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FIREPROOFING MATERIAL A. Fireproofing Material at Incidental New Work: 1. Isolatek International "Cafco Blaze Shield" spray applied fireproofing material. 2. Construction Products Division of W.R. Grace & Co "Monokote MK -6" cementitious fireproofing. B. Patching Material: Isolatek International "Cafco 300" or other patching material approved by the existing fire -rated assembly manufacturer and the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 2.2 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be comply with the following criteria. 1. Corrosion Resistance: In accordance with ASTM E937 without evidence of corrosion of the steel. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: in accordance with ASTM E84: a. Flame Spread: 0 b. Smoke Development: 0 B. The sprayed fireproofing material shall have been tested and reported by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. in accordance with the procedures of ASTM E119. C. Mixing Water: Free from mineral or organic substances as would affect the set of the fireproofing material. D. The fireproofing product shall be tested in accordance with ASTM Standard G- 21 -75, and shall show resistance to mold growth when inoculated with aspergillus niger, and mixed spore cultures, (Tappi T487 -M54 and ASTM G21 -80). Mold inhibitor shall be added by the manufacturer. E. The fireproofing material shall be free of mineral wool and application shall meet requirements of U.S. OSHA. regulation 29 CFR section 1926.58, for asbestos content. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify that all surfaces to receive sprayed replacement fireproofing are free of oil, grease, paints /primers, loose mill scale, dirt or other foreign substances which may impair proper adhesion of the fireproofing to the substrate. 070183 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 070183 - REPLACEMENT FIREPROOFING B. Verify that work of other trades has progressed to the point where fireproofing installation can begins. 1. Verify that clips, hangers, support sleeves and other attachments required to penetrate the fireproofing are in place. 2. Verify that ducts, piping, equipment or other suspended matter are not positioned so as to interfere with installation of fireproofing. 3. Prior to application of the replacement fireproofing to the underside of roof decks, all roofing applications shall be completed. All roof traffic shall be prohibited upon commencement of the fireproofing application and until the fireproofing material is cured and fully dried. 4. Prior to application of the replacement fireproofing to the underside of steel decking, concrete work above shall be complete. C. Provide masking, drop cloths or other satisfactory coverings so as to prevent the overspray of sprayed fireproofing. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Equipment and application procedure shall conform to the material manufacturer's application instructions. B. At new structural members to be fireproofed, spray apply fireproofing material in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Damage to existing fireproofing, including areas where fireproofing is removed to facilitate attachment of new items to fireproofed structural elements, and which are less than 3 square feet in surface area shall be patched using sprayed fireproofing material or fireproofing patching material. All patching and repairing of sprayed replacement fireproofing due to damage by the other trades, shall be performed under this section. Payment for fireproofing work not indicated in the Contract Documents shall be paid for under provisions of Section 012000. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Work of this Section is subject to testing and inspection in accordance with Section 014500. 3.4 CLEANING A. After the completion of replacement fireproofing work, remove application equipment. Remove overspray and clean surfaces not indicated for fireproofing. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Provide fireproofing at new structural members, and as necessary to restore original fire rating to existing steel structural members, on which fireproofing has been damaged by work under this General Contract. B. Fire - Resistance Rating (time in hours) schedule shall be as follows: 1. Primary Structure (columns and members framing into columns): 3HR 2. Exterior Wall Framing: 4HR 3. Secondary Roof Structure (members not framing into columns): 2HR END OF SECTION 070183 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 078400 — FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Firestopping systems for sealing penetrations through fire rated construction. B. Related Sections: 1. 078500 - Fire Rated Joints. 2. Division 22 - Plumbing: Penetrating elements. 3. Division 26 - Electrical: Penetrating elements. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. E814 - Methods for Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Fire Stops. B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 1479 - Fill, Void or Cavity Materials and Through- Penetration Firestop Systems. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Each firestopping system shall be selected to maintain fire rating of the assembly in which it is used. B. Firestopping systems shall be resilient as necessary to accommodate differential movement between assemblies. C. Where firestopping is used to seal penetrations through floors with waterproof membranes, system shall be selected for compatibility with membrane material. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code Verification: Prior to installation of fire stopping systems obtain approval from the jurisdictional Code authorities for the fire stopping systems and applications proposed. B. Firestopping: 1. Tested in accordance with ASTM E119, ASTM E814, or UL 1479 to meet the hourly fire ratings of the construction being sealed. 2. Provide F rated assemblies, except where T rated assemblies are required by the code authority. 3. Firestopping systems shall be UL listed assemblies. C. Firestopping system components shall be in compliance with the requirements of Los Angeles County. 1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with provisions of Section 016000. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Maintain maximum ventilation to remove volatile emissions produced during the installation process. 078400 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 078400 — FIRESTOPPING PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Systems meeting the requirements specified and suitable for the conditions indicated. B. Systems with sodium silicate shall not be used. C. Electrical Box Inserts: 1. Manufacturer: Rectorseal, Houston, TX (713/263 -8001; 800/231- 3345). 2. Fire Rated Pads: BioFireshield LECTRA -STOP; 1/4 inch thick intumescent pads; sized to fit electrical boxes; classified by UL; minimum 2 hour rating. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Installation Accessories: Angle clips, horizontal angles, impailing pins with sheet metal shields, and other components recommended by system manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping systems in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as necessary to meet the indicated fire rating requirements. B. Provide firestopping at plumbing, mechanical, and electrical, penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and ceilings, and other locations as indicated on the Drawings. C. Where firestopping is used to seal around penetrations through waterproof membranes, install to maintain integrity of waterproof barrier. D. For sealing electrical boxes, coordinate installation with Division 26. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for preparation and installation. Install in locations as required by Code for protection of openings through fire rated partitions. 3.3 PATCHING OF HOLES IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION A. Fill open holes which remain after removal of existing mechanical, electrical, and plumbing components. Patch and repair holes as necessary to match the adjacent construction and to maintain the fire rating of the assemblies. Firestopping systems may be used to fill holes which will be concealed in the finish construction. B. Where firestopping systems are used to fill floor openings in occupied areas, provide minimum 16 gage sheet metal covers as necessary to support floor loads and to prevent damage to the fire stopping assemblies. Secure sheet metal as necessary to prevent irregularities from telegraphing through the floor finishes over the sheet metal. 3.4 CLEANING A. Trim excess material flush with adjacent surface. B. Remove spills, leave area in undamaged, clean condition. END OF SECTION 078400 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 079200 — JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cleaning and preparation of joint surfaces. 2. Sealant and backing materials. 3. Compressible foam tape. B. Related Sections: 1. 078400 - Firestopping: Fire penetration sealants. 2. 088000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants. 3. 093000 - Tiling: Control joints in ceramic tile fields; mock -up. 4. 098100 - Acoustic Insulation: Acoustical sealant. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit product literature for each material used. C. Samples: 1. Type PT Sealant: Submit 3 samples of each color selected. Samples shall be tooled into 1/2 inch wide 3 inch long channels. 2. Other Sealants: Submit samples from manufacturer's full line of pre - formulated colors for Architect's color selection D. Guarantee Drafts: Concurrent with initial product data submittal, submit a draft of installer's guarantee for Architect's review. E. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Schedule of sealant colors and respective locations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installers: Use only skilled workmen specially trained in the techniques of sealing, and familiar with the published recommendations of the manufacturers of the sealants being used. B. Verify that sealants are compatible with the substrates and accessory materials provided under other Sections. Notify Architect of evidence of incompatibility. C. Conferences: 1. Attend building envelope conference as specified in Section 013119. 2. Attend pre - installation conference as specified in Section 093000. D. Mock Ups: Provide control joint sealant as a part of the tile mock -up specified in Section 093000. 1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. In accordance with Section 016000. B. Containers shall bear manufacturer's shelf life expiration date. Sealants outdated shall not be used. Keep backing rods dry and away from dirt and other contaminants at all times. 079200 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. In accordance with Section 016000, and as follows: 1. Do not apply sealant when ambient temperatures are below 40 degrees F, or expected to fall below 40 degrees F before sealant cure is complete. 2. Do not apply sealant to substrates or accessories that are moist. 1.7 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish a 1 year installer guarantee in accordance with Section 017700. B. Guarantee against defects in installation including, without limitation, adhesion failure. 1.8 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY A. Furnish Type S sealant manufacturer's standard materials warranty. B. Warranty against defects in materials including, without limitation, the following: 1. Cohesive failure. 2. Staining of surfaces adjacent to joints by sealant or primer, 3. Chalking or visible color change on surfaces of the cured sealant. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Furnish sealants of a single listed manufacturer for each type specified. With the exception of sealant types indicated as "No substitution," substitutions will be considered under provisions of Section 016000. 2.2 EXTERIOR SEALANTS A. Type P2 - Multi- Component Polyurethane, Non -Sag Type: 1. ChemRex, Inc. "Sonolastic NP 2." 2. Pecora Corporation "Dynatrol II." 3. Tremco Incorporated "Dymeric 240." B. Type S: Silicone Non - Traffic Bearing Sealants: 1. ChemRex, Inc. "Sonolastic Omniseal." 2. Dow Corning Corporation "Dow Corning 790." 3. General Electric Co. "Silpruf." 4. Pecora Corporation "864 Silicone." 5. Tremco Incorporated "Spectrem 1." 2.3 INTERIOR SEALANTS A. Type P2 - Multi- Component Polyurethane, Non -Sag Type: 1. ChemRex, Inc. "Sonolastic NP 2." 2. Pecora Corporation "Dynatrol II." 3. Tremco Incorporated " Dymeric 240 FC." B. Type PT - Polyurethane Traffic Joint Sealant: Multi- Component Polyurethane, Non -Sag Type: Pecora "Dynatred"; no substitutions. C. Type SM - Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: 1. ChemRex, Inc. "Sonolastic Omniplus." 2. Dow Corning Corporation "Dow Corning 786." 3. General Electric Co. "GE Sanitary SCS1700." 4. Tremco Incorporated "Tremsil 600." D. Type A - Single Component Acrylic Sealant: 1. ChemRex, Inc. "Sonolac." 2. Pecora Corporation "Pecora AC -20+ Silicone." 3. Tremco Incorporated "Tremflex 834." 079200 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 079200 — JOINT SEALANTS E. Type R - Clear Sealant: 1. Sherwin- Williams "Pro Select" 950A; (800/321- 8194). 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non - corrosive and non - staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Backing Materials: 1. Foam Backer Rod: Round profile, sized 125 to 150 percent of normal joint width. a. Interior: Open celled polyurethane foam, compatible with sealant. b. Exterior: Closed cell polyethylene foam rod, unless otherwise recommended by the sealant manufacturer: 2. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. D. Related Accessories: Cleaners, gaskets, fillers, dams, and other accessories, as required for proper installation of scheduled sealants. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. Remove loose materials and other matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. B. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width /depth ratios. C. Except as otherwise specified, install backer rods to achieve proper sealant width / depth ratios, in accordance with the respective sealant manufacturers' printed instructions. D. Use bond breaker tape at joints where depth or profile of joint does not permit use of backer rod. E. Apply masking tightly around joints to protect adjacent areas from excess sealant. Masking tape shall be removed as soon as practical after joint has been filled and tooled. 3.3 SEALANT INSTALLATION A. Install types of sealants scheduled, in colors as approved by the Architect, for each location where sealant is required. B. Perform work in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Tile Control Joints: 1. Include accelerator at Contractor's option; proportion and mix in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Install sealant without backer rod to full depth of joint. Tool to slightly concave profile. D. Apply sealant to uniform thickness in continuous beads, filling joints solid. After application tool joints to achieve complete adhesion and contact; leave surface slightly concave, unless indicated otherwise. Finish free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. Tooling shall be completed in one continuous stroke. 079200 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 079200 — JOINT SEALANTS E. Installation of sealant, adjacent to a sealant of a different type, may be done only after the adjacent sealant has cured. 3.4 CLEANUP A. Clean adjacent surfaces free of excess sealant as work progresses. Use cleaning agents recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect all installed sealants from damage due to inclement weather or excessive temperatures until curing is complete. B. Cover and protect traffic sealants from normal traffic until sealant is fully cured; protect from damage due to construction traffic, cleaning operations, incompatible chemicals, and soil until time of Owner occupancy. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Type P2 - Multi- Component Polyurethane Non -Sag Type: 1. Provide at joints in stone tile and joints between stone tile and adjacent construction. 2. Provide at interior joints in exterior through -wall penetrations. 3. Furnish colors as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's full line of pre - formulated colors. B. Type S - Silicone Non - Traffic Bearing Sealant: 1. Provide at exterior non - traffic bearing joints, including the following major items: a. Exterior non - traffic bearing joints, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Furnish standard colors as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's full line of colors. C. Type PT Multi- Component Polyurethane, Traffic Joint Sealant: 1. Provide at control joints in ceramic, porcelain, and stone the flooring. 2. Refer to Finish Legend for colors. D. Type SM - Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: 1. Provide at countertop backsplashes and restroom plumbing fixtures. 2. Color: a. Furnish white at sink rim. b. Provide translucent at counter material, backsplashes, etc. E. Type A - Acrylic Interior Joint Sealant: 1. Provide at all interior sealant joints, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Furnish standard colors as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's full line of colors. F. Type R - Clear Sealant: 1. Provide at: a. Unframed, exposed mirror edges, between the backside of the mirror surface and the wall finish. b. Dressing Room partitions as specified in Section 097200. END OF SECTION 079200 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 081113 — HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Hollow metal doors and frames. B. Related Sections: 1. 087100 - Door Hardware: Preparation requirements. 2. 087300 - Door and Hardware Installation: Installation; tolerances; hardware locations. 3. 088000 - Glazing: Installation of glass. 4. 099000 - Painting: Finishing of doors and frames. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Steel Door Institute (SDI): 1. ANSI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold- Rolled, Commercial Quality. 2. A569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot - Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. 3. A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Hollow Metal and Technical Design Manual. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 80 - Fire Doors and Fire Windows. 2. 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assembles. E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests Of Door Assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature for doors and frames, including factory- applied primer. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Frames: Indicate configuration, anchor types and spacings, locations and reinforcement for hardware, and finish. 2. Doors: Indicate elevations, internal reinforcement, closures, locations and sizes for glazing, locations and reinforcement for hardware, welding of door edges, and finish. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Door and frame design shall be based on the requirements of the Steel Door Institute. B. Codes and Standards: Comply with pertinent codes, regulations, and the following standards: 1. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) as applicable to fire rated hollow metal doors and frames. 2. NAAMM, recommended installation practices. C. Where doors are noted with an hourly fire resistance rating, provide door and frame assemblies labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory, or any other testing laboratory approved by the local Code authorities having jurisdiction, to meet the hourly fire rating noted. 081113 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 081113 — HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES D. Fire -Rated Door Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire- protection ratings indicated. E. Fire rated openings shall meet NFPA 252 or UL 10C requirements for positive pressure. 1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Section 016000. B. Provide packaging such as cardboard or other containers, separators, banding, spreaders, and paper wrappings as required to completely protect all metal doors and frames during transportation and storage. C. Store doors upright, in a protected dry area, at least one inch off the ground and with at least 1/4 inch air space between individual pieces; protect all prefinished surfaces. D. Break seal in airtight packages to permit ventilation. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Hollow metal manufacturer shall be a member of SDI or NAAMM, subject to compliance with specification requirements. B. All hollow metal doors and frames shall be products of a single manufacturer. 2.2 METAL DOORS A. Type and Design: Full -flush design, in the dimensions, types, labeled and non - labeled, as indicated on the Door Schedule; steel reinforced or laminated core, except as otherwise specified or restricted by Code requirements. B. Fabrication: 1. Face Sheets: ASTM A366 or A653, as applicable; minimum 18 gage steel for interior doors and 16 gage steel for exterior doors. 2. Internal Components: ASTM A366 or A569, gage as recommended by door manufacturer. 3. Close top and bottom edges of doors with steel channel minimum 16 gage extending full width of door, spot welded to both faces; close top edges of exterior doors flush with steel filler cap; seal joints watertight. 4. Reinforce steel stiffened doors with minimum 22 gage vertical stiffeners, spaced 6 inches o.c. and welded to face material; completely fill core with mineral sound - deadening material, minimum 1 pcf density. 5. Reinforce laminated core doors with impregnated Kraft paper honeycomb, bonded polystyrene, or bonded urethane core. 6. Polyurethane or polystyrene foam core at exterior doors. 7. Continuously weld door edges for the full length and grind smooth. 8. Fabricate openings for glazing where indicated, perimeter of opening reinforced and closed with steel channel; provide 18 gage steel glazing stops, removable type secured with oval head sheet metal screws, neatly mitered at corners. C. Sizes: Dimensions on Door Schedule refer to frame opening sizes to the rabbet. D. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inch, unless otherwise scheduled or detailed. E. Clearances: Fabricate for 1/8 inch clearance at head and each jamb, 1/8 inch between pairs of doors, 3/8 inch clearance from hard surface finish floor, 3/4 inch from hard surface beneath doors at openings indicated to receive carpeting, and 3/16 inch clearance above top of threshold. 081113 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 081113 — HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2.3 WELDED METAL FRAMES A. Type and Design: Double rabbet, unless otherwise detailed, full welded. Fabricate frames with throat dimensions as indicated. Provide 1 inch returns at exterior frames as detailed. B. Fabrication: 1. ASTM A366 or A653 steel, as applicable. 2. Minimum 16 gage for frames with door openings up to and including 4 feet in width; 14 gage for frames with openings greater than 4 feet in width. 3. Weld frames with corners accurately fitted; grind welds smooth. 4. At masonry walls, provide minimum 22 gage mortar guard boxes to protect hardware preparation from mortar. 5. Drill frames for rubber silencers, except not required at frames where compression type stop mounted seals are indicated; drill for 3 silencers at each strike jamb, and 2 silencers per door at head above double doors. 6. Provide removable spreader at bottoms of three sided frames. 7. Interior Window /Relite Frames: Configure for glazing from room exterior side. C. Anchors: Provide jamb anchors as required by wall conditions; not less than 3 anchors per jamb, spacing not to exceed 2' -0" o.c. Provide floor anchors welded to frames with provision for 2 anchor bolts into floor at each clip. D. Mullions and transom bars shall be tubular construction with members butt welded to head and jambs and ground smooth. 2.4 FIRE DOORS AND FRAMES A. Provide Underwriters' Laboratories or Warnock Hersey label on doors and frames where fire rating is scheduled or required. 2.5 HARDWARE PREPARATION A. Secure templates from finish hardware supplier; mortise, reinforce, drill and tap at the factory for mortised door hardware in accordance with hardware templates. B. Prepare for hardware locations as specified in Section 087300. C. Universal non - handed preparation of doors for butts is not acceptable. D. Doors and frames shall be properly reinforced for specified hardware with reinforcement adequate for secure permanent attachment and to prevent warping or buckling of surfaces. E. Reinforcing: 1. For butts, closers, and other similar moving items: Minimum 3/16 inch steel. 2. Reinforcing for each butts: Minimum 10 -1/2" x 1 -1/2" on hinge side of door and frame. 3. Reinforce for locking and latching devices: Per specifications of hardware manufacturer. 4. Reinforce for closers: Full width of door and locate on frame per template of closer manufacturer. 2.6 FINISH A. Exterior Doors and Frames: 1. Hot dip galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A653 A60 (.60 oz/sq ft. coating weight). 2. Include reinforcing and other internal components 3. Use zinc rich primer to touch -up galvanized coatings damaged during fabrication operations. B. Pre -clean all steel doors and frames and factory apply primer appropriate to the substrate, in preparation for finish painting to be performed under Section 099000. 081113 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 081113 — HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install metal frames in strict accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the approved shop drawings, and the manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Installation of metal doors is specified in Section 083619. B. Comply with ANSI A250.11 for erection of metal frames. C. Set frames accurately in position; plumb, align, and brace securely until permanent anchors are set; anchor bottom of frames to floors with expansion bolts or with powder driven fasteners; and build wall anchors into walls or secure to adjoining construction as indicated, specified, or required. D. Set frames indicated for installation in masonry walls in place, braced, and ready for installation of masonry. Furnish jamb anchors to the appropriate trade for installation. END OF SECTION 081113 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 081400 — WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic laminate faced flush wood doors. 2. Flat -panel stile and rail doors. B. Related Sections: 1. 062000 - Finish Carpentry: Wood door frames and casings; application of hardboard faces; transparent finishes for wood doors. 2. 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Metal frames to receive wood doors. 3. 087100 - Door Hardware. 4. 087300 - Door and Hardware Installation: Installation; tolerances; hardware locations. 5. 088000 - Glazing: Installation of glass. 6. 099000 — Painting and Coating: Transparent finishes for wood veneer doors. 7. 123563 - Dressing Room Casework: Wood louvered doors at dressing room partitions. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Woodwork Institute (AWI): Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, latest edition. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 80 - Fire Doors and Fire Windows. C. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): As applicable to fire rated doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Refinishing Of Existing Doors: 1. Touch -Up: For doors that require only minor surface repair, including filling minor chips and scratches, and re- touching of stain to match existing color. 2. Refinishing: For doors needing more extensive repairs or a change in finish, remove door, provide a complete refinish as scheduled, and reinstall. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 0133000. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature for each type of door. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing elevation of each door type, door sizes, thickness, glazed vision lites, glazing stops, and define materials used in construction of each type of door. D. Project Closeout Submittals: 1. Conform to Section 017700. 2. Warranty: Submit specified warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to requirements of the jurisdictional Code authorities. 2. Where doors are noted with an hourly fire resistance rating, provide assemblies labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory, or other testing laboratory approved by the local code authorities, to meet the hourly fire rating noted. 3. Installed doors and frames shall conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated. B. Furnish products of the same manufacturer for each type of door indicated. 081400 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 081400 - WOOD DOORS 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors after building is enclosed, heated, and dry. B. Protection: Use means necessary to protect wood and plastic doors before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of other trades. 1.7 WARRANTY • A. Furnish manufacturer's warranties in accordance with Section 017700. B. Solid Core Flush Doors: Provide for replacing wood doors, including cost of rehanging and refinishing, at no cost to Owner, doors exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship, including delamination, visible telegraphing of core, and warp in excess of 1/4 inch in the plane of the door, at any time during the life of the installation. 1.8 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers listed are acceptable, subject to compliance with Drawings and specification requirements. B. Flush Doors: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. (800/678- 8910). 2. Eggers Industries (920/722- 6444). 3. Marshfield Door Systems (800/869- 3667). 4. Graham Manufacturing (Div of Essex Industries) (800/377- 3948). 5. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. (717/473- 3557). 6. VT Industries (800/827- 1615). C. Stile and Rail Doors: 1. Karona, Inc. (800/829- 9233). 2. Eggers Industries (920/722- 6444). 3. Maiman Co. (800/641- 4320). 2.2 INTERIOR DOORS A. Flush Doors: 1. Face Veneers: a. Opaque Finish Doors (Scheduled as PW): Birch, rotary cut, AWI Grade A. b. Plastic Laminate Doors (Scheduled as PL): 0.050 inch thick; color, pattern, and finish as scheduled. 2. Size: 1 -3/4 inch thick x size indicated. 3. Construction: a. Standard: AWI Premium Grade. b. AWI 1300 -S -7 and S -8 with particle board core for non -rated doors, and AWI 1300 -S -13 with mineral core for rated doors, unless indicated or specified otherwise. c. Provide 5 inch top rail at fire rated doors. d. For plastic laminate faced doors, provide plastic laminate edges with faces applied after edge strips. 4. Core Assembly: Conform to AWI PC -5 or PC -7, core bonded to stiles and rails. 5. Fire Rated Doors: Conform to AWI FD -5 or FD -7. 6. Vision Lite Frames and Stops: a. Plastic Laminate Doors: Manufacturer's standard design, finished under the following conditions: 1) At Wood Door Frames: Vision lite frame finish shall match the wood door frame finish. 2) At Hollow Metal Door Frames: Vision lite frame shall be painted to match the plastic laminate door face, same as the HM door frame. 081400 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 081400 — WOOD DOORS B. Flat -Panel Stile and Rail Doors (Transparent Finish): 1. Veneer - Laminated Center Panel: a. Core: 1 /4 inch plywood suitable for adhering wood veneer. b. Veneer: Hard Maple (Acer saccharum), Select White, AWI Premium Grade AA, sapwood, flat -cut, book - matched. 2. Stile and Rail Lumber: Hard maple (Acer saccharum), AWI Grade 1, sapwood; free of mineral stains; limited figure; plain sawn. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood doors in accordance with the referenced AWI Standards for the grades specified. B. Coordinate with Sections 062000, 081113, and requirements of Section 087300 for fitting of doors and hardware to frames. C. Provide fire rating label on fire rated doors. D. Finishing: Transparent finish wood doors shall be shop finished as a part of the work of Section 099000. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation of wood doors is specified in Section 087300. • END OF SECTION 081400 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 083100 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fire rated and non -rated access doors and frames. B. Related Sections: 1. 012200 - Unit Prices: Description of unit prices. 2. 092200 - Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board: Framing of openings for access doors. 3. 092900 - Gypsum Board: Installation of gypsum board in concealed drywall access doors. 4. 099000 - Painting: Field paint finish. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Include types, sizes, finishes, and scheduled locations. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where an access door is required in fire rated construction, the access door assembly shall be labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory, Warnock Hersey, or any other testing laboratory approved by the jurisdictional Code authorities, to meet the hourly fire resistance rating of the construction in which the access door is installed 1.4 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. JL Industries, Bloomington, MN; (800/554- 6077). 2. Karp Associates, Inc., Maspeth, NY; (800/888- 4212). 3. The Williams Brothers Corporation for America, Front Royal, VA; (800/255- 5515). 4. Milcor Limited Partnership, Lima, OH; (800/528- 1411). 5. Nystrom Products Co., Minneapolis, MN; (612781- 7850). 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fire Rated Wall Access Doors: 1. Flush type design. 2. Exposed flange, 3/4 to 1 inch. 3. 16 gage steel frame; minimum 20 gage welded door panel insulated with non - combustible filler. 4. Self- closing and self - latching, with interior latch release. 5. Fully concealed pin type hinges or continuous piano hinge, 175 degree opening. 6. Ring turn latch. B. Non Rated Wall Access Doors: 1. Flush type design. 2. 16 gage steel frame; 14 gage door panel. 3. For installation in gypsum board, masonry, and other similar surfaces: Equip with attachment flange and drywall bead for installation in gypsum board assemblies; exposed flange at other conditions. 4. Fully concealed pin type hinges or continuous piano hinge, 175 degree opening. 083100 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 083100 — ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 5. Screwdriver operated cam latch; number of units in accordance with manufacturers standards, except minimum of 2 at ceiling assemblies. C. Non Rated Concealed Drywall Access Doors: 1. Recessed type design. 2. Minimum 16 -gage frame; minimum 16 -gage door panel recessed to receive gypsum board. 3. Integral attachment flange and drywall bead for flush installation. 4. Fully concealed pin type hinges or continuous piano hinge, 175 degree opening. 5. Screwdriver operated cam latch; number of units in accordance with manufacturers standards, except minimum of 2 at ceiling assemblies. D. Sizes: 12 x 12 inch size for hand access, 22 x 22 or 24 x 24 inch size for man entry, unless indicated otherwise. E. Finish: 1. Galvanized steel with wiped coat finish; prime units with manufacturer's standard primer to receive field paint coating as specified in Section 099000. 2. Stainless Steel access doors for use in Toilet Rooms at locations and sizes as indicated on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. B. Beginning of installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install access doors at locations requiring access to balancing and fire dampers, trap primers, valves, fans, terminal units, and other similar equipment requiring periodic inspection through finished walls and ceilings, whether indicated or not. Coordinate access requirements with other trades. B. Provide concealed access doors at public locations such as at Sales Floor, Customer Service and Elevator Lobby areas, except where fire rated doors are required. C. Install square, plumb, and level in wall and ceiling openings, with plane of door surface in accurate alignment with plane of wall or ceiling surface. D. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. • E. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 083100 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 087100 — DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Door hardware and related accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. 017700 - Closeout Procedures: Closeout submittal of keys. 2. 062000 - Finish Carpentry: Wood door frames. 3. 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Coordination and preparation for hardware. 4. 081400 - Wood Doors: Coordination and preparation for hardware. 5. 083323 - Overhead Coiling Doors: Keyed controls; coordinate cylinder requirements. 6. 084000 — Entrances, Storefronts, and Curtain Walls: Pivots, automatic operators, bottom rail deadlocks, closers, and thresholds. 7. 087300 - Door and Hardware Installation. 8. 109013 - Miscellaneous Specialties: Door mounted coat hooks and security key box. 9. 283100 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm system. 10. Division 26 - Electrical: Service and control power for electronic hardware. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Except where indicated otherwise, substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and catalog cut sheets for each item. C. Samples: Submit samples of each plastic laminate color specified for push plates and kick plates. D. Hardware Schedules: 1. Submit schedule in vertical format, as defined by the American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants, indicating types of hardware and quantity required for each opening. List each door separately. 2. Use same reference numbers for openings as Drawings. 3. Use same symbols and codes as referenced in this Section. 4. Include abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in submitted schedule. 5. Include name and manufacturer of each item. 6. Include door size, door and frame materials and type, and handing for each opening. 7. Include type, quantity, style, model number, function, size, finish, fastenings, and other pertinent data for each item. 8. Indicate degrees of opening for closers, overhead stops, overhead holders, and other similar hardware items. 9. Hardware Schedule shall be sealed and signed by an AHC, employed by the Supplier, certifying submittal is in compliance with the Project Drawings and Specifications. 10. Submittals that do not comply with these requirements will be returned for correction without review. E. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule for Owner's review after Hardware Schedule has been reviewed by Architect. Submittal to Architect is not required. F. Templates: 1. Furnish templates and approved Hardware Schedule to door and frame fabricators and hardware installers. Where a fabricator cannot work to paper templates, furnish physical hardware. 2. Ship templates and physical hardware to factories of respective manufacturers; prepay costs for shipping and delivery. G. Wiring Diagrams: Submit layout and wiring diagrams for electronic hardware. 087100 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 087100 — DOOR HARDWARE H. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Comply with provisions of Section 017700. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: a. Include catalog cut for each item and associated maintenance instructions. b. Include instructions on operation, adjustment, servicing, and lubrication. c. Include parts list for replaceable parts. 3. Maintenance Tools: Deliver special tools to Owner. 4. Warranty: Submit specified warranty for closers. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to requirements of the jurisdictional Code authorities. 2. Where openings are noted with an hourly fire resistance rating, provide hardware components labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory, or other testing laboratory approved by the local jurisdictional Code authorities, to meet the hourly fire rating noted. 3. Hardware shall conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated. 4. Comply with provisions of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) including ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ANSI A117.1 to accommodate barrier free design. B. Supplier: 1. Hardware shall be supplied by a recognized builder's hardware supplier who has furnished hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of not less than 5 years. 2. The supplier's organization shall include a certified member of the American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants who is available at reasonable times during the course of the work to meet with the Owner, Architect, or Contractor for project hardware consultation. 3. The AHC shall affix their seal to the front page of the submitted hardware schedule certifying their review and compliance with the Drawings and specifications. C. General Requirements: 1. Hardware has been specified by manufacturer's name, brand and catalog numbers for purpose of establishing basis for quality, design and operational function. 2. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, equivalent products from other listed manufacturers are also acceptable. 3. Provide designated product, or where more than one product or manufacturer is listed, provide equivalent product of one of other listed manufacturers. 4. Obtain each type of hardware from single manufacturer. 5. Review Drawings and Door Schedules thoroughly and provide required hardware for all openings, including openings which may have been inadvertently omitted from Hardware Schedules. 6. Should an opening be omitted or an opening not indicated in Hardware Schedule, provide hardware of same quality, design and function as specified for similar openings. 7. Furnish hardware complete with brackets, plates, fittings, and other accessories required for installation. 8. Provide screws, nuts, bolts, through - bolts, washers, grommets, and other fastening devices necessary for proper installation of hardware; match finish of hardware being attached. Non- ferrous or corrosion resistant type required where exposed to exterior atmosphere. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver hardware in manufacturers' original unopened undamaged packages, clearly identifying manufacturer, brand name, and contents. B. In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements as necessary. C. Mark each item of hardware as to description and location of installation in accordance with approved hardware schedule. D. Protect the finish on hardware before, during and after installation. 087100 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 087100 — DOOR HARDWARE 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty stating closers will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HARDWARE A. Furnish hardware items as specified and in accordance with Hardware Schedule at end of this Section. 2.2 FINISHES A. Refer to Door Schedule for locations of hardware finishes. B. Where hardware is scheduled with US26D finish, stainless steel items shall have US32D finish, aluminum thresholds shall have a mill finish, other aluminum items shall have clear anodized finish, and closers shall have sprayed aluminum finish. C. Where hardware is scheduled with US26D finish, US15 satin nickel plated finish will be permitted for butts. D. Provide manufacturer's standard prime coat finish for removable mullions, coordinators, metal astragals, and other similar items. Prime coated devices will be field painted under Section 099000. E. Provide Architect - selected finish to face of key- switch cylinders at Mall Entries. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION KEYING A. Provide keyed construction cylinders for all locking hardware. B. Cylinder housings shall accommodate 7 pin interchangeable core cylinders. C. Construction cylinders shall remain the property of the hardware supplier and shall be returned by the Contractor after installation of the permanent cores. D. Provide 20 Construction keys. E. Provide 3 Construction Control keys. 2.4 PERMANENT KEY SYSTEM A. Provide keyed permanent cores for all locking hardware. B. Permanent cores and keys to be purchased by hardware supplier from the following: ASG Security Group P.O. Box 19155 Seattle, WA 98109 Tel: (206) 284 -3553 C. Hardware supplier to provide complete hardware schedule with order for permanent cores and keys. D. Provide permanent cores and keys for locked dressing room doors. Locks are furnished by the partition manufacturer. Quantity of cores: 131. E. Owner's authorized representative will coordinate keying requirements with ASG Security Group. Permanent cores and keys to be shipped directly to Owner's representative via prepaid registered mail /UPS. F. Furnish keys of nickel silver material in following quantities: 1. Great Grand Master Keys (GGMK) 6 2. Grand Master Keys (GMK): 6 3. Master Keys (MK - each set): 6 087100 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE 4. Change Keys (per lock): 2 5. Keyed Alike Sets (each set): 6 6. Emergency Control Keys (each type): 6 G. Key Control System: 1. Key cabinet will be furnished and installed by Owner. 2. Furnish keys in key envelopes, properly identified with permanent tags. 2.5 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Furnish 2 sets of special tools required for installation, adjusting, and maintenance of hardware. 2.6 DOOR HARDWARE A. Butts: 1. Manufacturer Listed: McKinney, Scranton, PA. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hager Hinge Co., St. Louis, MO. b. Lawrence Brothers, Inc., Sterling, IL. c. Stanley Hardware Division of The Stanley Works, New Britain, CT. 3. Minimum Number: a. Doors 5' -0" or less in height: One pair. b. Door over 5' -0" and not over 7' -6 ": 1 -1/2 pair. c. Doors over 7' -6 ": One for each additional 2' -6" height or fraction thereof. 4. Sizes: 4 -1/2 x 4 -1/2 inch, except where indicated otherwise. 5. Pins: Provide non - removable pins for out - swinging exterior doors and for interior reverse bevel doors equipped with locking device. Non - rising pin for other doors. 6. Types: a. B1: TA2714. b. B2: TA2314. c. B3: T4A3786, 5 X 4 -1/2. d. B4: T4A3386, 5 X 4 -1/2. e. B5: 1502. f. B6: 1522, set of 3. g. B7: Bommer 1002H 4 X 4. B. Cylinders: 1. Manufacturer Listed: Sargent, New Haven, CT with 65 -7P- 7300 -B cores. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturer: Best Lock Corporation, Indianapolis, IN. 3. Provide cylinders for locksets, deadlocks, exit devices, keyed switches, keyed control stations and remote keyed switches for overhead coiling doors, and other control and locking devices indicated in Hardware Schedule or indicated in other specification sections. 4. Interchangeable core seven pin tumbler design. 5. Equip with appropriate rings. 6. Finish cylinders and rings to match trim of locking device. 7. Provide appropriate cams as required by the specific locking device; verify requirements with the lock manufacturer. C. Mortise Latchsets, Locksets, and Deadlocks: 1. Manufacturer Listed: Sargent, New Haven, CT. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturer: Best Lock Corporation, Indianapolis, IN. 3. Latchset and Lockset Design: Sargent 8200 Series, LNL. 4. Deadlock Design: Sargent 4870 Series. 5. Latch Bolt: One piece anti - friction, 3/4 inch throw. 6. Dead Bolt: 1 inch throw. 7. Types: a. L1: 72 -43. b. L2: 72 -43; for installation at door operator keyswitch. c. L3: 72 -8204. d. L4: 8213. e. L5: 8215. 087100 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 087100 — DOOR HARDWARE f. L6: 72 -8216. g. L7: 72 -8226. h. L8: 72 -8245. i. L9: 49 -8265 with indicator. j. L10: 72 -76 -8204. k. L11: 72 -4876. I. L12: 49 -8265 SPL with indicator and non - locking outside lever. 8. Provide strikes with minimum projection to protect trim. 9. Provide wrought or plastic boxes. 10. Provide levers with knurled or abrasive coated tactile warning at storage, janitor, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and other similar hazardous locations. D. Combination Lockset: 1. Manufacturer: Sargent, New haven, CT. 2. Types: a. L1A: 72- KP8276 LNL with ASA strike. b. L2A: 72- KP8278 LNL E. Exit Devices: 1. Manufacturer: Sargent, New Haven, CT; no substitution. 2. Design: Sargent 80 Series, ETL design. 3. Underwriters Laboratory Inc. listed for "Accident Equipment List - Panic Hardware" at exit assemblies. 4. Underwriters Laboratory Inc. listed for "Fire Exit Hardware" at labeled assemblies. 5. Exterior trim shall have provisions for through - bolting directly to center cases. 6. Types: a. ED1: 8810. b. ED2: 12 -8810. c. ED3: 12 -8815 x ETL. d. ED4: 72 -12 -8813 x ETL. e. ED5: 72 -8804 x ETL. f. ED6: 12 -NB -8715 x ETL. g. ED7: Not used. h. ED8: 72 -76 -12 -8804 x ETL. F. Removable Mullions: 1. Manufacturer Listed: Sargent, New Haven, CT. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Von Duprin, Inc., Indianapolis, IN. 3. Equip with adjustable strikes. 4. Types: a. ED9: 12 -L980, or L980S for non -rated applications. b. ED10: 72- EL980, electrical lockable mullion. G. Door Closers: 1. Manufacturer Listed: Sargent, New Haven, CT. 2. Other Acceptable Products and Manufacturer: 4041 Series, 4010 -SED and 4110 -SED Series as applicable, LCN Closers, Princeton, IL. 3. Types: a. C1: 281 -0. b. C2: 281 -P10. c. C3: 281 -CPS. d. C4: 281 -B inverted drop plate. e. C5: 2467 electro- mechanical without integral detector. f. C6: 2497 electro- mechanical without integral detector. 4. Provide closers for each leaf at pairs of doors, except where indicated otherwise in the Hardware Schedule at end of this Section. 5. Size as recommended by the manufacturer for door size and weight. 6. Adjust closer pressures as specified in Section 087300, unless otherwise required by jurisdictional Code authorities. 087100 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 087100 — DOOR HARDWARE 7. Equip with sex bolts for closers mounted to wood doors; finish to match adjacent hardware. 8. Equip with arms, tracks, brackets, plates, shoes, and other accessories to suit applicable conditions. 9. Equip with manufacturer's full size non - metallic cover. 10. Electro- Mechanical Features: a. Concealed wiring design. b. Single point hold -open. c. Fail -safe operation. d. 24 volt DC. e. Wired to the building fire annunciation system. H. Push and Pull Devices: 1. Manufacturers: As noted. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hiawatha, Inc., Bloomington, MN. b. H.B. Ives, Wallingford, CT. c. Rockwood Manufacturing Co., Rockwood, PA. d. Tice Industries, Portland, OR. e. Trimco (Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc.), Los Angeles, CA. 3. Types: a. PP1: Tice 3332, push /pull bars, 1 inch diameter, push bar of length to suit conditions, 12 inch CTC straight pull. Equip with spanner caps at thru -bolt locations; exposed fasteners not acceptable. b. PP2: Not used. c. PP3: Tice 102 x 21, 3 x 15 -inch metal plate, 3/4 -inch diameter 8 -inch CTC straight pull. d. PP4: Trimco 1060, flush cup pull. I. Plastic Laminate Push Plates and Kick Plates: 1. Manufacturer: Tice Industries, Portland, OR. 2. Laminate Manufacturers and Colors: As indicated on Finish Legend. 3. Material: 1/8 inch laminate plastic, beveled 4 sides with stainless steel screws suitable for wood or metal doors. 4. Types: a. P1: Push plates, Tice No. 160, 6 x 16 inch size, for flush doors. b. P2: Kick plates, Tice PLKP, 12 -inch height, full width of doors less 1/4 -inch clearance at each side between stops. Within 1/4 inch of bottom of door. c. P3: Armor plate, Tice PLAP, 40 inch height, full width of doors less 1/4 -inch clearance at each side between stops. Within 1/4 inch of bottom of door. J. Flush Bolts: 1. Manufacturer Listed: H.B. IVES, Indianapolis, IN. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Door Controls International, Ann Arbor, MI. b. Rockwood Manufacturing Co., Rockwood, PA. c. Trimco (Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc.), Los Angeles, CA. 3. Types: a. FB1: Self- latching design FB -52 for labeled metal doors. b. FB2: Self- latching design FB -62 for labeled wood doors. c. FB3: Automatic design FB -32 for labeled metal doors. d. FB4: Automatic design FB -42 for labeled wood doors. e. FB5: Manual design FB458 for labeled metal doors. f. FB6: Manual design FB358 for labeled wood doors. 4. Equip with extension bolts of lengths to locate operating mechanism at 12 inches above floor for bottom unit and not over 72 inches above floor for top unit. 5. Equip bottom bolts with dust proof strike equivalent to DP -1. Provide DP -2 plate where floor mounted; plate not required at thresholds. K. Stops and Holders: 1. Manufacturers: As noted. 087100 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 087100 — DOOR HARDWARE 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. (ABH), Elk Grove Village, IL b. Glynn- Johnson, Chicago, IL. c. Hiawatha, Inc., Bloomington, MN. d. H.B. Ives, Wallingford, CT. e. Rockwood Manufacturing Co., Rockwood, PA. f. Trimco (Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc.), Los Angeles, CA. g. Rixson, Charlotte, NC. 3. Types: a. Si: Wall stop Ives WS407 CCV. b. S2: Floor stop Ives FS436 or FS438 as applicable. c. S3: Concealed overhead stop GJ 410S Series. d. S4: Concealed overhead hold -open GJ 410H Series. e. S5: Concealed overhead stop GJ 100S Series. L. Electronic Door Controls: 1. Electro- Magnetic Door Holders: a. Manufacturer Listed: LCN, Princeton, IL. b. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc., Elk Grove Village, IL. 2) Rixson, Charlotte, NC. c. Voltage: 24 volts DC. d. Type El: SEM -7850. 2. Electric Strikes: a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Folger Adam Security, Lemont, IL. 2) Hanchett Entry Systems, Inc., Phoenix, AZ. 3) Von Duprin, Inc., Indianapolis, IN. b. Voltage: 24 volts DC. c. Type E2: Folger Adam 712 -75, fail- secure operation. d. Type E3: Folger Adam 310-4 or HES 9600, fail- secure operation. M. Weatherstrips, Seals, and Gaskets: 1. Manufacturer Listed: Pemko Inc., Ventura, CA. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. National Guard Products, Inc., Memphis, TN. b. Reese Enterprises, Inc., Rosemount, MN. c. Ultra Industries, Commerce, CA. d. Zero International, Inc., Bronx, NY. e. McKinney, Scranton, PA. 3. Finish: Match or blend with adjacent hardware. 4. Type W1: Weatherstripping, S88D, dark bronze color. 5. Type W2: Smoke gasket, S44D, dark bronze color. 6. Type W3: Door sweep, 315N, anodized aluminum. 7. Type W4: Meetings stile seals, pair of 18041CP, anodized aluminum. 8. Type W5: Metal astragal, 357SP, prime coat. 9. Type W6: Rain drip, 346, anodized aluminum. 10. Type W7: Automatic door bottom, 411ARL, anodized aluminum. N. Thresholds: 1. Manufacturer Listed: Pemko Inc., Ventura, CA. 2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. National Guard Products, Inc., Memphis, TN. b. Reese Enterprises, Inc., Rosemount, MN. c. Ultra Industries, Commerce, CA. d. Zero International, Inc., Bronx, NY. e. McKinney, Scranton, PA. 3. Type T1: Standard design, 171. 087100 -7 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE 4. Type T2: Transition design, Pemko SBR.5FMR with miter returns and Liquid Nails No. LN901 installation adhesive. 5. Type T3: 158A. 6. Type T4: Not used. 7. Additional Thresholds: In addition to thresholds indicated in the Hardware Schedule, provide metal thresholds of types detailed at locations where indicated in Door Schedule under "Sill" details. O. Miscellaneous Hardware: 1. Manufacturers: As noted. 2. Finish: Match or blend with adjacent hardware. 3. Type M1: Push and pull indicators, Model Ch801 / 802 by Tice Industries, Portland, OR, or HD8001 / HD8002 by Forms + Surfaces, Santa Barbara, CA. 4. Type M2 - Silencers: a. Type: Ives SR64 for metal jambs, Ives SR65 for wood jambs. b. Pairs of Doors: Two at header. c. Single Doors: Three at strike jamb. d. Weatherstripped Doors: Not required. e. Gasket / Smoke Sealed Doors: Not required. 5. Type M3: Door viewer, Peek-0 Type 595, Home Protector Mfg. Co., Inc., Pico Rivera, CA (213/699- 6130). 6. Type M4: Door edge guards, Tice 200, surface applied, minimum 16 gauge stainless steel, height as detailed, beveled and square designs to suit door edges, dimpled holes 12 inches o.c. for minimum #8 x 1 inch stainless steel flathead sheet metal or full thread wood screws for attachment; No. 4 satin finish. Provide factory cut -outs for butts, latch bolt, and deadlock bolts. 7. Type M5: Exit alarm, Sargent 72 -550 with cylinder and batteries, EB or EN to match color of adjacent hardware. 8. Type M6: Lock guard, Folger Adam Security 700. 9. Type M7: Coordinator, COR Series with brackets for door closer mounting and full width fillers, primed coat. 10. Type M8: Key pad by others. 11. Type M9: Key switch by others. 12. Type M10: All other hardware by door manufacturer /supplier. 13. Type M11: Cased opening, no hardware required. 14. Type M12: Glazed opening, no hardware required. 15. Type M13: Coat hook; specified under Section 109013. 16. Type M14: Knox box; specified under Section 109013. 17. Type M15: Existing door; reuse hardware. 18. Type M16: Existing door, reuse other remaining hardware. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation of hardware is specified in Section 087300. 3.2 HARDWARE SCHEDULE No. Butts Lock Exit Closer Stop/ Push/ Plates Stop/ Electric Misc Device Holder Pull Thres Device 1003A M11 1003B T2 M16 1003C T2 M16 1004 M11 1005A M11 1005B B1 ED6 C2 S1 T2,W2,4 087100 -8 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 087100 — DOOR HARDWARE No. Butts Lock Exit Closer Stop/ Push/ Plates Stop/ Electric Misc Device Holder Pull Thres Device 1006 M11 1010A M15 1016 M15 1023 M11 1024 B1 C1 S1 PP3 P1,2 M2 1025A M11 1025B M11 1026 M11 1027 P1,2 M16 1032A P2 M16 1032B B1 ED3 C1 S1 P2 T2,W2 1033 M11 1035 B1 C1 S1 PP3 P1,2 M2 1036 B1 L5 C1 S1 P2 W2 1037 M11 1038 M11 1040 B1 C1 S1 PP3 P1,2 M2 1044 M11 1045 B1 C1,4 S3 PP3 P1,2 M2 1047 M11 1048 M11 1049 M11 1050 P1,3 T2 M16 1051 M11 1052 P2 T2 M16 1053 M11 1054 M11 1056 M11 1058 B1 L8 C1 S1 P2 M2,3 1060 B1 C1,4 S3 PP3 P1,2 M2 1065 B3 C1,4 S3 PP3 P1,2 M2 1067 B3 ED4 C1 S1 P2 T2,W2 1071 M11 1072 B1 L8 C1 S1 P2 M2,13 1073 B1 L8 C1 S1 P2 M2,13 1074 B1 L8 C1 S1 P2 M2,13 1076 B1 L5 C1 S1 P2 W2 087100 -9 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 087100 — DOOR HARDWARE No. Butts Lock Exit Closer Stop/ Push/ Plates Stop/ Electric Misc Device Holder Pull Thres Device 1D21 M11 1S4 B3 ED4 C1 S1 W2 M5 2005 B3 C1,4 S5 PP3 P1,2 M2 2009 M15 2013 B1 L8 S1 M2,13 2020 B1 ED3 C1 T2,W2 El 2028 B1 ED3 C1 Si P2 T2,W2 2029 B1 C1 Si PP3 P1,2 M2 2031 M11 2035 M11 2040 B1 C1 S1 PP3 P1,2 M2 2042 M11 2043 B1 L9 C1 S1 P2 M2 2044 M11 2051 M11 2052 B1 C1 Si PP3 P1,2 M2 2053A M11 2053B B1 ED3 C2 Si P2 W2 2054 M11 2056A B1 C1 Si PP3 P1,2 M2 2056B B1 C1 Si PP3 P1,2 M2 2058 M11 2061 M11 2063 M11 2064A B1 C1 Si PP3 P1,2 M2 2064B B3 L2A C1 Si P2 M2 2066 M11 2071 B3 L8 C1,4 S3 P2 M2 2074 M11 2082 B1 C1 51 PP3 P1,2 M2 2083 M11 2084 B1 ED3 C1 Si P2 T2,W2 2088 B1 C1 Si PP3 P1,2 M2 2089 M11 2092 M11 2093 B1 L2A C1 Si P2 M2 2094A M11 087100 -10 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 087100 — DOOR HARDWARE No. Butts Lock Exit Closer Stop/ Push/ Plates Stop/ Electric Misc Device Holder Pull Thres Device 2094B B6 L3 S1 M2 2094C B6 L3 S1 M2 2094D B6 L3 S1 M2 2094E B6 L3 S1 M2 2094F B6 L3 S1 M2 2095 B1 L2A C1 S1 P2 M2 2097A M11 2097B B6 L3 S1 M2 2097C B6 L3 S1 M2 2097D B6 L3 S1 M2 2098 M11 2099A B6 L3 S1 M2 2099B B6 L3 S1 M2 2099C B6 L3 S1 M2 2101 M11 2102A M11 2102B B6 L3 S1 M2 2102C B6 L3 S1 M2 2102D B6 L3 S1 M2 2103 B1 C1 S2 PP3 P1,2 T2 M2 2104 M11 2105 M11 2107 M11 2108 B1 C1 S1 PP3 P1,2 M2 2117A B1 ED6 C1 S1 T2,W2,4 2118 M11 2S3 M15 END OF SECTION 087100 -11 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 087300 — DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTALLATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of door hardware and related accessories. 2. Installation of hollow metal and wood doors which are specified in Sections 081113 and 081400. B. Related Sections: 1. 017700 - Closeout Procedures: Closeout submittal of keys. 2. 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 3. 081400 - Wood Doors. 4. 087100 - Door Hardware. 5. Division 26: Conduit and raceways; power and connection to electrically operated hardware items. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Unless otherwise indicated, work of this Section includes installation of all hardware specified under Section 087100. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installer: Installers of doors and hardware shall be skilled mechanics experienced in this type of work. 1.4 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOORS AND DOOR HARDWARE A. Furnished under other Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 3.2 DOOR INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install doors at locations scheduled, complete with the scheduled hardware. B. Do not subject wood doors to abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity, or sudden changes thereof. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity prior to hanging. 3.3 WOOD DOORS A. Fit and prepare doors for installation in accordance with the door manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide clearances of 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, 1/8 inch at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 3/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering, except where threshold is shown or scheduled provide 1/4 -inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 087300 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 087300 — DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTALLATION B. Bevel doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at latch edge. C. Flush Doors: Install roses, escutcheons, kick plates, closers, pulls, and other surface mounted hardware only after door finishing is complete and finish is fully cured. 3.4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Fit hollow metal doors accurately to the respective frames within clearances specified in Section 081113. 3.5 DOOR HARDWARE A. Keep hardware in a separate room under lock and key at the site until installation is made. Installer shall receive delivery and unpack, tag, index, and file keys in individual envelopes furnished by lock manufacturer and mark each with door number, key number, and master set to facilitate their integration into a key control system. B. Verify dimensions and be responsible for the correct installation and fit of hardware at the locations scheduled, indicated on the Drawings, and as specified. C. Install each item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. D. Wherever cutting and fitting are required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, reinstall each item. Do not install surface - mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. E. Coordinate installation of electrically operated hardware with the door and frame supplier; coordinate connection of electrical service to electrically controlled hardware. Test completed installation and adjust as necessary for proper operation. F. Hardware Mounting Heights: 1. Mount hardware at heights as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Butt Hinges: a. Top: 5 inches from inside head of frame down to top of hinge. b. Bottom: 10 inches from finished floor to bottom of hinge. c. Intermediate: Equally spaced between top and bottom hinges. 3. Verify conflicts with location of other hardware for proper clearances for installation prior to cutting or milling for specified hardware. Notify Architect immediately if such conflicts are discovered. G. Door Pulls and Push Plates: 1. Recess door pull fasteners on the opposite side of the door in order to provide a flush surface for the mounting of the corresponding push plate. 2. Door pull fasteners must not penetrate push plates. H. Push /Pull Indicators: 1. Mount one pair per leaf, back to back in location indicated; bond to surface with epoxy adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Temporarily secure in place with tape until adhesive has set; provide cardboard, paper, or similar material to protect against lifting of the finish on push -pull indicator, when tape is removed. I. Threshold Transition Strips: Grout fill in sequence with installation. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation of function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with graphite type lubricant unless otherwise recommended by the hardware manufacturer. Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. B. Door closers: 1. Adjust closer opening force, per CAC Title 24 and ADA requirements: a. Maximum push /pull force of 5 Ibs for interior doors. b. Maximum push /pull force of 8.5 Ibs for exterior doors. 087300 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 087300 — DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTALLATION c. Maximum push /pull force of 15 Ibs for labeled, fire -rated doors. 2. Testing of each closer shall be done by the Contractor with the following approved device. The testing device shall be given to the Nordstrom maintenance staff at the time of turnover. a. Door Pressure Guage: model "DPG -PP" (push -pull) by HMC International Div., Inc., Littleton, CO; (303/794 -2510 or 800/848 - 4912x4452). 3. Provide maintenance testing and adjustment of existing door closers located on required accessible routes. 4. Provide documentation indicating the testing results of each door and that closers have been adjusted in accordance with ADA guidelines. 3.7 FINAL ADJUSTMENT A. Wherever hardware installation is made more than 30 days prior to building Substantial Completion, return to the work during the week prior to Substantial Completion and make a final check and adjustment of such hardware items. B. Clean and relubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. C. Protect door hardware from damage until building turnover. 3.8 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment of hardware and maintenance of finishes. END OF SECTION 087300 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 088000 — GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Requirements for glazing provided in other sections including: 1. Glazing for wood doors. 2. Screening film for vision panels in designated Sales Floor doors. B. Related Sections: 1. 012200 - Unit Prices: Unit price for additional screening film. 2. 081400 - Wood Doors: Door and frame vision lites to receive glazing. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C1036 - Flat Glass. 2. C1048 - Heat - Treated Glass -Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 3. E773 - Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. Z97.1 - Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. C. Glass Association of North America (GANA): 1. Glazing Manual. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Fire Windows. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for fire rated glass and screening film. C. Project Closeout Submittals: Submit specified warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers: Provide at least one person thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required, completely familiar with the referenced standards and the requirements of this Work, who shall administer installation of work of this Section. B. Standards: Comply with pertinent recommendations of GANA "Glazing Manual" for glazing installation methods. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Submit warranties under provisions of Section 017700. 1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MONOLITHIC GLASS A. Annealed Glass: ASTM C1036; Type I, Class 1 clear, quality q thickness as indicated;.clear and tinted as scheduled. 088000 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 088000 — GLAZING B. Fire Rated Laminated Glass: 5/16 inch thick laminated fire -rated and impact safety -rated glazing material; one of the following. 1. Technical Glass Products, Kirkland, WA; 800 - 426 -0279 "FireLite Plus." 2. Vetrotech Saint - Gobain North America, Inc., Auburn WA; 253 - 333 -0660; 888 - 803 -9533; "SGG Keralite FR -L. ". 2.2 FABRICATION A. Tempering and Heat Strengthening: 1. Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048; glass which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 4 times the annealed strength; certified safety glass in accordance with ANSI Z97.1. 2. Heat Strengthened Glass: ASTM C1048; glass which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in bending to not less than 2 times annealed strength; free of tong marks. 3. Fabricate tempered and heat strengthened glass units so that principle distortion will be in the horizontal direction in the finished installation. 4. Unless otherwise approved by the building official, provide manufacturer's label on each lite indicating glass type and thickness. 5. Comply with Code requirements for identification and labeling of safety glazing materials in hazardous locations subject to human impact loads. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Vision Lite Screening Film for Sales Floor Doors: 1. First Layer: 3M Company Scotchtint Abrasion Resistant Sun Control Window Film P -18ARL Silver reflective film. 2. Second Layer: 3M Company Scotchtint Window Film CS50 shading film; 0.015 inch thick self adhesive polyester film. B. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide setting blocks, spacers, clips, glazing tapes, glazing sealants, and other glazing accessories as necessary for a complete installation; watertight at exterior locations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully examine installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where the work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Verify that glazing can be performed as specified, and in accordance with pertinent Codes and regulations. C. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 3.2 GLAZING A. Glazing Systems: 1. Interior Non -Rated Door and Relite Frames: Use sponge glazing tape on both sides. 2. Fire Rated Doors and Relite Frames: Conform with labeling requirements and requirements of NFPA 80. B. Setting Blocks: Place setting blocks in frames for support of glass. Place at quarter points unless approved otherwise. C. Install glazing tapes, gaskets, and sealants in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; adjust gaskets and tool sealant to form a uniform sightline. Sealant bead shall be tooled for a slight outward slope at exterior locations. D. Set glass in a true plane, tight and straight, with proper and adequate clearance, firmly anchored to prevent rattling and looseness; cut edges cleanly. 088000 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 088000 — GLAZING 3.3 SALES FLOOR DOOR VISION LITES SCREENING FILM A. Install screening film to surface of door vision lites on side opposite Sales Floor at locations indicated in the "Remarks" column of the Door Schedule. Screening film may be required at other locations to be determined by Owner or Architect under a unit price basis; refer to Section 012200. B. Clean glass and remove labels prior to installation of screening film. C. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for preparation and installation of screening film. Apply the film in 2 separate layers. D. Cut film accurately to extend full height and width of vision lite without visible gaps at edges. Cut film straight at butt joints so that film does not lap over sealant joints. Installed free of air bubbles, scratches, splices, and other defects which would impair clarity. 3.4 CLEANUP A. As the work proceeds, and upon completion, promptly remove primers and adhesives where spilled, splashed or splattered, in a manner not to damage the surface from which it is removed. B. Leave labels on the glass until inspected and approved by the Architect; remove labels immediately thereafter. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Provide barricades and covers as necessary, and in accordance with Code and regulatory requirements for safety and protection of installed glazing during construction. Do not apply tape to glass units having an exposed coating. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Glass Types: 1. Vision Panel Glazing within doors: Clear tempered unless noted as fire /impact -rated glass on the Door Schedule. END OF SECTION 088000 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 088323 — UNFRAMED GLASS MIRRORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Custom wall- mounted mirrors, in locations as scheduled at the end of this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking for attachment of support channels. 2. 092200 - Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board: Blocking and supports. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C1036 - Flat Glass. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' product data and installation instructions for adhesives and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate mirror layouts, relevant field dimensions, joint locations, support and edge details, cutout sizes and locations, type, and thickness. D. Samples: Submit samples of edge finishes and mounting channels. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver, store and protect products under provisions of Section 016000. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Furnish 5 -year manufacturer's warranty, executed to the Owner, under provisions of Section 017700. B. Warranty: Include coverage of glass and coating against discoloration, silver spoilage, and manufacturing defects. 1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MIRRORS A. Mirrors: ASTM C1036; 1/4 inch thick, Quality q clear float glass; full silver coating, copper coating, and manufacturer's standard organic coating applied to minimum average dry film thickness of 1.4 mils. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Adhesive and Primer: • 1. Adhesive: Mirro Mastic by Palmer Products Corporation, Louisville, KY (800/431- 6151). 2. Drywall Primer: Mirro- Mastic Bond by Palmer Products Corporation. B. Mounting Retainers at Dressing Rooms: 1. Bottom Channel: Predrilled and dimpled for screw attachment; No. D516BA 5/16 inch Standard "J" Channel by C.R. Laurence Co., Inc., Union City, CA (510/475- 1000). 2. Top Channel: Predrilled and dimpled for screw attachment; No. D58BA 5/16 inch Deep Nose "J" Channel by C.R. Laurence Co, Inc.. 088323 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 088323 — UNFRAMED GLASS MIRRORS 3. Finish: Anodized aluminum, buffed bright finish. 4. Screws: Stainless steel flathead wood screws; #8 x 2 inches. C. Mounting Retainers at Sales Floor Columns: Match finish and style of existing mirror channels. D. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 - 90 Shore A Durometer hardness, 1/8 inch thick x inch per sq. ft. mirror area. E. Shims: Clear softwood, milled to thickness as required for installation of mirrors according to detail. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Flat Mirrors: Cut to size in accordance with approved shop drawings; verify field dimensions for restroom mirrors and at other critical locations, prior to fabrication. Finish edges as follows: 1. Top and Bottom Edges to be Concealed by Retaining Channels: Swipe. 2. Vertical Edges for Butt or Spaced Joints in Plane or at Inside Corners: Pencil polish edge. 3. Exposed Vertical Edges and Vertical Edges at 90 Degree Outside Corners : Pencil polish (bright, smooth finish; frosted appearance not acceptable). B. Drill and cut as required for electrical and other penetrations; drill to form uniform radius at all inside corners; do not overcut corners. Grind cutout edges smooth. C. Glass Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Out of Square: Maximum 1/16 inch, diagonal measure. 2. Width: As required to meet detailing and installation tolerance requirements. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are sound, smooth, plane, dry, and ready for mirror installation, and are within the tolerances specified for metal framing and gypsum board construction. B. Verify that continuous solid wood backing is present for fastening of mounting clips. C. Verify that paint has been applied to substrate as detailed at gaps between mirrors, and that substrate surfaces to receive adhesive are unpainted. D. Beginning of installation constitutes Contractor acceptance of conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CHANNEL SUPPORTED MIRRORS A. Installation of Mounting Channels: 1. Install mounting channels at bottom edge. Fasten with specified screws at 6 inches on center along the channel, with minimum 4 screws per mirror panel. Screws shall penetrate the solid wood backing a minimum of 1 -3/8 inches; screws into plywood backing shall penetrate through the full thickness of the plywood. 2. Fasten top channel with #8 screws at 12 inches on center. Screws shall penetrate the solid wood backing a minimum of 1 -3/8 inches. 3. Provide adequate clearance in the deep -nose channel at the top for installation of mirror as described below. 4. Install channels continuous in longest practical lengths; where splices are required, install for tight fit; locate joints at approximate midpoints of mirror edges. B. Use mirror adhesive to install shims, sized to locate glass against front edge of clips. C. Insert setting blocks in bottom channel at mirror quarter points. D. Adhesive Installation: 1. Apply specified drywall primer to substrate in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's printed instructions. Allow primer to dry. 2. Apply adhesive in pats to thickness that will ensure full contact of mirror back with each pat. E. Lift mirror into the top, deep channel then lower mirror into the bottom channel. 088323 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON ■ SECTION 088323 — UNFRAMED GLASS MIRRORS F. Install with gap between adjoining mirrors as indicated; use temporary spacers as necessary to assure uniform gap width. G. Installation Tolerances: 1. Outside Corners: Install accurately to detail with intersection between mirrors accurately aligned for the full height of the mirror, and with exposed mirror edge not more than 1/16 inch behind and not projecting more than 1/16 inch beyond plane of face of adjacent mirror. 2. Gaps Between Adjacent Mirrors: Plus or minus 25 percent of indicated dimension, except provide tolerance of plus 0, where maximum dimension is indicated on the Drawings. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove excess and spilled adhesive. B. Patch adjacent surfaces damaged by work of this Section. C. Remove labels and clean exposed surfaces of mirror units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installation under provisions of Section 015000. END OF SECTION 088323 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 088326 — WOOD FRAMED GLASS MIRRORS PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Custom wall mounted wood framed mirrors; noted on Drawings as WFM1 and WFM2. B. Related Sections: 1. 092200 - Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board: Blocking and support framing. 2. 099000 - Painting: Painting of wall surfaces behind mirrors. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C1036 - Flat Glass. 1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver, store and protect products under provisions of Section 016000. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Include coverage of mirror glass coating against discoloration, silver spoilage, and manufacturing defects. 1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. • PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMED MIRRORS A. Glass Mirrors: ASTM C1036; 1/4 inch thick, Quality q2 clear float glass; full silver coating, copper coating, and manufacturer's standard organic coating applied to minimum average dry film thickness of 1.4 mils. B. Wood Frames: 1. Manufacturer: Soicher -Marin Fine Art • 1515 Mockingbird Lane, Suite 405 Charlotte, NC 28209 Contact: Michael Strong, Account Executive. Phone: 704/905 -2384 cell. FAX: 704/553 -8255. 8508 Park Road #111 Charlotte, NC 28210 2. Molding Type: M3243, Roma molding (2 3/8" width). 3. Finish: F -1531, 100% water proof coating. C. Frame Sizes (Overall): 1. WFM1: 24 inch width, 72 inch height. 2. WFM2: Custom sizes as indicated on the Drawings; dimensions field measured prior to fabrication. 088326 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 088326 — WOOD FRAMED GLASS MIRRORS 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Hardware: Extruded aluminum bars with pre - drilled holes for attaching to frame and wall; Super Z -Bar by Timothy's Hardware Company, San Clemente, CA (888/361- 8484). B. Touch -Up Paint: Same composition, color and sheen as used for finish of wood frames. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready for mirror installation and within the tolerances specified for metal framing and gypsum board construction. B. Verify that surfaces to receive mirrors have been painted. C. Beginning of installation constitutes Contractor acceptance of conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation: 1. Install mirrors square, plumb, and level. 2. Attach mounting Z -bars to mirror frames and walls with recommended fasteners in accordance with manufactures instructions. 3. Z -bars at walls shall be secured to each stud and supplemented with drywall type screws between studs in quantity to ensure that the Z -bars can withstand the weight of the mirrors. B. Cleaning: Remove labels and clean exposed surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Frame Touch -Up: Touch -up damages to wood frame using same paint as the original coating. END OF SECTION 1 088326 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 092200 — SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal framing for interior partitions. 2. Metal framing for gypsum board ceiling systems. 3. Metal framing for exterior soffit systems. 4. Metal furring systems. 5. Structural design of lightgage metal support framing systems. B. Related Sections: 1. 054000 - Cold- Formed Metal Framing: Structural steel stud and joist framing systems. 2. 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Partial height partition supports. 3. 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and backing. 4. 072100 - Thermal Insulation: Coordination of rigid board wall insulation requiring zee - furring. 5. 092116 - Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies: Shaft wall stud framing. 6. 095113 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings: Alternate framing for ceiling Tight coves. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 2. C635 - Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. 3. C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. 4. E119 - Method or Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. i 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Structural Design of Suspended GWB Soffits and Ceilings: 1. Structural design of lightgage metal framing systems shall be furnished by the Contractor. 2. Select framing systems, gages, supports, bracing, and connections as necessary to meet the structural requirements specified. 3. Select framing members based on the manufacturer's published span tables. B. Design Loads: 1. Interior Partitions and Ceiling Assemblies: 5 pounds per square foot uniform lateral load. C. Deflection Requirements: 1. Maximum deflection of L/240 for flexible finish materials such as gypsum board. 2. Maximum deflection of L/360 for rigid finish materials including ceramic tile, stone tile, and mirrors. D. Provide sufficient fasteners and framing elements to adequately resist the combined dead and live loads, including finishes, of assemblies suspended from overhead construction. Base the design on the working capacity stated in the manufacturer's technical data for the components, unless required otherwise by jurisdictional Code authorities. Suspended assemblies are subject to review by the Project Structural Engineer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. 092200 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 092200 — SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD B. Product Data: 1. Schedules: Proposed manufacturer's tables of partition heights and stud gages, as applicable to the work, including Contractor's notations of selected components to be used in the work. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate typical fastening framing layouts and fastening details. 2. Assemblies Suspended from Overhead Construction: Show framing configurations for gypsum board ceilings, and other suspended assemblies; include applicable technical data and designing engineer's seal. D. Quality Control Submittals: - 1. Design Engineer's Inspection Report: Submit report to Architect, giving results and observations of tests, stating compliance or noncompliance with design -build documents 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Wherever a fire- resistance classification is shown or scheduled for wall construction (1 -hour or similar designations), provide materials, accessories, and application procedures which have been listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or tested according to ASTM E119 for the type of construction indicated, and approved by the local building department. Fire rated walls shall be continuous and full height, whether or not specifically indicated. B. Conform to the seismic requirements of the jurisdictional Code authorities. C. Code Requirements: 1. Provide assemblies meeting the hourly fire ratings indicated and specified. Assemblies shall been tested in accordance with ASTM E119, and shall be approved by the local jurisdictional code authorities. Coordinate installation of other materials which are a part each assembly. 2. Fire rating requirements take precedence over the construction requirements indicated. In the event of conflict, notify the Architect, and do not begin construction in the area of conflict until the conflict has been resolved. 3. Provide calculations, drawings, product data, and other verification as required by the jurisdictional code authority to obtain approval of the lightgage metal framing installation. D. Structural Design: Framing systems shall be designed by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the state where the Project is located. 1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE . A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL STUD FRAMING A. Light -gage Steel Framing: ASTM A653 and C645; G60 galvanized coating. B. Studs: Galvanized, non- loadbearing, roll formed, "C" shaped with not less than 1 -1/4 inch flanges and prepunched webs for installation of stiffening channels and mechanical and electrical items. C. Size: 1. Width: 3 -5/8 inch wide, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, dictated by field conditions, or greater if required for installation of mechanical and electrical items. 2. Gage: 25 gage minimum, unless otherwise specified or required to meet deflection requirements. 2.2 DIRECT HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Acceptable Systems and Manufacturers: 1. HD8906 Furring Systems /Drywall by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, PA (888/234- 5464 ). 2. Drywall Furring 660 System by Chicago Metallic, Chicago, IL (800/323- 7164). 3. Donn Rigid X Drywall Suspension System by USG Interiors, Inc., Chicago, IL (800/950- 3839). 092200 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 092200 — SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD B. Suspension System: 1. Type: Double web roll formed galvanized steel tees with 1 -3/8 or 1 -1/2 inch face, interlocking connections, and manufacturer's standard finish. 2. Classification: ASTM C635, heavy -duty. C. Related Components: 1. Perimeter Moldings: Manufacturer's standard U or L shaped design with hemmed edges. 2. Accessories: Provide clips, fasteners, and other devices for a complete system installation. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Runner Track: 1. Unpunched; sized to receive studs, galvanized; furnish extended leg (1 -1/4 inch minimum) for ceiling track to be anchored to building structural members. 2. Fire -Rated Partition Assemblies: Unless approved otherwise, use fire rated runners furnished from Section 078500. B. Stud Bridging: 16 gage, 3/4 x 1/2 inch cold rolled steel channels, unless indicated otherwise. C. Carrying Channels: 16- gauge, cold rolled steel channels, 1 -1/2 inch deep. D. Furring Channels: Roll formed hat shape, not lighter than 26 gage galvanized steel, designed for screw attachment of gypsum board. E. Zee - Furring: Minimum 26 gage hot - dipped galvanized steel; depth as indicated, or as required to accommodate insulation. F. Wire: Galvanized soft annealed steel with minimum gage for the use as follows: 1. Ceiling suspension system: 9 gage. 2. Furring channels to runner channels: 16 gage. 3. Splices in channels: 18 gage. G. Screws: Low - profile head, self- tapping. H. Furnish other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete installation of metal framing systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION • 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. B. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated, erect framing systems in accordance with industry standard practice, pertinent Codes and regulations, requirements for fire rated construction, and recommendations of the manufacturer. Securely anchor components in position. B. Accurately lay out partitions and wall lines from the dimensions on the Drawings; with work of other Sections for concealed work and where finishes are applied. C. Independently support partitions, furring, and ceiling suspension systems; do not attach to ducts, pipes, and other similar building components. Do not support from electrical, HVAC, plumbing or sprinkler system components. Do not drill or "shoot" into any structural member in manner that would impair its structural integrity. 092200 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 092200 — SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD D. Unless otherwise detailed, construct each wall as a continuous plane for its full extent; offset or vary sizes of framing members as necessary to accommodate indicated variations in stud width, number of layers and thickness of gypsum board, finish, and other similar conditions to maintain continuity of plane, except that gage and width of framing members shall not be less than that required to meet structural performance criteria. E. Erect framing in true planes to provide solid backing for finish materials; tolerance limitations are specified under the various finishes unless noted herein. 3.3 PARTITION FRAMING A. Construct each partition as indicated on the Drawings including necessary offsets in framing which may not be indicated; adjust location of, and vary size of, studs as required to provide continuous wall planes for their entire extent; vary finish thickness if necessary. B. Floor Track: Align and securely anchor floor track to building construction with fasteners at 24 inches on center maximum in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as required for fire rated construction. C. Top Runner Track: 1. Align and securely anchor ceiling track to building construction by welding, screwing, or other method best suited to conditions in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as required for rated construction, as applicable. 2. Unless approved otherwise, install fire rated runners furnished from Section 078500. Install in accordance with fire rated assembly requirements. - 3. Comply with Section 014500 requirements for anchorage into metal decking. D. Secure studs to floor track with rigid connection and install in single lengths from floor to ceiling track. Where interior partition ceiling track is directly anchored to structural members, and unless flexible ceiling track is installed, cut studs 1/2 inch short of web of track and secure in position with metal channels or gypsum board anchored to the studs only. E. Align punch -out holes in studs within a continuous length of wall to receive horizontal stiffening • channels and /or utilities. F. Stud Spacing: 1. Place at 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, but not exceeding manufacturer's recommendations or requirements for fire rated construction for stud type, length and loading. 2. Provide double studs, closer stud spacing, and additional reinforcement as detailed or required at door frames, cased openings, borrowed lights, recesses for equipment, and other similar conditions. 3. Space studs appropriately and install independently of each other for control joints, reveals, and reglets. G. Stud Bridging: Install as follows, whether or not recommended by the framing manufacturer to achieve performance within specified requirements without sheathing or bridging. 1. At interior partitions greater than 4 feet in length, and with gypsum board or other rigid facing material on one stud flange only, provide bridging channels in horizontal rows at a maximum of 5' -0" on center for the full height of the partition. 2. Interior full height partitions (studs extending from the floor to the structure above) with gypsum board or other rigid facing material stopping 3 feet or more below top of studs; provide one row of _ bridging channel horizontally approximately 12 inches above termination of gypsum board material and one additional row for each 5 feet of exposed studs. 3. Install stud - bridging channels in long lengths, wire tying and lapping the joints a minimum of 12 inches. Attach bridging channel to each stud as shown in manufacturer's printed instructions. H. Bracing: Install diagonal wire bracing to structure or to other partitions as necessary to reinforce stud partitions against lateral movement. I. Corners: Construct corners using minimum of 3 studs, unless noted otherwise. 092200 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 092200 — SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD J. Framed Openings: Install double studs continuous from floor to ceiling track at the jamb of each doorframe, cased opening, window, sidelite jambs, and other similar openings. Studs shall be the same gage as the adjacent studs, but no less than 20 gage. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. K. Framed Penetrations: Frame openings as required for duct penetrations, wall diffusers /grilles, fire extinguisher cabinets, access doors /panels, and other similar devices. L. Attach studs adjacent to frames securely to top and bottom track, either by welding or screws; secure to door head tracks with clip angles; weld or bolt frame anchors to studs. M. Over door, borrowed light frames, and cased openings, install a section of track horizontally, securely attached to adjacent vertical studs with clip angles; use cut -to- length pieces of studs to reinforce vertical joints, and over opening headers at standard spacing extending to the ceiling track. Use similar system at sills. N. Fire -rated walls shall be continuous where required, whether or not specifically indicated. O. Plumbing Chases and Double Stud Partitions: 1. Cross brace non - acoustically insulated double stud partitions using 5/8 inch minimum thick gypsum board with length of braces equal to thickness of partition, 12 inches high and installed at 24 inch centers vertically. Where studs are not directly opposite, provide supplementary furring channels for anchoring bracing. 2. Where an acoustically insulated partition is indicated to be constructed from double rows of studs, maintain mechanical isolation between rows of studs. Coordinate with plumbing and electrical work to ensure that no item is anchored to studs on opposite sides of wall and that acoustic separation is maintained between each side of the partition. P. Escalators: Frame for plenum equipment enclosure as detailed, and in accordance with requirements of local jurisdictional Code authorities. Q. "Z" Furring: 1. Space "Z" furring channels at a maximum of 24 inches on center, and no more than 3 inches from corners. 2. Unless indicated otherwise, install framing vertically with fasteners at 24 inches on center. Provide shims as required to meet tolerance requirements specified. 3. Coordinate installation of framing to allow installation of rigid insulation as specified in Section 072100. R. Shaft wall stud installation is specified in Section 092116. 3.4 FRAMING SYSTEM FOR SUSPENDED GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS A. Coordinate locations of hangers and supports with the work of other Sections. B. Framing system for suspended gypsum board ceiling shall be direct hung suspension system, or suspended framing system at Contractor's option. C. Direct Hung Suspension System: 1. Space main tees 4 feet on centers and not more than 6 inches from parallel walls or beams; secure with hanger wires relative to indicated ceiling height looping wire after tying around vertical 3 times and cutting neatly. 2. Space cross furring tees at maximum 24 -inch centers. 3. Perimeter moldings and component connections shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Suspended Framing Systems: 1. Space runner channels 4 feet on center with splices lapped 12 inches and tied. 2. Support runner channels with hanger wires spaced at 4 feet on center for gypsum board ceilings. Loop hanger wire around support element and tightly wrap around vertical wire 3 times; cut off neatly. 092200 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 092200 — SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 3. For systems to receive gypsum board, space hat furring channels 16 inches on center with splices lapped 12 inches minimum and tied; clip or saddle tie to runner channels with 16 gage tie wire. 4. Where overhead obstructions prevent the regular spacing of hangers, provide secondary carrying members for indirect support of the suspension system, or reinforce the nearest adjacent hangers and related framing components as required to span the required distance. E. Suspend systems from overhead structural elements only. Do not support from electrical, HVAC, plumbing, or sprinkler system components. F. Attachment: 1. Install hanger wires with due regard for the structural integrity of all adjacent work. 2. Attach hanger wires to metal deck by screw attachment; comply with Section 014500 requirements for anchoring into metal decking. 3. Do not support from electrical, HVAC, plumbing, or sprinkler system components. 4. Verify location of all conduit in poured concrete deck before making attachments to metal deck. G. Stabilize suspended framing systems against lateral movement by means of diagonal bracing. Conform to the seismic requirements of the jurisdictional Code authorities. H. Frame openings for recessed light fixtures, recessed light tracks, air diffusers, duct penetrations, access doors, hatches, and other similar items. I. Install supplementary hanger wires for support of ceiling mounted equipment, such as speaker support bracket, as required and as detailed. - 3.5 FRAMING FOR GYPSUM BOARD AT CEILING LIGHT COVES A. Refer to drawings for optional framing requirements at Tight coves. B. In lieu of using framing components of the suspended acoustical ceilings specified in Section 095113, provide light cove framing using steel stud assemblies. C. Provide vertical and horizontal steel studs of 3 -5/8 inch minimum size spaced at 24 inch centers maximum. Brace assemblies with a metal stud kicker tied back to the wall spaced at 48 inch centers or install the vertical steel stud full height to underside of structure above. D. Secure assemblies to suspended acoustical ceiling grid system using metal clips which are compatible with the ceiling system; coordinate requirements with the grid manufacturer 3.6 BACKING PLATES A. Metal Backing Plates: 1. Wood blocking as specified in Section - 061000 is typical. Metal backing plates may not be used in lieu of fire retardant treated wood blocking. 2. Provide minimum 4 inches wide, 16 gage, galvanized steel, sheet metal backing plates, screwed rigidly to studs, for support of wall mounted items, where indicated. 3. Sheet metal backing plates at gypsum board light coves shall be 16 gage galvanized sheet metal, 4 inch height, length as necessary for securing light fixtures. Coordinate length requirements with Section 265000 - Lighting. B. Coordinate specific requirements with applicable trades and suppliers to accurately locate and provide for proper alignment of equipment, fixtures, and accessories. 3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Studs and Furring: 1. Variation from Level: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Variation from Vertical: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, except 1/16 inch from true plane at escalator wells, mall entries, columns, and surfaces indicated to receive adhesive attached mirrors. 3. Variation from Indicated Location: 1/4 inch. 4. Variation in Alignment: 1/8 inch between any three framing members, except 1/16 inch between any three studs at wall surfaces indicated to receive adhesive attached mirrors. B. Soffit and Ceiling Systems: Variation from level - 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 092200 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 092200 — SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 3.8 GAGE SCHEDULE A. Provide studs of gages required to meet the specified deflection and design Toad requirements for each partition type configuration, unless indicated or specified otherwise. END OF SECTION 092200 -7 07/21/08 • NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 092700 — PLASTER FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Precast glass fiber reinforced gypsum (GFRG) components. B. Related Sections: 1. 092900 - Gypsum Board: Requirements for joint tape and compounds. 2. 099000 - Painting and Coating: Finish coatings. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product literature. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate component configurations and cross sections, location and type of supports and reinforcing, and methods of fastening to surrounding construction. 2. Obtain approval before proceeding with the fabrication of the mock -up. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock -up: 1. Provide mock -up in accordance with Section 014500. 2. Furnish at the site, one full size sample of typical column assembly, including all supports, mounting devices, and accessories. 3. The approved mock -up may be used in the Work. B. Design Criteria: 1.. Design the shapes to withstand a uniform surface Toad of 10 PSF, with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span. 2. Anchorage: Design secure method of concealed anchorage to the adjacent construction indicated. C. Seismic Design: 1. Provide anchorage and bracing of components to meet the seismic requirements of the jurisdictional Code authorities. 2. Seismic bracing and anchorage shall be subject to inspections by the Owner's Structural Engineer. 3. Correct bracing and anchorage systems determined not to be in compliance by the Owner's Structural Engineer, or furnish structural calculations verifying compliance from a Contractor paid structural engineer licensed to practice in the State of where the Project is located. 1.4 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PREFABRICATED GYPSUM SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Casting Designs, Inc. (Fort Worth, TX; 817- 551 - 7373). 2. Intex Forms, Inc. (San Jose, CA; 408 - 846- 5667). 3. Moonlight Molds, Inc. (Gardena, CA; 310 - 538 - 9142). 4. Plastrglas, Inc. (Omaha, NE; 402 - 455 - 0652). 092700 -1 07/21/08 • NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 092700 — PLASTER FABRICATIONS 5. Plasterform, Inc. (Davidsonville, MD; 800 - 268- 4534). 6. Formglas Inc. (North York, ON; 416 - 635 -6588) B. Materials: 1. Plaster: High strength gypsum cement. 2. Reinforcement: Chopped glass fibers; woven or non - directional glass fiber mat. C. Fasteners: Self- drilling, self- tapping bugle head drywall screws, length as required for each assembly. D. Taping and Finishing Materials: As specified in Section 092900, except that open mesh glass fiber joint tape may be used in lieu of paper joint tape at the Contractor's option. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Casting: Provide shapes as indicated on the drawings. Units shall be true to dimensions and have clean accurate arrises and smooth and even curves. All details shall be faithfully executed to Architect's design. Paired components shall be fabricated for installation in perfect alignment. B. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Curves: No point on the surface of the curve shall vary from the prescribed arc more than 1 percent of the radius. 2. Arrises and Surfaces: No point on a surface plane or arris shall vary more than 1/8 inch under a 10 foot straight edge. 3. Shapes: No shape shall vary from its prescribed location more than 1/8 inch in any direction. C. Finishes: Smooth finish. Prepare surface as required to allow paint adhesion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify conditions are satisfactory to receive work. Report all discrepancies to the Architect. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. B. Field Measurements: Verify prior to fabrication and erection. 3.2 INSTALLATION / ERECTION — A. Install components in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Where connection to structure is required, connect to structural steel components only. C. Tape and finish joints between prefabricated members, in accordance with requirements of Section 092900. Maintain continuous radius at column joints. D. Installation Tolerances: 1. Variations from Plumb: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 2. Variations from Position: 1/4 inch in any direction. 3. Offsets in Alignment of Adjacent Members At Any Joint: 1/16 inch maximum. 3.3 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. After work is completed, repair or replace damaged surfaces and components to Architect's satisfaction. Sections shall be uniformly clean and free from soil or stain which would impair adhesion or bleed through finish paint coating. END OF SECTION 092700 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 092900 — GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board construction and finishing systems. 2. Trim and related accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. 092200 - Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board. 2. 092116 - Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies: Framing system and liner board. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction. 2. C557 - Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. 3. C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board. 4. C1396 - Specification for Gypsum Board 5. E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. B. Gypsum Association (GA): 1. GA -214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. 2. GA 216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials of each type specified shall be products of a single manufacturer. B. Perform work in accordance with GA 216, unless specified otherwise, or required otherwise to meet fire rating requirements. C. Wherever a fire- resistance classification is indicated or scheduled, furnish materials and accessories which have been tested as components of the indicated assembly by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. • or according to ASTM E119 for the type of construction shown, approved by the local building department. D. Fire rating requirements take precedence over the construction requirements indicated. In the event of conflict, notify the Architect, and do not begin construction in the area of conflict until the conflict has been resolved. E. Assembly Instructions: Contractor shall keep at the site and make available to installers a copy of the following: 1. Installation requirements for each fire rated assembly. 2. GA 214 and 216. 1.4 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 BOARD MATERIALS A. General: 1. Furnish boards of maximum permissible length for type of installation indicated. 092900 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 092900 — GYPSUM BOARD 2. Tapered edge for boards to be exposed, taped, and finished; square edge for boards in concealed applications. 3. Furnish Type X board for fire rated assemblies; furnish board which has been tested as part of the approved assembly. 4. 5/8 inch thick, unless noted or specified otherwise. B. Types of Gypsum Board: 1. Standard Board and Water Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C1396. C. Shaft Walls: Furnish gypsum board materials listed as part of the approved shaftwall system. Liner panels are specified as work of Section 092116. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive for Laminated Construction: ASTM C557, unless recommended otherwise by the gypsum board manufacturer. B. Interior Trim: 1. Corner Trim: Concealed flange, galvanized steel; USG Dura -A -Bead No. 103. 2. Edge Trim: Concealed flange, galvanized steel; USG No. 200 -A J- Sheetrock Trim or No. 200 -B L -Trim as applicable. C. Interior Control Joints: Concealed flange, galvanized steel; USG No. 093. D. Interior Reveals: 1. Manufacturers: a. Fry Reglet Corporation, Alpharetta, GA (800/237- 9773), extruded aluminum, concealed flanges. b. Equivalent profiles by Flanery, Inc., Las Vegas, NV (702/220- 4700), Gordon Inc., Shreveport, LA (800/877- 8746), or Pittcon Industries, Inc., Riverdale, MD (800/637 -7638) also acceptable. 2. Types: DRM- 625 -375 (5/8 inch deep by 3/8 inch high; refer to Drawings for locations 3. Intersections: Furnish prefabricated " +" and "T" intersections, and splice alignment plates. 4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard epoxy prime or chemical conversion coat finish. E. Joint Tapes: 1. Standard: ASTM C475 and GA 216. 2. Mesh Tape for Water Resistant Backing Board: 2 -1/2 inch wide glass fiber tape; 10x10 mesh; — self adhesive type. F. Joint Taping and Finishing Compounds: 1. Standard Compounds: ASTM C475 and GA 216. 2. Chemically Hardening Compond: Durabond 210 by USG Corporation. G. Screws: ASTM C1002, length as required for penetration of framing members. H. Other Related Materials: Furnish all other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete installation of gypsum board. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. B. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. C. Verify that mechanical and electrical work, and blocking, framing, and insulation to be concealed in partitions, has been installed and completed. Verify that blocking for toilet accessories, toilet partitions, and urinal screens has been installed. 092900 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 092900 — GYPSUM BOARD D. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and tolerances of existing substrates and supporting framing, and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 BOARD INSTALLATION A. General: Provide partitions of types indicated on the Drawings; where a partition type is not indicated, provide same construction as that of adjacent partitions, or as partitions in areas of similar use or type. B. Coordinate with Section 098100 for installation of acoustical insulation and acoustical sealant. C. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 216, and fire rated assembly requirements. Install gypsum board with long dimension perpendicular or parallel to the framing members at Contractor's option, unless otherwise required for fire resistance rating requirements. D. Erect board so that all edges and corners are firmly supported. E. Use screws to fasten gypsum board to metal furring or framing. F. Use water resistant backing board at the following locations: 1. Restroom walls as a substrate for surfaces scheduled to receive ceramic wall tile. G. Install board continuous to structure at partitions indicated to be fire rated; install required number of layers of gypsum board behind drinking fountains, panel boards, cabinets, and other recessed accessories as necessary to maintain fire rating of walls. H. Multiple Layer Applications: 1. Use backing board or standard board for concealed layers; type X as required for fire ratings. 2. Offset joints of each layer, a minimum of 12 inches. 3. Secure each layer with screws into framing members. 4. Adhesive application of gypsum board may be used in non - acoustically insulated partitions, if it is in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and meets fire rating requirements. 5. Install multiple layers without voids between boards. 6. At exposed edges to form steps on wall surface, install L -trim in accurate line and in firm contact with surface of face and substrate boards, without gaps. I. Cutouts: 1. Cutouts for air conditioning, electrical, mechanical, and plumbing items shall be clean and true cut throughout the entire thickness of the boards and of minimum sizes for the items to be • accommodated. 2. Cut openings for a tight fit without damage such as spalling on either face of the board, fracturing of the core, or tearing of the covering and with such accuracy that plates, escutcheons, or trim will cover the edges. 3. Replace with new materials, all boards which are damaged at cutouts. J. Unless otherwise detailed, where ceiling track is anchored to structure, extend board to within 1/2 to 3/4 inch of structure; where wall end stud is anchored to structure or to finish material which is rigidly anchored to structure, extend board to within 1/4 to 3/8 inch of intersecting surface. Do not anchor wallboard to rigid ceiling tracks or wall end studs which are anchored to building structural elements. Coordinate installation of board with placement of J -trim, where required. K. Sealant Joints: 1. Coordinate installation of firestopping and sealants at concealed joints between partitions and structure at fire rated and acoustically insulated partitions. 2. Where sealant joints are indicated at ends or edges of gypsum board, install board and trim for uniform 1/8 inch joint, unless otherwise indicated. Installation of sealant in exposed locations is specified in Section 079200. L. Fasteners: Properly space fasteners in careful accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, pertinent codes, and regulations for rated construction, with heads driven slightly below the surface, but without breaking the paper cover. 092900 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 092900 — GYPSUM BOARD M. Interior Trim: 1. Use longest practical lengths, with no piece less than 2 feet long for continuous runs greater than 8 feet. Securely fasten and align trim ends at joints. 2. Install concealed flange corner beads at exposed external corners, bent to conform to required angle, where other than 90 degrees. 3. Install concealed flange Type L -trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 4. Install Type J -trim where sealant joint is indicated at gypsum board edge, and at locations where edge of board would otherwise be exposed to view N. Interior Control Joints: 1. Install only at locations in Sales Floor and other public areas where indicated on Drawings. 2. Install where typically required within the stair shafts. O. Interior Reveals: Install as indicated, with ends neatly fitted and butted in accurate alignment. P. Fire Rated Construction: 1. At heads of fire rated metal stud and gypsum board partitions, install gypsum board in accordance with the fire rated assemblies specified in Section 078500. 2. Where proprietary fire rated compensating channels are used at heads of fire rated metal stud and gypsum board partitions, install gypsum board in accordance with the track manufacturer's instructions. 3. Fill joints between gypsum board surfaces and adjacent construction with fire rated joint compound in accordance with the requirements of the fire rated construction joint assembly manufacturer. 4. Provide continuous fire rated assemblies. Where adjacent construction interrupts fire rated assemblies, provide additional construction as necessary to maintain the continuity of fire rated assemblies." 3.3 GYPSUM BOARD FINISHES A. Provide levels of gypsum board finishing in accordance with GA 214. B. Provide the following levels of finish in the locations listed below 1. Level 5: a. Wall and fascia surfaces in sales floor area. b. Sales floor area ceiling "features," including false beams, and soffits. c. Surfaces of light coves visible from the sales floor. — d. Escalator wells, including ceilings, walls, pilasters, and facias. • e. Walls and ceilings at entries. f. Walls at CUSTOMER SERVICE area. g. Walls at DISPLAY WINDOWS. 2. Level 4: a. Walls to receive wall covering. b. Repair and refinishing of walls stripped of old wall covering in preparation for installation of new wall covering. c. All surfaces unless specified otherwise. 3. Level 3: NOT USED 4. Level 2: a. Surfaces to receive tile or other thick finish materials applied to gypsum board surfaces. 5. Level 1: a. Fire rated and non -fire rated assemblies concealed from view in the finished work ("fire - taping "). b. Wall surfaces with acoustical insulation concealed from view in the finished work. c. Surfaces to receive fabric wrapped panels and mirrors. 6. Level 0: NOT USED. C. Level 4 and 5 finishes: Return to the site after primer is applied, and touch -up surface defects. D. Where necessary to sand, do so without damaging the face of the gypsum board. — E. Use chemically hardening joint compound with mesh tape in the following locations: 1. Joints in water resistant backing board. 092900 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON ' SECTION 092900 — GYPSUM BOARD 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Typical: Install gypsum board with 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum variation from plane. B. Skim- Coated Surfaces: Finish flat surfaces for maximum variation of 1/16 inch from true plane; finish curved surfaces for uniform appearance, including intersections and arrises. C. Surfaces to Receive Adhesive Applied Mirrors: Install for maximum variation of 1/8 inch from true plane. END OF SECTION 092900 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 093000 - TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Tile, types as scheduled. 2. Installation of Owner furnished stone. 3. Installation of Owner furnished floor tile. 4. Cementitious backing board substrate. 5. Setting and grouting materials. 6. Metal screeds. 7. Transition type rubber threshold. 8. Waterproof membrane. 9. Crack isolation membrane. 10. Tile sealing. B. Related Sections: 1. 012300 - Alternates: Description of alternates involving work of this Section. 2. 012200 - Unit Prices: Slab leveling; grout release; additional crack isolation membrane. 3. 035416 - Hydraulic Cement Underlayment: Coordination with slab leveling requirements and screed installation. 4. 079200 - Joint Sealants: Expansion / control joint sealant. 5. 099743 - Concrete Floor Stain: Treatment of adjacent substrate. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 2. C150 - Portland Cement. 3. C206 - Finishing Hydrated Lime. 4. C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 5. F2170 -02 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for the Installation of Ceramic Tile. 2. A137.1 - Ceramic Tile. C. Tile Council of North America, Inc. (TCNA): 1. Handbook of for Ceramic Tile Installation, current edition. 2. Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Expansion Joint: Unless otherwise detailed, expansion joints in tile fields are sealant filled joints to accommodate expansion and contraction of tile. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's standard literature for screeds, sealers, adhesives, waterproof membrane, crack isolation membrane, mortar, grouts, and additives. Include descriptions of tensile strengths, withdrawal strengths, elasticity, and other data as necessary for review of performance characteristics. 093000 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 093000 — TILING 2. Submit installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings / Tile Layout Drawings: Submit drawings which indicates general layout of all tile, starting and stopping points of tile installations, locations of tile that are smaller than half -tile, locations of expansion joints, and other similar special conditions. Include tile edge details indicating conditions at adjacent materials. D. Samples: 1. Tile: Submit samples of each type and color of non - Owner - purchased tile to be provided under this Section. Include representative range of dimensions, colors, and finishes. 2. Sealer: Submit one sample, minimum 12 x 12 inch size, of each type sealed stone, for review of sealer appearance. Divide the face of each sample tile into 2 equal areas and apply sealer to one area while leaving the other area unsealed. 3. Screed: Submit samples, 4 to 8 inches in length. 4. Transition Type Rubber Threshold: Submit samples, 4 to 8 inches in length. 5. Grout: a. Submit cured samples, minimum 2 inches long, of each type and color. b. Furnish cured samples of approved grout colors to the sealant Section for color matching. E. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Field Test Report: Submit documentation attesting to the flood testing of the membrane waterproofing; indicate the procedures, test results, and modifications that were required. 2. Mortar Coverage Inspection Report: Submit documentation of visual inspection performed during installation of large- format tile as described herein. F. Contract Closeout Submittals: . 1. Conform with requirements of Section 017700. 2. Record Drawings: a. Indicate the installed locations of substrate construction and control joints, and locations of expansion joints in floor tile fields. b. Indicate shrinkage cracks in slabs at time of tile installation. c. Indicate the installed locations and extent of crack isolation membrane, include the _ additional locations which may have been added to the Contract. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installation of tile shall be performed by specialists in the installation of tile, with minimum 5 years experience in work of type and scope similar to that of this Project, including stone tile installation. 2. Installing company shall be capable of furnishing, upon request, resume of similar work performed within the last 3 years in the Project area. B. Pre -Award Meeting: 1. Prior to tile installer subcontract award, administer a meeting to address field conditions, materials, related work, sequencing and coordination, inspections, substrate requirements, warranty requirements, include procedures and requirements for shop drawing submittals, shipment of Owner furnished tile, scheduling, delivery, storage and transportation. 2. Require in attendance the Architect and each prospective installer. 3. Subcontract award will be conditional upon installer's demonstration of intent to furnish all materials necessary for installation of tile furnished under separate subcontract, to perform field fabrication as necessary to complete the work, and to provide complete installed tile systems in compliance with all provisions of the Contract Documents. C. Pre - Installation Conference: 1. In accordance with Section 013119, schedule and administer a meeting to review and discuss the tile installation a minimum of 7 calendar days prior to commencement of work of this Section. 2. Require in attendance the Architect, the tile installer, the sealant installer, the slab leveling materials installer, the mortar and grout manufacturer's representatives, and all other parties affected by work of this Section. 093000 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 093000 — TILING 3. Agenda: Address installation scheduling and procedures, scheduling of mock -up construction and review, coordination, slab condition and preparation, protection requirements, expansion joint locations, tile quantities required, material and installation tolerances, profiles of grouted joints, grout release and sealing procedures, acceptance criteria, remedies, and overage required for waste. D. Mock -Ups: 1. Provide mock -ups in accordance with Section 014500. 2. Main Field Tile Mock -Up: a. In a location as directed, install a minimum 100 foot square mock -up section of tile flooring, with metal screed at one edge (showing mitered inside corners), grout, and grout joint widths to demonstrate quality of workmanship to be expected in the finished work. b. Remove floor tiles from mock -up as directed by Architect, to verify coverage of mortar. 3. Restroom Tile: In location as approved by the Architect, install a minimum 50 square foot mock- up of rest room wall, base, and floor tile. Incorporate tile and grout types indicated. Show proposed grout joint widths. 4. Approved mock -ups may be used in the Work. E. Verification of Mortar Contact: At a maximum of two locations on each floor, after the mortar has set but prior to grouting, the Architect and /or Owner may require that a floor tile be removed to verify extent of mortar coverage. Replace demolished tile with new. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Section 016000. B. Installer Inspection: 1. Inspect the tile prior to transporting it from the Project warehouse to the Project Site 2. Inspect shipping containers and representative samples of tiles to verify freedom from damage, including cracks, chips, stains, dimensional irregularities, and other imperfections. 3. Color and Pattern Culling: a. Inspect representative samples of tile to identify color and pattern trends, and segregate so that the tile can be installed in a uniform appearance. b. Pull a minimum of 2 tiles from each porcelain tile pallet. c. Pull a minimum of 2 stone tiles from each foam shipping carton. 4. Non - conforming and damaged pieces shall be isolated in a separate location for replacement. C. Transport accepted tile from the Owner's warehouse to the Site. D. Store tile in a dry, protected area; store cementitious materials in weather tight spaces, free from moisture. E. Prevent the from coming into contact with materials which could cause staining or discoloration. F. Replace with new undamaged materials all materials damaged as a result of shipping or handling procedures. 1.7 INSPECTIONS BY THE ARCHITECT A. Inspection After Shipping: 1. In accordance with Section 015000, the Owner will furnish warehouse space sufficient for receipt, storage, inspection, and dispatch of stone, including Owner - procured stone. The Contractor shall furnish personnel as necessary to assist in lifting, uncrating, distribution, and repacking of stone. 2. Notify the Architect a minimum of 5 working days prior to delivery. 3. Upon delivery of each shipment of stone to the warehouse, the Contractor, together with the Owner, Architect, stone supplier, and stone installer, shall inspect the shipment for damage and completeness. 4. The General Contractor shall prepare stone for inspection as follows: a. Lay out crates according to plan attached below. b. Open crates gently, taking care not to wedge pry bars against foam packing boxes within crates. 093000 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 093000 — TILING c. Mark each crate with wide marker pen on wooden frame facing inspection samples, numbering each consecutively. As each shipment arrives, number consecutively, continuing from last number in the most recent shipment. d. From top layer of foam cartons, randomly select two cartons and set directly in front of each respective crate, marking on the foam carton the same number as on the crate. Repeat above by randomly selecting two cartons from the bottom layer. e. Carefully remove 5 tiles from each carton and carefully set on 1x6 wood sleepers directly in front of each respective crate, in accordance with scheme illustrated at the end of this Section. Take care to avoid chipping of edges. f. Dry tiles, or allow to dry, thoroughly before inspection. g. Have on hand an incandescent, free - standing light source along with use of warehouse fluorescent lighting, in order to allow the Architect to combine incandescent lighting with fluorescent for color inspection. h. Tiles will be inspected for color range, size and quality, per specifications. i. After inspection, carefully repack tiles into foam cartons face -to -face (finish side to finish side) without any bottom of tile rubbing against any other tile face. j. Re -pack crates tightly, re -crate and stack cartons carefully in numerical order. 5. Non - conforming and damaged pieces shall be identified and isolated in a separate location for subsequent replacement. 6. Promptly replace all stone fabrications missing or damaged in shipment with new materials. 7. Comply with additional requirements for Owner Furnished Contractor Installed products as specified in Section 011000. 093000 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 093000 — TILING 00 ❑❑❑ 000 000 000 000 000 - o 28 0 ° 29 30 31 19 ° 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 0 000 000 000 000 000 000 00 00 000 000 000 000 000 000 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 m 2 m 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CO F27 ❑❑❑ 0 FOAM CARTONS MARKED 0000❑❑ WITH CRATE NUMBER 000 ❑❑❑ TYPICAL STONE LAYOUT @ EACH CRATE. 0 LAY STONE ON 2X4 WOOD SLATS TO KEEP ABOVE FLOOR FOR DRYING PROTECTION FROM DAMAGE. STONE INSPECTION LAYOUT PLAN 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Floor tile shall be left clean and ready for application of tile sealer a minimum of 30 days prior to scheduled Store Turnover date. B. Sequence work such that the special concrete stains and sealers application specified in Section 099743 is completed prior to the installation of the transition type rubber threshold. 093000 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 093000 — TILING 1.9 SUBCONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. In accordance with Section 017700, furnish from the tile installer, written guarantees, executed to the Owner, against defects in workmanship and materials for 2 years from date of Store Opening. B. Include coverage of failure due to non - complying installation procedures; failure of grout due to improper mixing, installation, or curing procedures, and release of tile due to failure of adhesive bonds under normal usage and movement conditions. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Additional Owner - purchased tile intended for maintenance stock will be held by the stone supplier until store turnover, at which time it will be delivered to the store maintenance manager. _ B. Upon completion of installation, any unused tile shall be returned to the Owner's Project warehouse, packed & padded to prevent breakage, and properly labeled. C. Only retain tile that is in conformance with these specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STONE TILE AND SHAPES A. Furnished by Owner. B. Types: Refer to the Finish Legend for interior stone. 2.2 FLOOR TILE A. Furnished by Owner. B. Types: Refer to the Finish Legend. C. The Owner's supplier will furnish precut tile to minimize requirements for field cutting. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, field cutting requirements shall be limited to cutting of tile or panel edges at intersections with walls, columns, or other building components to be installed prior to tile installation. D. Shop precutting will be in accordance with shop drawings furnished by the Owner's supplier. Obtain copies for review and transmit one copy to the Architect. 2.3 PORCELAIN TILE AND BASE AT TOILET ROOMS A. Provide tile manufactured in accordance with ANSI A137.1. B. Types: Refer to the Finish Legend. 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Setting Materials: 1. Latex Portland Cement Mortar (Thinset): a. Mapei Corporation "Kerabond" with " Keralastic" latex additive. b. Laticrete International, Inc. "317 Thin Set Mortar" mixed with "333 Super Flexible Mortar Additive." c. Bostik Findley, Inc. (800- 592 -8558) "Hydroment Tile -Mate Premium" with "447 Flex -A- Lastic," proportions as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Rapid -Set Thin Bed Mortar: a. "Grani /Rapid" with "KER 318 Keralastic" by Mapei Corp. b. Hydroment "Single Flex FS," by Bostik Findley, Inc. 800 - 592 -8558. c. "211 Crete Filler Powder" with "4237 Latex Thin -set Mortar Additive" and "101 Rapid Set Latex "(proportions as recommended by the manufacturer for the setting time required)," by Laticrete International, Inc.. 3. Medium Bed Latex Portland Cement Mortar: a. Mapei Corporation "Ultra /Contact." b. Laticrete International, Inc. "220 Medium Bed Mortar" mixed with "333 Super Flexible Mortar Additive." 093000 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 093000 — TILING c. Bostik Findley, Inc. (800- 592 -8558) "Hydroment Medium Bed Mortar" mixed with "425 Multi - Purpose Acrylic Admixture," proportions as recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type 1. 5. Thick Bed Mortar: a. Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. b. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206 or C207, Type S. c. Sand: ASTM C144. d. Water: Clean and free of deleterious materials. e. Proportioning: Per TCNA Handbook. B. Reinforced Waterproof Membrane: - 1. Laticrete International, Inc. "Laticrete® Hydro Ban TM . " 2. "NobleSeal TS" by The Noble Company, or "Dal -Seal TS." by Dal -Tile Corp; CPE sheet with non- woven polyester fabric laminated to both sides; NobleBond 21 adhesive bond coat. C. Crack Isolation Membrane: 1. "NobleSeal CIS" by The Noble Company, or "Dal -Seal CIS" by Dal -Tile Corp; CPE sheet with non -woven polyester fabric laminated to both sides; 48 inch width for tile 16 inches and below, 72 inch width for tile 18 inches and above; with NobleBond 21 adhesive bond coat. 2. N.A.C. Products Inc. "ECB Membrane," self bonding reinforced modified asphalt sheet membrane; 36 inch width (for tile 12 inches and below). 3. "Laticrete Blue 92" by Laticrete International, Inc. D. Reinforcing Mesh: 2 "x 2 "x 16/16 gage welded wire mesh. E. Grout: 1. Normal Setting Grout: a. Bostik Findley, Inc.( 800 - 592 -8558) "Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout" mixed with 100 percent "425 Multi- Purpose Acrylic ", or 100 percent styrene butadiene rubber additive, as recommended by the grout manufacturer. b. Laticrete International "1500 Series Sanded Grout," or "1600 Series Unsanded Tri -Poly Grout," as appropriate; each mixed with 100 percent Laticrete "1776 Grout Admix Plus" acrylic admixture. c. Mapei Corporation "Keracolor S" sanded grout or "Keracolor U" unsanded grout. 2. Fast Setting Grout: a. "Ultra /Color" by Mapei Corp. b. "Floor Joint and Grout Filler" with "3701 Latex Mortar Admixture" and "101 Rapid Set Latex ", by Laticrete International, Inc. (proportions as recommended by the manufacturer for the setting time required). 3. Types: Unsanded at wall tile with grout joints less than 1/8 inch; sanded at all other locations. 4. Colors: Match scheduled colors; refer to Finish Legend. F. Metal Screed: 1. Clear anodized aluminum, one of the following: a. SCHIENE -AE by Schluter Systems, Inc. (800/472 - 4588). b. CTC Edge by Ceramic Tool Company (800/236- 5230). c. Edge Protector Trim by Blanke Corporation (800/787- 5055). 2. Provide sizes as required for installation with top of screed aligned flush with top surface of tile, except at beveled edge tile align top edge of screed with bottom edge of bevel on the tile. G. Transition Type Rubber Threshold: Transition design; Pemko "SBR.5" with Liquid Nails No. LN901 installation adhesive; for installation at Sales Floor at the locations indicated. Separate rubber threshold is provided under Section 087100 at doors and cased openings as a part of hardware groups. H. Cementitious Backing Board: 1. Board: 1/2 inch nominal thickness, aggregated portland cement panel, reinforced with glass fiber mesh; "WonderBoard" by Custom Building Products (800/272- 8786), "Durock Cement Board" by USG Corporation (800/874- 4968). 2. Joint Tape: Open weave glass mesh joint tape, self- adhesive; 2 -1/2 inches wide. 093000 -7 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 093000 — TILING 3. Fasteners: Thread forming self - drilling wafer head screws, polymer coated or zinc plated; minimum 1 inch length. I. Siloxane Type Tile Sealer: 1. Miracle Sealants "511 -H20" by Miracle Sealants and Abrasives Company (800/350- 1901). 2. Aqua Mix "Sealer's Choice Gold" by Aqua Mix, Inc. (800/272- 8786). J. Grout Release (for use with stone tile showing grout staining as determined by mock -up): 1. Grout Release Water Repellent: Miracle Sealants and Abrasives Company "511 Impregnator." or Miracle Sealants "Porous Plus." K. Grout Release Stripper for Water Borne Grout Release: "Rinse Free Strip" by Spartan Chemical Co.; alkaline cleaning solution, diluted in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. L. Protective Covering Paper: Fortifiber "Seekure"; reinforced 2 ply laminated kraft paper. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully examine installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. B. Identify locations of control joints, construction joints, and cracks in slab surfaces to receive tile; note all variations between Drawings and actual field conditions. C. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. D. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Perform moisture test in accordance with ASTM F2170 to verify that floors are dry. Notify the Architect of readings in excess of 75% relative humidity (RH). B. Floor Preparation: 1. Clean substrate surfaces free of grease, dirt, dust, organic impurities, curing agents, and other materials which would impair bond. 2. Floors to receive tile without waterproof membrane or crack isolation shall be cleaned by detergent, scarification, shot blasting, or other methods as recommended by the mortar materials manufacturer to ensure secure bond; thoroughly rinse with clear water. 3. Take special care to avoid damaging or adversely affecting the appearance of surfaces to receive special concrete stains and sealers specified in Section 099743. C. Field coordinate the actual casework/aisle layout in areas indicated for display casework in tile fields. D. Accurately lay out locations of tile. Determine and indicate borders, patterns, screed locations, starting points, and field- determined tile dimensions. Do not commence tile installation, until all conflicts with patterns indicated on the drawings have been resolved with Architect. E. Where additional fabrication is required for fitting and detailing of stone to fit adjoining materials, shop fabricate wherever feasible. F. Field cut tile as necessary for accurate placement and fit, with uniform joint widths. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CEMENTITIOUS BACKING BOARD A. Screw -attach board with screws of type as described in this section, spaced 8 inches on center, into each framing component. B. Install tape reinforcing at all board joints. 093000 -8 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 093000 — TILING 3.4 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install waterproof membranes in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Except where indicated otherwise, extend waterproof membrane up the wall to 4 inch minimum height. Do not expose the waterproof membrane to view. C. Install waterproof membrane into clamping ring of floor drains. D. Protect waterproof membrane from damage until after tile installation is complete. E. Membrane locations are scheduled at the end of this Section. F. Flood Testing of Membrane: 1. Water test waterproof membrane installations at above grade floors prior to installation of tile. 2. Notify the Architect a minimum of 72 hours prior to testing. 3. Verify that elements installed by other trades which penetrate the membrane are sealed and ready to receive testing. 4. Plug drains and provide water dams to contain the water. 5. Fill test area with water to a depth of 1 inch at the shallowest point, and leave for a minimum of 24 hours. 6. Repair leaks observed from test; retest as necessary to achieve a leak -free installation. 3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install crack isolation membrane in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install crack isolation membrane prior to cementitious leveling. C. Install to concrete floor slabs indicated for tile finish, to cover the following: 1. Substrate control and construction joints, minimum 30 inch width, with minimum 12 inches between substrate joint and edge of membrane for 12 inch tile. In installations where the tile is greater than 12 inch size, provide additional membrane as necessary to ensure that tile on each side of substrate joint has the membrane beneath the tile. 2. Terminate membrane at edge of tile field. 3. Surfaces of suspended slabs around escalator wells, minimum of 9' -0" outboard from escalator landing plates, and 4' -0" outboard from edge of escalator well. 4. Surfaces of suspended slabs, minimum 30 inches wide, centered at building column grid lines. 5. Omit at floors indicated for waterproof membrane. D. Substrates to receive tile flooring shall be reviewed by the Contractor, the tile subcontractor, the Owner, and the Architect. Notify the Owner and the Architect minimum of 5 working days before commencing with installation to allow for the examination. The examination will determine the need, if any, for treatment of slab cracks with crack isolation membrane. Additional crack isolation membrane at locations directed by Architect will be added to the Contract under a unit price basis in accordance with provisions of Sections 012000 and 012200. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF TILE A. TCNA Systems: Unless specified otherwise, install tile in accordance with the TCNA systems scheduled at the end of this Section using indicated system with specified materials. B. Field Cutting: 1. Field cut tile as necessary for accurate placement and fit, with joint widths uniform. 2. Bevel exposed top edges of cut stone tile to a uniform profile to match factory edge. C. To the greatest extent possible, arrange tile with similar color and pattern so that the finished installation presents a uniform appearance. D. Slab Leveling: 1. Prior to installation of thinset floor tile, where local irregularities in the substrate surface would prevent level installation of the tile, the substrate shall be brought to proper elevation, and leveled to a plane surface with variations not to exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, or within 1/8 inch of indicated plane at surfaces indicated for slope to drain. 093000 -9 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 093000 — TILING 2. Level with latex modified thinset mortar screeded or floated to appropriate thickness; allow to set prior to proceeding with installation. 3. Where correction of slab level conditions is performed under this Section, alternative leveling compounds and procedures may be utilized in lieu of the above, subject to endorsement by the setting mortar manufacturer and approval under provisions of Section 016000. E. Thick Bed Mortar Applications: 1. Thick Setting and Leveling Beds for Floor Installations: a. Install in conjunction with tile as indicated. b. Apply setting and mortar beds to thickness required for ultimate proper location of tile finish surface, or carpet inset crush line elevation, as applicable. Compensate for indicated pitches, tile thickness, and bond coat thickness. c. Install reinforcing mesh at mid depth of all thick mortar beds. d. Slope mortar beds to drain; 1/8 inch in five feet maximum. 2. Provide medium bed mortar at floor drains; refer to floor drain details. F. Screed Installation: 1. Coordinate with tile and leveling bed installation to ensure accurate placement, in accordance with details and tolerance requirements. 2. Install screeds at tile field edges except at interface with metal transition materials and where otherwise indicated. 3. Verify that substrate is clean, dry, and in proper condition for adhesive attachment. 4. Accurately cut to length for flush butt joints; miter at angle joints; do not bend; remove burrs. 5. Install in longest possible lengths, except that no section screed shall be longer than 12 feet nor shorter than 4 feet in length for continuous runs greater than 16 feet. 6. Install screeds in accurate locations, free from waves, and variations in height. 7. Set screeds directly in setting bed as the tile installation proceeds. 8. Make butt joints tight and in accurate alignment with moderate contact; do not force. 9. Obtain Architect's approval, prior to grinding screeds. Grind screed joints as necessary to correct minor misalignment, and to ease sharp outside corners. Maintain tops of screeds flat and in accurate alignment. 10. Installation of tile adjacent to screeds: a. Install tile at SCHIENE -AE with the void space between screed and tile edge filled with tile grout. b. Install tile tight to CTC Edge with the void space between screed and tile edge filled with tile setting mortar. G. Transition Type Rubber Threshold Installation at Sales Floor: 1. Coordinate tile installation to ensure a straight edge to receive transition type rubber threshold. 2. Prepare surfaces so that they are clean, dry, and in proper condition for adhesive attachment; preparation marks shall not extend beyond the toe of the transition type rubber threshold such that they are exposed in the finished work. 3. Install in longest possible lengths, except that no section shall be shorter than 4 feet in length for continuous runs greater than 15 feet. 4. Install threshold tight to tile edge, free from waves, and variations in height. 5. Set threshold directly in adhesive. 6. Accurately cut to length for flush butt joints; miter at angle joints; cuts shall be clean and straight. 7. Make butt joints tight and in accurate alignment with moderate contact; do not force. H. Installation of Large Format Tile (8 inches by 8 inches or larger): 1. Wash backs of each tile to remove all dust and soil that would compromise adhesion. 2. Dampen substrate as necessary to prevent excessive suction. 3. Key the mortar into the substrate with the flat side of the trowel. 4. Comb mortar over the previously keyed substrate in one direction using the notch side of the trowel. 5. Firmly press each tile into the mortar. Press down and move the tile back and forth perpendicularly across the ridges approximately 1/8 to 1/4 inch to flatten the ridges and fill in the valleys of the combed mortar. 6. Set tile within 15 minutes of spreading setting mortar. 093000 -10 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 093000 — TILING 7. Set tiles in accurate alignment. Beat in with a wood block and small hammer as necessary to level tiles. 8. Provide temporary setting buttons and shims as necessary to maintain wall tiles in position until setting mortar has set. I. Special Stone and Porcelain Tile Installation Requirements: 1. Tiles that exhibit directional patterns shall be set with grain direction as indicated on the shop drawings, or, if not indicated, as directed by the Architect. 2. Tiles shall be blended as required to avoid pattern repeats and "patches" of adjoining tiles of distinctive color or character within each field area. Coordinate distribution of tiles on the floor with the Architect. 3. Polish exposed edges to provide a finished appearance equal to that of the tile face. J. Special Requirements for Toilet Room Tile: 1. Install coved base at intersection of floor with walls. 2. Install butted, vertical inside corners above mitered, inside corner, coved base. 3. Install edge - polished tile at exposed edges. 4. Install bullnose, coved base at base -only conditions. 5. Install squared -top (unfinished top edge) coved base at walls to be tiled. K. Clean joints to receive grout free of mortar to a minimum depth of 1/4 inch. L. Use medium bed mortar as filler around floor drains where thinset mortar bed thickness exceeds 3/16 inch thickness. M. Joint Widths: 1. Porcelain and Stone Tile: 1/8 inch; typical joints grouted. 2. Exterior Facing Tile: 1/8 inch; rake joints free of mortar to full depth of setting bed for receipt of sealant. Sealant materials and installation are specified as work of Section 079200. N. Installation Tolerance: Install tile with uniform joint widths; maximum variations at grout joints not to exceed the following: 1. Variation in Average Joint Width: Plus 0 or minus 25 percent of specified width. 2. Variation in Width Between Individual Joints: Plus or minus 25 percent of average joint width within each distinct field. 3. Variation in joint width from one end to the other: 25 percent. 4. Variation in Finish Height of Floor Tile Edge Across Grout Joint (lip): 1/32 inch. 3.7 EXPANSION JOINTS • A. Spacing: 1. Place expansion joints in tile at maximum 16 foot intervals, at cold (construction) joints and control joints in substrate surfaces, at junctures of tile with dissimilar materials (with the exception of screeds), at intersections with walls and columns, at tops and bottoms of ramps, and at other locations as indicated. 2. Adjust joint locations as necessary to accommodate field conditions. Verify locations with Architect. B. Joint Size: Match tile grout joint width. C. Construction: Rake expansion joints free of mortar to full depth of setting bed for receipt of sealant. D. Sealant: Sealant materials and installation are specified as work of Section 079200. Coordinate to ensure compliance with required schedule, including allowance for sealant cure time. 3.8 GROUTING A. Grout Release at Stone Tile: 1. Apply grout release to wearing surfaces of stone floor tile types determined by mock -up to be subject to grout staining. Apply either prior to tile installation or prior to installation of grout. 2. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using techniques to prevent grout release material from coating tile edge in contact with surfaces to receive grout or sealant. 093000 -11 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 093000 — TILING 3. For bidding purposes, assume that grout release will not be required. Payment for addition of grout release requirements will be determined in accordance with Sections 012000 and 012200. B. Except for expansion joints, grout tile joints in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Tool or float joints slightly concave, recessed to bottom arris of bevel at eased edge tiles. C. Do not grout joints indicated to receive sealants, including inside right angle corner joints between floors and walls or column bases. Grout joints which intersect joints to receive sealant shall be finished flush with tile edges. D. The tight gap between screed and tile shall remain free of grout. Protect screed from damage and dislocation during grouting operations. E. Wipe surface clean after grouting; use minimum amount of water necessary to clean surfaces to avoid leaching of pigments or cement from uncured grout. Take special care to minimize standing time of uncured grout on exposed surfaces of screeds. Do not use acid cleaners. F. Remove efflorescence from cured grout joints prior to application of sealer. 3.9 CURING A. Immediately after grouting and cleaning, begin curing procedures accordance with the grout - manufacturer's instructions. Monitor moisture content of grout for minimum 72 hours to ensure complete cure. B. Do not use polyethylene or products containing bituminous materials. For floor surfaces, use the method specified for traffic protection. C. Protect tile surfaces during curing. Keep traffic off tile surfaces. D. Periodically test cured grout, to confirm complete and proper hydration. Grout that fails to cure properly shall be removed and replaced with new. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each tile unit prior to installation to verify conformance with specifications, and freedom from damage, including cracks, chips, stains, and other imperfections. Non - conforming and damaged tile shall be rejected. B. Mortar Coverage Inspection: 1. The General Contractor shall conduct periodic visual inspection of large- format floor tile during installation. 2. A minimum of one out of every one hundred freshly installed floor tile must be removed to check for adequate mortar coverage. 3. Presence of air pockets will necessitate the removal and resetting of floor tile in the affected area. Removal shall progress through the work area until the presence of air pockets is no longer observed. 4. Documentation of the visual inspection and resultant removal and resetting shall be provided to the Architect for each day's work. Include the date, time, location within the store, frequency of samples observed, and extent of tile removed and reset. C. Installed tiles that are found to be defective shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory material, subject to the Architect's approval. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Comply with Section 015000. B. Special Protection Requirements For Interior Floor Tile Surfaces: 1. Areas Subject Only to Foot Traffic: Lay down non - staining curing paper lapped and sealed at joints and edges with Nashua Brand Duct Tape. Do not use polyethylene or products containing bituminous materials. 2. Areas Subject to Rolling Trucks, Dollies and Other Equipment: In addition to the above, such areas shall be further protected by continuous plywood or hardboard runways. Coordinate designation of such areas. 093000 -12 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 093000 — TILING 3.12 CLEANING A. Comply with provisions of Sections 015000 and 017700. B. Coordinate final cleaning with work of Section 079200. Do not begin cleaning operations until tile expansion joint sealants are fully cured. C. Where water borne grout release has been used, strip with grout release stripper applied with a white scrubbing pad and vacuum retrieval process, and in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. D. Special Cleaning Requirements for Floor Tile: Prior to sealer application, clean as follows: 1. Preparation: a. Broom sweep debris. b. If necessary, use a wood or plastic scraper to remove items such as labels, stickers, and drywall joint compound. c. Dust mop with clean dry dust mop. 2. Cleaning: a. Using a rotary scrubbing machine, thoroughly clean floor tile using cleaning materials and techniques to remove soil and residue from tile surface without damage to tile, grout, sealant expansion joints, or adjacent carpet. b. Rinse thoroughly and mop dry to remove cleaner from tile and grout. c. Repeat process as necessary to remove all visible soil and streaking. 3. Covering: Protect cleaned tile floors from traffic. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner, re- cover floors and maintain covered until commencement of sealing operations. 3.13 TILE SEALING A. Typical Sealer: 1. Apply specified sealer in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to achieve optimum penetration into tiles and grouts. 2. Apply 2 coats sealer to floor tile fields, tile base, and tile wainscot, including those with previous treatments. 3. Wipe surfaces after each application as necessary to remove visible sealer residue. 4. Use additional coats or pre- treatment procedures as recommended by the manufacturer of sealer for porous surfaces and other special conditions. 3.14 SCHEDULES A. Interior tile locations and corresponding grout types are indicated in the Finish Legend. B. Install continuous waterproof membrane at floors and base at Family and Toilet Rooms located on upper floors above occupied spaces. C. TCNA Installation System Schedule: Application Installation System Floor tile and thresholds over concrete F113 with latex Portland cement mortar, except floor slabs F122 at waterproof membrane or crack isolation membrane. Ceramic wall tile over gypsum board W243 with latex Portland cement mortar, or W242 with organic adhesive Stone wall tile and base over gypsum W243, with latex Portland cement mortar board Stone tile over cementitious backing board W244 with latex Portland cement mortar END OF SECTION 093000 -13 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 095113 — ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Suspended acoustical ceiling grid systems, acoustical units, and associated trim. B. Related Sections: 1. 092200 — Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board: Option for metal stud system at light cove framing. 2. 092900 - Gypsum Board: Coordination of light cove construction. 3. 099000 - Painting: Painting of lay -in acoustical panels and ceiling grid, in place. 4. 210000 - Fire Suppression: Sprinkler layout and penetrations. 5. 233000 — HVAC Air Distribution: Duct layout and ceiling grilles. 6. 260500 — Common Work Results for Electrical: Light track and other electrical connection work. 7. 265000 - Lighting: Coordination with installation of lighting fixtures; light tracks; installation of track lights. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1 C635 - Metal suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. 2. C636 - Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay - in Panels. B. International Building Code (IBC) C. Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA) 1. Recommendations for Direct Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings — Seismic Zones 0- 2. 2. Guidelines for Seismic Restraint Direct Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings — Seismic Zones 3 &4. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit product literature for all products and systems. C. Samples: 1. Submit each type of acoustical unit proposed for the work, including reveal edges, where applicable; minimum 6 x 12 inch size. 2. Submit main runner, wall molding, and light cove molding proposed for the work; minimum 4 inches in length. • 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C635 and C636. B. Codes: Comply with requirements of jurisdictional Code authorities. C. Conform to the requirements of IBC Chapter 16, Seismic Design Category D, CISCA seismic zones 3- 4, and the requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities. D. Pre - installation Conferences: 1. Pre - Installation conferences shall be in accordance with Section 013119. 2. Administer a meeting to discuss the acoustical ceiling work. a. Schedule the pre - installation meeting to coincide with mock -up review. 095113 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 095113 — ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS b. Require in attendance the following parties: 1) Owner 2) Architect 3) General Contractor 4) Acoustical ceiling Subcontractor (including actual installers). 5) Sprinkler Subcontractor. 6) Electrical Subcontractor. 7) All other parties affected by the work of this Section. c. Agenda: Address installation scheduling and procedures, layout, cutting operations to accommodate penetrations and field conditions, anchorage and fastenings systems, bracing, surface mounted light track installation, dressing room lighting, display hangers, column details, field painting, and overage for Owner's maintenance stock. 3. Also attend pre - installation conference specified in Section 230500. E. Mock -ups: 1. Provide mock -ups in accordance with Section 014500. 2. Schedule mock -ups to allow time for revisions or additional mock -ups as necessary to obtain approval. 3. Provide a minimum total of 400 square feet of acoustical ceiling in Dressing Room and Sales Floor areas as approved. 4. Mock up areas shall include column, perimeter soffits, and other conditions as approved. 5. Demonstrate field cutting for down lights and sprinkler heads, perimeter soffit conditions, surface mounted light track installation, special dressing room lighting, and other conditions as indicated for the mock -up areas. 6. Approved mock -up may be used in the completed work. 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish 3 percent extra stock for each type of acoustical unit and finish scheduled, required for future replacement. B. Deliver acoustical units in unopened factory cartons clearly marked to identify contents. 1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROUGH SUSPENSION A. Hanger Wire: Minimum 12 gage; galvanized; soft annealed mild wire steel. B. Wire ties: 18 gage galvanized annealed steel wire. C. Carrying Channels: Cold rolled steel; 16 gage; 1 -1/2 inch. D. Anchorage Devices: Cast in place type, inserts, powder driven fasteners, screws; minimum 100 lb pullout strength for each application. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Exposed T System: 1. ASTM C635, heavy duty classification; direct hung; exposed "T" design; factory baked on finish to match acoustical panels. 2. Furnish stabilizer bars, splices, main - runner seismic joints, edge moldings, and other items as necessary to complete suspended ceiling grid system. B. Moldings: 1. Shadow Moldings: Match existing. 2. Perimeter Angles: a. Manufacturer's standard; 7/8 or 15/16 inch horizontal flange may be used in lieu of the 2 inch horizontal flange; dependent on approval of BERC2 clip by the AHJ. 095113 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 095113 — ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS C. Finish /Color: Match existing. D. Accessories: 1. Provide compression struts, stabilizer bars, concealed clips for securing tees to perimeter moldings, clips for securing grid system to top of walls abutting the ceiling, and other components required for a complete installation. 2. "Beam End Retaining Clip" System (BERC2) by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, PA (888/234- 5464). 2.3 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Match existing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully examine installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. C. Coordinate work of this Section with Architectural, Structural, Electrical, Mechanical, and Sprinkler work. 3.2 INSTALLATION - GRID SYSTEM A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636, IBC and CISCA 3-4, manufacturer's product data and instructions, and as supplemented in this Section. Firmly anchor all items in place. B. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, provide secondary carrying channels for indirect support of the suspension system, or reinforce the nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying channels as required to span the required distance C. Hanger Wires: 1. Set hanger wires into drilled structural slabs or support from structural members or metal decking. Comply with Section 014500 requirements for anchorage into metal decking. 2. Space hanger wires 4 feet on center, each direction, with additional hangers at ends of each suspension member; do not splay wires more than 5 inches in a 4 -foot vertical drop and wrap wire a minimum of 3 times horizontally turning end upward. 3. Space hanger wires at 12 inches on center along grid at display hanger locations indicated on the Drawings. D. Stabilize ceiling suspension system against lateral movement, by means of diagonal bracing. E. Stabilize ceiling suspension system against lateral movement, by means of diagonal bracing consisting of four diagonal tie wires and vertical compression strut, spaced 12' -0" o.c., each way. F. Perimeters: 1. Moldings a. Install moldings where suspended ceilings intersect vertical surfaces. 1) Install L- molding at square edge panels and at suspension systems with no panels. b. Install C- molding at the exposed perimeter of acoustical ceilings that do not abut a vertical building component. c. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps. d. Do not use pop rivets to secure suspension grid to the moldings; use grid manufacturer's standard concealed clips. e. Install 2 inch shadow molding and 2 inch L- molding at perimeter when the span of the proposed suspended ceiling system between perimeter walls exceeds 25 in both directions. 095113 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 095113 — ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS f. Installation of "Beam End Retaining Clip" System (BERC2): Install the BERC2 system in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). 2. Systems for Installation of Panels: Where indicated on the Drawings and where installation of grid suspension members would result in perimeter panels less than 4 inches in width, or triangular panels less than 12 inches in leg dimension, reconfigure main /secondary runner pattern and /or add additional suspension members on 24x24 inch grid as necessary to permit installation of minimum size panels, as specified. G. Runner Installation: 1. Space main runners at 4 feet on center, at right angles to carrying channel where applicable, with primary cross runners at 4 feet on center and the 4 x 4 foot space divided with a 4 foot secondary runner placed parallel to main runner to form a 2 x 4 foot grid. 2. Provide additional main runners for support of surface mounted light tracks placed perpendicular to primary grid direction. Where light tracks are placed parallel to main runners but placed between the main runners, provide additional main runners to support the light tracks. 3. Provide 2 foot supplementary cross runners where necessary. 4. Provide supplementary cross runners as necessary to provide 4 -sided support for 12x48 inches fluorescent light fixtures. 5. At butt, X, and T intersections, tightly butt the tees together with no exposed cover plates at joints. 6. Where cutting to length is required at intersections between tees, make cuts neatly and accurately for intersections without gaps. 7. Coordinate electrical requirements with surface mounted light track specified in Section 265000 - Lighting. Electrical service to surface mounted light tracks will require installation of canopy /feed within the grid system; coordinate requirements and locations accordingly 8. Surface mounted light tracks placed at 45 degrees to the grid system shall span between the grid members; supplemental tee runners to support the tracks will not be required at this condition. Refer to surface mounted light track and canopy details for installation conditions. H. Frame for HVAC diffuser openings, light diffusers, and light fixtures where shown or as required. I. Suspension System Installation Tolerance: 1. Level to within 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Perimeter Reveal Variation from Indicated Dimension: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. 3.3 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in level plane in straight -line courses, placing materials to bear all around on suspension members. Carefully install units to avoid damage. B. Install acoustical units in the same orientation within a room or area. C. Neatly cut acoustical units as required for installation: 1. Trim and re- rabbet cut edges of reveal edge units for intersections with supporting grid. Panels cut to fit at perimeters of acoustical panel fields shall be cut at wall molding edge only with factory- rabbeted edges installed against the grid system. 2. Trim and re- rabbet cut edges of reveal edge units at canopy /power feed locations; refer to details. D. Special Requirements for Minimum Panel Size: 1. Panels less than 4 inches in width and triangular panels with less than 12 -inch leg dimension not permitted. 2. For panels greater than 24 inches (nominal) but less than 28 inches in longest dimension (orthogonal or diagonal cut at one end), fabricate from type panels. 3. For panels greater than 28 inches in longest dimension, with diagonal cut end, fabricate from (typical) panels. E. Seismic Clips: Notch ceiling tile to accommodate seismic clips. F. After the entire ceiling installation is completed, adjust grid systems to specified tolerance. 095113 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 095113 — ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 3.4 CLEAN -UP A. Completely remove all fingerprints and traces of soil and damage from the surfaces of grid and acoustical materials using only those cleaning materials recommended for that purpose by the manufacturer of the material being cleaned. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Acoustic ceiling locations are scheduled on the Drawings. END OF SECTION 095113 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 096500 — RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient sheet flooring. 2. Resilient tile flooring. 3. Resilient base. 4. Resilient stair treads and landing tile. B. Related Sections: 1. 096800 - Carpeting: Coordination with base installation. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. F2170 -02 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's complete product literature for resilient flooring, resilient base, adhesives, leveling compounds, and related accessories. C. Samples: 1. For each type and color of resilient flooring material scheduled, submit 3 samples, not less than 8x10 inch size. 2. For each type and color of resilient base scheduled, submit 3 samples, not less than 12 inches in length. 3. Submit 3 samples, not less than 12 inches in length, of each type of transition strip required for the work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Room Temperature: Maintain minimum room temperature of 50 degrees F for period of 3 calendar days prior to moisture test procedures, during installation, and minimum of 72 hours after installation. 1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with provisions of Section 016000. 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. In addition to those required for construction, furnish 12 resilient stair treads for Owner's replacement stock. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STAIR TREADS AND LANDING TILE A. RF -1: 1. Manufacturer: The R.C.A. Rubber Company, Akron, OH (800/321- 2340). 096500 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 096500 — RESILIENT FLOORING 2. Treads: No. 90 Target, studded rubber design, molded solid rubber with nosings; black color; include No. 490 Target treads with two minimum 1/2 inch wide grooves filled full with yellow abrasive compound at nosings for installation at first bottom tread and at top of each stair run. 3. Landing Tile: No. 90A Target studded rubber design, 24 x 24 inch size, black color, for installation at landings. 2.2 RESILIENT FLOORING A. Manufacturers, Products, and Colors: Refer to Finish Legend for resilient sheet flooring and resilient tile flooring. 2.3 RESILIENT BASE A. Description: Coved style; roll stock; 1/8 inch thick; 4 inch high, except 6 inch high at sales floor columns and backwalls. B. Manufacturers, Products, and Colors: Refer to Finish Legend. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Latex Underlayment: Portland cement/latex patching and leveling compound; one of the following, or as otherwise recommended by the flooring adhesive manufacturer: 1. Dependable White Skimcoat Underlayment with Latex Liquid additive by Dependable Chemical Company, Inc., Rocky River, OH (800/227- 3434). 2. Redy- Mastic No. 08 Latex Underlayment by Gibson - Homans Company, Twinsburg, OH (330/425- 3255). 3. 445 Fast Setting Flooring Underlayment by W.W. Henry Company, 400 Ardex Park Drive, Aliquippa, PA (800/232 - 4832). B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by resilient stair treads, flooring, and base manufacturers for specific application C. Transition Strips: Vinyl, color as selected by the Architect. D. Epoxy Caulking: Type recommended by the stair tread manufacturer. E. Other Related Materials: Materials not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation of resilient stair treads, flooring, and base shall be only as recommended by the manufacturer of the material to which it is applied and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to commencing with work of this Section, carefully examine the installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. B. Install subfloor filler to fill low spots, cracks, construction joints, holes and other defects, and as required to adjust level to meet adjacent finishes. Feather to maximum slope of 1/8 inch in 3 feet; float to smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic over filler. C. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with installation in subject areas until discrepancies have been fully resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. D. Ensure that concrete floors are free from scaling, and exhibit acid neutrality. E. Moisture Testing of Concrete Slabs: 1. Perform moisture tests in accordance with ASTM F2170 to determine the vapor emission rate from the concrete floors, including slabs above grade. Notify the Architect of readings in excess of 75% relative humidity (RH). 3.2 SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Install resilient sheet flooring in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 096500 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 096500 — RESILIENT FLOORING B. Install sheet flooring to a minimum 1/3 full material width, with length of sheet parallel to length of room. Where cutting is required, cut and trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door at door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar, and where no threshold is indicated. D. Install transition strips at unprotected edges. 3.3 RESILIENT TILE INSTALLATION A. Install resilient tile flooring in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Clean substrate. Spread adhesive evenly in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure adhesion over entire area of installation. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of flooring before initial set. C. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to ensure full adhesion. D. Lay tiles with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. E. Install with minimum tile width 1/2 full size at room or area perimeter, to square grid pattern with joints aligned, and pattern grain alternating with adjacent unit to produce basket weave pattern. F. Terminate tile flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.4 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Install resilient base in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Fit joints tight and vertical, in accurate alignment. No section to be less than 48 inches in length. C. Score back of base material with grooving tool, at all outside corners; maintain minimum leg length 18 inches where wall length permits. Mount base so that scored groove is accurately aligned with corner, and with base tightly adhered to wall at both sides of corner, with no visible gaps at top of base. Stretch cove for smooth transition around corner, with toe in uniform contact with the finish flooring. D. Miter or cope inside corners for accurate fit. E. Scribe and fit to doorframes, stairs, and other obstructions. F. Install straight and level to maximum variation of plus or minus 1/8 inch over 10 feet. G. Solvent or adhesive weld joints in base at JANITOR rooms; seal base toe to floor. H. Location Schedule: 1. Install base to walls, columns, and to casework toe kicks in all areas where resilient base is listed in the Room Finish Schedule, and where no other base finish is specifically noted or detailed. 2. Unless specified otherwise, install base continuous behind lower level stock shelving and sales floor casework where located in areas scheduled for resilient base. 3. Omit resilient base at hardboard wainscot, precast concrete, and CMU walls. 4. Omit resilient base behind safe at C.R. and Fine Jewelry Office. 3.5 STAIR TREAD INSTALLATION A. Install resilient treads and landing tile at stairs to upper level stock areas in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Trim treads for tight fit to stringers and risers. C. Install epoxy caulking at nosing of stair treads to eliminate void space and provide firm support. D. Set treads into place with nosing return tight to stair riser and roll into adhesive for full contact. 096500 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 096500 — RESILIENT FLOORING E. Install landing tiles as indicated on the Drawings. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. 3.7 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the installation, immediately remove all surplus adhesive from adjacent surfaces. B. As soon as possible after installation, and in accordance with the timing recommended by the manufacturers, clean the entire resilient flooring surface using the materials recommended for that purpose by the manufacturers of the materials being cleaned. END OF SECTION 096500 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 096800 — CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of Owner furnished walk -off mat, carpet entrance mat, carpet , pad, and carpet tile, including floor carpet in passenger elevator. 2. Statements of required quantities of Owner - furnished walk -off mat, carpet and pad. 3. Transportation of walk -off mat, carpet, and pad from warehouse to jobsite. 4. Substrate preparation. 5. Coordination and installation of carpeted base to display casework. 6. Accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. 012200 - Unit Prices: Installation of carpet base at display casework. 2. 013546 - Carpet Reclamation: Procedures for recycling of existing carpet. 3. 062000 - Finish Carpentry: Wood base. 4. 096500 - Resilient Flooring: Resilient base. 5. 237000 — Central HVAC Equipment: Beneficial use. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. F2170 -02 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. 1.3 QUANTITY STATEMENTS A. Carpet, pad, walk -off mat, carpet entrance mat, carpet tile, and pertinent installation with maintenance instructions will be furnished by Owner. B. Quantities of carpet purchased will be based on the approved Quantity Statement furnished by the Contractor for the exact amount required for the installation. Overage quantities will be added separately by the Owner for each type of carpet. C. Types and locations of each type of carpet shall be as scheduled and indicated on the Owner's Purchase Order; base bid on special requirements for each carpet type, including requirements for special adhesive and pattern matching. D. Contractor shall be responsible for accuracy of quantity statements. In the event that insufficient quantity is discovered after order has been placed, proceed as follows: 1. Immediately notify the Owner in writing of the additional quantities required, whereupon the Owner will, at his cost, obtain the additional quantities. 2. Install additional quantities at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Pay for unusual transportation costs incurred in obtaining additional materials. 4. Carpet furnished for overage may be installed, if necessary. Notify Owner of quantity of carpet installed so that he may obtain additional carpet for overage stock. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Submittals Prior to Sub -bid: 1. List of proposed bidders. 2. For each proposed bidder, include evidence of compliance with installer qualification requirements. 096800 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 096800 — CARPET C. Submittal With Sub -Bid: 1. Submit preliminary quantity statements for entrance carpet, each type of carpet and pad from each prospective carpet subcontractor. Base quantity statements on seaming diagram indicated on Drawings. Do not include overages in Quantity Statement. 2. Include amounts required for carpet base on display casework provided under separate contract. 3. Architect will return acceptable quantity statements to the Contractor. Only sub - bidders with acceptable quantity statements shall be considered for subcontract. D. Submit following within 30 days after award of carpeting subcontract: 1. Quantity statements indicating proposed adjustments. 2. Copy of Architect's seaming diagrams approving seaming layout. 3. Include quantities of carpet required for installation to display casework described in the Owners display casework package. E. Guarantee Drafts: Concurrent with initial product data submittal, submit draft of installers guarantee for Architect's review. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installation of carpeting shall be performed by specialists in installation of carpet, with minimum 5 years experience in work of type and scope similar to that of this Project. 2. Installing company shall be capable of furnishing, upon request, at least 3 references and resume of similar work performed within the last 3 years in the Project area. B. Pre -Award Meeting: 1. Prior to installer subcontract award, administer a meeting to address field conditions, materials, related work, sequencing and coordination, inspections, substrate requirements, pattern matching techniques, and guarantee. 2. Include procedures and requirements for submittals, delivery, and scheduling of installation. 3. Require in attendance the Architect, the Owner's Representative, and each prospective installer. 4. Subcontract award will be conditional upon installer's demonstration of intent to furnish all materials necessary for installation of carpets and pads furnished under separate subcontract and to provide complete installed systems in compliance with provisions of the Contract Documents. C. Pre - Installation Conference: 1. Comply with provisions of Section 013119. 2. Schedule a conference minimum of 10 calendar days prior to carpet installation. 3. Review installation procedures, including locations and types of seams, pattern spacing, details at corners, and edge details. 4. Require in attendance, the Contractor, Architect, Owner's Representative, carpet installer, and other parties affected by this work. D. Mock -Up: 1. Install carpet with pad in one department as designated by the Architect to demonstrate installation techniques. 2. Approved mock -up may be incorporated into the work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with provisions of Section 016000. B. Owner furnished materials will be delivered to the Nordstrom warehouse facility; refer to Section 015000. Transport materials from the warehouse to the site. 1.7 SUBCONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. Submit in accordance with Section 017700. B. Furnish a 1 year written guarantee covering defects in installation of carpets, pads, and carpet tile. Guarantee work shall include, without limitation, reseaming, restretching, and other procedures required to resolve installation deficiencies. 096800 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 096800 — CARPET C. In addition to the requirements of the 1 year guarantee, if installation defects have caused irreparable damage to the carpet tile, carpet or pad, furnish and install new materials to match that damaged at no additional cost to the Owner, at a time convenient to the Owner. 1.8 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTIES A. Provide materials and installation methods as required to obtain manufacturer's standard warranties for Owner - furnished carpets, pads, and carpet tile. 1.9 SITE CONDITION A. Environmental Requirements: Do not commence carpet installation until areas to receive carpet are enclosed, and heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems are in operation. Require that minimum temperature of 68 °F be maintained during carpeting installation. Coordinate with Sections 015000, 237000 and 255500. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPETS AND PADS A. Furnished by Owner. 2.2 CARPET TILE A. Furnished by Owner. 2.3 WALK -OFF AND CARPET ENTRY MATS A. Furnished by Owner. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Latex Underlayment: Portland cement/latex patching and leveling compound; one of the following. 1. Ardex Inc. " Ardex SD -P Instantpatch." 2. Dependable Chemical Company, Inc., "Dependable White Skimcoat Underlayment" with "Latex Liquid" additive. 3. Underlayment by W.W. Henry Company, Aliquippa, PA (800/232- 4832). 4. The Gibson - Homans Company "Redy- Mastic #808 Latex Underlayment." B. Adhesives: 1. Carpet Adhesive: Type as recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Pad Adhesive: Type as recommended by pad manufacturer. 3. Carpet Tile Adhesive: a. General: Releasable type as recommended by carpet manufacturer. b. COSMETICS Department: Substrate sealer and carpet tile adhesive furnished by Owner. 4. Walk -Off and Carpet Entrance Mat Adhesive: Furnished by Owner. C. Latex Adhesive: Latex composition; "Parabond M -267" by Para -Chem Southern, Inc. (803/967- 7691); "Jiffytex" by Crain Cutter Co. Inc. (408- 946- 6100), "710 Kwik Seam Latex" by Taylor Co. Inc. (800- 397 -4583 ). D. Seam Sealer: Latex composition; "Parabond M -163" by Para -Chem Southern, Inc (803/967- 7691), "775 Carpet Seam Adhesive" by Taylor Co. Inc.(800- 397 -4583) E. Carpet Grippers / Tack Strip: "Commercial" carpet strip by Halex Corp., Pomona, CA; (800) 576- 1636. F. Hot Melt Tape: 1. Roberts "50 -330 Supertape." 2. Orcon "XK -50." 3. Premier Tape Products "The Sidekick." G. Transition Strips for Carpet/Pad to Hard Surfaces: Mercer Products Company Inc. "Royal Commercial Reducer No. 200," with provision for carpet gripper; black color. 096800 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 096800 — CARPET H. Transition Strips for Glue -Down Carpet and Carpet Tile to Hard Surface: Mercer Products Company, Inc. "Imperial Reducer No. 700, 800, or 900," as appropriate to carpet thickness; black color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully review the preparatory work of other trades, and verify that such work is acceptable for the proper performance of the work of this Section. Report unacceptable conditions to the Architect. Do not begin work until unacceptable conditions have been rectified. B. Inspect carpet prior to installation and verify quantities and quality of materials. Inspect each carpet for inaccurate pattern alignment and orientation, non - uniformity of color, stains, and other defects, prior to cutting. Notify the Owner of defective materials and other discrepancies. C. Ensure that concrete floors are free from scaling, and exhibit acid neutrality. D. Upon commencement of carpet installation, the Contractor accepts the substrate and responsibility for unacceptable finished work caused by prior observable substrate conditions, including slabs which do not meet specified flatness tolerances. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster, and other substances which would be detrimental to the proper performance of adhesive and carpet in accordance with the carpet manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Underlayment: 1. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions for mixing and installation. 2. Fill low spots and cracks over 1/8 inch in width with latex underlayment. 3. Apply leveling underlayment where flooring is not level, or possesses defects which would telegraph through carpet and where leveling is required to raise substrate elevation for proper alignment of finish surfaces (i.e., tile and carpet crush lines). Feather to concrete for slope not to exceed 1/4 inch in 24 inches. 3.3 CARPET GRIPPERS A. Place carpet grippers continuously at perimeter of rooms and at edges of carpet fields, except at doors; secure to floor with adhesive and concrete nails to resist applied stresses. B. Maintain space between carpet grippers and hard surface aisles to firmly hold tucked carpet edge. 3.4 CARPET AND PAD INSTALLATION A. Prior to installation obtain from Owner pertinent installation instructions for each carpet type. B. Install carpets and pads in strict accordance with the respective manufacturer's printed instructions for the type of substrate and application indicated. C. Install carpet using sequential rolls. D. Prior to seaming apply latex adhesive to cut edges of tufted loop pile carpet. E. Seams: 1. Locate in accordance with Drawings. 2. Overcast stitching is not permitted. 3. Align carpet seams, using no fill strips less than 6 inches wide, laying all carpet in the same direction within each distinct area. F. Cross Seams, Typical: Unless approved otherwise, hand sew with single thread cross stitch and reinforce with hot melt tape on back side. 1. Side Seams, Typical: Join with hot melt tape. 2. Seams in carpet borders shall be hand sewn using cross stitch and backed up with hot tape. 096800 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 096800 — CARPET G. Except for direct glue installations, trim carpet at screeds (tile field interfaces) with allowance for tucking. Tuck carpet edges into a bead of latex adhesive applied between the tack strip gripper and screed as indicated. H. Floor Outlets: Where floor outlets occur in carpet fields on the sales floor at "cashwrap" locations, cut carpet in "H" pattern to expose the outlet for access. I. Install transition edge strips as detailed, and as follows: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, install transition strips where carpet meets concrete or resilient flooring. 2. Where carpet to resilient or concrete surface flooring transition is indicated at door openings, locate to center transition strip under door. J. Carpet Base: 1. Install carpet and adhesive to surfaces as scheduled and detailed. 2. Make cuts and joints accurate for invisible joints. Locate joints 8 inches, minimum, from outside corners. 3. Measure sufficient quantities of carpet for installation to base, including Owner - furnished display casework located on carpet, unless otherwise specifically indicated. 4. The same type of carpet as scheduled for floor shall be used for bases, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 5. Remnants may be used for this purpose, subject to proper pattern direction, and suitable sizes with no more than one joint for each 3 corners of the casework base. 6. Costs for installation of carpet base to display casework will be borne by the Owner in accordance with Sections 004144 and 012200. K. Install patterned carpet with exact end and side matches. 3.5 GLUE -DOWN CARPET A. Glue -Down Carpet: 1. Glue directly to the floor. 2. Scribe carpets to vertical surfaces. 3. Align the lines of carpet using no fill strips less than 6 inches wide, laying all carpet in same direction. 4. Where carpet abuts carpet/pad edge strip, apply a bead of seam sealer at interface between carpet and edge strip. B. Seams: 1. Locate seams in accordance with Drawings, unless approved otherwise. 2. Fabricate seams by compression method, using butt joint; properly sealed with seam sealer. 3. Do not stretch seams. C. Omit carpet under safe at C.R. and Fine Jewelry Office. 3.6 WALK -OFF MAT AND CARPET ENTRANCE MAT INSTALLATION A. Install mat and adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with tight butt joints. B. Locate seams parallel to direction of travel, but away from traffic patterns. Align so that pattern continues uninterrupted across seams. 3.7 CARPET TILE INSTALLATION A. Obtain the carpet manufacturer's printed installation instructions prior to installation. B. Apply releasable adhesive in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's recommendations using a roller to ensure 100 percent contact. Each carpet tile shall be fully bonded; loose tiles will not be acceptable. C. Joints shall be tight and unnoticeable upon completion. D. Place carpet tile in patterns indicated with joints aligned in both directions and grain /texture direction as indicated in the drawings. 096800 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 096800 — CARPET E. Special Requirements for Minimum Tile Size: 1. Department Pads: a. Install a full tile at front edge of department pad and proceed toward back wall. b. Carpet tile at back wall and sides of department pads, at aisles (including center drive /accent aisle) should be min 6 inches. c. Where last carpet tile will be less than 6 ", cut the back two rows at equal dimensions to complete the installation. 2. Aisles: a. Carpet tile shall start, per the designated start point indicated on the drawings, with a full tile at the center and run toward aisle edges. b. Where the last (outer) row of carpet tiles are less than 6 inches wide, cut the last two rows at aisles edges to be of equal dimension, to complete the installation. F. Cut carpet evenly and accurately to fit tight to walls, columns, and projections. G. Cutting of carpet for telephone and electrical floor outlets shall be the responsibility of the carpet installer. H. Install transition strips as detailed and as follows: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, install edge strips at carpet tile edges where carpet meets concrete or resilient flooring. 2. Where carpet to resilient or concrete surface flooring transition is indicated at door openings, locate to center edge strip under door. I. Carpet tile installation shall be rolled following installation to assure complete transfer of adhesive. 3.8 CARPET INSTALLATION ON STAIRWAYS OVER SEPARATE PAD A. Install carpet and pad at stairs in accordance with carpet manufacturer's recommendations, and as follows: 1. Lay padding on each stair tread and riser in one piece securely adhered to substrate at perimeter of each piece with appropriate pad adhesive. 2. Slightly stretch pad so it will lay flat to stair tread and riser leaving no bubbles or wrinkles on surface of pad. 3. Tightly stretch carpet to prevent wrinkling and secure at juncture of tread with riser with carpet grippers secured to substrate with appropriate adhesive. 3.9 OVERAGE AND REMNANTS A. Remnants. 1. Carpet and pad remnants are classified as that which remains after installation. Remnants shall not be considered as part of required overage. 2. Upon completion of installation, contact the Owner's Representative for selection of remnants. 3. Carefully wrap and mark separately selected remnants for each type of carpet; note the type, approximate sizes, and locations where installed. Deliver selected remnants back to the Nordstrom Distribution Center or warehouse as directed. Remove and dispose of remainder at a legal off -site location. B. Overage: Cut, roll, and mark with department names one 12 foot wide by 6 foot long piece of each carpet field color type. Deliver to Owner and store on site where directed by Owner's Representative. 3.10 CLEANUP A. Premises shall be kept free from unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment and surplus materials during the progress of the work. B. Remove threads with sharp scissors. Remove spots with manufacturer's recommended spot remover. C. Immediately after installation, thoroughly power vacuum entire surface using equipment with motor driven brushes. 096800 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 096800 — CARPET 3.11 PROTECTION A. Provide and maintain protection during remainder of construction and move -in period, by covering flooring materials as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096800 -7 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 097200 — WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Quantity Statements for Owner- furnished materials. 2. Transportation of wall coverings. 3. Installation of wall coverings. 4. Sealer over designated wall covering. B. Related Sections: 1. Electrical Device And Cover Plate Schedule 2. 079200 - Joint Sealants: Sealant at perimeter of fabric wall covering at Dressing Room partitions. 3. 092900 - Gypsum Board: Substrates. 4. 097723 - Fabric - Wrapped Panels: Coordination of scope of work. 5. 099000 - Painting and Coating: Primer for substrates to receive wall covering. 6. 123563 - Dressing Room Casework: Dressing Room partitions to receive wall covering treatment (Not included in General Bid Set issue). C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock Up: 1. In accordance with Section 014500. 2. Mock -up shall be ready for review prior to pre - installation conference. 3. Install wall covering in a location as directed by the Architect. Selected location will incorporate wall covering full height of wall, one seam, and one inside corner. 4. Mock -up will be reviewed for flatness, alignment, seaming accuracy, and edge detailing. 5. Approved mock -up may be incorporated into the work. B. Pre - Installation Conference: 1. In accordance with Section 013119. 2. Schedule a conference a minimum of 10 calendar days prior to the installation of the wall covering. 3. Review mock -up, locations of each fabric type, substrate requirements, pattern matching requirements, installation procedures and methods, scheduling, and identification of conditions and situations which would adversely affect the work. 4. Attendance: Contractor, Architect, wall covering installer, Owner's representative, and all other parties affected by the work of this section. 1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Owner purchased materials will be delivered to the Nordstrom warehouse facility. Contractor shall transport the materials from the warehouse to the site. B. Deliver sealers, adhesive and accessories to the job site in sealed containers bearing the • manufacturer's labels. C. Storage: 1. Store wall coverings flat, not upright, in a dry area. 097200 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 097200 — WALL COVERINGS 2. Maintain temperature at a minimum of 45 degrees F, unless a higher temperature is recommended by wall covering manufacturer. Maintain humidity normal to the space or area where the wall covering is to be installed. D. Take necessary measures to eliminate fire hazards. Conform to the requirements of the applicable regulatory agencies. E. Provide appropriate safeguards when toxic materials are used. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Temperature: 1. Do no wall covering work until building is enclosed and permanent heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems are in operation. 2. Do no wall covering work until surfaces and materials have been maintained at 60 degrees F. minimum, or higher if recommended by wall covering manufacturer, for 3 days before work begins. 3. Maintain minimum or above temperatures during the entire installing time and until adhesives have fully dried or cured. B. Lighting: Maintain minimum lighting level of 15 foot - candles on the surfaces to receive wall covering, using temporary lighting, if necessary, to attain specified level. C. Ventilation: Provide adequate continuous ventilation as required for the scheduled wall coverings and adhesives required during the work and until adhesives have fully dried or cured. 1.6 QUANTITIES A. Owner will order and pay for wall coverings based on the approved quantity statements furnished by the Contractor. B. Prior to award of the wall covering subcontract, submit to the Owner a Quantity Statement, obtained from each proposed installer, stating the amount of each type of wall covering required for each department. C. Types and locations of each wall covering shall be as indicated on the Drawings, Room Finish Schedule, and on the Owner's Purchase Order; base bid on special requirements for each wall covering type, including requirements for pattern matching. D. Overages: Quantities of wall covering materials required for future maintenance will be determined by the Owner. Do not include maintenance stock in quantity estimates. E. Prior to award of the wall covering subcontract, the Contractor shall review each proposed installer's Quantity Statement with the Architect to verify its accuracy. Only installers with approved Quantity Statements will be acceptable for subcontract. F. If, at the time of installation, there are insufficient quantities of materials due to the Contractor's failure to obtain an approved quantity statement the Contractor shall: 1. Immediately notify the Owner in writing of the additional quantities required, whereupon the Owner will, at his cost, obtain the additional quantities. 2. Contractor shall install the additional quantities at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Contractor shall pay for all additional transportation costs incurred in obtaining the materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL COVERING A. Furnished by the Owner. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Provide the following unless otherwise required for compatibility with the flame retardant treatment materials, as applicable. 1. "Dynamite 433" Heavy Duty Clay Strippable Wall Covering Adhesive by Gardner - Gibson, Inc.; Tampa, FL (800/237- 1155); for use with vinyl wall covering. 097200 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 097200 — WALL COVERINGS 2. "Dynamite 234" Premium Grade Heavy Duty Clear Wall Covering Adhesive by Gardner - Gibson, Inc.; Tampa, FL (800/237- 1155); for use with fabric wall covering. B. Adhesive Additive: Henkel "Metylan Stanfix." C. Sealer: Benjamin Moore "Benwood Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane No.423," low luster sheen. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect substrate conditions, and notify the Architect of conditions which would prevent a satisfactory installation. Unacceptable conditions shall include unprimed surfaces, cracks, voids, irregular surfaces, ridges, oils, grease, moisture, porosity, indelible and water soluble crayon, ball or felt tip pen marks, and foreign materials. Do no work until these conditions have been corrected. B. Ensure that gypsum board surfaces to receive wallcoverings have received a coat of primer as specified in Section 099000. C. The installation of wall covering constitutes the Contractor's acceptance of substrate conditions and responsibility for all unacceptable finished work caused by prior observable substrate conditions. D. Contractor shall inspect the wall covering materials and notify the Architect immediately of all defective materials. Contractor shall not install defective wall covering. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Schedule work such that the subsequent work of other sections will not damage the work of this Section. B. Verify the type, pattern, color, and quantity of each type wall covering for each location scheduled. C. Remove electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical diffusers, escutcheons, registers, surface hardware, fittings, and fastenings prior to starting work; store during and replace after work. D. Provide sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces, and in particular in storage and preparation areas. E. Where fabric wall coverings have water resistant coatings such as "Zepel ", provide 1 prime coat of adhesive. F. At existing painted surfaces, evenly roughen with a medium grit garnet paper; wash with T.S.P. or Sal Soda; wipe clean with potable water; let surface dry, and size with same adhesive to be used for wall covering. 3.3 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES A. Mix and apply adhesives in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions for the type of material being applied. B. For application of wall coverings to plastic laminate or similar substrates, add adhesive additive to the specified adhesive at a rate of 1 pint to each gallon of adhesive. C. Take care to prevent adhesive from getting on adjacent surfaces, and finished wall covering surfaces. 3.4 WALL COVERING INSTALLATION A. Install materials secure, smooth, clean, and without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. B. Extend wall covering continuously behind such items which are close to but not touching walls. C. Install materials in strict accordance with the wall covering manufacturer's recommendations. D. Installation requirements for wallcovering when manufacturer's installation instructions are not available: 1. Apply adhesive to wallcovering back by brush or roller. 2. Use wallcovering rolls in consecutive numerical sequence of manufacture. 097200 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 097200 — WALL COVERINGS 3. Place wallcovering panels consecutively in exact order in which they are cut from the roll including filling all spaces above or below windows, doors, relights, or similar penetrations. E. Seams: 1. Selvage: a. Remove selvage with a sharp blade using a metal straight edge as a guide. b. Trim additional material where required to achieve a color and pattern match at seams. 2. Horizontal Seams: Not permitted. 3. Corner Seams: Make no seams within 6 inches of an inside or outside corner, except at inside corners where a color or pattern change is indicated. 4. Provide double -cut seams on non -match patterns; butt seams or as required for uninterrupted pattern match on patterned material. 5. Where a double cut seam is made, place a 3 -inch strip of wax paper on the pasted edge to prevent adhesive staining. After cutting, remove wax paper and excess paste or adhesive from each seam before proceeding to the next seam. 6. Roll or smooth down seams in a manner recommended by the manufacturer of the wall covering being applied. F. Smoothing and Elimination of Air Pockets: 1. Vinyl: Use stiff bristled brush or flexible 4 to 6 -inch width broadknife. 2. Fabric and Paper: Unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer, use brush working from center to outside edges. G. Standards: At walls with integral standards, neatly trim wall covering to expose standard flanges. H. Sealer: Apply 2 coats of sealer over wall covering at locations indicated in Room Finish Schedule. Allow first coat to dry before application of 2 coat. I. Fabric wall covering at Dressing Room Partitions: Following installation of wall covering at Dressing Room Partitions, apply a 1/8" wide fillet of Type R sealant at juncture of partition frame and fabric covered panel. Color of sealant shall be clear. J. Electrical cover plates in the rooms listed below shall be wrapped with the same wall covering. Match pattern and orientation as appropriate; secure with contact spray adhesive; make two diagonal cuts at each corner, remove waste, and return exposed edges. Cut receptacle openings neatly aligned with coverplate opening; make small "x" cut at screw location and reinstall cover plate. Refer to Electrical Device And Cover Plate Schedule for locations. 3.5 CLEANUP A. Remove dust, dirt, adhesives, and other contaminants in a manner which will not damage the surface from which it is removed. B. Remove debris and leave areas neat and clean. C. Replace removed wall plates and other accessories. D. Repair to like -new condition, or replace as directed, all adjacent materials and finishes, damaged by work of this Section, and all wall coverings which are soiled, damaged, or not in compliance with these specifications. 3.6 EXTRA YARDAGES A. Notify designated Owner's Representative at the site prior to removing excess yardage from the job. The Owner's representative will select the materials which are to be retained by the Owner. B. Carefully wrap and mark the excess yardage selected to be retained. Note on an inventory sheet the type and location(s) where installed, and deliver back to the Owner. Remove remainder from the site and dispose of legally. END OF SECTION 097200 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 097233 — PLASTIC LAMINATE WALL COVERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Plastic laminate, adhesively applied to wall surfaces. B. Related Sections: 1. 092900 - Gypsum Board: Substrate. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Section 016000. B. Delivery: 1. Package sheets in cartons; mount on skids or pallets, for shipment to project site. 2. Deliver adhesive in sealed containers with labels legible and intact. C. Storage: Store laminate sheets with faces exposed in a dry place at the project site for at least 48 hours prior to installation. D. Handling: 1. When moving more than a single sheet, place sheets face -to -face and back -to -back. 2. Protect surface of laminate during cutting and working by application of temporary, strippable coating. 3. Remove foreign matter from face of laminate by use of a soft bristle brush, avoiding abrasive action. 4. Do not wipe with a cloth or bare hands. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions recommended by the adhesive manufacturer from 24 hours prior to installation of the plastic laminate until full adhesive cure after installation. B. Comply with adhesive manufacturer's recommendations for ventilation to prevent accumulation of toxic or combustible fumes during application of solvent -based adhesive. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. High Pressure Laminated Plastic: 0.050 -inch thick, General Purpose Grade; refer to Finish Legend for manufacturers, colors, textures and finishes. B. Provide plastic laminate with Class 1 fire rating in accordance with ASTM E84 in the locations noted. C. Adhesive: Solvent based contact bond adhesive specifically formulated for the laminating of plastic laminate materials. 097233 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 097233 — PLASTIC LAMINATE WALL COVERING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Substrate surfaces shall be smooth, clean, and free of projections or voids that would telegraph through the installed plastic laminate sheet. C. Do not begin installation until work requiring penetration of wallcovering and all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Apply temporary strippable coating to plastic laminate to protect finished surfaces during cutting and fitting operations. B. Make all cuts straight and free of rough, sharp, cracked, or crazed edges; bevel all cut edges that will be exposed in the finished work. C. Cut inside corners with minimum 1/4" radius, except where exposed in the finish work. D. Where fasteners or other devices must penetrate the laminate, drill holes oversized by 1/8 inch. E. Allow 1/16 inch expansion space between panels and at all surrounding construction. Exposed edges shall be smooth and self- trimming. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Clean substrate and laminate surfaces. B. Apply adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's printed application instructions. C. Install sheets with long dimension vertical, unless otherwise indicated, or otherwise approved by the Architect. Sheets shall be completely bonded to substrate with no air bubbles. D. Contact bond each sheet to the substrate by progressing from one side to the other to expel all air. E. Apply pressure uniformly to the face of the sheet by using a wide hard rubber roller. F. Protect laminate faces from scratches and other surface damage from installation procedures. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective covering. B. Remove adhesive from face of laminate using solvent recommended by manufacturer of adhesive. Prevent solvent from penetrating glue line at edges and joints of laminate. C. Clean laminate surfaces in accordance with recommendations of laminate manufacturer. END OF SECTION 097233 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 097723 — FABRIC - WRAPPED PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fabric wrapped panels at St. John and Collectors dressing rooms. 2. Ballast Boards and Removable Panels (RP) at Display Windows. 3. Quantity Statements for Owner - furnished materials. B. Related Sections: 1. 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking. 2. 092200 - Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board: Metal backing. 3. 092900 - Gypsum Board: Substrate. 4. 097200 - Wall Coverings: Coordination of scope of work. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 0160000. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock -Ups: 1. Provide mock -ups in accordance with Section 0145000. 2. Mock -ups shall be ready for review prior to pre - installation conference. 3. Provide a minimum of two fabric wrapped panels in a location as approved by the Architect. 4. Approved mock -up panels may be incorporated into the work. B. Pre - Installation Conference: 1. In accordance with Section 013119. 2. Schedule a conference a minimum of 10 calendar days prior to the installation of the pin panel fabric. 3. Review mock -ups, locations of each fabric, frame construction, installation procedures and methods, and scheduling. Request that conditions and situations which may adversely affect the fabric application be mentioned. 4. Attendance: Contractor, Architect, fabric installer, pin panel fabricator, Owner's representative, and all other parties affected by the work of this section. 1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 0177000. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Owner purchased materials will be delivered to the nearest Nordstrom warehouse facility. The Contractor shall transport the materials from the warehouse to the site. B. Storage: 1. Store wall fabric flat, not upright, in a dry area. 2. Maintain temperature at a minimum of 45 degrees F, unless a higher temperature is recommended by fabric manufacturer. Maintain humidity normal to the space or area where the panels are to be installed. 1.5 QUANTITIES A. The Owner will order and pay for all panel fabric based on the approved quantity statements furnished by the Contractor. B. Overages: For future maintenance, additional yards of each panel fabric, will be ordered by the Owner in excess of that required. Do not add these extra yardages to the quantity estimates specified below. 097723 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 097723 — FABRIC - WRAPPED PANELS C. Prior to award of the fabric panel subcontract, the Contractor shall review each proposed installer's Quantity Statement with the Architect to verify its accuracy. Only installers with approved Quantity Statements will be acceptable for subcontract. D. If, at the time of installation, there are insufficient quantities of materials due to the Contractor's failure to obtain an approved quantity statement the Contractor shall: 1. Immediately notify the Owner in writing of the additional quantities required, whereupon the Owner will, at his cost, obtain the additional quantities. 2. Contractor shall install the additional quantities at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Contractor shall pay for all additional transportation costs incurred in obtaining the materials. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 0133000. B. Samples: Submit 12 inch square panel with substrate board, proposed fabric, wrapped edges, mounting cleats and proposed adhesive. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Panels: 1/2 inch thick MDF. B. Fabric: Purchased by the Owner. C. Cleats: Interlocking clip, 1 /4 inch thick. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware for.Removable Panels (RP) at Display Windows: 1. Wire Pulls: No. 4484 with US26D dull chrome finish by Stanley Hardware, New Britain, CT (800/622- 4393). 2. Magnetic Catches: No 41 by Stanley Hardware, New Britain, CT (800/622- 4393). 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate panels to the configurations indicated with uniform joints. Allow sufficient dimension to receive fabric. B. Cut board to the shapes indicated with eased edges. C. Each panel shall be a single piece. Where panels are greater than 8' -0" in length, cut MDF panels from 9', 10', 12' MDF sheets as required for single piece panels. D. Stretch fabric around board uniformly taut, set into adhesive, without wrinkles or tearing. Stretch fabric beginning from the center of the sides, progressing to the corners. Secure fabric to panel back with staples or other concealed fasteners as needed to promote stable cure of adhesive and fabric. Fold and secure each corner neatly. E. Fabric with linear patterns shall be applied with patterns in accurate alignment with panel edges, as appropriate, and with lines of pattern free of waves. Where the same fabric type is installed on adjacent panels, horizontal patterns and patterns with repeats shall be installed to maintain line and sequence of pattern from panel to panel. F. Ballast Boards and Removable Panels (RP) at Display Windows: Prefit with allowances for fabric wrap; label back of each panel with location and position. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect substrate conditions, and notify the Architect of any unacceptable condition which would prevent a satisfactory installation. 097723 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 097723 — FABRIC - WRAPPED PANELS B. The installation of panels constitutes the Contractor's acceptance of substrate conditions and responsibility for all unacceptable finished work caused by prior observable substrate conditions. C. Contractor shall inspect the fabric and notify the Architect immediately of defects. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of metal backing or wood blocking as necessary to secure panels in position. B. Schedule work such that the subsequent work of other sections will not damage the work of this Section. C. Verify the type, pattern, color, and quantity of each type of fabric panel. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fabric wrapped panels, using 1 /4 inch cleats, in the locations indicated. Provide accurate alignment, uniform joint spacing and clearances per the details. 3.4 CLEANUP A. Remove debris and leave areas neat and clean. 3.5 EXTRA YARDAGES A. Notify Owner's representative at the site prior to removing excess yardage from the job. The Owner will select the materials that are to be retained. B. Carefully wrap and mark the excess yardage selected to be retained, and deliver to the Owner's warehouse. Remove remainder from the site and dispose of legally. END OF SECTION 097723 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 098100 - ACOUSTIC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical insulation in walls. 2. Perimeter acoustical sealant. B. Related Sections: 1. 092200 - Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board: Metal studs. 2. 092900 - Gypsum Board: Coordination. 3. 092116 - Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies. 4. 095113 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction. 2. E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION A. Manufacturer: One of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation, Valley Forge, PA. 2. Johns Manville Corporation, Denver, CO. 3. Owens - Corning, Toledo, OH. 4. USG Interiors, Inc., Chicago, IL. B. Ball Type Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I unfaced; minimum 3 inch thick fiberglass or mineral fiber batts or blankets, unless required otherwise to meet the STC requirements indicated or specified; minimum fire hazard classification rating of 25/50 per ASTM E84; width to fit stud spacing indicated. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Sealant: Non - hardening, low shrinkage; for use in conjunction with gypsum board; one of the following: USG "Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant," W.W. Henry Company "Henry 313," Tremco "Acoustical Sealant 30CTG," or Quiet Solution (Sunnyvale CA; 408 - 541 -8000) "QuietSeal QS- 350." B. Materials such as fasteners, adhesives, impaling pins, and retainers, not specifically described, but required for a complete installation of acoustical insulation shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 098100 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 098100 — ACOUSTIC INSULATION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully examine installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Verify that adjacent materials are dry. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. C. Verify mechanical and electrical services within spaces to insulated have been installed and tested. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Except as otherwise directed by the Architect, install all acoustic insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's current installation recommendations. B. Place acoustical insulation tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. C. Install insulation full height from floor to ceiling track in all full height partitions indicated to be acoustically insulated. D. Sealant: 1. Install acoustical sealant around perimeter of acoustically insulated partitions, one continuous bead at each side of framing member interface with substrate. 2. Except for fire -rated systems, seal penetrations through gypsum board on acoustically insulated partitions and gypsum board ceilings 3.3 SCHEDULE A. Locations of acoustical wall insulation are indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION 098100 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 099000 — PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1. Section Includes: Field applied paint systems. B. Related Sections: 1. 051200 - Structural Steel Framing: Preprimed metal surfaces. 2. 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Preprimed metal surfaces. 3. 062000 — Finish Carpentry: Wood elements and running trim finished under the work of this Section. 4. 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Shop primed surfaces. 5. 081400 — Wood Doors: Wood veneer doors finished under the work of this Section. 6. 083100 - Access Doors and Panels: Shop primed surfaces. 7. 092900 - Gypsum Board: Substrate for application of coatings. 8. 109013 - Miscellaneous Specialties: Preprimed surfaces. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: 1. Submit complete literature for each product. 2. Materials List: Submit a typewritten list of materials proposed. Organize list to indicate painting systems to be used on each substrate. C. Paint Samples: 1. Prior to receiving paint color samples from the Contractor, the Architect will transmit 2 samples of custom colors for matching. 2. Paint Finish P -1: a. Submit 3 samples of P -1 paint finish on an 8 "x10" piece of substrate to which paint will be applied. Note manufacturer, type of paint, color, sheen, and application on the sample. b. Samples shall be prepared using the complete two -coat paint system for gypsum wallboard surfaces, using the same techniques to present color and sheen as proposed for the finished work. 3. Submit 3 samples for balance of the paint finishes on 8 x 10 inch size brush -out cards. Note manufacturer, type of paint, color, sheen, substrate, and application on the sample. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes: Comply with the requirements of [ - -- insert name of governing body here - -- ] with regard to the rules for VOC and ozone limits of Architectural and Industrial Maintenance (AIM) coatings. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with a minimum of 3 years documented experience in work of type and scope required for this Project. C. Mock -ups: 1. Provide the following mock -ups in accordance with Section 014500. a. Painted Gypsum Board: 1) Provide minimum 100 square foot mock -up of paint color P -1 over skim coated gypsum board wall surface in location as directed by the Architect. 2) Sales Floor mock -up of P -1 must be prepared, at exact location to be determined by the Architect, for approval by the Owner and the Architect. 099000 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 099000 — PAINTING AND COATING 3) Existing Painted Wood Casework: Prepare and re -coat approximately 8 square feet of existing casework for evaluation by the Architect. Approved mock -up may be incorporated into the finished work. 4) Gouge and damage the painted gypsum board surface as directed. Patch the damaged area using drywall joint compound or finishing compound, sand smooth, and repaint the damaged area with two coat system. 2. Coordinate with Division 16 work and other trades to ensure sufficient lighting. Lighting shall include properly lamped 2x2 ceiling fixtures and light coves in the vicinity of the mock -up; remove or extinguish temporary lighting as directed. 3. Mock -ups shall be representative of color, sheen, texture, materials, and workmanship proposed for the finished work. D. Colors: 1. Paint and stain colors indicated for installation under this Section, whether or not indicated by a specific manufacturer and color number, shall be considered custom and subject to adjustment after sample review. 2. Paint colors required for mock -ups are subject to adjustment after mock -up review. 3. Refer to Schedules, and Legends for required colors. E. Visual Standards: Each distinct area of the finished work shall be free of variations in color and sheen, orange peel, runs, sags, foreign matter, blistering, checking, cracking, and scratches. In areas where the sheen changes, but the color does not, ensure that the color remains consistent across the two. F. Pre - Installation Conference: 1. In accordance with Section 013119. 2. Schedule and administer a meeting to review the work of this Section, a minimum of 14 days prior to starting painting work. 3. Require in attendance the General Contractor, Architect, painting subcontractors, and all other parties affected by this work. 4. Review scheduling of mock -up installation and mock -up lighting requirements, preparatory work, paint color schedule, paint systems, number of coats, and sheen requirements. 1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Section 016000. B. Deliver paint materials to the job -site in sealed, original, labeled containers, each bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Store materials at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F in a well ventilated area. D. Fire Hazard and Safety: 1. Conform to the requirements of the applicable regulatory agencies. 2. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 3. Where toxic, acidic, combustible, or explosive materials are used, take appropriate precautions, following manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements of applicable safety regulatory agencies. 4. Provide adequate ventilation. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Weather Conditions: Do no exterior work on unprotected surfaces when rain or other moisture is present or is expected before applied paints can dry or attain proper cure. Allow wetted surfaces to dry and attain temperature and condition specified before proceeding with work. 099000 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 099000 — PAINTING AND COATING B. Temperature: 1. Do no painting work when surface and air temperatures are below those temperatures recommended by the manufacturer for the material type used. 2. Maintain minimum recommended application temperatures at painted surfaces until paint has fully cured. C. Lighting: Maintain a minimum lighting level of 50 foot candles on the surfaces being painted or finished. D. Ventilation: Provide adequate continuous ventilation. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule painting operations for minimum impact on application of finish work of other sections. 1.9 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish overage of paint materials equal to 10 percent minimum of quantity of each paint, in color and sheen required for the work, but furnish not more than five full one gallon cans, nor less than two full one quart cans, of each type. Overruns in excess of five gallons may be furnished to the Owner at the Contractor's option. B. Overage shall be taken from the batch mix furnished for the work. Overage shall be furnished in completely filled, properly labeled, sealed cans. \ PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Unless specified otherwise, furnish manufacturer's highest grade commercial coating systems by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore & Company. 2. Frazee /Parker /Kwal - Howells. 3. ICI Paints North America. 4. Kelly -Moore Preservative Paint Company. 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 6. The Sherwin- Williams Company. 7. Vista Paint Corporation. B. Each distinct coating system shall be the product of a single manufacturer. C. Materials not specifically specified but otherwise required for the work, such as linseed oil, shellac, and thinners shall be of a quality not less than that required by manufacturers of finish materials used in the work. D. All products shall be in compliance with jurisdictional requirements relating to volatile organic compounds (VOC). E. Interior Latex Paints and Primers: 1. Manufacturer's highest grade, low VOC, vinyl acrylic or 100 percent acrylic latex paint. 2. Basis of Design: "Eco Spec" by Benjamin Moore & Company, Montvale, NJ (201) 573 -9600; or equivalent from the approved manufacturers listed above. F. Waterborne Metal Paint System: 1. Waterborne Metal Primer: DTM 100% acrylic rust - inhibiting primer. 2. Waterborne Metal Finish Coat: DTM 100% acrylic paint. G. Epoxy /Polyurethane System: 1. Epoxy Primer: Tnemec "Hi -Build Epoxoline II" Series N69, Carboline 888, Ameron "Amercoat 385 ". 2. Polyurethane Finish Coats: Tnemec Series 1075 "Endura- Shield" Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel, Carboline "133 HB," Ameron " Amercoat 450SA "; semi -gloss or satin sheen. 099000 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 099000 — PAINTING AND COATING H. Acrylic Wall Size: 1. ICI Devoe "Wonderprime" DR51701 vapor barrier primer /sealer. 2. ICI Dulux "Ultra- Hide" 1060 vapor barrier primer /sealer. 3. Sherwin- Williams "Harmony Primer 0 VOC" B11 W900 . 4. Benjamin Moore Paint Company "Moore's Wall -Grip 203." 5. Parker Paint Mfg. Co., Inc. "Perm Gard" Interior Latex Vapor Barrier. 6. Zinsser Co, Inc. (Somerset NJ; (732 -469 -8100) "Shieldz Universal Pre -Wall Covering Primer"; acrylic primer /sealer I. Waterborne Floor Enamel: 100% acrylic waterborne floor coating; semi - gloss; ADA compliant for slip resistance; Sherwin Williams "ArmorSeal Tread- Plex ". J. Striping Paint: Sherwin Williams "SetFast Series TM2136/37" fast -dry latex traffic marking paint. K. Resilient Flooring Primer: Modified Waterborne Acrylate; Tnemec "Enviro- Crete" Series 156; matte finish. L. Latex Plenum Paint: Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall by Sherwin Williams, Series 115 W.B. Unibond DF by Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816 -483- 3400). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully examine the preparatory work of other sections, and verify that such work is acceptable for the work of this section. Report all unacceptable conditions to the Architect. Do not begin work in areas of unacceptable conditions until the conditions have been resolved. B. Verify that gypsum board indicated to receive skim coat, as specified in Section 092900, has received satisfactory skim coat application. C. Starting painting work constitutes Contractor acceptance of surfaces, and responsibility for unacceptable work caused by prior foreseeable substrate conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Adequately protect surfaces not to be painted including surfaces within the paint storage and preparation areas from spills, drips, over painting, and other damage caused by this work. B. Hardware and Miscellaneous Items: 1. Remove electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical diffusers, escutcheons, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings prior to starting work. 2. Store, clean and replace these items upon completion of work in each area. 3. Use no solvent or abrasives that will remove the permanent lacquer finish normally used on some of these items. C. Prepare surfaces by removing dirt, moisture, and foreign matter which would impair the proper adhesion of the finish system. D. Steel and Iron: Unless otherwise required by the paint system manufacturer, remove rust and scale by wire brushing, scraping, and sanding down to bare metal in accordance with SSPC -SP2 and SP3. Immediately apply specified prime coat. E. Ferrous Metal Shop Primed under other Sections: Solvent clean previously primed surfaces to remove oil and grease. Remove loose rust, blistered and peeling paint to bare metal by scraping, sanding, and wire brushing in accordance with SSPC -SP2 and SSPC -SP3. Immediately apply touch up prime damaged or abraded surfaces. Lightly sand all shop prime painted surfaces to receive paint finish. F. Galvanized Ferrous Metal: 1. Undamaged Surfaces: Clean with non - petroleum solvent in accordance with SSPC -SP1; abrade surfaces with metal preparation pad. 099000 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 099000 — PAINTING AND COATING — 2. Damaged Surfaces: Remove loose rust to bare metal by scraping, sanding, and wire brushing in accordance with SSPC -SP2 and SP3. Touch up prepared damaged surfaces with zinc rich primer. G. Aluminum: Verify that surface has not been previously anodized. Remove surface contamination by steam, high pressure water, or solvent washing, and apply etching type primer, or acid etch, let dry, then immediately prime paint. H. Wood — Opaque Paint Finish: 1. Spot coat knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. 2. Fill fastener holes and cracks. Sand filler smooth and level with wood surface. I. Concrete or Concrete Masonry Units: Remove contaminants, including oil, grease, dirt, dust, etc., by washing and wire brushing as required to provide proper surface for bonding of new coating. J. Precast Gypsum Components (GFRG) and Gypsum Board: Remove contamination including oil, grease, dirt, product residue, oil coating, etc. by brushing, washing, and light sanding, as necessary to provide proper surface for bonding of new coating. K. Ceilings and Ceiling Grid: Mask as required to protect sprinkler heads, security cameras, and other operating equipment above ceiling grids. Mask to provide for sharp color transition between ceiling grid and suspension components, such as hanger wires and cold - rolled channels. L. Existing Finished Surfaces To Be Repainted: 1. Remove loose, blistered, scaled, or crazed finishes to bare substrate; feather new work into existing work. Prepare surfaces to the nearest break line if necessary to blend new finishes with old finishes. 2. Wash and rinse surfaces with trisodium phosphate and water or other solution required to remove remaining film, wax, oil, grease, or foreign matter which would impair bond or cause bleed through. 3. Lightly sand, or apply a liquid deglosser on existing semi -gloss and high -gloss finishes before refinishing. 3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Follow paint manufacturer's label directions for general application procedures and coverage rates, unless specified otherwise. B. Apply primer coats untinted, except that latex paints used as primers on gypsum shall be tinted. Sand lightly between coats as necessary to achieve required finish. C. Number of coats specified for each application is minimum; apply additional finish coats as necessary for complete hiding of substrate colors, and as determined by mock -up. D. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Make sure each coat of finish is dry and hard before a following coat is applied unless the manufacturer's directions state otherwise. E. Rollers for application of interior latex flat sheen paints shall have nap' /2 inch or less; for all other paint types, rollers shall have nap 3/8 inch or less. F. Where roller finishes are scheduled for application to gypsum plaster and gypsum board surfaces, apply first coat with a roller to achieve texture approved by the Architect; finish coats may be spray applied at Contractor's option. Backroll spray applied finish coats immediately after application. G. Spray apply finishes unless otherwise indicated. Use techniques and procedures as necessary to prevent compromise of equipment operation, such as painting over indicator lights, motion detector lenses, etc., paint intrusion through grilles, obscuration of labels, etc. H. Paint intended for Anagalypta wall- covering shall be spray - applied only, with no back - rolling permitted. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide barricades, signs, and protective covers as necessary to protect work of this Section from damage. Remove prior to building substantial completion. • 099000 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 099000 — PAINTING AND COATING 3.5 CLEANUP A. As the work proceeds and on completion of the work, promptly remove all sealers, primers, paints and finishes where spilled, splashed or splattered in a manner not to damage the surface from which it is removed. B. Remove masking. C. Clean, or replace with new, all lamps and electrical fixtures damaged by overspray. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Galvanized Metal - Epoxy/ Polyurethane System: 1 System: Apply one coat epoxy primer, and two polyurethane finish coats in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Verify compatibility with shop - applied primer. Apply epoxy primer over all shop - applied primers, unless the specified primer was shop applied. Brush or roller apply, except spray apply at Store Entry components exposed to view. 2. Sheen: Semi -gloss or satin, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Applications: Galvanized exterior metal surfaces, including: a. Hollow metal frames and doors (interior and exterior surfaces). b. Light fixture bearing plates and conduit at top side of canopy metal roofing. c. Roof hatch /scuttle. d. Pipe bollards, guardrails and handrails at loading dock area, including associated gate. e. Chute at waste compactor. f. Overhead coiling door frames and embedded angles at loading dock area. g. Other similar components. 3.7 INTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Wall Board and Precast Gypsum Components (GFRG) - Latex System: 1. Roller texture; sheens as indicated on Drawings. System variations shall be as follows: a. Prime Paint Only: One coat latex primer. b. Preparation for Wall Covering: 1) One coat primer, tinted to match P -1. 2) One coat acrylic wall size, as directed by wall covering manufacturer. c. Two Coat System: First coat latex interior primer /sealer, second coat interior latex. d. Three Coat System: First coat latex interior primer /sealer, second and third coats interior latex. 2. Applications: a. Prime Paint Only: Gypsum board surfaces scheduled for FT -1. b. Preparation for Wall Covering: On surfaces indicated to receive wall covering. c. Two Coat System: At gypsum wall board and precast gypsum components (GFRG), except as otherwise indicated. d. Three Coat System: At gypsum wall board locations indicated to receive deep tone colors. e. Verify sheen with Architect before proceeding with work. f. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, do not apply paint to surfaces to receive adhesive applied hard surface finish, such as wood veneer paneling, mirrors, laminated plastic wall covering, or reinforced plastic panel wall covering. B. Water Resistant Gypsum Board (As specified in Section 092900) - Latex System: 1. Fire taped and primed only, where indicated on Room Finish Schedule as FT -1. 2. Latex system; semi -gloss sheen; 2 coats - first coat latex interior primer, second coat latex interior paint; as directed on Room Finish Schedule. C. Wood - Latex Paint Systems: 1. Semi -gloss sheen unless indicated otherwise; 3 coats - first coat latex wood primer, second coat latex enamel undercoat (tinted) or interior latex enamel finish, as recommended by the paint manufacturer, and third coat interior latex enamel finish. Apply additional coats of interior latex enamel finish at locations scheduled for deep tones. 2. Applications: a. Exposed wood surfaces indicated to receive opaque paint finishes. 099000 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 099000 — PAINTING AND COATING b. Optional field finishing for wood doors indicated for opaque finish; coordinate with requirements of Section 081400. D. Wood - Stain & Varnish Transparent Finish System: 1. System: a. Stain: Compatible with finish system; color match to match Architect's sample. b. Sanding Sealer: The Sherwin Williams Company, "Sher -Wood Vinyl Sealer" T67F3; 1 coat. c. Finish: Sherwin- Williams Company, "Sher- Wood" Water White Conversion Varnish - V84F83-DRE(17-21); 2 coats. d. Sand with 220 grit sandpaper between coats. 2. Application: Woods scheduled for transparent finish as specified in 081400 and doors scheduled for re- finishing as indicated on the Door Schedule. E. Ferrous Metal - Waterborne System: 1. Three Coat System: Semi -gloss sheen unless indicated otherwise; smooth finish; 3 coats - one coatwaterborne metal primer, and 2 coats waterborne metal finish paint. Primer may be deleted on previously shop primed surfaces. 2. Two Coat System (Over Shop Primed Surfaces): Provide one coat waterborne metal primer and one waterborne metal finish paint which matches the color coat system used to finish paint adjacent wall surfaces. 3. Applications: a. Three coat System: Except as otherwise indicated, use on all interior ferrous metal surfaces including, without limitation, the following: 1) TV Video support frame. 2) Freight elevator hoistway doors and frames. 3) Interior hollow metal doors and frames. 4) Fire extinguisher cabinets. 5) Access doors and panels. 6) Exposed plugmold. F. Galvanized Metal - Waterborne- System: 1. Semi -gloss sheen unless indicated otherwise; smooth finish; 3 coats - one coat waterborne metal primer, 2 coats waterborne metal finish paint. 2. Applications: Use on interior galvanized metal surfaces exposed to view in the finished work; except, not required at exposed mechanical and electrical items in "back of house areas," galvanized sheet metal corner guards, and steel stud framing. G. Aluminum - Waterborne System: 1. Semi -gloss sheen unless otherwise indicated; smooth finish; 3 coats - one coat waterborne metal primer, second and third coats latex enamel. Prime coat may be deleted where items to be painted are factory primed or finished. 2. Applications: Aluminum surfaces, including reveals in gypsum board walls and ceilings. H. Acoustic Ceiling Panels and Suspension System - Latex System: 1. Latex flat sheen, one coat latex paint; spray application. 2. Applications: a. Apply to acoustical tile surfaces where indicated or scheduled. b. Apply to exposed portions of acoustical suspension system. c. Apply to ceiling expansion joint closures, mechanical diffusers, flush ceiling speakers, and similar items installed in the ceilings to be painted. d. Mask off light tracks, sprinkler heads, smoke detectors, light fixtures, and other protruding appurtenances not indicated for painting to protect from overspray. Mask light tracks by inserting sealant backer rod, continuous along length of track. e. Paint extra stock of ceiling tile and replace in original cartons for delivery to Owner; coordinate with work of Section 095123. I. Light Track Clips: 1. Exposed metal mounting clips of light tracks that are surface mounted to the acoustical ceiling suspended grid system shall be painted with one coat of appropriate primer followed by latex paint in color and sheen to match to the grid system. 099000 -7 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 099000 — PAINTING AND COATING 2. Exposed clips occur only at locations where light track is placed at an angle to the grid system. J. Resilient Flooring Primer: 1. One coat Modified Waterborne Acrylate; flat sheen; color as scheduled. 2. Applications: Roller -apply over Display Window flooring. K. Miscellaneous Equipment - Latex Enamel: 1. One coat latex enamel; flat sheen; colors to match adjacent finishes, as applicable. 2. Applications: a. Temperature Sensor and Bypass Pushbutton Covers in DISPLAY WINDOWS: as scheduled for below the DISPLAY WINDOW plenum. b. Horn Strobes, as Permitted by Local Authorities: As directed. L. Security System Cameras: Furnish to Section 282300 latex paint to match each wall color, in sufficient quantity to paint wall mounted cameras and brackets in sales floor departments. M. Ceiling Plenums - Latex System: 1. Two coats latex plenum paint. 2. Applications: a. Display window ceiling plenum surfaces above the ceiling grid. b. Brass Plum ceiling plenum surfaces above the ceiling grid. N. Casework Repaint — Acrylic Latex Enamel: 1. Three coats - one coat waterborne acrylic primer; second and third coats: waterborne enamel. 2. Applications: Existing wood display casework to be repainted. 3. Surface Preparation: Remove unbonded coatings, sand bonded coatings to remain, and clean. 4. Mock -up: Provide mock -up as described above and in accordance with Section 014500. 3.8 COLOR/SHEEN SCHEDULE A. Provide colors listed in the Interior Finish Legend in locations as indicated in the Room Finish Schedule and as specified below. B. Exposed Gypsum Board Sales Floor Surfaces: Paint surfaces 10' -0" AFF and below (eggshell sheen); paint surfaces above 10' -0" AFF (flat sheen). C. Exposed Gypsum Board Toilet Room Surfaces: Paint surfaces semi -gloss sheen. D. Paint GFRG surfaces P -1 eggshell sheen. E. Paint horn /strobe escutcheons P- 1(sheen to match adjacent surface) when painting is approved by the local code authorities. F. Mechanical diffusers, speaker grilles, light fixture trim rings, and light tracks in painted gypsum board and field painted ACT ceilings shall be painted to match the adjacent painted surface. G. Paint fire extinguisher cabinets and hose valve cabinets to match adjacent wall surface. H. Primer to remain exposed in the finished work shall be tinted to match P -1. I. Paint light -track seismic clips to match adjacent ceiling tees. END OF SECTION 099000 -8 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 101413 — INSTALLATION OF SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Installation of Owner - furnished identifying devices and graphics. B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers: Use only installers skilled and experienced in the installation of graphics of the type scheduled. B. Pre - Installation Conference: In accordance with Section 013119. 1. Administer prior to starting the work of this Section. 2. Require in attendance: a. Architect. b. General Contractor. c. Signage and Graphics installers. d. Other parties affected by the work of this Section. 3. Agenda: a. Review installation details. b. Review installation requirements for other work including substrate preparation and sequencing with other trades. c. Review installation requirements including environmental conditions and storage of materials. , d. Establish protection procedures after installation. e. Request that all conditions which would prevent the satisfactory installation of the signage and graphics be mentioned. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND GRAPHICS A. Furnished by the Owner under separate contract. B. Contact the Owner to determine the fabricator selected for this Project. C. Refer to the Graphics Schedule included in the Project Manual for the listing of elements to be furnished. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Fasteners: 1. Foam Tape: 3M Scotch brand #4016 5YAB double -stick tape, 1/16 inch thick. 2. Screws: Flat head; finished or painted to match adjacent finishes. B. Provide miscellaneous fasteners, adhesives, silicone sealant, and other materials as required by the fabricator for proper installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 101413 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 101413 — INSTALLATION OF SIGNAGE 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of blocking in adjacent construction as necessary to support signs. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install signage as referenced in the Graphics Schedule and other items as specified below. B. Graphics shall be mounted level and plumb and in accurate alignment, unless indicated otherwise. C. Use templates for proper alignment and spacing. D. Mounting: 1. Where screw mounting is indicated over gypsum board surfaces, use hollow wall screw anchors or similar anchor devices. 2. Where double stick tape is used for mounting, the tape shall not be visible in the installed position. 3. Plastic signs mounted with double stick tape in Dressing / Fitting rooms shall be mounted with double stick foam tape continuous around perimeter at back of sign, with uniform 1/8 inch space between edge of sign and edge of tape. Close all gaps between back of sign and substrate at sign edge. E. Vinyl Letters: 1. Adhere by removing protective backing sheet and pressing firmly to surface, following accurate spacing. 2. Remove all residue around letters, wipe clean. END OF SECTION M 101413 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 102111 — PLASTIC- LAMINATE -CLAD TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Floor supported laminated plastic toilet partitions, doors and hardware. 2. Wall mounted laminated plastic urinal screens. e` 3. Attachment and operating hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking. 2. 092200 - Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board: Metal backing plates. 3. 102813 - Toilet Accessories: Partition mounted accessories. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A167 - Stainless and Heat - Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. B. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): Standard LD -3 - Laminated Plastic. C. ANSI A117- 1986 Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. D. Title 24, California Code of Regulations. Parts 2, 3, and 5. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit product literature for the partitions, including fittings, hardware, and anchorage devices. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition layouts and dimensions, swing of doors, elevations, anchorage and mounting details, components, hardware, finishes, blocking requirements, and critical field dimensions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes: 1. Comply with requirements of jurisdictional Code authorities, ordinances, laws, regulations, safety orders and directives relating to the work. 2. Comply with applicable accessibility regulations. B. Supplier for assemblies specified in this Section shall be approved by the Owner. Refer to Bobrick National Account Agreement Contract #60 for special pricing and bid instructions; contact Carol Miller at Stone - Drew /Ashe & Jones, Seattle, WA (206- 763 - 2850). 1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish 4 additional latch and strike assemblies, with fasteners, for Owner's maintenance stock. 102111 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 102111 — PLASTIC- LAMINATE -CLAD TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers are approved, subject to the specified requirements: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; (800/553- 1600). 2. Accurate Partitions Corporation; Lyons, IL; (708/442- 6800). 3. Global Steel Products Corporation; Deer Park, NY; (631/586- 3330). �r 4. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation; Freeport, NY; (516/546- 0550). 5. The Sanymetal Products Company; Somerset, KY; (606/678- 2700). 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wood Particle Board Core: Minimum 45 lb. density, industrial grade, three ply, laminated, resin - impregnated; sanded faces. B. Plastic Laminate: 1. NEMA LDS -1985; general purpose type; 0.050 inch minimum thickness. 2. Laminate colors, patterns, and finishes per the drawings and the Finish Legend. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Partitions: Three ply, laminated, 45 lb. density particle board core, one inch total thickness; plastic laminate faced; single piece for each face; self- edged; compartment sizes as detailed. B. Doors: 1. Three ply, laminated, 45 lb. density particle board core, 1 1 /4 inch total thickness; plastic laminate faced; single piece for each face; self- edged; compartment sizes as detailed. 2. Door Configurations: a. Ordinary Toilet Stalls: Provide 24 inch wide, in- swinging doors. b. Ambulatory Toilet Stalls: Provide 32 inch wide, in- swinging doors. c. Accessible Toilet Stalls: Provide 36 inch wide (clear opening) out - swinging doors. • C. Floor Supported Pilasters /Stiles: 1. Three ply laminated particle board bonded to each side of a minimum 11 gage steel reinforcing plate integral at central core; minimum one inch total thickness; plastic laminate faced; self - edged. 2. Pilasters at partition ends shall be not less than 8 inch width by 1 1 /4 inch thick, except that pilasters supporting doors for accessible compartments shall be not less than 10 inch width by 1 % inch thick; pilasters anchored to walls or to sides of partitions shall be not more than 4 inch width, unless also anchored to the floor. D. Urinal Screens: Wall -hung type, three ply, laminated, 45 lb. density particle board core, one inch total thickness; plastic laminate faced; single piece for each face; self- edged; 42 inch height, 24 inch depth. E. Bevel corners and edges of plastic laminate. F. Provide factory cutouts for through partition mounted toilet room accessories; coordinate requirements with Section 102813. 2.4 HARDWARE AND FITTINGS A. Materials and Finishes: 18 -8, type -304 stainless steel with No.4 satin finish. Chrome - plated "Zamac" is not approved. B. Urinal Screen Mounting Brackets: 11 gage, double thickness; 3 per screen. C. Pilaster /Stile Shoes: ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish, 22 gage; 4 inches high. Top shall have 90 degree return to stile. D. Pilaster Floor Support and Leveling Device: 3/8 inch thick by 7/8 inch wide steel leveling plate, welded to 11 gage steel reinforcing core; supported by two 3/8 inch bolts anchored into concrete floor; including provision for leveling. 102111 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 102111 — PLASTIC- LAMINATE -CLAD TOILET COMPARTMENTS E. Anchorage Devices: 1. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel, theft- resistant design. 2. Concealed Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized or cadmium plated. F. Pivot Hinges: 1. Manufacturer's standard design with provision for returning door to and holding in slightly open or closed position when door is not latched; nylon pivot pins and bearings. 2. Mount with tamper -proof bolts, in door recesses 2 -1/2 inch from top and bottom corner. G. Door Latch /Strike: 1. Sliding, 16 gage, concealed or surface mounted on door. 2. One -piece strike and keeper with rubber door bumper. 3. Required opening force shall not exceed 5 lbs. H. Door Pulls- Standard Compartments: Manufacturer's standard design. I. Door Pulls - Accessible Compartments: 1. Wire design, 5/16 inch diameter, not less than 1 -1/2 inch clearance, 5 inches center -to- center; stainless steel with US32 polished finish or brass with US26 polished chrome finish. 2. Provide on both sides of doors, mount directly below the latching device. J. Door Coat Hook (DCH): Bobrick B -212; aluminum with satin finish; required in all toilet compartments. K. Purse Hook (PH): Custom Bobrick No. 818139; stainless steel; required only in toilet compartments for women. Contact Carol Miller at Stone - Drew /Ashe & Jones, Seattle, WA (800) 222 -2850. L. Door Bumper: Bobrick B -687; stainless steel flange with black nylon post and black neoprene bumper. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. C. Verify correct location of built -in framing, blocking, and bracing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, plumb, square. B. Provide 1/2 inch space, maximum, at walls (between back wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters). C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using appropriate anchorage devices, secured through substrate to concealed wood blocking or metal backing plates. D. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with mounting brackets, secured through substrate to concealed wood blocking or metal backing plates. E. Adjust pilasters for floor variations; conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. F. Equip each door with hinges, door latch /strike, and door pulls. G. Install door strike on each pilaster in alignment with door latch. H. Install door coat hook within each compartment on door at location indicated. I. Install purse hook within each women's compartment on door at location indicated. 102111 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 102111 — PLASTIC- LAMINATE -CLAD TOILET COMPARTMENTS J. Equip out - swinging doors at end compartments which swing to a wall with a door bumper. Mount bumper on door or adjacent wall at location to prevent door from striking wall. K. Thru -bolts are not permitted for mounting of hardware or accessories; except fasteners for wire pulls. L. Adjust and align hardware to achieve uniform clearance between doors and pilasters not exceeding 3/16 inch. M. Adjust hinges to locate doors in partial open position when unlatched. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove protective maskings. B. Clean surfaces, leave in condition ready for public use. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Approximately 60 days after Store Opening, return to site and adjust pilaster floor attachments as — necessary for accurate alignment. Coordinate with Store Manager. END OF SECTION 102111 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 102813 — TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal toilet accessories. 2. Rough -in frames supplied to other sections. 3. Attachment hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking. 2. 088323 - Unframed Glass Mirrors: Vanity mirrors. 3. 092200 - Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board: Installation of blocking, rough openings. 4. 093000 - Tiling: Coordination requirements. 5. 102111 - Plastic- Laminate -Clad Toilet Compartments: Coordination with partition mounted accessories. 6. 123559 - Display Casework: Paper towel dispensers and soap dispensers in display casework • at STUDIO, COSMETICS, and COSMETICS ACTIVITY. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat - Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel, Plate, Sheet and Strip. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: 1. Submit product literature for each accessory item. 2. Describe the item, replacement parts, methods of service or repair. 3. Where appropriate list acceptable soaps, paper or other material to be used or dispensed by the item. C. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with Section 017700. 1. Operation and Maintenance Manual Inserts: Restocking information, including telephone numbers, addresses, price lists, and order forms, as appropriate for sanitary napkin /tampon packs and diaper change kits. 2. Keys: Quantities as specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier for equipment manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. shall be approved by the Owner. Refer to Bobrick National Account Agreement Contract #60 for special pricing and bid instructions; contact Carol Miller at Stone - Drew /Ashe & Jones, Seattle, WA (206- 763 - 2850). 1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Verify locations and dimensions shown with field conditions and be responsible for accuracy and conformity of the work with existing conditions. B. Avoid damaging the work or finish of other trades; repair any damage, or replace damaged items, as directed, at no additional cost to the Owner. 102813 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 102813 — TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Materials: Manufacturer's standard for the various units, except where specified otherwise. B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304, with No. 4 or No. 6 satin finish on exposed surfaces. C. Attachments: Furnish complete with all anchors, mounting frames, plates, and other devices required for complete installation. Do not use cement mounting. D. Security: Provide locks keyed alike insofar as practical; furnish 6 keys for each different type of locking device. E. Fasteners: Provide concealed type insofar as possible; where design requires exposed fasteners, provide stainless steel, vandal proof type. F. Location and Quantities: Provide accessories in locations and quantities shown on the Drawings or as specified. Where accessories are not shown on Drawings, install at location and height as directed by Architect. 2.2 MANUFACTURER A. Provide the product line from either of the two following manufacturer's for the listed toilet accessories: 1. American Specialties, Inc. (ASI); Yonkers, NY (914/476- 9000). Contact: Gil Pasevento. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc. Contact Carol Miller at Stone - Drew /Ashe & Jones, Seattle, WA (206- 763 -2850. 2.3 ACCESSORIES Accessory Bobrick ASI Description Code Model # Model # PTD/WR B -3961 n/a Accessible Combination Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle; recessed; no substitutions. PTD B -3861 04523 Paper Towel Dispenser; Recessed with 3'/% inch wall penetration. B -38616 04523 -6 Paper Towel Dispenser; Semi - recessed. CMTD B -526 1002 Counter Mounted Towel Dispenser; provide one at sink in COSMETICS Department and STUDIO as indicated on the Nordstrom Casework Drawings. WR B -3644 0458 Waste Receptacle; semi - recessed, 4 -inch wall cavity, 12 gallon capacity B -279 0828 Waste Receptacle; surface - mounted, 6 1/2 gallon capacity, for walls with insufficient cavity for recess. TPD B -2888 0030 Toilet Paper Dispenser; surface Wall or Partition Mounting; multi -roll. B -3888 0031 Toilet Paper Dispenser; recessed wall mounting; multi -roll, for end compartment. SCD B-4221 9477SM Seat Cover Dispenser; surface mounted. SCD1 B -301 9477 Seat Cover Dispenser; recessed, with perimeter mounting flange. B -3013 6477 Seat Cover Dispenser; recessed, with concealed mounting flange. SNV B -43500 9468 Sanitary Napkin Vendor; recessed, 25 cent coin operation. No SNV at POWDER ROOM. SNR B-4354 0472 Sanitary Napkin Receptacle; thru - partition mounting, dual unit, serving two toilet compartments. B -4353 0473 Sanitary Napkin Receptacle; recessed wall mounting, for end compartment and private bathrooms. SNR1 B -270 0852 Sanitary Napkin Receptacle; surface mounted. FUS B -287 0698 Folding Utility Shelf; surface mounted. • 102813 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 102813 — TOILET ACCESSORIES Accessory Bobrick ASI Description Code Model # Model # GB B -6806 3800 Grab Bar; concealed mounting with snap flange, 1 -1/2 inch diameter stainless, with No. 2562 anchoring system for metal stud wall and No. 2583 anchoring system for toilet compartment. Stainless B -298 0692 36 inch length by 8inch depth, for TAILOR/ALTERATIONS; adjacent Steel Shelf to spotting board. Noted on Drawings as "Chemical Shelf" in T /A. CH B -2116 0751 Coat Hook / Purse Hook, wall mounted. MIRROR B -290 0600 Framed Mirror, 24" x 72" U.N.O., for TAILOR/ALTERATIONS, and ESA. SD B -8226 0332 -D Soap Dispenser, 34 oz. capacity, for installation in lavatory countertops where indicated, one at sink in COSMETICS Department, and STUDIO. B -8221 0332 -C Soap Dispenser, 20 oz. capacity, for installation in wall -hung lavatories where indicated and on left side of wall -hung lavatories in TAILOR/ALTERATIONS. B -40 2001 Soap Dispenser, 32 -40 oz. capacity, surface mounted, for installation above sinks in, VISUAL SHOP. 2.4 SPECIALTY ACCESSORIES A. Provide the following items where indicated; no substitutions. B. Diaper Vendor (DV): 1. Manufacturer: Brocar Products, Inc.; Cincinnati, OH (513- 922 -2888 or 800 - 827 - 1207). 2. Model: 105 -SSR; stainless steel door; exposed welds ground and polished; bottom corners returned, 12 -1/2 inches wide, 42 -1/2 inches high, 5 -1/4 inches deep. 3. Equip with 025 -SS flange for recess mounting. Set flange against hinge knuckle for maximum recess. 4. Equip with manufacturer's standard black/chrome plate indicating "$1.00 /INSERT 4 QUARTERS" and "Diaper Change Kits" graphics on door of unit; apply all other graphics on the inside of the door. 5. Provide 3 sets of keys for door lock and coin box. 6. Provide two cases of 026 -DCR diaper refills for each diaper vendor. C. Utility Towel Dispenser (UTD) - Back of House Areas: 1. Manufacturer: Kimberly -Clark Corporation, Neenah, WI (888- 525 - 8388). 2. Model: Scott 09766; surface mount; for installation at wall- mounted sink. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories plumb and level in strict accordance with recommendations of manufacturer, using concealed fasteners insofar as practical. B. Install accessories securely anchored to substrate; coordinate with work of Section 092200 for framing of openings and installation of blocking. C. Install accessories after all other adjacent finishes are completed using only workmen skilled in this category to install the various items; exercise care to avoid damage to other trades' work; be responsible for damage during performance of this work. D. Mounting Heights: 1. Mount accessories in locations and elevations as indicated on the Drawings. Where elevation is not indicated, mount at the minimum elevation recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Mop and Broom Holders: Mount at 6' -0" AFF, over mop sink. 102813 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 102813 — TOILET ACCESSORIES E. General Grab Bar (GB) Installation: 1. Accessible Toilet Compartments and Rooms: 36 -inch bar for mounting at rear of toilet; 42 -inch bar for mounting at side of toilet. 2. Ambulatory Accessible Toilet Compartments: Two 42 -inch bars. F. Counter Mounted Soap Dispensers: Install close to the sink such that the spout projects inward 3" beyond the inside edge of the sink rim. G. Clean and polish exposed surfaces after removal of protective covering. END OF SECTION 102813 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 104416 — FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 2. Fire extinguishers. 3. Fire extinguisher brackets. B. Related Sections: 1. 092200 - Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board: Blocking and framing for cabinets. 2. 092900 - Gypsum Board: Coordination. 3. 099000 - Painting and Coating: Field painting at exterior surface of fire extinguisher cabinets. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit product literature for fire extinguisher brackets, fire extinguisher cabinets, and each type of extinguisher proposed for the work. 1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Section 016000. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (FEC) A. Recessed Cabinets - FEC: 1. For Non -Rated Installation: Potter - Roemer, Inc. 7020 -F, or Larsen's Manufacturing Company 2409 -R2. 2. Type: Recessed, with solid metal door; white baked enamel at interior, recoatable white baked enamel at exterior surface, and equipped with manufacturer's standard continuous hinge, roller catch, and door pull. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Dry Chemical - ABC Multi- Purpose Type: 1. Type FE: Ansul "Sentry 5" AA05, Amerex 500/500T, Potter- Roemer 3005, or Larsen's Manufacturing Company MPS; 5 lb. capacity, UL rated 2A:10B:C, approximately 4 -1/2 inch diameter x 14 inch high, polyester coated steel shell. 2. Type FE -2: Ansul "Sentry 10" A10H, Amerex 456, Potter - Roemer 3010, or Larsen's Manufacturing Company MP10; 10 lb. capacity, UL rated 4A:60B:C, approximately 5 inch diameter x 21 inch high, polyester coated steel shell. 3. Agent: Ammonium phosphate base. B. Carbon Dioxide Type: 1. Type CO2 -5: Ansul "Sentry 5" CD05A -1, Amerex 322, Potter - Roemer 3405or Larsen's Manufacturing Company CD5; 5 lb. capacity, UL rated 5B:C, approximately 5 inch diameter x 18 • inch high, polyester coated aluminum shell. 2. Type CO2 -10: Ansul "Sentry 10" CD10A -1, Amerex 330, Potter - Roemer 3410; 10 lb. capacity, UL rated 10B:C, approximately 7 inch diameter x 24 inch high, polyester coated aluminum shell. 104416 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 104416 — FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 3. Agent: Carbon dioxide. C. Fire Extinguisher Brackets: Wall mount type, appropriate to the size of the extinguisher, equipped with strap and quick release clip. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Verify appropriate rough opening dimensions and blocking locations. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate with other trades to ensure proper and adequate provision for interface with the work of this Section. B. Install cabinets properly shimmed, and secured to the framing, in proper alignment with plane of wall finish materials, as applicable. C. Install Type FE fire extinguisher in each fire extinguisher cabinet by brackets mounted at back of cabinet. All other fire extinguishers shall be wall mounted on brackets. D. Where fire extinguishers are indicated for wall mounting, secure bracket to wall through finish to framing or blocking. E. Fire extinguishers shall be installed, charged, tagged, and dated, not more than 30 days prior to building turnover. END OF SECTION 104416 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 105636 — RECONFIGURATION OF STORAGE ASSEMBLIES PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. New stock storage shelving components and systems, where existing components cannot be reused. 2. Salvaging and reassembly of existing components to create new stock shelving configurations. 3. Re- support of upper -level stock decking where reconfigured. 4. New double -level shelving at Kids Shoes stock. B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. C. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Except as approved by the Architect, the storage shelving system shall be entirely floor supported. B. Shelf Design Load: 50 pounds per square foot per shelf at a maximum deflection of L/120. C. Shelving system shall be installed in compliance with seismic requirements of the jurisdictional Code authorities. D. Reinforced shelves shall be designed and installed to support a minimum 300 lb. vertical point load at any location along the front edge without permanent deflection. Provide reinforced shelves at the following locations: 1. In freestanding shelving conditions: Reinforce the two shelves above the base shelf. 2. Reinforced shelves not required at units scheduled to receive "shelf lips." E. Reactions: Unless approved otherwise prior to submittal of shop drawings, loads imparted to suspended building floor structure shall not exceed the following: 1. 125 psf distributed load. 2. 2000 lb point load. F. Shelving Dimensions: 1. Depth and width of units shall be as shown on the Drawings. 2. Units shall be 10 foot high, except where indicated otherwise. a. Install 9 foot high in Children's Shoes. 3. Modular lengths as indicated on the Drawings shall be equal to actual dimensions so that total length of each row of shelves in end to end configuration shall not exceed the dimension indicated on the Drawings plus the width of the row end post. 4. Nominal width dimensions shall be such that shelving support posts into aisles laid out on dimensions as indicated on the Drawings, shall not intrude into the aisles. 5. At areas with low overhead ducts, reduce unit height as required to clear ductwork and overhead beams. G. Framing standards shall be free of protrusions and shall be perforated or slotted to receive tabs or studs on shelving supports. Shelving support framing shall be mechanically locked to the standards, either by bolt or with a removable and reusable clip. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Sections 013300 and 017700 as applicable. B. Product Data for New Systems: Include product literature completely illustrating components of system, methods of assembly and attachment, loading capacities, installation plans and instructions. 105636 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 105636 — RECONFIGURATION OF STORAGE ASSEMBLIES C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit complete shop - installation drawings indicating layout, system dimensions, field dimensions, assembly sequences, component details, connection to structure, relationship to adjacent enclosures and construction, clearances to sprinkler heads, and shelf spacing for each location. 2. Include structural calculations, stamp, and signature by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the State where the project is located. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Installation Report: Prior to final acceptance, submit designing engineer's report, with certification that the system has been installed in conformance with the design. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Building Codes: Conform to the requirements of the jurisdictional Code authorities. B. Permits and Fees: Obtain and pay for all permits and fees required by the jurisdictional Code authorities. C. The shelving system, including support framing members and connections shall be designed under the supervision of a professional structural engineer licensed to practice in the State where the project is located. D. - Pre - Installation Conference: 1. Conduct in accordance with Section 013119. 2. Require in attendance the General Contractor, the Architect, the shelving system installer, the electrical lighting installer, the mechanical ductwork installer, and the fire protection (sprinkler) installer, as they may be affected by the work of this Section. 3. Agenda: Address preliminary layout procedures, placement of shelving units in each room, anchorage, clearances, backing and screening, deck installation and screw penetrations, and shelf installation. 1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 NEW STORAGE SHELVING SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS A. Provide new components as necessary to provide a complete installation. New components shall match existing to the greatest extent possible and shall meet the requirements specified below. B. Approved Manufacturers, subject to compliance with specification requirements: 1. Lozier Store Fixtures, Omaha, NE (800/228 -9882, 402/457- 8000). 2. Easy -Up Shelving Seattle, WA (253/395 -2033; contact: Roger Stuessi). 3. Excalibur Shelving Systems, Inc., Contook, NH (603/746- 6200). 4. Morgan Marshall Industries, Inc., Chicago, IL (708/758- 6300). 5. E -Z -Rect Manufacturing, Ltd., North Vancouver, B.C. (604/929 -5461) 6. Cubic Designs / Borroughs, Brookfield, WI (800/826- 7061). 7. Storage Equipment, Inc., Minneapolis, MN 888/920- 9415). C. Furnish standards to permit maximum 2 inch incremental adjustment of shelf spacing. Provide minimum 12 gage steel foot plates welded to bases or equivalent engineered rigid shoe at all floor supported standards. D. Shelving Panels: Particle Board: ANSI A208.1; grade M- 2(medium density). Where existing shelves are fire retardant treated, provide fire retardant treated shelves to match; flame spread of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. E. Surfacing Panel: Hardboard; tempered pressed wood fiber board; 4'x8' sheets; 1/4 inch thick, smooth surfaced one side. 105636 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 105636 — RECONFIGURATION OF STORAGE ASSEMBLIES F. Furnish flush toe space closure for installation at base below lowest shelf except at Janitor's closet shelf units. G. Backing: 1. Solid Backing: 1/4 inch thick hardboard. 2. Screening Barriers: One of the following. a. Wire Mesh (Hardware Cloth): 1/2 inch mesh galvanized hardware cloth; 19 gage wire. b. Wire Mesh (Hardware Cloth): 1/4 inch mesh galvanized hardware cloth; 23 gage wire. c. Chicken Wire (Poultry Netting): Hexagonal weave; 1 inch opening; galvanized 20 gage wire. H. Fasteners: 1. Provide fasteners as required to complete the system. 2. Screw fasteners to penetrate upper level metal decking shall be sized to penetrate the upper flutes 5/8 inch maximum. 3. Surfacing Panel Screws: #8 x 1 -1/4 inch Hardiboard Screws or other approved screws for installation flush with surface of hard board. I. Anchors: Expansion anchors, size as required for anchorage to the slab, but not greater than 2 -1/4 inches in penetration length, unless otherwise approved. J. Shelf Edge Guards: Clear acrylic or polycarbonate sheet angle (Similar to Tri- Guards (708/537 -8444) TG 4212); minimum 1 -1/2" x 1 -1/2 "; lengths as required. K. Shelf Lips: Clear 3/16 inch acrylic; custom fabricated to the shapes indicated; predrilled to receive #10 x 3/4" 3/4 inch pan head screws at 8 inches on center at bottom flange. L. Surface Blocking: Minimum 20 gage hat channel. M. Pegboard Hooks: 1. Basis of Design: a. Supplier: McMaster -Carr, Atlanta, GA; (404) 346 -7000. b. Type: Heavy Wire hooks, zinc - plated steel, for 9/32 inch pegboard. c. Sizes: 1) 6 1 /4 inch projection, No. 18535A63. Provide 500. 2) 10 1 /2 inch projection, No. 18535A65. Provide 180. 2 Acceptable alternatives may be submitted (subject to compliance with the Contract Document requirements and Architect's approval of conformance to design intent). 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate Stock Storage System and storage shelving in accordance with the approved shop drawings and manufacturer's Specifications. B. BUILDING MAINTENANCE / HOUSEKEEPING / LAUNDRY and JANITOR CLOSET Shelving: 1. Do not equip with toe space closure. 2. In addition to top and bottom shelves, provide 4 intermediate shelves. Bottom shelf is to be placed at +30 inches above finished floor. 3. Provide cross bracing and rigid reinforcing bar at back of unit for stability. C. Shelves: Wood panels with front and rear metal edge support beams. Support beams shall be 1 -3/16 inches or less in height, measured from bottom of beam to top of shelf. D. Bearing Plates: Wherever possible, column and post foot plates shall be designed and attached to the base of vertical members in a configuration to preclude intrusion of the edges of the plates beyond the face of the column or post into a passageway. 2.3 ELEVATED DISPLAY SHELVING AND ELEVATED RECEIVING SHELVING A. Quantity and Locations: Refer to Drawings. 105636 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 105636 — RECONFIGURATION OF STORAGE ASSEMBLIES B. Design: 1. Steel framing system with 4 corner posts of 10 foot minimum height equipped with bearing plates for an assemblies of 8 foot width by 4 foot depth. Equip corner posts with bearing plates; provide clearance holes for bolting to floor. 2. Steel framing braced at 3 sides (both ends and back) between corner posts creating an open front for clear access to lower storage area at the floor. 3. Equip with steel angle support framing at 4 sides for support of plywood platform placed at 7 foot height. Provide intermediate steel angle supports spaced at 2 foot centers placed perpendicular to front and back supports. 4. Top of assembly braced at 4 sides with steel angle creating a framed upper storage area. 5. Corner posts shall extend at least two feet, but not more than 3 feet above the top shelf. C. Plywood Platform: APA C -D EXT, not less than 1/2 inch thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION • 3.1 SALVAGING OF EXISTING COMPONENTS A. Carefully remove and disassemble existing shelving units affected by demolition operations. B. Neatly store salvaged materials for reinstallation. At the end of installation, turn over usable excess materials to the Owner. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of work, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that this installation may commence. B. Make all required measurements in the field to ensure proper fit of storage shelving items. C. In the event of discrepancies, immediately notify the Architect, and do not proceed with fabrication or installation until discrepancies have been corrected. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Field coordinate shelving locations with electrical and sprinkler subcontractors so that sprinkler heads are located at the center of aisles, and shelving heights are maximized. B. Coordinate as required to ensure that adjacent work is performed as necessary to accommodate the work of this Section without additional cost to the Owner. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install shelving system components in accordance with manufacturer's installation details and approved Shop Drawings. B. Securely fasten all components in position to prevent displacement. At walls where a single row of shelving greater than 84 inches is indicated, secure the shelving to the wall. C. Anchor each floor supported standard to the floor with one expansion anchor, only. D. Install components plumb and true to line. E. Brace storage shelving system as required to provide stability of units. Cross -aisle ties shall allow a minimum of 7' -6" clearance from the finished floor at aisles. F. Back -to -Back Units: Secure adjacent posts with manufacturer's standard clips or with screws installed to draw posts into contact with each other or with backing material, as applicable. G. Backing: Unless otherwise indicated, install backing to backs and ends of shelves as follows: 1. Between Back To Back Units (Typical): Chicken wire screening or hardboard backing, full height of shelves. 2. Between Back To Back Units where indicated: 1/4 inch wire mesh hardware cloth screening, full height of shelves. Where metal stud framing closes off the area between top shelf and underside of structure, extend screening to complete closure; coordinate installation with metal stud framing specified in Section 092200. 105636 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 105636 — RECONFIGURATION OF STORAGE ASSEMBLIES 3. Exposed Backs: Hardboard backing to 8' -0" AFF; hardboard backing or wire mesh above 8' -0" AFF. 4. Closed Exposed Ends: a. Hardboard backing to 8' -0" AFF; hardboard backing or wire mesh above 8' -0" AFF. b. Required only at upper level shelving systems at locations where ends terminate at guardrails and other similar open conditions where stock could drop to the lower level. 5. Conceal or return all cut ends of screening which protrude into aisles. H. Assemble STOCK room storage shelving with shelf spacing and clearances as indicated on the Drawings and as follows: 1. Where shelving is finished one side only, install with finished surface up. 2. Metal Barriers: a. Provide metal barriers attached to shelf support connectors at the locations indicated, and approximately 6 inches back from the shelf front edge line. b. Metal barriers shall be metal straps or angles with a minimum of one 2 -1/2 inch wide face. c. Barriers shall be free of sharp edges and burrs. d. Arrange metal barriers so the 2 -1/2 inch face is oriented vertically to receive safety message. e. Safety Message: Each metal barrier at each shelf shall be clearly labeled on the vertical surface visible from the shelf side with minimum 1/2 inch high letters which read: DO NOT STACK ABOVE THIS LINE." 3. Install upper level top shelf 10 inches, minimum, but not more than' 26 inches below lower edge of metal barrier. I. Shelf Lips: Mount shelf lips as detailed, at shelving in locations and distribution as indicated on the Drawings. J. Install shelf edge guards to front edges of all shelves in GIFTS STOCK and COSMETICS STOCK areas. Install with horizontal leg extending under the shelf and vertical leg extending upward. Fasten as necessary to secure in place. K. At locations where column bearing plates must extend into aisle spaces, provide minimum 14 gage steel column guards to prevent tripping at the column plate. Extend from floor to 3 feet above the finished floor; provide metal closure plate at the top of the guard. Alternative column guard designs may be used, subject to approval by Architect. L. Touching Up: After installation, touch up all damaged paint, and leave in a clean, neat, usable condition. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The shelving system designing structural engineer shall inspect the installed system and verify that the installation complies with all design requirements. END OF SECTION 105636 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 106013 — FIXED HANGROD PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Revision of existing hangrod system to fit new construction. B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Furnish complete descriptive brochures of equipment to be furnished. C. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings showing hang rod configurations and placement, location of hang rod extensions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURER/INSTALLER A. Systems Engineering and Design, Inc., Division of SDI Industries, Inc., 13000 Pierce Street, Pacoima, CA 91331 -2528 (818/890- 6002). 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Reuse existing salvaged components as necessary to provide the layouts and configurations indicated or directed by the Owner. B. Provide new components as necessary to provide a complete installation. New components shall match existing to the greatest extent possible, and meet the following requirements: 1. Post Stanchions and Stock Arm Brackets for Hang Rod System: a. Vertical Post Stanchions: 1) Type: Galvanized steel pipe, plain ends, Schedule 40, sizes as recommended by system manufacturer. 2) Minimum Height - All Locations: 144 inches above finished floor. b. Stock Arm Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for single, double, triple, and quad hang installations. 2. Stock Rails: High lustre galvanized domestic tubing rails; 0.083 gage; hi- strength specification for a minimum yield of 55,000 p.s.i. a. Typical: 1 -5/16 inch O.D. b. Special Stock Rail Applications: 1 inch O.D. 3. Stock Rail Components: a. Provide standard manufacturer's standard components to facilitate additions or revisions to the system. b. Use tube inserts for all rail joints; minimum of 10 inches long secured with four (4) self - tapping screws. c. Fabricate all brackets and fittings of malleable iron and /or steel plate and finish in cadmium or zinc plate, or one coat of aluminum paint. d. Incorporate vibration -proof nuts and bolts in all clamp type fittings. e. Double arm brackets: Fabricate of steel with Universal Hanger Cradle and adjustable features. f. End caps: 1) Type: Manufacturer's standard plastic or rubber components in colors indicated. 2) Rail end caps: Plastic construction; red color for 1 -1/16 inch pipe; yellow for 1 -5/16 inch pipe. 3) Cross arm bracket end caps: Rubber (malleable plastic) construction, yellow color. 4. Fastenings: Provide self - drilling and tapping metal screws, TEKS 10 -32 x 3/4 inch with hardened tips, cadmium plated, Phillips head, and /or Type F, self- tapping, 10 -32 x 3/4 inch with hex head. 106013 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 106013 — FIXED HANGROD 5. Rounder Storage Hooks: Rounder Hook RH1000L by SDI (818/890- 6002). a. Bent -rod Rounder Hook. b. Double -arm mounting bracket. c. Mounting fasteners. d. Provide quantity as indicated on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SALVAGING OF EXISTING COMPONENTS A. Carefully remove and disassemble existing hangrod units as necessary for relocation and reassembly in the new locations indicated. B. Neatly store salvaged materials for reinstallation. At the end of installation, turn over usable excess materials to the Owner. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Use salvaged components and new components where necessary for a complete installation. B. Stabilize hangrod against lateral movement by means of diagonal bracing. C. Brace all components against seismic loading in accordance with code requirements. Pipe to pipe connections shall be rigid; U -bolts or other sliding connections will not be permitted. D. Secure all hangers and braces to structural members only; make no attachments to structure which will in any way impair or alter the structural integrity of the element. Make no attachments to metal deck. E. Make no attachments to metal deck. F. Make no attachments to any mechanical ductwork or other elements, or to electrical conduit and equipment, fire sprinkler piping or plumbing, or to any other previously installed non - structural work or equipment of other trades. G. Light Fixture Clearance: Coordinate rail and rod installation with light fixture locations to provide clearance between rod and fixture to service fixtures. H. Sprinkler Head Clearance: Coordinate heights within each stock room to ensure minimum 18 inch clearance at sprinkler heads. 3.3 HANG ROD A. Install hang rod in the locations indicated on the Drawings. Components will be assembled and erected by the General Contractor at the direction of the Owner during equipment installation in this room. Unassembled components shall be delivered shrink wrapped and secured to a pallet. B. Horizontal Hang Rod Spacing: As follows, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1. Center to Center Spacing of Main Supports: 48 inches typical. 2. Aisle Width: Refer to the drawings. C. Hang Rod Diameter: 1. Typical: 1 -5/16 inch O.D. 2. STOCK areas serving LINGERIE, KIDS WEAR GIRLS, KIDS WEAR BOYS, and KIDS WEAR INFANTS Departments (As Applicable): 1 inch O.D. D. Hang Rod Heights: As scheduled on the Drawings. E. End Caps: 1. Install end caps to exposed ends of storage hang rods. Secure with TEKS screw or steel pop rivet driven into rail. 2. Install end caps to exposed cross arm bracket ends, refer to Hang Stock Detail. 106013 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 106013 — FIXED HANGROD F. Provide additional, third hang rod mounted 116" AFF, at locations indicated on plans as DOUBLE HANG ROD. END OF SECTION 106013 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 109013 — MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards. 2. Sales Floor mirrors. B. Related Sections: 1. 012200 - Unit Prices: Description of unit prices involving work of this Section. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's complete product literature and other items as required by individual articles herein. 1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CORNER GUARDS A. Plastic Corner Guards. 1. Type / Manufacturer: a. CG -18 by Pawling Corporation, Wassaic, NY (800/431- 3456). b. TG4212 by Tri- Guards, Inc., Wheeling, IL (800/783- 8445). 2. Clear polycarbonate angle, 1/8 inch thick, 2 -1/2 x 2 -1/2 inch size, 4' -0" long; equipped with predrilled countersunk mounting holes and chrome plated oval head mounting screws. 3. Install on all outside corners at DRESSING rooms and other locations indicated on the Drawings. B. Metal Corner Guards: Provided under Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications . 2.2 SALES FLOOR MIRRORS: A. Furnished by Owner. B. Refer to Section 012200 — Unit Prices for bidding instructions. C. Size: 24 inches wide by 102 inches high. D. Quantity /Locations: Refer to Owner - provided "Mirror Location Plan ". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install each item in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as detailed, and in accordance with special requirements of each article. END OF SECTION 109013 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 122213 — DRAPERIES PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Transportation of Owner purchased drapery and accessories. 2. Installation of drapery, rods, tiebacks and associated hardware. B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drapery and hardware shall be installed by a firm acceptable to the Architect and regularly engaged in the installation of drapery and drapes for commercial applications. B. Pre - Installation Conference: 1. In accordance with Section 013119. 2. Schedule a conference a minimum of 10 calendar days prior to the installation of the wall covering. 3. Review mock -up, locations of each fabric type, substrate requirements, pattern matching requirements, installation procedures and methods, scheduling, and identification of conditions and situations which would adversely affect the work. 4. Attendance: Contractor, Architect, wall covering installer, Owner's representative, and all other parties affected by the work of this section. 1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Owner purchased materials will be delivered to the local Nordstrom project warehouse facility. Contractor shall transport the materials from the warehouse to the site. B. Storage: Store drapery flat, not upright, in a dry area. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 DRAPERY A. Furnished by the Owner. 2.2 DRAPERY ROD HARDWARE A. Furnished by the Owner. B. Provide incidental fasteners as necessary for a complete and functioning installation. 2.3 DRAPERY TRACK A. Series 9046 -16 025 track by Kirsch (800/528- 1407). B. 9682 end cap by Kirsch. C. Provide associated fasteners as necessary for a complete and functioning installation. D. Location: For installation at GIRLFRIEND ROOMS. 122213 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 122213 — DRAPERIES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence; including blocking locations and locations of cased openings. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install drapery hardware in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Hang drapery in intended locations, per the schedules and drawings. END OF SECTION 122213 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 123661 — SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Solid surface countertops and trim in Toilet Rooms. B. Related Sections: 1. 062000 - Finish Carpentry: Supporting construction. 2. 079200 - Joint Sealants: Sealant at adjacent construction. 3. 102813 - Toilet Accessories: Deck mounted soap dispensers. 4. 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures: Sinks, faucets, and trim. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for solid surface material; identify proposed manufacturer and color. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate plans and elevations, details, dimensions, materials, and construction details. Include adjacent construction, blocking requirements, and methods of attachments. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified by the solid surfacing materials manufacturer. 1.4 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with provisions of Section 016000. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Solid Surfacing Sheet: 1. Manufacturer and Color: Refer to Finish Material Schedule. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Adhesives: Seaming compounds and adhesives for bonding to substrates as recommended by sheet manufacturer. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate solid surfacing to the configurations indicated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Shop fabricate to the greatest reasonable extent; finish cut exposed edges and surfaces to match factory finish. C. Fabricate each component of one piece for full length; intermittent seams are not acceptable. D. Provide cutouts for soap dispensers, plumbing fixtures and trim , and other similar deck mounted items using installation instructions or templates obtained from device manufacturer. E. Ease exposed edges to 1/8 inch radius, unless otherwise indicated. 123661 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 123661 — SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Verify that wood substrate is securely anchored in. place and that supporting materials are ready to receive the countertop. C. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install solid surfacing fabrications square, plumb, and in proper alignment with adjacent construction. Secure to substrate using the adhesive recommended by sheet manufacturer. B. Seal joints between countertop, splashes, and trim with recommended seaming compound and in manner to produce hairline tight joints. C. Provide cutouts in plywood substrate as necessary for lavatories, soap dispensers, and other similar deck mounted items. D. Sealing of joints between backsplashes and adjacent wall construction specified in Section 079200. END OF SECTION 123661 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 210000 — FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Design, reconfiguration, and extension of existing sprinkler system as required for fire protection in renovation areas. 1.2 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION A. In general, the work shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Payment of all permits, fees and charges in connection with the work. 2. A complete modification of the existing overhead sprinkler systems for all affected store areas, and as required by the referenced standards, and the local authority having jurisdiction. Reference the architectural drawings for areas of renovation. 3. The Contractor shall visit the site before submitting his bid and shall examine all existing physical conditions that may be material to the performance of his work. No extra payments will be allowed to the Contractor as a result of extra work made necessary by his failure to do so. Any case of error, omission, discrepancy or lack of clarity shall be promptly identified to the Owner and Engineer for clarification prior to the bid due date. Pay special attention for possible conflicts between existing sprinkler mains and new ceilings /light coves. B. Design Criteria for Overhead Sprinkler System: 1. The sprinkler system for all affected store areas shall be designed, modified, fabricated, and installed in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13 (current edition), and the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 2. Sprinkler spacing: Sales Floor and Dressing Rooms shall be 130 sf. 3. Stock Room shall be 100 sf. 4. At new and /or relocated walls, when the nearest sprinkler to a wall is over 7' -6" from the wall, the sprinkler shall be considered overspaced and additional sprinkler protection shall be provided. 5. In rooms with low ceiling heights and hangrod storage, locate sprinklers to avoid obstruction by storage rod assemblies. 6. Coordinate sprinkler and piping locations with the mechanical and electrical subcontractors, to eliminate obstructions and provide maximum possible headroom thereunder. 7. Double Level Stock Shelving System: Provide 0.30 gpm per sf over the most hydraulically remote 3,000 sf plus 8 most remote sprinklers in the Lower Level system. 8. Lower Level of Double Level Stock Shelving System: Provide sprinklers in each aisle between shelves, with spacing between the sprinklers not exceeding 8 feet. Minimum sprinkler operating pressure shall be 15 psi with hydraulic calculation proving the capability of operating the eight hydraulically most remote sprinklers simultaneously with the ceiling system, including hose water allowance in accordance with NFPA 13. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1 Include details of the sprinkler system showing sections, light fixtures, air conditioning ducts, soffits, decks, canopies, etc. and other equipment to be used. 2. Hydraulic calculation for the double level stock system and as required for the use of flexible drops. 3. Obtain Fire Marshal's stamp of approval on all drawings prior to submittal to the other appropriate government agencies (Building Department, etc.) for review. B. Record Drawings: Keep a set of drawings on the job, noting all changes made in connection with final installation and transmit a marked set of drawings including all reflected ceiling plans showing "as built" conditions to the General Contractor for subsequent transmittal to the Owner. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The wet pipe sprinkler system shall be designed and installed in accordance with NFPA 13 (current edition), and is subject to the inspection and acceptance of the Owner's Representative, and the local AHJ. 210000 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 210000 — FIRE SUPPRESSION B. Comply with all applicable local rules, regulations, laws, ordinances, and standards of the National Fire Protection Association including, but not limited to, NFPA 13 and 24 and their respective appendices, (current editions). C. Installer Qualifications: The System shall be installed by a sprinkler subcontractor duly licensed and regularly engaged in the installation of automatic sprinkler equipment, using only experienced workers. 1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with existing site conditions for size and location of any drain receptors necessary for draining and testing the sprinkler riser and system. B. Devices, Materials and equipment: All materials used or installed in the overhead piping shall comply with the Standards and Appendices of the latest editions of the NFPA 13, except that piping with a wall thickness less than schedule 30 shall not be joined with cut grooves or threaded fittings, and piping with a wall thickness less than schedule 10 shall not be used in any installation. "Plain End" fittings or couplings shall not be used in this system installation. All equipment shall be submitted for approval prior to installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SPRINKLERS A. Approved Manufacturers: Tyco Sprinkler Corp., Grinnell Co., Victaulic, Viking Corp. Automatic Sprinkler Corp., Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., or approved. B. Types: 1. New sprinklers shall match the existing sprinklers. If the exact sprinkler model is no longer available from the manufacturer, provide sprinklers equivalent to the existing sprinklers in spray pattern, temperature, thermal element (fusible link or glass bulb), recess type and finish. 2. Provide recessed type sprinklers in all finished ceiling areas. 3. Sprinklers in rooms without ceilings and any sprinklers above ceilings shall be upright type, rough brass finish 286 degrees F (or 165 degrees F if located at lower level shoe stock). 4. Furnish extra sprinklers and a wrench as per NFPA 13. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Escutcheons: 1. Chrome plated metal split wall plates or escutcheons shall be installed where exposed piping passes through a finished floor, wall or ceiling, and they shall fit snugly around piping. 2. Coordinate required interior partitions' pipe passage clearances with the interior partition subcontractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 210000 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 210000 — FIRE SUPPRESSION 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Run all piping concealed wherever possible. Piping in stockrooms and service areas without finished ceiling may be exposed but shall be kept at minimum allowable distance from the ceiling or deck. Sprinklers installed above stock shelving systems shall be installed so that deflectors are at the maximum height, to allow maximized stock storage. Exposed piping and fittings shall be installed free of rust and wiped clean of oil and joint compounds. B. System piping shall be supported in accordance with NFPA 13. C. No unused existing pipe shall be abandoned in place. D. Coordinate location of all exposed piping with Architect. E. Where possible, run all sprinkler piping to not interfere with other work. Horizontal piping runs above sales floor ceilings shall not be located less than 12 inches above the ceiling suspension framing unless approved in writing by the Architect prior to submittal of plans for review. G. Cutting structural or mechanical members for passing of sprinkler piping or pipe hanger fastenings will not be permitted, except with approval of Architect. H. All other mechanical ductwork, piping, equipment locations, electrical fixtures and ceiling height have location precedence over sprinkler piping, within reason, except where NFPA 13 rules and regulations dictate otherwise. In cases of conflict with other trades, the Architect shall have final decision - making authority. Offset piping as required in such cases to accommodate work of other trades at no additional cost to Owner. Existing sprinkler piping shall be raised up to clear new ceiling construction. I. No sprinkler piping shall be installed directly above and 42 inches horizontally to any panelboard, switchboard, or transformer. J. Sprinklers and piping shall not be located directly above POS room data processing /transmission equipment (to prevent damage from leakage). K. The sprinkler subcontractor shall be responsible for all openings required for sprinkler piping when foundations, walls, floors and girders are installed. Any additional cutting for openings that should have been provided for will be paid for by the sprinkler subcontractor. L. Wall and Floor Penetrations: 1. Coordinate with Section 078400 for maintenance of fire ratings at new and revised wall and floor penetration configurations. 2. All new and revised penetrations shall be sealed air tight, whether or not required for fire rating. M. Piping Supports: 1. Earthquake (sway) bracing at the top of each floor level's riser shall be placed above, or beyond, the topmost flexible coupling and shall be attached to the roof or floor structure adjacent. 2. Earthquake (sway) bracing shall be installed throughout the system(s) regardless of the length of single hanger rods. All devices /fittings used for sway bracing shall be listed for such use by U.L. or F.M. 3. Piping with flexible couplings installed at less than 21 ft. centers shall require additional sway bracing to prevent excessive movement. Cross and feed mains shall be provided with flexible couplings at a maximum of 42 ft. on centers with earthquake bracing adjacent one side of the couplings. 4. Risers with flexible couplings installed at points in addition to the top and bottom shall require additional midpoint bracing to prevent excessive movement. 5. Cross main coupling hangers shall be installed on each piece of main between branch lines unless both branch line starter pieces are provided with hangers. 6. All rod type hangers shall be secured by an acceptable method (jam nut, etc.) to prevent rod rotation and subsequent unloading of hanger. 7. All hanger attachments to the roof structure shall be submitted for approval by the building's Structural Engineer; submittals shall include piping loads per NFPA #13 for individual hanging points; do not attach system hangers or braces to the bottom chord of any roof truss or girder. 8. Power driven studs shall not be used. 210000 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 210000 — FIRE SUPPRESSION 9. Provide 1 inch of clearance around all sprinklers penetrating the ceiling. Equip the sprinklers will a second escutcheon so that smoke will not pass through the larger penetration. 10. Add Alternate: Install flexible armover drop hose /piping, manufactured by Flex -Head, for use in ACT areas. The flexible hoses /piping shall be a minimum of 1 -inch in diameter and 3 -feet in length. (Use of flexible drops shall necessitate the provision of hydraulic calculations.) 3.3 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install all sprinklers in 2' x 2' acoustical tile ceilings in the center of tiles, with a maximum 1/2" tolerance. B. Layout and installation of sprinklers in "public area" ceilings shall be symmetrical or otherwise aligned on centerlines of circular light fixtures ( "downlights ") and with consideration to architectural features (soffits, etc.) without violating the referenced standards or this specification. Aesthetic review and approval by Architect is required prior to fabrication. C. Particular attention shall be given to avoiding obstructions to sprinkler water spray patterns by exposed or surface mounted light fixtures, structural members, decorative soffits and mechanical and electrical equipment tubing or piping, in accordance with NFPA 13. D. Recessed sprinklers shall be installed as to maintain the lowest profile. (i.e. the minimum distance between the sprinkler deflector and the ceiling). Sprinkler threads and Teflon tape shall not be visible. 3.4 SYSTEM ACTIVATION A. Fire protection within all areas of the existing store shall remain in service during all store and office hours, 7am to 10pm. Sprinkler work shall be coordinated closely with the General Contractor to assure protection of the facility. B. The sprinkler subcontractor's jobsite foreman shall be responsible for inspecting all piping prior to activating the system following work, to avoid water damage to Owner's stock and property. C. The sprinkler subcontractor's foreman shall then place all systems in full service and so advise the General Contractor prior to leaving the jobsite. The General Contractor shall also inspect the control valves to ensure that the sprinkler systems are in full service, prior to releasing the sprinkler subcontractor's foreman for that day. D. All exterior control valves shall be chained and padlocked in the fully open position prior to store turnover. Padlock keys shall be surrendered to the owner. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner's Representative will make periodic Course of Construction inspections of the installation on behalf of the Owner and will submit written confirmation of any deficiencies found to the Architect. Correction of all such deficient items in a timely manner, within the scope of the contract and this specification, is the sole responsibility of the sprinkler subcontractor and such deficiencies shall be corrected as soon as practical at no cost to the Owner. B. Testing: 1. Upon completion of the installation, the overhead piping systems shall be hydrostatically tested. 2. To assure that no water leakage will occur in this existing area, the system piping shall be pretested with 50 -psi air pressure prior to the 200 -psi hydrostatic test. END OF SECTION 210000 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 220719 — PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes piping insulation on: 1. Domestic cold water supply piping. 2. Domestic hot water supply piping and returns. 3. Interior AC Unit condensate drain piping. 4. Exposed lavatory drain supply lines. B. Related Sections: 1. 224000 — PLUMBING FIXTURES: Piping. 2. 230500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL: Piping. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Sections 013300, 017700 and 230013, as applicable. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with the general requirements specified in Section 230013. 1.4 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING INSULATION A. Manufacturers: One or more of the following. 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Knauf Fiber Glass. 3. Owens Corning. 4. Johns Manville Corporation. B. Cold Water Piping: Fiberglass dual temperature pipe insulation with white ASJ Cover. C. Hot Water Piping: Fiberglass with vapor barrier jacket. Furnish plastic covers for installation at changes in direction of piping and at all tees and valves. D. Interior AC Unit Condensate Drain Piping Serving Rooftop Drain Receptor: Fiberglass dual temperature pipe insulation with white ASJ Cover. E. Fiberglass Pipe Fittings Insulation: Zeston PVC insulated fitting covers for application after pipe insulation is installed, secured with tack fasteners, staples or tape. F. Vapor Barrier Material: White Kraft paper- backed aluminum foil, strength and permeability rating equivalent to adjoining insulation jacketing. G. Staples, Bands, Wires and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. H. Insulation for Lavatory P -Trap and Angle Stop Assemblies: Truebro Lavguard undersink protective pipe covers for accessible fixture traps. Provide cover for drain piping, P -trap, angle valves and supply tubing. Abrasion resistant exterior cover shall be smooth and shall have 1/8" wall minimum thickness over cushioned foam insert, white color. 220719 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 220719 — PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION I. Special Requirement for Use of Insulated Material: All PVC fittings and valve covers in air plenums shall have a UL 25/50 rating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which piping insulation will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation on mechanical systems subsequent to testing and acceptance of tests. C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full - length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use pieces or scraps abutting each other. D. Clean and dry mechanical surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. Provide oversize hangers around the outside of the insulation with pipe shields to prevent insulation compression. E. Maintain integrity of vapor- barrier jackets on cold piping mechanical insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. F. Unless otherwise indicated, cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition or efficiency of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specified form or type as indicated. G. Extend mechanical insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. H. Install protective metal shields and insulated saddles wherever needed to prevent compression of insulation. I. Cover insulated surfaces with all- service jacketing neatly fitted and firmly secured. Lap seams at least 2 ". Apply over vapor barrier where applicable. J. Do not insulate equipment, handholes, unions, cleanouts, ASME stamp, and manufacturer's nameplate. Provide neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation. 3.3 SCHEDULE A. Insulate the following cold plumbing piping system with fiberglass 1" thick with vapor barrier: 1. Domestic cold water piping. 2. Interior horizontal AC condensate unit waste receptor piping. B. Insulate the following hot plumbing piping systems with fiberglass 1" thick with vapor barrier: 1. Domestic hot water piping. 2. Domestic hot water recirculating piping. C. Insulate lavatory drain lines and hot and cold water stops and piping below lavatories with Truebro Lavguard. Insulation is not required when an architectural skirt prevents contact with the trap and supplies. END OF SECTION 220719 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 224000 — PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plumbing fixture installation. 2. Plumbing connections to equipment furnished from other sections. 3. Condensate drains from air - conditioning units. B. Related Sections: 1. 220719 — PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION. 2. 230013 — MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS. 3. 230500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL: Piping. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). B. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Sections 013300 and 230013. B. Product Data: Submit complete product literature for each fixture proposed for the work. C. Templates: Submit to appropriate trades for preparation of openings in vanity countertops. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with the general requirements specified in Section 230013. B. Standards: All material and workmanship shall comply with applicable local, county, state and national standards. C. Codes: Comply with the applicable Codes of jurisdictional authorities. D. Safety: Comply with all rules and regulations of applicable State Industrial Accident Commission and NFPA 101. E. Provide anchorage and bracing of all plumbing components to meet the requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities. 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Faucet: Furnish one complete infrared faucet and one infrared sensor control unit, for future replacement. B. Flush Valves: Furnish one 1.6 gal. per flush H.C. toilet infrared flush valve and one 1.0 gal. per flush urinal infrared flush valve. C. Drinking Fountains: Furnish two replacement filter cartridges for each filter installed. D. Deliver replacement components in original factory cartons; include complete parts list packed with each unit. 1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 224000 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 224000 — PLUMBING FIXTURES • PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FIXTURES A. Furnish fixtures as scheduled on the Drawings. Include all fittings and mounting accessories, as required for a complete and functional installation. B. P -1 — Water Closet: 1. P -1: a. Crane "Placidus" #3446E or Kohler "Kingston Lite" K4330; white finish; 1.6 gal /flush. b. Flush Valve: Sloan Royal Model 111 -SMO (or Zurn equivalent), 1.6 gallon per flush, battery operated infrared sensor with courtesy flush button; equipped with 1" I.P.S. angle stop, adjustable tail piece, vacuum breaker flush connection and wall spud flanges. c. Toilet Room Trap Primers: Provide Sloan model VBF -72 -A1 (or Zurn equivalent) trap primer for toilet room floor drains. Provide Sloan Royal Model 113- 1.6 -SMO (or Zurn equivalent) at trap primer locations. d. Seat: Olsonite #10CC open front seat, color to match fixture. e. Reuse existing carriers when possible. Notify Architect and Plumbing Engineer when any carriers are not fit for re -use. Should any new carriers be required, provide the following: 1) Bottom Outlet Carriers: Zurn model Z- 1204 -N4, Josam Series 12704 or 12714, or Wade Series 330. 2) Horizontal Outlet Carriers: Zurn, Josam or Wade. Horizontal outlet carriers shall be used only when conditions do not allow the use of a vertical carrier and only as shown on the drawings. 3) Provide auxiliary foot support located within toilet chase wall for additional support of water closets. Rod support feet shall be equal to Wade suffix M4. 2. P -la: (Handicap Stalls) Same as P -1 except mounted per architectural drawings for accessibility requirements. C. P -2 — Urinal: 1. American Standard "Allbrook" 6541.132 or Kohler "Dexter" K5016 -T; white finish. 2. Flush Valve: Sloan Royal Model 186 -SMO (or Zurn equivalent); battery powered, infrared sensor operated with courtesy manual button, chrome plated, 3 /4" I.P.S. angle stop with decorative cap, adjustable tail piece, vacuum breaker flush connection, and wall and spud flanges. 3. Carrier: Jay R. Smith, Zurn, Josam, or Wade. D. P -3 — Lavatories: 1. P -3a — Wall Mount: a. Eljer "Mayburne" 051 -2245; white finish; factory drilled hole for soap dispenser on right side. Provide supplies with key stop and trap. b. Stops: Provide 3/8 inch wall stops with 12 inch solid tube supplies and wall flanges; chrome plated brass. c. Drain Trap: 1 -1/2 x 1 -1/2 adjustable "P" trap with cleanout; wall flange; chrome plated brass. d. Provide trap, stop, and riser ADA compliant wrap per Section 220719. e. Carrier: Jay R. Smith, Zurn, Josam, or Wade floor mounted concealed arm carrier with rectangular uprights and chrome plated escutcheons, for installation at metal stud walls. f. Faucet: Sloan EBF -85 faucet with battery operated solenoid valve utilizing four "C" batteries and "Optima" sensor; chrome plated cast brass, 4" centerset metering faucet; no substitution. g. Mixing Valve: Powers e480 thermostatic mixing valve. 2. P -3b — Undercounter Mount: a. Kohler "Caxton" K -2210; 17" x 14"; white finish; 52047 clamp assembly, K -7715 grid drain, K7607 supply with key stop, and K9000 trap. b. Faucet: Sloan EBF -85A faucet with battery operated solenoid valve utilizing four "C" batteries and "Optima" sensor; chrome plated cast brass, 4" centerset metering faucet; no substitution. c. Mixing Valve: Powers e480 thermostatic mixing valve. 224000 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 224000 — PLUMBING FIXTURES 3. P -3d - Wall Mount Lavatory: a. Eljer "Mayburne" 051 -2245; white finish; factory drilled hole for soap dispenser on right side; 802 -0325 supplies with key stop and 804 -1190 trap to meet ADA accessibility requirements. Install escutcheon to hold lavatory away from wall. b. Carrier: Jay R. Smith Zurn, Josam, or Wade floor mounted concealed arm carrier with rectangular uprights and chrome plated escutcheons, for installation at metal stud walls. c. Faucet: American Standard "Reliant" 2385.009. d. Mixing Valve: Powers e480 thermostatic mixing valve. 4. P -3e — Studio Lavatory, Self- Rimming: a. Kohler "Bolero Round" K- 2610 -S; K -7715 grid drain, K- 7605 -CP supply with key stop, and K -9000 trap. b. Faucet: Kohler "Wide Spread Lavatory" K- 7303 -K, 5 -1/4" gooseneck spout; 8" centers, 4" wrist blade handles, 2.0 gpm aerator. c. Mixing Valve: Powers e480 thermostatic mixing valve. 5. P -3h — Lavatory, Countertop: a. Kohler "Invitation" K- 2098 -4; 20" x 13 "; 4" centers, white finish; K -7715 grid drain, K7607 supply with key stop, and K9000 trap. b. Faucet: Sloan EBF -85A faucet with battery operated solenoid valve utilizing four "C" batteries and "Optima" sensor; chrome plated cast brass, 4" centerset metering faucet; no substitution. c. Mixing Valve: Powers e480 thermostatic mixing valve. E. P-4 — Sinks: 1. P -4c — Cosmetics Open Cell Sink: a. Kohler "Bolero Round" K- 2610 -S; K -7715 grid drain, K- 7605 -CP supply with key stop, and K -9000 trap. b. Faucet: Kohler "Wide Spread Lavatory" K7303 -K, 5 -1/4" gooseneck spout; 8" centers, 4" wrist blade handles, 2.0 gpm aerator, K7607 supplies with key stop. c. Mixing Valve: Powers e480 thermostatic mixing valve. F. P -7 — Drinking Fountains: 1. Compliance Criteria: Furnish units as specified, with modifications as necessary to comply with ADA requirements, as follows. a. The actuator shall be a front mounted pushbutton or a side mounted lever and shall require a force no greater than 5 lbf to operate. b. The spout shall be located at the front of the unit and shall direct the water flow in a trajectory that is parallel or nearly parallel to the front of the unit. c. The spout shall provide a flow of water at least 4" high. d. The spout shall be positioned so that the flow of water is within 3 inches of the front edge of the fountain. 2. Fixture P -7b: Haws Model H1011MS, or approved equivalent product from Sunroc.; stainless steel with #4 satin finish, chrome plated bronze bubblers and chrome plated bronze actuator; stainless steel bowl interiors. 3. Include Haws Model 6425 filters for all units. G. P -11 — Recessed Wall Mounted Trap Primer Assembly: Stainless steel 12" x 18" hinged access door containing ball shut -off valve, trap primer, manufactured distribution manifold. Size primer for number of traps served per manufacturer's requirement. Access door shall be fire rated when installed in rated walls. H. Floor Drains: Outlet size as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Manufacturers: a. As specified: Jay R. Smith. b. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Zurn; Josam; Wade. 2. Types: a. Floor Drains: 1) FD -la: Same as FD -1 except with sediment bucket. 224000 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 224000 — PLUMBING FIXTURES I. Trap Primer: Precision Plumbing Products Inc. Model P -1 or P -2, automatic brass trap primer activated by a drop in building water pressure; assemble as component of P -11. Provide Sloan VBF- 72-Al trap primer in cold water supply to P -1 flush valve for toilet room floor drains. J. Water Hammer Arrestor: Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., SC series, piston operated, type "K" copper barrel with brass threaded adaptor. Size as scheduled on drawings. Provide access to water hammer arrestors per requirements of AHJ. Provide access panels as needed. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Plumber's Putty: Stainless plastic plumber's putty similar to Hercules Chemical Company "Sta- Put." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Templates: Submit to stone and /or casework fabricator, as appropriate, for preparation of openings in vanity countertops. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Fixtures: 1. Install where shown on plans complete with traps, valves, stops and all fittings. Provide plumber's putty at grid drains at sinks and lays. 2. Mount toilets, urinals, lavatories, and eye washers at elevations shown on Architectural Drawings. 3. Firmly anchor fixtures against movement; locate in center of area allowed. 4. Vanity Tops: a. P -3e: Coordinate with Section 123661 for mounting of lavatories in molded plastic countertops. b. Fixtures set into molded plastic countertops stone countertops shall be set with silicone sealant. 5. Fixtures shall be completely installed with all fittings and mounting accessories. 6. Run clear water through water lines prior to completion of faucet installations to clear lines of debris. 7. Install floor drains /sinks with 2' x 2' lead or neoprene sheet sealed to lower drainage collar to allow seepage through weep holes. 8. Set fixtures for hand washing or showering to 110 degree F. maximum. B. Install trap primers for floor drains and floor sinks as needed. Use P -trap tap fittings and slope trap primer piping in the direction of flow with no dips or traps. C. Air Chambers: 1. Where water hammer arrestors are not indicated on Drawings, install air chambers at the ends on each horizontal runout or the top of each vertical drop to all fixtures in the domestic HW and CW system. 2. Air chambers shall consist of a 1' long x 3/4" capped copper pipe at the high point, or as required by the local plumbing jurisdiction. 3. When multiple fixtures are installed on the same runout, single piston type arrestors, as specified, may be installed in lieu of air chambers if sized per the water hammer arrestor manufacturer's criteria. D. Drinking Fountains: 1. Install filters in cold water supply below counter or behind access panel, as appropriate. E. Infrared Sensors 1. Adjust infrared sensors on water closet flush valves and lavatory faucets per manufacturer's installation manual for proper operation. Adjust range and angle of infrared beam to suit job conditions and to avoid nuisance or inactive operation. 224000 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 224000 — PLUMBING FIXTURES 3.3 TESTING A. Water Closet Testing: All tests shall be witnessed by the Owner's representative. 1. Field verify that the (flowing) dynamic water pressure at the pressure gauge on the main cold water branch serving each toilet room is at least 30 psi while one toilet is flushing. 2. Adjust all toilet stop cocks open for maximum water flow without splashing on seat. Verify proper operation of flush valve per manufacturer literature. 3. Place 2 toilet seat covers and 6 feet of 2 ply toilet paper (purchased by Contractor) in each toilet and flush once. 4. If toilet does not clear bowl on first flush, remove bowl and return to supplier for warranty replacement. 5. Install replacement bowl from a different "china kiln" batch and retest until all toilets are in compliance. 6. Include all costs for testing procedure as part of Base Bid. END OF SECTION 224000 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230013 — MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: General provisions and requirements for all Sections of Division 23 - MECHANICAL, covering the following: 1. Quality Assurance. 2. Submittals. 3. Coordination. 4. Measurements. 5. Drawings. 6. Attachments. 7. Racks, stands and supports. 8. Labeling and painting. 9. Damage. 10. Electrical equipment and wiring - responsibilities. 11. Adjusting and balancing 12. Testing. 13. Cleaning. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 26 — Electrical: Electrical connections to mechanical equipment. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General Requirements: 1. Make submittals in accordance with Sections 013300. 2. Submit complete, at one time. Partial submittals will not be considered. 3. Catalog sheets shall be complete, and the item or model number to be used shall be clearly marked. 4. Form: With the exception of shop drawings, submittals shall be in booklet form and in 3 -ring binders. The data shall be arranged and indexed under basic categories by spec section and part. A typewritten index shall be included with dividers and identifying tabs between sections and references to specification section numbers. B. Product Data and Shop Drawings: Submit as necessary to coordinate equipment installation methods with work of other trades. C. Equipment Lists: Furnish 6 copies of a complete equipment material list showing ratings where appropriate for approval and coordination. D. Project Closeout Submittals: 1. Conform to the requirements of Section 017700. 2. Record Drawings: Maintain a current set of drawings on the job, noting all changes made in connection with final installation and convey a marked set of drawings showing "as- built" condition to the Owner. 3. Maintenance and Operation Manuals: a. Unless otherwise required, submit three copies, as described in Section 017700, of maintenance and operation manuals prior to completion of project, providing complete manufacturer's identification and service requirements for all equipment installed, catalog sheets, fixture numbers, parts list, certificates of guarantee, and operating instructions. 230013 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230013 — MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes, Ordinances and Permits: 1. Material and equipment for all work shall be designed and installed in compliance with all governing codes and ordinances of the jurisdictional Code authorities. 2. Secure and pay for all inspection fees and permits. 3. Safety: Comply with all rules and regulations of the State's Industrial Accident Commission and NFPA. 101. B. Drawings: 1. Architectural, structural, plumbing, fire protection, mechanical, and electrical drawings form a part of the work to be done under this section. 2. When discrepancies exist among scale, dimension, or quantity on architectural, structural, electrical or mechanical drawings, they shall be called to the attention of the Architect whose decision regarding such discrepancies shall be final and binding. C. Fire Rated Systems: Maintain the integrity of fireproofing materials and system and of rated partitions and floors at all mechanical penetrations. Coordinate installation of firestopping material specified in Section 078400. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Cutting and Patching: 1. Coordinate cutting and patching with work of other sections. 2. Furnish cutting, patching, equipment curb or base requirements well in advance of work in this Division. 3. Cutting shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner limiting scope to only that which is necessary to accomplish the new work. 4. Openings in concrete shall be saw -cut or core drilled only. 5. Do no cutting of structural members without permission of the Architect. 6. Take precautions to protect all buildings, contents and occupants and repair to like -new condition, or replace if directed, all damage to buildings and their contents. B. Interference With Other Systems: Placement of elements in ceiling plenums shall be coordinated among the various trades according to the following order of precedence, with the first having highest priority: 1. Light fixtures. 2. Floor outlets. 3. , Sprinkler heads. 4. Ductwork. 5. Drainage piping. 6. Other piping, electrical conduit. C. Field mounted electrical disconnect switches are to be installed under Division 26 so as not to interfere with access to HVAC equipment or accessories. HVAC subcontractor shall coordinate with electrical subcontractor prior to mounting of these electrical items. D. Condensate drain piping shall be installed so as not to interfere with access to HVAC equipment or accessories. 1.5 MEASUREMENTS A. Verify all measurements at the job site. B. Locate all piping, ducts, etc., to clear openings. 1.6 DRAWINGS A. The plumbing and mechanical drawings are generally diagrammatic. Complete details of the building which affect the plumbing and mechanical installation may not be shown. For additional details, refer to the Architectural, Structural, Fire Protection, and Electrical drawings. 230013 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230013 — MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.7 RACKS, STANDS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide all racks, stands and supports for mechanical equipment and work as required. Construct of steel angle or channel, cut to fit neatly, welded or bolted into a sturdy fit, designed to resist all vertical and lateral forces required by code. Provide with primer paint. 1.8 LABELING A. Valves: Provide brass tags with engraved numbers on all valves. Furnish a master list noting valve numbers, their function, and location in the building. List shall be typed on 8 -1/2" x 11" paper and mounted in a frame. Series 100 numbers shall apply to valves located on the first floor, series 200, second floor, and so forth. B. Nameplates: Vinylfilm, Scotchcal Film 3651 with adhesive backing, or equal. Lettering to be black on white background. 1. Access Panels: Provide for all mechanical item access panels, identifying item requiring access. 2. Mechanical Equipment: Provide for all mechanical equipment. C. Piping Labels: Provide adhesive type color coded pipe identification labels for any new piping per ASME A13.1 for the following services: non - potable water, steam, condensate, compressed air, vacuum, soft water, filtered water, gas, "x" psi gas, gas relief vent, domestic hot water, domestic hot water recirculating and cold water, storm drain, overflow storm drain and grease waste. 1.9 DAMAGE A. All subcontractors shall be responsible for damage caused to their work and that of other trades, in the execution of their work, and shall make, or pay for, all necessary repairs to restore damaged work to like -new condition at no cost to the Owner. 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING - RESPONSIBILITIES A. HVAC Work: 1. General: Furnish control equipment including factory pre - packaged controls, thermostats, sensors, switches and relays. 2. Packaged Air - Conditioning Units and Heat Pumps: Provide all factory installed electrical equipment including motors starters, and protective devices. 3. Exhaust and Transfer Fans: Provide all factory installed electrical equipment including motors. 4. Provide variable frequency drives for supply fan motors where indicated on the Equipment Schedule. B. Electrical Work: The following is to be provided under Division 26. 1. All line voltage and low voltage conduit, wire, and connections. 2. Disconnect switches for packaged air - conditioning units and terminal units when not furnished by manufacturer. Refer to HVAC Equipment Schedules. 3. Disconnect switches and line voltage starters for exhaust and transfer fans. 4. Power for early operation of equipment. 5. Wiring to and from variable frequency drives, including line reactors, if required. 6. Installation of duct mounted smoke detectors. 1.11 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING A. Adjust each part of system to ensure proper functioning of all controls, proper air distribution and elimination of drafts, noise and vibration. B. Filters: Provide clean air filters at start-up, project completion, and Store opening. Additional filter changes will be considers as an additional cost. C. Operation: At least 3 weeks prior to project completion, unless otherwise required to facilitate work of other trades, and in the presence of the Architect or his representative: 1. Start up heaters and run through sequence of operation. 2. Start up all equipment and run control through sequence of operation. 3. Adjust all controls. 4. Adjust all fans for quiet operation. 5. Make adjustments and repair defects as necessary to eliminate all duct rattles and noise. 230013 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230013 — MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 6. Clean or replace all filters. 7. Instruct the Owner's operator in the proper operation and maintenance of equipment as directed. D. Balancing: 1. Air balancing shall be performed by the Mechanical Contractor in accordance with NEBB, AABC, or SMACNA air balancing guidelines. 2. Balance air equipment and registers for volume shown. 3. Log all balancing data and submit to Architect and Engineer prior to final approval. 4. Provide ladders, sheaves, motors, belts, and other devices as required for execution of the work. 1.12 TESTING A. Scope: Test all piping before backfilling or covering. The Architect or his representative is to be present at all tests. Notify Architect at least 48 hours before an expected test. B. Water piping: Test all new water piping at 125 psi air pressure and hold for four hours. Test in sections before covering. Test entire system when completely installed. Repair all defects shown by test and retest until entirely tight. C. Waste, Sewer Piping: Test all new waste, sewer and vent piping by filling with water to a minimum of 10' -0" above grade of first floor and hold for four hours. Test in sections as work progresses. Repair all defects shown by test and retest until entirely tight. D. Gas Piping: Test all medium and low pressure gas piping as required by the gas provider and the local code authority. As a minimum, cap all pipes at end or use a pressure relief valve and hold 125 - psi air pressure for 4 hours. Gas pipe testing shall be witnessed and confirmed by General Contractor. Temporarily disconnect all devices that are rated less than 125 psi prior to testing. 1.13 CLEANING A. Leave all equipment clean and ready for use. Protect all equipment from damage during construction. Leave in new condition. B. Remove all adhesive labels from the fixtures and exposed piping. 1.14 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE LABELING A. Install at least two labels per new pipe in boiler equipment rooms (more than two labels where piping is congested) , one label every 50' -0" in exposed locations (stock rooms, etc.), and one label every 20' -0" in concealed locations (above tile or hard ceiling) for the services listed. Provide arrows on piping integral with piping system service lettering to indicate direction of flow. Provide all pipe labels as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 230013 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230013 — MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 3.2 TEMPORARY SYSTEM SHUTDOWNS A. Provide all materials and labor necessary to perform shutdown of building plumbing systems to accomplish remodel work. This shall include shutting down of water systems (domestic, irrigation, hot water, etc. as required) with draining of systems, adding isolation valves if not already present to allow for future shutdowns, and re- filling of systems. Provide also for natural gas systems including turning off gas to equipment, evacuation of piping system, adding isolation valves if not already present to allow for future shutdowns, re- filling of systems and purging of air from system, turning on gas to equipment and re- lighting of pilot lights. END OF SECTION 230013 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Piping and fittings. 2. Valves. 3. Hot water storage heaters. 4. Pipe support systems. 5. Motors. 6. Accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. 112346 — GARMENT FINISHING AND CONVEYING EQUIPMENT: T/A support equipment; requirement for Owner review of equipment placement prior to connection. 2. 220719 — PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION. 3. 224000 — PLUMBING FIXTURES. 4. 230013 — MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS. 5. 263200 — PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES: Engine and muffler; exhaust rain cap for installation under this Section. 6. 283100 — FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM: Installation of duct mounted smoke detectors. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B32 - Solder Metal. 2. D2513 - Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings. B. American National Standards (ANSI): B1- Cast -Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Sections 013300 and 230013. B. Product Data: Submit complete product literature for each material /fixture proposed. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with the general requirements specified in Section 230013. B. Welding: For welding pipe and fittings, all welders shall be qualified and licensed by the State in which the Project is located. C. Pre - Installation Conference: Conduct in accordance with Section 013119. 1. Require in attendance the plumbing subcontractor, the HVAC installer, the fire protection subcontractor, the acoustical ceiling installer, the Architect, and other trades affected by the work. 2. Agenda: Include review of the following items. a. Scheduling and coordination of the work. b. Equipment access requirements, including FIT boxes, dampers, plumbing valves, and cleanouts. c. Clearances. d. Sleeve sizes and locations. e. Suspension and seismic restraints. f. Equipment supports. D. Plumbing Pre - Installation Conference: Conduct in accordance with Section 013119. 1. Require in attendance the plumbing subcontractor, the Plumbing Engineer and other trades affected by the work. 230500 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL 2. Agenda: Include review of the following items. a. Scheduling and coordination of the work. b. Equipment access requirements, including FIT boxes, dampers, plumbing valves, and cleanouts. c. Clearances. d. Sleeve sizes and locations. e. Suspension and seismic restraints. f. Equipment supports. E. Seismic Design: 1. Provide anchorage and bracing of all mechanical components to meet the seismic requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities. 2. Seismic bracing and anchorage shall be subject to Owner paid inspections performed by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the State where the Project is located. 3. Correct all bracing and anchorage systems determined by the Owner's Structural Engineer to be non - compliant, or furnish structural calculations verifying compliance from a Contractor -paid structural engineer licensed to practice in the State where the Project is located. 1.5 WARRANTIES A. Submit in accordance with Section 017700. 1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All equipment specified shall be regularly catalogued items of the manufacturer and in use for at least two years and shall be supplied as a complete unit in accordance with the manufacturer's standard specifications and any optional items required for proper installation for equipment unless otherwise noted. B. Unless specified otherwise, all materials specified in this section shall be U.S. made. C. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings. T -drill is not acceptable. D. All electrical components shall be UL listed. 2.2 STORM, DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPING A. Storm, Drain and Waste Piping: 1. Below Grade: Standard weight cast iron (with no -hub joints) where allowed by AHJ. Otherwise standard weight cast iron bell and spigot with factory glazing- 2. Above Grade: a. 3" and larger: Standard weight cast iron or galvanized steel schedule 40 pipe (storm and overflow storm). b. 2 1 /2" and smaller: Standard weight cast iron or DWV copper pipe. B. Vent Piping: Standard weight cast iron or copper. C. Fittings: 1. Below Grade: Standard weight cast iron with no -hub couplings where allowed by AHJ. Otherwise standard weight cast iron with factory glazing with rubber gasket joints. 230500 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL 2. Above Grade: a. All Sizes: Standard weight cast iron with rubber gasket joints or no -hub joints where allowed by local authorities. Long sweep elbows shall be provided where spacing and slope allow. For galvanized steel pipe fittings use Anvil Gruvlok Fig. 7001 Standard Coupling or Fig. 7401 Rigidlok Coupling, both with minimum ratings of 300 psi for up to 16" pipe size. Pipe and fittings shall use roll or cut grooved joining methods. Fittings shall be galvanized forged or segmentally welded steel fittings with minimum schedule 40 wall thickness. Provide with 3 year manufacturer warranty including coverage for water damage. Use of galvanized steel storm /overflow storm system is subject to approval by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). b. 2 -1/2" and smaller: Standard weight cast iron with rubber joints or no -hub joints where allowed by local authorities or (no -lead) soldered wrought copper DWV. Long sweep elbows shall be provided where spacing and slope allow. D. No -Hub Couplings: 1. Piping 1.5" and larger Diameter: Husky 4000 or Mission Heavy Duty. E. Floor Cleanouts: J.R. Smith 4020, nickel bronze cover, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. Provide secondary clamping collar caulked watertight to drain in waterproof floors. F. Wall Cleanout Covers: Chrome plated or stainless steel discs with retaining screw. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING A. AC Condensate Piping: Type "L" copper tubing with wrought copper DWV fittings using 95/5 solder. Condensate drain piping for HVAC equipment shall have P -trap with union connection to allow removal and cleaning. 2.4 WATER PIPING MATERIALS A. Copper Tube: Type L hard -drawn temper; wrought - copper fittings using 95/5 solder and /or Viega ProPress mechanical pipe joining method. For ProPress system, use copper press fittings conforming to material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. 0-rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM. ProPress piping system shall be suitable for pressure range of up to 200 psi and temperature range of 0 F to 250 F. ProPress systems shall meet the requirements of the International Plumbing Code and shall be IAPMO UPC listed. B. Manufacturer of Copper Press Fittings shall be: 1. Viega, 17545 Daleview Dr., Lakewood, OH 44107, 877.620.0016 or 2. Ridge Tool Co., 400 Clark Street, Elyria, OH 44035, 800.519.3456. . 2.5 HORIZONTAL PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Pipe Rings for Rod Hangers: 1. For pipe 2" and smaller, adjustable strap type, Grinnell Fig. 97 or equal. 2. For pipe 2 -1/2" and larger, clevis type with adjustable nuts on rod, Grinnell, Fig. 260 or equal. 3. Furnish copper plated or lined hangers when in contact with copper pipe in order to prevent electrolysis. B. Hanger Rod Attachments: 1 Attachments to structural steel with malleable iron beam clamps or structural steel angles or channels spanning between beam flanges or angle clip seats. 2. Attachment to concrete with concrete inserts for new concrete construction, installed prior to placing of concrete and expansion shields for existing. C. Insulated Piping Inserts: 1. Provide Calcium Silicate rigid pipe insulation inserts at all insulated piping. Thickness of insert • insulation shall be one inch for water piping, condensate drain piping within the building and storm /overflow drain piping. Thickness shall be 2.5" thick for steam main piping and 1.5" thick for steam run out piping and condensate return piping. Provide full circumference metal band to protect insulation from crushing by hanger. 230500 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL 2.6 VALVES A. Furnish factory- fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Furnish valves of types and pressure ratings indicated but rated at not less than 125 psi SWP to comply with installation requirements; sizes as indicated, and connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. B. Manufacturer: Crane, DeZurik, Fisher, Fairbanks, Hammond, Jenkins, Milwaukee, NIBCO, Powell, Stockham or Walworth. C. Ball Valves: Seat ring designed to hold sealing material; lever- handles; brass screwed; Teflon seats and seals; stainless steel ball. 1. Water, gas, air service — 150 psi SWP, 600 psi WOG rated. a. 2" and smaller: Full port opening. b. 2 -1/2" and larger: Conventional port opening. 2. Steam and steam related application — 250 psi SWP. Watts B- 6800 -SS -04 full port or Nibco T- 585-70-66-ST full port. D. Check Valves: Construct pressure containing parts of valves as follows: 1. 2" Size and Smaller: Bronze swing check, bronze disc. Crane Cat. No. 37. 2. 2 -1/2" and Larger: Iron body, swing check, brass trim, with brass -faced disc, brass body seat ring. Crane Cat. No. 373 for flanged pattern. 3. In Copper Tubing: Swing check, Y- pattern, screwed cap bronze body end disc. Crane Cat. No. 1342. 2.7 WATER HEATERS A. EWH -1 — Electric Water Heater 1. Chronomite M -20L, 4160 Watts, 208V/1 PH, 57 degree -F temperature rise at 0.5 gpm. 2.8 MOTORS A. Voltage: 1. Up to and including 1/2 HP: 120V 60 Hz operation, unless otherwise indicated. 2. More than 1/2 HP: As indicated on the Drawings. B. Features: 1. Permanently lubricated sleeve or ball bearings. 2. Totally enclosed motors on or in equipment on roof where exposed to weather. 3. Starters and Protection: Equip each motor with overload and under - voltage protection. 120 volt motors shall have thermal protection consisting of Westinghouse M.S. switch, one pole toggle operated with pilot light. 3 -phase motors shall have across - the -line- starter and thermal element of protection of each phase. 4. Provide high efficiency motors where indicated on drawings. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Sealants: As specified in Division 7. B. Solder: ASTM B32, 95/5 type. C. Pipe Supports Over Membrane Roofing: Pillow Block Pipestand Model No. 1.5 or 3 -R, Miro Industries Incorporated, Murray, UT (800/768- 6978); or approved. 2.10 WATER HEATERS A. EWH -1 — Electric Water Heater 1. Chronomite SR -15L, 1800 Watts, 120V/1 PH, 24 degree -F temperature rise at 0.5 gpm. 2.11 PUMPS A. SP -1 — Packaged Simplex Sump Pump 1. Little Giant 9E -SMPX Packaged Simplex Sump Pump, 4/10 hp motor, 5 gpm at 20 feet of head, 120V/1 PH. 2. Provide one additional float for EMCS alarm connection. 230500 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL 2.12 TEMPORARY CLEAN -UP FACILITIES A. Refer to Section 015000 — TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS, Article 1.3, for provisions of temporary service sinks, faucets, and associated piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING WORK A. Coordinate space and installation requirements for mechanical work indicated diagrammatically on the Drawings. Follow routing shown for lines as closely as practicable. Make runs parallel with the lines of the building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installation and repairs. Keep gravity piping tight to structure at start of run. Overlay Plumbing Drawings with HVAC, Sprinkler and Electrical Drawings prior to starting work. Where a conflict is identified, reroute services as required. B. Offsets in Piping: Coordinate work and provide all piping offsets as required to complete the piping installation. No extra payment will be allowed for offsets required because of actual construction conditions. C. Replace all fireproofing damaged or removed from structure during the course of the work to maintain the rating of the fireproofing. D. Provide fire stopping around all pipes that penetrate rated walls or floors, by means of firestopping system as specified in Section 078400. E. Provide all incidental accessories and procedures which may not be indicated or specified, but which are normally necessary for a complete and functioning installation. F. Support all piping independent of HVAC equipment, ductwork, or supports. G. Provide a minimum of 12 -inch clearance between bottom of piping and top of acoustical ceiling tiles. H. Provide dielectric fittings on all joints between pipes of dissimilar materials. 3.2 STORM, WASTE, VENT AND CONDENSATE PIPING A. Slope waste pipe 4 inches and larger in diameter, 1/8 inch to 1 foot minimum. B. Slope waste pipe less than 4 inches in diameter, 1/4 inch to 1 -foot minimum. C. Maintain uniform slope. D. Joints shall be watertight. E. Joints between steel pipe and cast iron pipe may be caulked or screwed. F. Screw joints shall be American Standard with all burrs removed by reaming. G. Cleanouts: Provide all cleanouts shown or where necessary for cleaning of pipe. Cleanouts shall be closed with flush brass screw plugs. Cleanouts under concrete shall have a flush plate at floor lines. Note location on record drawings by dimensions from nearest building grid line. Open and reseal all cleanouts prior to store turnover. H. Provide trap and vent on sanitary waste fixtures. I. Elbows shall be long sweep where space and sloping allow; medium sweep otherwise. J. Run piping concealed, except as approved by the Architect. K. Changes in direction shall be made with fittings. L. Provide trap primers for sanitary floor drains and sprinkler receptors. Provide trap primers for floor sinks that don't have daily water drain, including all floor sinks outside of kitchen areas, unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate locations of trap primer wall panels prior to pouring slab on grade and installing wall studs. 230500 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL M. Air Conditioning Drains: 1. Install copper piping connecting air conditioning units to roof receptors or drains as indicated on Drawings. 2. Depth of seal on trap shall be 4 inches minimum, unless noted otherwise. 3. Use solid copper straps and fasteners, or stainless steel straps and fasteners (wrap pipe), and pipe supports to support piping that cannot be supported from AC unit. Stack pipe supports for required height; refer to details. Space pipe supports at each end of run and intermittently at 10- foot centers maximum. N. Galvanized steel piping systems for storm /overflow storm system shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations and this specification. Treat ends of field grooved or pipe cutting of galvanized pipe with two coats of spray -on "liquid- galvanize" to maintain galvanized coating protection. Use Gruvlok formulated gasket lubricant to assure proper coupling gasket seating per manufacturer's recommendations." O. Below grade piping shall be no -hub as preferred system where allowed by AHJ. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 WATER PIPING A. Joints shall be soldered using 95/5 solder and /or Viega ProPress mechanical pipe joining method. Press connections shall be made in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions. The tubing shall be fully inserted into the fitting and the tubing marked at the shoulder of the fitting. The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark on the tubing to assure the tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting. The joints shall be pressed using the tool approved by the manufacturer.. B. Ceiling Shut -Off Valves: 1. Provide ceiling shut -off valve on each water line at each fixture or group of fixtures (except where shown as being fed from the floor below) to allow zone and fixture isolation while the remaining parts of the system are in service. 2. Where acoustical ceilings are scheduled, install 1 foot above ceiling. 3. Where no ceilings are scheduled, install maximum 10 feet above finished floor in location accessible from below by ladder, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Do not locate shutoff valves above hard surface (such as GWB) ceilings or in areas where valve would be inaccessible. C. Gate valves in water piping are to be used on service entrance piping only. D. Pipe passing under or through walls shall be protected from breaking with sleeves. Provide link seal watertight penetrations through foundation walls. E. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings. Allow for expansion and contraction. Changes in sizes shall be made with reducers. F. Provide dielectric insulating couplings wherever copper tubing joins other materials. G. Wrap pipe with dielectric insulating tape at contact points with studs, unistrut, and dissimilar materials and "sock" or sleeve pipe where in contact with concrete, soil or earth. 3.4 PIPE HANGERS, ANCHORS, SWAY RESTRAINT, AND ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide suitable hangers, anchor bolts and anchors for all piping; also, required for securing any part of the work. B. Comply with provisions of Section 014500 for attachments to metal decking and building structural members. C. Sway Restraints: 1. Provide longitudinal sway bracing to prevent rubber gasketed hub and spigot and no hub pipe from separating at the joints under dynamic flow (water impact). Bracing is required at 40 foot maximum intervals to prevent horizontal movement or more frequently as required by code. Provide also brace at downturn to vertical piping. 2. Provide sway bracing on domestic cold water mains where they turn down to main toilet headers to prevent movement when toilets flush. 230500 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL 3. Provide sway bracing on all water piping 2 '/2" and larger in all seismic zones and where noted on drawings. 4. Seismic Zones 3 or 4: Provide longitudinal and lateral sway bracing on runs of pipe 4" diameter and larger and over 40' long when more than 12" from structure. 5. Show all sway restraint locations on As -built Drawings. D. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel for proper piping support. Spacing of supports shall be as follows: (CI =Cast Iron Pipe, CU= Copper Pipe, ST =Steel Pipe) Pipe Size Maximum Hanger Spacing Rod size 1/2 to 1 -1/2 inches 6 feet 3/8 inch 2 inches 10 feet 3/8 inch 2 -1/2 to 3 inches 10 feet 1/2 inch 4 to 6 inches 10 ft. (CI, CU), 12 ft. (ST) 5/8 inch 8 to 12 inches 10 ft. (CI), 12 ft. (CU,ST) 7/8 inch E. Vertical supports for cast iron hub and spigot piping shall be at base of riser, at each floor and not to exceed 15 feet vertical. Vertical supports for copper and steel piping shall be at each floor and not to exceed 10 feet vertical. F. Copper tubing 1/2" and smaller shall be supported at 5' -0" on center maximum. G. Soil storm and waste pipe shall have at least one hanger or support per section. Storm and waste pipe below grade shall have rebar support on each joint to support pipe during soil settling. H. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts securely to forms. I. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Where piping of various sizes to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping, or ductwork. J. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. K. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports, which are copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods. L. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. M. Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. N. Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. O. Comply with the following installation requirements for insulated piping: 1. Inserts and Shields: Install Calcium Silicate insulation inserts with protective sheet metal shields between hangers and insulation. Provide oversize hangers around the outside of the insulation insert with pipe shields to prevent insulation compression. Calcium Silicate inserts shall be installed when piping is first hung (before insulation of remainder of piping). 3.5 SLEEVES A. Furnish sleeves to other sections for installation at piping penetrations through floors, rated walls, or ceilings. B. Coordinate location and installation of sleeves; furnish setting instructions. 230500 -7 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL C. Firestopping for sealing penetrations in fire rated assemblies is specified in Section 078400. 3.6 ACCESSORIES A. Valves: Provide the following types for each service. 1. Shut off Valves: a. 3" and Smaller: Ball valves. b. 4" and Larger: Gate valves. c. Install on inlet of each equipment item and inlet of each fixture. 2. Drain Valves: a. 2" and Smaller: Gate valves. b. Install one each equipment item, base of each riser, and base of each rise or drop in piping system. 3. Check Valves: a. All Sizes: Swing check valves. b. Install on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as indicated. c. Boiler Feed Water: Lift check valves. B. Escutcheons: Provide at exposed pipe passing through floors, walls, or ceilings. C. Valves: Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 1. Install valves with stems pointed up in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward below horizontal plane. 2. All valves shall be labeled with tags indicating their function. Valves located above suspended acoustic tile ceiling shall be marked on the tile below with a clear thumbtack, and noted on the Project Record drawings. 3.7 TESTING A. Prior to installation of fixtures or insulation, pressure test all piping. B. Prior to ordering water softener verify water hardness as follows: 1. After Culligan representative performs startup of equipment, water sample tests shall be taken from espresso machine(s) and hand sink (hot water) furthest from the water softener at both ebar and cafe (where present) to verify proper operation of the water softener. 2. At completion of job, 1 week prior to store opening, repeat test with water sample taken from locations described above. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed fixtures and equipment from damage. B. Protect all drainage, waste and vent piping from entry of foreign debris. Immediately after installation, cap or plug all open pipes with temporary plugs or caps, (duct tape is not acceptable). Cover floor drains and sinks with plywood or metal covers wired to the drain grates. Provide temporary metal screens inside drain grates to catch debris and allow water to flow. Failure to comply with these requirements shall be grounds for the Owner to employ an independent company at the contractor's expense to videotape all piping to verify that it is clean. END OF SECTION 230500 -8 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230713 — DUCT INSULATION PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Duct insulation on 1. Exterior of unlined ducts. 2. Duct interiors where indicated on Drawings. B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: All material and workmanship shall comply with applicable local, county, state and national standards. ft B. Safety: Comply with all rules and regulations of the State's Industrial Accident Commission and NFPA 101. 1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT INSULATION A. Manufacturer: Owens - Corning, or equal. B. Thermal Insulation: 1 -1/2 inch fiber glass, 0.6 pcf, with factory applied foil vapor barrier facing with one 2 inch flange, R = 4.2 min; thickness as scheduled. Tape all joints. C. Soundlining: Owens- Corning "Aeroflex type 150"; 1 inch thick blanket duct liner, 1.5 to 3.0 pcf. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Duct Exterior Insulation 1. Install where ducts are concealed in shafts and above ceilings and where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Wrap insulation tightly on all metal supply ductwork, except that shown as being lined, with all circumferential joints butted and longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of 2 inches; tape or seal all joints. 3. In return air shafts, lap all joints in direction of air flow and tape all joints. 4. Pin or wire ductwrap on all ducts over 35 inches in width, so that ductwrap stays tight to ducts. 5. Fire dampers do not require ductwrap. Position insulation to facilitate installation of wall angles at fire damper sleeves. 6. All access doors and volume /balancing damper operators, locking quadrants, shafts, and handles shall be exposed, accessible and operable following installation of ductwrap. Slitting insulation (only) at these locations is not acceptable. Cut back insulation and tape around quadrants. 7. Closure systems shall have a 25/50 F.H.C. per UL 723. 8. For rectangular ducts over 18 inch wide, the duct wrap shall be secured to the bottom side of the duct with mechanical fasteners, or equivalent, spaced at 18 inch centers to reduce sag. Care should be taken to avoid over compensating the insulation with retaining devices. 230713 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230713 — DUCT INSULATION 9. Exterior duct wrap shall be terminated 6 inches from end of duct to allow connection of flex duct, only where flex duct is shown. B. Soundlining: 1. Install in duct locations as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Install tight to duct interior surface, neatly fitted into all corners. 3.3 SCHEDULE A. Install in accordance with Drawing Symbols as follows: 1. 18 "/12" Li": Indicates 18" by 12" duct (metal dimension) with 1 inch soundlining; L2 indicates 2 inch soundlining, etc. 2. 18 "/12" W ": Indicates 18" by 12" duct (metal dimension) with 1 -1/2 inches external insulation wrap. 3. 18 "/12 ": Indicates 18" by 12" duct (metal dimension) with no soundlining or external insulation wrap t END OF SECTION 230713 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: System for control and instrumentation of building mechanical system. B. Related Sections 1. 233000 - HVAC Air Distribution: Ventilation. 2. 260500 - Common Work Results for Electrical: All wiring and electrical conduit to controls. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Sections 013300 and 230013. B. Product Data. C. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Conform to Section 017700. 2. Operation Manuals. 1.3 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. General Control Sequence: 1. For all air conditioning units specified in Section 237000, provide factory wired controls, which when connected as specified herein and in Section 255500, provide automatic temperature control. 2. System shall contain an economizer cycle, where applicable, outside air dampers and exhaust dampers. 3. On a call for heating, outside air damper is in minimum position and electric resistance heat is staged as called for by EMCS system. 4. On a call for cooling, refrigeration capacity is staged as called for by the EMCS system. 5. Compressors shall be locked out by an ambient thermostat at 55 °F (adjustable) and below. During this period all cooling requirements shall be accomplished by modulating economizer damper to maintain a 55 °F (mixed) supply air temperature. On morning startup, outside air dampers shall be kept closed until room temperature in all zones is up to thermostat setting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Zone Temperature Sensors: 1. Obtain Architect approval for design and location. 2. Furnished under Section 255500 (except FITNAV room sensors). B. Furnish rooms and areas indicated on plans with fan induction terminals and electric reheat coils, or VAV boxes operated by room sensor through EMCS system. C. Smoke Detection: Duct smoke detectors shall signal fire alarm panel; fire alarm panel shall initiate a smoke exhaust and makeup air mode as approved by the local jurisdictional authorities. D. Provide all products necessary for equipment to perform in specified operational sequence. E. Refer to Section 260500 for electrical connections by Electrical Contractor. 230900 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 3.2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The control system manufacturer and Contractor shall furnish the services of a trained representative to instruct the Owner's personnel in maintenance and trouble shooting of the system, prior to Store opening, at a time convenient to the Owner. END OF SECTION 230900 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 233000 — HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: System of sheet metal ductwork, grille collars, intake housings, connections, exhaust and other fans, required to supply, recirculate and exhaust building air. B. Related Sections: 1. 089100 - Louvers. 2. 230013 - Mechanical General Provisions. 3. 230713 - Duct Insulation. 4. 230900 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC. 5. 237000 - Central HVAC Equipment. 6. 260013 - Electrical General Provisions. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300 and Section 230013. B. Product Data: Submit complete product literature for each system and component. Include a list of all equipment to be provided, showing ratings for equipment where appropriate. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with all pertinent codes and regulations, recommendations of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc., (SMACNA) as they apply to work in this Section. B. Fabricator /Installer: PSF Mechanical (206/764- 9663). 1.4 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL A. Fabricate all sheet metal work of galvanized iron in accordance with the latest SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, unless heavier gages are required by Code, or by special conditions: 1. Exposed round duct shall be spiral duct. 2. Medium pressure duct shall be spiral, flat oval, or approved equal B. Duct Fabrication: 1. Construct and design in accordance with the latest edition of the ASHRAE Guide and SMACNA Standards. 2. Seal all joints and seams of ductwork air tight with Scotch brand pressure sensitive tape or duct sealer. 3. Crimp or bead flat duct surfaces diagonally regardless of size. 4. Make duct transitions with a slope of not more than 30° with the air stream. 5. Turning Vanes: Make turns with a throat radius of not less than the duct width, with maximum 24" radius up to 70" wide duct, or use turning vanes, Tuttle & Bailey "Ducturns ", or approved equal. 6. Round sheet metal ductwork and round flexible ductwork may be used where space and codes allow or as shown on the Drawings. 7. Where access doors are indicated or required, fabricate or provide of two gages heavier than plenum or duct of same size; provide doors with hinges and catches. 8. Manufactured ductwork of lighter than code gage shall be approved by the local authority prior to installation. 233000 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 233000 — HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION 2.2 FILTERS A. Furnish air filters of the model, size and type as required for project for all air conditioning units. -- B. Disposable Fiberglass Type: Farr 30/30 or equal. C. Prior to equipment start up and air balancing, replace all filters. After final acceptance of project, and prior to store opening, replace filters in all air conditioning units. Refer to Section 230013 for balancing requirements. 2.3 AIR OUTLETS /INLETS A. Approved Manufacturers: Titus, Shoemaker. B. Furnish all air outlets and volume control required to effect a uniform air distribution. C. Refer to Grille /Register /Diffuser Schedule on Drawings for types. D. Birdscreen: 1/2 -inch mesh galvanized hardware cloth; 19 gage wire. 2.4 FAN INDUCTION TERMINALS A. Manufacturer: Trane or approved equal. B. 22 gage galvanized steel casing with 1/2 inch thick, pound density, glass fiber insulation. C. Fan shall be a F.C. blower style with a direct drive permanent split capacitor, with solid state variable speed control (SSSC). Refer to equipment schedules for motor voltages. D. Electrical coil shall be factory furnished and installed. provide wattage and voltage as scheduled. Resistance heater shall be UL listed, open -coil type with required safety control devices. Heaters shall be furnished with heavy duty coils derated to 35 watts per square inch and furnish with one - stage mercury contactors for heaters less than or equal to 16KW when used with Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) control from the EMCS. Provide two -stage mercury contactors for heaters larger than 16KW when used with PWM control from EMCS. E. Variable volume damper shall have a leak rate of not more than 10 percent at 1 inch S.P. F. Provide factory installed access panels on bottom panels of fan induction terminals. G. Furnish terminal units with Glasfloss #Poly -Fil throw away air filters. H. Control Components: Furnish as required by Section 255500. Control package shall be compatible with a signal from EMCS for D.D.C. control. Controls shall be pressure independent. Controls shall provide reverse action when primary air units are supplying air at a temperature greater than 72 °F. I. Provide factory mounted electrical disconnect switches when prior approval is obtained from building officials. Refer to equipment schedules. J. Furnish terminal units with Glasfloss "poly -fil" throw -away air filters. 2.5 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINALS A. Manufacturer: Trane, or approved equal. B. 22 gage galvanized steel casing with 1/2 inch thick, pound density, glass fiber insulation. C. Variable volume damper shall have a leak rate of not more than 10 percent at 1 inch S.P. D. Control Components: Furnish as required by Section 255500. Control package shall be compatible with a signal from EMCS for D.D.C. control. Controls shall be pressure independent. Controls shall provide reverse action when primary air units are supplying air at a temperature greater than 70 °F. E. Include factory installed 277V /24V AC control transformer. F. At Contractor's option, VAV damper may be fabricated integral with the duct, providing extended shaft and bracket for mounting motor controller are furnished. G. Provide factory mounted electrical disconnect switches when prior approval is obtained from building officials. Refer to equipment schedules. 233000 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 233000 — HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HORIZONTAL DUCT SUPPORTS A. Provide supports in accordance with the following: Max Max Maximum One Other Minimum Support Side Side Su. • ort Material Distance 12" 18" 1" x 22 gage strap Every 10 feet 23" 35" 1" x 18 gage strap Every 10 feet 36" 72" 3/8" rods with 2" x Every 10 feet 2" x 1/8" trapeze 36" 96" 3/8" rods with Every 10 feet 2 -1/2" x 2 -1/2" x 3/16" trapeze 3.2 VERTICAL DUCT SUPPORTS - FROM FLOOR A. Provide supports in accordance with the following: Maximum Size Angle of Rectangular Iron Duct Size 48" x 96" 3" x 3" x 3/16" B. Locate all duct supports at 12 feet o.c. maximum. 3.3 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Conceal all ductwork in ceiling spaces and chases, unless indicated otherwise. Where ceilings and chases are not provided, install neat and square, maintaining maximum clearances above floor. B. Coordinate duct location with the work of other Sections. Ductwork shall take precedence over all piping and electrical conduit. Structural elements, and building components exposed to view, such as lighting, shall take precedence over ductwork. C. Locate ductwork as indicated. Where obstructions exist, use the most direct route possible; record duct locations on as -built drawings. D. Install all ductwork with due regard for the structural integrity of all adjacent work. E. Provide a minimum of 12 -inch clearance between bottom of ductwork, and equipment, and top of acoustical ceiling tiles. 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Prior to air balancing, replace all filters. After final acceptance of project, and prior to store opening, replace filters in all air conditioning units. Refer to Section 230013 for balancing requirements. B. Install air outlets and volume control required to effect uniform air distribution. C. Actuators controlled by EMCS are to be provided under Section 255500. 3.5 SCREENS A. Install bird screen over all outside air inlets, exhaust or relief air outlets, and exhaust fan outlets. END OF SECTION 233000 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 255500 — INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF HVAC PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) including all fabrication, equipment, engineering, submittals, software, training, coordination, checkout and start-up for a complete and functional system. B. Related Sections: 1. 230013 - Mechanical General Provisions. 2. 230500 - Common Work Results for Mechanical. 3. 237000 - Central HVAC Equipment: a. Installation of line size and non -line size automatic valves and separable wells furnished under this Section. b. Provision of all piping connections, taps and wells required for flow, pressure or temperature devices. c. Provision of duct mounted control dampers and actuators so indicated, under Equipment Specifications. d. Installation of all automatic dampers furnished under this Section. e. Assembly of multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages, shafts and brackets, and extensions of required number of shafts through the ducts for externally mounted damper motors. Jack shafts will be assembled with sealed roller or ball bearings of stainless steel construction. 4. 233000 - HVAC Air Distribution. 5. 230900 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC. 6. 260500 - Common Work Results for Electrical: Installation, mounting, wiring (communication and power), and termination of complete EMCS system as shown on the Drawings and described herein. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Work under this Section includes: 1. All labor, materials and equipment required for construction of the EMCS. 2. All central processing hardware and software, electronic and control equipment, sensors and thermostats, as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Engineering, calibration, software programming and checkout. B. The systems shall be complete in all respect, tested and ready for operation. C. The proposal shall be based on a completely electronic system, including valve and damper actuators, and a full DDCNAV system, wherein all VAV terminals are centrally controlled by the EMCS system. D. Miscellaneous Equipment: 1. New BCU -1, BCU -2 and EMCP -10 shall interface to all existing inputs /outputs /field devices currently under control of the Trane Tracer EMCS. 2. Each AC unit currently under control of the EMCS shall be under control of the new EMCS. Existing unit controllers to be used. 255500 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 255500 — INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF HVAC 3. Each temperature sensor currently monitored by EMCS shall be monitored by the new EMCS and alarmed as required. 4. Each lighting contactor currently under EMCS control shall be started and stopped by the new EMCS time scheduling program. Existing EMCP panels, pilot relays and contactors to be used. 5. Each exhaust fan currently under EMCS control shall be started and stopped by the new EMCS time scheduling program. Existing EMCP panels, pilot relays and power relays to be used. 6. The EMCS shall monitor an existing electrical pulse meter for use in energy reports. 7. EMCS Workstation Backup Device: Provide EMCS Workstation PC with associated software to allow a complete backup to removable media of the EMCS workstation software. 8. HVAC Emergency Shutdown Switch: A new two- position key -lock switch and indicator light shall be located on the face of a Building Control Unit in the Maintenance Office. Operation of this . _ switch to the "shutdown" position shall cause all HVAC fans under EMCS control to shut down. 9. Fire Alarm Inputs to EMCS System: The EMCS shall control designated HVAC equipment in response to existing input signals from the Fire Alarm System. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300 and 230013. B. Product Data: Submit complete equipment list, including manufacturer's catalog sheet for each item on the equipment list. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Interconnect Drawings: Show all field wiring interconnecting equipment and devices. 2. Wiring Diagrams: a. Show internal wiring of all panels. b. Show general physical arrangement of component devices installed in the panel. c. Provide partial elementary diagrams to show the function of circuits employing switching logic. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Construction Phase Control Schedule: Prior to activation of EMCS, submit schedule indicating time of day and setpoint schedules for all lighting and HVAC. 2. VAV Group Report: Submit sample for review by the engineer and Owner. E. Project Closeout Submittals: 1. Conform to Section 017700. 2. Record Drawings: Submit at time of Store turnover. Record drawings shall update the shop drawings to reflect the actual "as- built" condition. 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: At final acceptance and system turnover, deliver to the General Contractor the required number of bound copies of the O &M Manual, describing the operation, maintenance and servicing requirements of the overall systems and all equipment provided. Provide the following information in separate sections each with tab index: a. Material list. b. Technical literature for all equipment including catalog sheets, calibration, adjustment and operation instructions and installation instructions. c. A list of spare parts recommended for purchase by Owner. d. System description and complete sequence of operation. e. Reduced size (11" x 17 ") copies of record shop drawings. f. Control programs specific to this system. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. EMCS Subcontractor (Trane/Tracer): The EMCS subcontractor shall have an office within a 50 mile radius of the job site, staffed with factory trained engineers fully capable of providing instruction, routine maintenance and emergency maintenance service on all system components B. The EMCS subcontractor shall have a three year experience record in the design and installation of computerized building systems similar in scope and performance to that specified herein, and shall be prepared to provide evidence of this history as condition of acceptance and approval prior to bidding. 255500 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 255500 — INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF HVAC C. The EMCS subcontractor shall be prepared to make a personal presentation of his systems to the Owner of his designated representative prior to award of Contract, should the Owner request it. 1.5 WARRANTY AND SERVICE REQUIREMENTS A. All EMCS devices and installation shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship and material for a period of one year from the date of store opening. All equipment, software and installation found to be defective shall be repaired, replaced, or corrected without expense to the Owner. B. Factory authorized warranty service shall be available within 50 miles of the jobsite. 1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS 2.1 OPERATOR INTERFACE A. Furnish one PC based workstation which shall be able to access all information in the system. The workstation shall reside on the same high speed LAN as the building controllers and shall be able to be custom configured based on the needs of the operator. B. Hardware: The workstation shall consist of the following: 1. Personal Computer. The PC may be either Micro Channel Architecture (MCA), or Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA). The CPU shall be a minimum of an Intel Pentium and operate at a minimum of 333 MHz. A minimum of 32 MB of RAM, one 1.44 MB inch diskette drive, and a 3.2GB hard disk shall be provided. A two button mouse will also be provided. Furnish all required serial, parallel, and LAN communication ports for proper system operation. The PC shall have a minimum of a 15" VGA monitor. Manufacturer to be IBM. 2. Modem: Furnish one auto dial telephone modem and associated cable for communication to the work station. The modem shall transmit at a minimum of 9600 baud, and communicate over voice grade telephone lines. 3. Printer. The work station shall have a Hewlett Packard inkjet printer C. Workstation Software: 1. Multiple Users. The system shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access the system data should be limited only be operator password. Multiple users shall have access to all valid system data. An operator shall be able to log onto any workstation on the system and have access to all valid data. 2. Operating System. Furnish a concurrent multi- tasking operating system. The operating system shall accommodate processes and threads as well as prioritizing applications based on their input output priority level (IOPL). The operating system shall also support the use of other common software applications that operate under DOS or Microsoft Windows. Examples include Lotus 123, Microsoft Excel, Word Perfect, and Paradox. Acceptable operating systems are, Windows NT, Unix and OS /2. 3. System Graphics. The Operator Workstation software shall be graphically oriented. The system shall allow display of up to 10 graphic screens at once for comparison and monitoring of system status. Provide a method for the operator to easily move between graphic displays and change the size and location of graphic displays on the screen. The system graphics shall be able to be modified while on line. An operator with the proper password level shall be able to add, delete, or change dynamic points on a graphic. Dynamic points shall include analog and binary values, dynamic text, static text, and .CUT files. Graphics shall have the ability to show animation by shifting .CUT files based on the status of the point. a. Standard Graphics. Provide graphics for each major piece of equipment in the building. This includes each Chiller, Air Handler, VAV Terminal, Fan Coil, Boiler, and Cooling Tower. These standard graphics shall show all points as specified in the points list. 255500 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 255500 — INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF HVAC b. Custom Graphics. The system shall have custom graphics provided as detailed on the system drawings. Custom graphic files shall be created with the use of a PC Paint package furnished with the system. The PC Paint package shall be a graphically based system that uses the mouse to create and modify graphics that are saved in industry standard formats such as PCX, TIFF, and GEM. The PC Paint package shall also provide the capability of capturing or converting graphics from other programs such as Designer, or Auto Cad. c. Graphics Library. Furnish a complete library of common HVAC equipment such as chillers, boilers, air handlers, VAV terminals, fan coils, and unit ventilators. This library shall also include symbols for other equipment including fans, pumps, valves, piping, and ductwork. The library shall be furnished in a file format compatible with the PC Paint program. 4. Workstation Applications. The workstation shall serve as the primary area of the system for operator interface and off -line storage of system information. The workstation shall also serve as the bridge to other building systems. Provide the following applications at the workstation. a. Automatic System Database Save and Restore. Each workstation shall store on the hard disk a copy of the current database of each building controllers. This database shall be updated whenever a change is made in any panel in the system. The storage of this data shall be automatic and not require operator intervention. In the event of a database loss in a building management panel, the first workstation to detect the loss shall automatically restore the database for that panel. b. Manual Database Save and Restore. A system operator with the proper password clearance shall be able to save the database from any system panel. The operator shall also be able to clear a panel database and manually initiate a download of a specified database to any panel in the system. c. System Configuration. The workstation software shall provide a simple to use graphical method of configuring the system. As elements are located on the site they shall be displayed on a graphical representation of the system. This shall be flexible to allow for _ future system changes or additions. d. On Line Help. Provide a context sensitive on line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall be available through the use of hypertext. e. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to the system with a user name and password in order to view, edit, add or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system operator shall have the ability to set passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the functions accessible to viewing and /or changing each system application, editor, and object (i.e. Operator One can view and change all airside data but only view chiller plant data, operator two can only acknowledge alarms and not view or change system data etc.) Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto logoff time shall be set per operator password. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format in the building management panels. f. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all workstations, printers, modems, LAN connections, building management panels and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator. g. Alarm Processing. Any object in the system shall be configurable to alarm in an out of normal state. The operator shall be able to configure the alarm limits, states, and reactions for each object in the system. 1) Binary Alarms: Each binary object shall be set to alarm based on the operator specified state. Provide the capability to automatically and manually disable alarming. 2) Analog Alarms. Each analog object shall have both high and low alarm limits as well as high and low "early warning" limits. Provide separate sets of limits for both occupied and unoccupied (on /off) conditions. Alarming must be able to be automatically or manually disabled. 255500 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 255500 — INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF HVAC 3) Alarm Reactions. The operator shall be able to determine what action if any are to be taken, by object, during an alarm. Actions shall include logging, printing, starting programs, displaying messages, providing audible annunciation or displaying specific system graphics. Each of these actions shall be configurable by workstation and time of day. The system shall provide 20 levels of alarm priority. An object in alarm that has not been acknowledged within an operator specified time period shall be moved to a higher level of priority and follow the actions for that level. h. Trend Logs. The operator shall be able to define a custom trend log foe any data in the system. This definition shall include intervals of 1, 5, 15, 30, and 60 minutes as well as once a shift (8 hours), once a day, and once a month shall be selectable. All trends shall start based on the hour. Each trend shall accommodate up t0 64 system objects. The system operator, with proper password, shall be able to determine how many samples are stored in each trend. Trend data shall be sampled and stored on the Building Controller panel and be archived on the hard disk. The data shall be able to be viewed and printed from the operator interface software. They shall also be storable in a tab delimited ASCII format for use by other industry standard word processing and spreadsheet packages. i. Event Log. Provide a central point in the system that the operator can use for viewing all system alarms and change of states. Events shall be listed chronologically. An operator with the proper security level may acknowledge and clear alarms. j. Point Status and Control. Provide a method for the operator to view and edit if applicable the status of any object and property in the system. These statuses shall be available by menu on graphics or through custom programs. k. Clock Synchronization. The real time clocks in all building control panels shall be synchronized on command of an operator workstation. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight savings and standard time if applicable. I. Reports and Logs: Provide a reporting package that allows the operator to select, modify, or create reports. Each report shall be definable as to data content, format, interval, and date. Report data shall be archived on the hard drive disk for historical reporting. Provide the ability for the operator to obtain real time logs of designated lists of objects. Reports and logs shall be stored on the PC hard disk in a format that is readily accessible by other standard software applications including spreadsheets and word processing. Reports and logs shall be readily printed to the system printer. 1) Custom Reports: Provide the capability for the operator to easily define any system data into a daily, weekly, monthly, or annual report. These reports shall be time and date stamped and shall contain a report title and the name of the facility. 2) Standard Reports: The following standard system reports shall be provided for this Project. These reports shall be readily customized to the project by the Owner. a) Electrical Meter Report: Provide a monthly report showing the daily electrical consumption and peak electrical demand for each building meter. Provide an annual (12 month) summary report showing the monthly electrical consumption and peak demand for each mete b) Weather Data Report: Provide a monthly report showing the daily minimum, maximum, and average outdoor air temperature and the number of heating and cooling degree days for each day. Provide an annual (12 month) report showing the minimum, maximum, and average outdoor temperature for the month and the number of heating and cooling degree days for the month. 5. Workstation Applications Editors. Each PC workstation shall support editing of all system applications. Provide graphically based editors for each application at the PC workstation. The applications shall be downloaded and executed at one or more of the building management panels. a. Application Specific Controller. Provide a full page editor for each application specific controller. This shall allow the operator to view and change the configuration, name, control parameters and set points for each device. 255500 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 255500 — INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF HVAC b. Scheduling. 1) A complete graphically based editor for the scheduling application shall be provided at each workstation. Provide an easy to use method of selecting the desired schedule and month. This shall consist of a "month at a glance" calendar for each schedule. Exception schedules and holidays should be shown clearly on the calendar in contrasting colors. Selecting a day on the calendar with the mouse should display the schedule for that day. Provide an easy to use method for allowing several related objects to follow a schedule. The start and stop times for each object shall be adjustable off of this master schedule. 2) An operator with proper password level shall be able to modify the schedule. Schedules shall be able to be easily copied between objects and /or dates. _ c. Equipment Coordination. Provide an easy to use method of coordinating equipment operation. This shall provide the proper coordination between HVAC equipment, lighting outputs and set points in the various areas of the building. Optimal start / stop, night setback, economizer, and temperature compensated energy management shall all be coordinated. d. Custom Programming Language. 1) Provide the capability to perform custom applications. The custom programming editor shall reside on each workstation. The operator shall be able to create, edit, and download custom programs at the same time that all other system applications are operating. The system shall be fully operable while custom routines are edited, compiled, and downloaded. 2) The Program editor shall allow for creation, editing, troubleshooting, and simulation of custom programs. The editor shall check for proper programming context, use, spelling and format. The custom programming editor shall also compile the program and be able to upload and download to the building management panel. All custom routines shall be executed at the building management panel. 2.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. The system shall consist of Operator Workstations, Building Management Panels, and Application .. Specific Controllers. All elements of the system shall be designed for standalone operation. Control shall always occur at the lowest level of the system. Communication between the building management panels and workstations shall be over a high speed LAN. All nodes on this LAN shall be peers. The operator shall not have to know the panel identifier or location to view or control an object. - Application Specific Controllers shall be constantly scanned by the building management panels to update point information and alarm information. 1. Performance Standards. The system shall conform to the following performance standards. The system supplier shall demonstrate this performance to the consulting engineer prior to system acceptance. a. Graphic Refresh. The system shall display a graphic with 20 dynamic points with all current data within 8 seconds. b. Object Command. The maximum time between when an operator commands a binary object and the device reacts shall be less then 10 seconds. Analog objects should start to adjust within 10 seconds. c. Object Scan. All objects in the system shall be scanned at least once every 45 seconds. Scans shall include off normal values and operator specified properties. d. Alarm Response Time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm to when it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed 45 seconds. e. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often as once every 5 seconds. The contractor shall be responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control. 255500 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 255500 — INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF HVAC 2.3 NETWORK CONTROLLERS A. General. Provide an adequate number of Building Management Panels to provide the performance specified above. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements. 1. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, stand - alone, microprocessor based System Application Controllers to manage the global strategies described in Application software section. 2. The System Application Controller shall have ample memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. 3. The multi- tasking operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms. 4. Data shall automatically be shared between System Application Controllers when they are networked together. 5. The database and custom programming routines of remote System Application Controllers shall be editable from a single operator station. 6. The System Applications Controllers shall have the capability of being remotely monitored over telephone modem. Additional capabilities shall include automatically dialing out alarms, gathering alarms, reports and logs, programming and downloading databases. 7. The controller shall continually check the status of all processor and memory circuits. If a failure is detected, the controller shall: a. Assume a predetermined failure mode. b. Emit an alarm. c. Display card failure identification. B. Communications. Each Network controller and Operator Workstation shall reside on the peer to peer LAN. This LAN shall be self configuring and shall automatically re- configure as nodes are added or removed. LAN communications shall conform to the standards of IEEE 802.3, 802.4, 80 or ANSI 878.1 and follow the OSI model. LAN communications shall be at a minimum of MBPS. 1. Hard Wired Connections. Provide a coaxial cable between all nodes on the system LAN. C. Serviceability. The network controller should be designed in a modular fashion so that the enclosure may be roughed in prior to the installation of the electronics. Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communications, and alarms. The controller shall have provisions for expansion and future controller architecture's. All wiring connections shall be made to field serviceable terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. D. Memory. The network controller shall maintain all BIOS and programming information in the event of a power loss for at least 7 days. If a battery backup is used, the batteries must be replaced at the end of the warranty period. The system BIOS shall be easily upgradeable from the PC workstation without the need for going out to the panel. System manufacturer shall provide current version software and firmware at the end of the warranty period. 2.4 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS A. Application Specific Controllers shall be stand - alone, microprocessor based Direct Digital Controllers with sufficient memory to handle its operating system, database and programming requirements. B. The Application Specific Controller shall be pre - programmed, tested, and factory mounted on the mechanical equipment to ensure reliability. Where factory mounting is not possible, the controllers shall be factory programmed and tested prior to shipment to the jobsite. The controllers shall be clearly labeled as to controller type, where it is to be installed, and software address (if applicable). The controller shall be fully tested upon installation to ensure that it is properly matched to the equipment it is controlling. C. The controller shall communicate with other devices on the communication network and be fully integrated with the other system components. D. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 1. Controllers used outdoors and /or in wet ambient shall be mounted within waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at - 40 °F to 155 °F. 255500 -7 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 255500 — INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF HVAC 2. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in dust -proof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 32 °F to 120 °F. 2.5 CUSTOM APPLICATION CONTROLLERS A. The Custom Application Controllers shall provide stand -alone control and require no additional system components for complete operation. It shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. B. All programming required for operation shall be memory resident and shall be retained in permanent memory. Battery backup for a minimum of 72 hours is also permissible. C. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. — 1. Controllers used outdoors and /or in wet ambient shall be mounted within waterproof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 °F to 155 °F. 2. Controller used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in dust -proof enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at 32F to 120F. 2.6 INPUT /OUTPUT INTERFACE A. Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through System Application, Custom Application, or Application Specific Controllers. Slave devices are also acceptable. Any critical points requiring immediate reaction shall be tied directly into the controller hosting the control software algorithm for the critical function. B. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of on /off signals from remote devices. The binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of 12MA at 12VDC to be compatible with commonly available control devices. All status points shown on the point list shall be positive proof differential pressure or current sensing binary switches. C. Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low voltage, current, or resistance signals and shall have a minimum resolution of percent of the sensing range. Analog inputs shall be compatible with, and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices. D. Binary outputs shall provide a continuous low voltage signal for on /off control of remote devices. E. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shall provide either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 milliampere signal as required to provide proper control of the output device. Systems that utilize a pulse width modulating output (PWM) shall include a position feedback Al for each output. F. System architecture shall allow for point expansion in one of the following ways: 1. The addition of input/output cards to an existing System Application Controller. 2. A slave controller may be used to expand point capacity. 2.7 SYSTEM APPLICATION CONTROLLER SOFTWARE A. System Security 1. User access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user names. 2. Passwords shall restrict the user to only the objects, applications, and system functions as assigned by the system manager. 3. User logon /logoff attempts shall be recorded. 4. The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging off following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user definable. 255500 -8 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 255500 — INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF HVAC 2.8 SYSTEM SOFTWARE A. Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All software applications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall occur at the operator workstation. 1. Scheduling. Provide the capability to schedule each object or group of objects in the system. Each schedule shall consist of the following: a. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. Each of these schedules should include the capability for start, stop, optimal start, optimal stop, and night economizer. Each schedule may consist of up to 10 events. When a group of objects are scheduled together provide the capability to adjust the start and stop times for each member. b. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate any day of the year as an exception schedule. Exception schedules may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule is executed it will be discarded and replaced by the standard schedule for that day of the week. c. Holiday Schedules. Provide the capability for the operator to define up to special or holiday schedules. These schedules may be placed on the scheduling calendar and will be repeated each year. The operator shall be able to define the length of each holiday period. 2. Optimal Start/Stop. The scheduling application outlined above shall support an optimal start/stop algorithm. This shall calculate the thermal characteristics of a zone and start the equipment prior to occupancy to achieve the desired space temperature at the specified occupancy time. Provide an early start limit in minutes to prevent the system from starting too early. 3. System Coordination. Provide a standard application for the proper coordination of equipment. 4. Alarm Reporting. 5. Trending 6. Diagnostics 7. Power Fail Recovery 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS A. Duct Mounted Control Dampers 1. Duct mounted dampers shall be designated to operate in systems having velocities up to 3,000 FPM with a static pressure differential of 4" WG. The frame shall be minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel roll formed channel. Blades shall be minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel with a maximum width of 8 ". Shafts shall be minimum 1/2" diameter. Maximum damper sections size shall be 48" x 72 ", with larger damper installed in sections with appropriate jack shafting. 2 All multiple blade duct mounted proportional control dampers shall be opposed blade type and all two - position dampers shall be parallel or opposed blade type. 3. Duct mounted dampers shall be minimum leakage type equipped with blade and edge seals. B. Actuators 1. Electronic valve and damper operators shall be positive positioning, spring return. Motors shall be of the low voltage synchronous type and shall be non - overloading at a continuous stall. 2. Actuators are to be factory selected, mounted and tested for proper operation based on unit size, type and torque requirements. C. Control Valves 1. Electronic, positive positioning, spring return, low voltage (24 VAC) actuators are to be properly selected for the valve body and service. 2. Valve bodies are to be three -way mixing, two -way normally open or normally closed to suit application. Bodies 2" and Tess are to be 250 psig bronze, screwed connection, bronze seats, equal percentage plugs, stainless steel stems with Teflon packing. Over 2" bodies are to be 125 psig iron, flanged connection with modified equal percent plug. Valve selection is to be based on minimum 5 psig drop across fully open valve. D. Temperature Sensors: Mamac TE- 205- MB -12. 255500 -9 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 255500 — INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF HVAC PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 OWNER TRAINING A. The EMCS subcontractor shall provide three copies of an operator's manual describing all operating and routine maintenance service procedures to be used with the temperature control and Building Management System supplied. This subcontractor shall instruct the Owner's designated representatives in these procedures during the start-up and test period. The duration of the instruction period shall be no less than eight hours, during normal working hours. 3.2 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE A. Upon completion of the calibration, start up the system and perform all necessary testing and run diagnostic tests to ensure proper operation. EMCS subcontractor shall be responsible for generating all software and entering all database necessary to perform the sequence of control and specified software routines. Perform acceptance test in the presence of the Owner's representative and the Architect's electrical consultant. END OF SECTION • 255500 -10 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260013 — ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: General requirements for all Sections of Division 26. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 — HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING: Mechanical equipment requiring electrical connections. 2. 255500 — INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF HVAC. C. The Drawings, provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL CONTRACT WORK A. Electrical work includes all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for the modification to an existing complete building electrical system, including, but not limited to: 1. Provide all required electrical demolition work to accommodate the building renovation. 2. Relocate, adjust, and modify all existing electrical devices, equipment, branch circuits, and feeders that interfere with the demolition or new construction work. This includes resupporting all existing conduits that require new supporting means due to the renovation work. 3. Modify branch - circuit panels to accommodate the additional branch circuits required for the renovation work. 4. A system of feeders in conduit to new or relocated power panels and branch - circuit panels. 5. All new or modified electrical distribution equipment. 6. Branch - circuit wiring system for motors, receptacles, junction boxes, lighting and control wiring. 7. Wall switches, receptacles, floor boxes, poke thru devices, and other devices as shown on the Drawings. 8. Light fixtures. 9. Installation and final connection of Owner and Contractor furnished light fixtures. 10. Electrical service to mechanical equipment, including the following: a. Line voltage wiring, conduit, and connections from panelboard up to and including final connection to equipment. b. Low voltage control wiring, conduit, and connections from control devices to HVAC equipment. c. Installation and final connection of all EMCS equipment and wiring as defined in Section 255500 and on the electrical and EMCS plans. d. Interconnections to the existing EMCS system as required to control all additional or relocated HVAC equipment. e. Line voltage control wiring, conduit, and connections from control devices to HVAC and Energy Management Systems. f. Magnetic starters for motors and HVAC equipment not equipped with factory installed starters 11. Low voltage conduit system as follows: a. Telecommunications system conduit. Include all conduit indicated on the plans. Include pull strings in all conduits. b. Sound, Security, and Fire Alarm system conduit. Include all conduit indicated on the plans. Include pull strings in all conduits. c. Television and security video system conduit. Include all conduit indicated on the plans. Include pull strings in all conduits. d. Include low voltage plaster rings and pull strings for all data, voice, sound, security, and fire alarm system device unless noted otherwise. 12. Final connections to all equipment supplied by others or under other Divisions. 13. Modifications to the existing emergency power system as required to accommodate the renovation work. 260013 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260013 — ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 14. Interconnections to the energy management control system as required to control new or modified lighting and casework branch circuits. This shall include all investigation and coordination work required to provide proper control and EMCS zoning to accommodate the renovation work. 15. Emergency power system. 16. Wiring and equipment installation, connection and termination of all equipment described in Section 255500. 17. Pilot relays for all magnetic starters and lighting contactors. 18. All related supplementary and miscellaneous appurtenances and devices. 19. The proper disposal of all light fixtures, lamps, and ballasts scheduled for demolition. 20. Providing all temporary electrical connection to casework/cashwraps required to be shifted for floor refinishing work. 21. Removal of all existing floor boxes that are not scheduled for reuse. For floor boxes that contain feed - through conductors, this shall include removing the conductors and box, coupling the remaining conduits, and re- pulling new conductors to the devices that remain in service. 22. Removing all existing device plates in areas that are scheduled for new wall or column finishes. Include re- installing device plates at the new finishes. 23. Coordination of all demolition work with phasing plans to maintain all electrical services to temporary department locations. 24. Electrical Site Review. 1.3 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS A. General: Provide wiring, conduit, switches, and boxes as required to make final connection to all miscellaneous equipment and machinery furnished and set in place under other Sections of these specifications, including but not limited to illuminated signs, casework, refrigerated candy case, and HVAC equipment. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals as specified below, and in accordance with Sections 013300 and 017700 as appropriate. B. Submit complete product data and shop drawings for each system at the same time. C. Product Data: 1. Submit for all products furnished in other Division 26 Sections. 2. Submit in booklet form with data arranged under basic categories; i.e., lighting fixtures, panels, etc. Include a typewritten index with dividers and identifying tabs between sections and references to Section of the Specifications. 3. Provide 6 identical copies of a complete equipment material list with the item or model to be used clearly marked, showing ratings where appropriate for approval and coordination. Indicate substitute items separately. D. Shop Drawings: Submit as required in other Division 26 Sections. E. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit reports on all tests required under this Section. Include copies in Operation and Maintenance Manual. F. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Electrical record drawings. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals for electrical systems. Include the following. a. Copies of all test reports. b. Record of final torque at bolted wire connections. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equipment Supplier Qualifications: All equipment suppliers shall have continuously represented products supplied for a minimum of 3 years, and shall be located within 75 road miles of the site. B. Codes: Comply with requirements of the Code Authorities having jurisdiction. C. Attend building envelope conference specified in Section 013119. 260013 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260013 — ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.6 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING A. Provide temporary power and lighting as specified in Section 015000. 1.7 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING A. As soon as practical, connect power to the HVAC units, elevators, permanent store lighting and cove lighting. B. Mechanical Equipment: Complete final connection and energize all equipment 15 days prior to required time of start-up of equipment, as specified in Section 230013. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades related to electrical work. B. Coordinate electrical work to avoid conflicts with the following prior to commencing installation. Adjust electrical work to avoid conflicts whenever possible. Verify the following before installing work; notify the Architect of all unresolvable conflicts. 1. Locations of ceilings. 2. Door swings. 3. Millwork and millwork details. 4. Windows and other openings. 5. Locations of all wall covering and of wainscots in stock rooms. 6. Locations and extent of all rated walls and enclosures. 7. Transformer locations. 8. Extent of all rated walls and enclosures. 9. Stone and other special finish materials. 10. Display casework. 11. Stock shelving and hang rod locations. 12. Access requirements for HVAC equipment and accessories C. Interference With Other Systems: Placement of elements in ceiling plenums shall be coordinated among the various trades according to the following order of precedence, with the first having highest priority: 1. Light fixtures. 2. Floor outlets. 3. Sprinkler heads. 4. Ductwork. 5. Drainage piping. 6. Other piping, electrical conduit, and low voltage wiring systems. D. Electrical drawings are generally diagrammatic, and complete details of the building which affect the electrical installation are not shown. For additional details, coordinate with the Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing, Sprinkler Fire Protection, and separate Nordstrom casework drawings. 1.9 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Electrical equipment shall be as specified in the other Division 26 Sections. B. All equipment shall be UL labeled unless approved otherwise. C. Each piece of equipment shall be supplied as a complete unit in accordance with the manufacturer's standard specifications and shall include all optional items required for proper installation unless otherwise noted. D. All equipment shall be regularly catalogued items of the manufacturer and shall have been in use for at least 3 years. 260013 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260013 — ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS E. Do not use equipment exceeding the dimensions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to starting electrical work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. C. Upon arrival of new HVAC equipment verify nameplate electrical requirements and notify Architect of any discrepancies between designed electrical services to equipment and equipment nameplate requirements. D. Electrical Site Review: 1. Prior to Bid, visit the project site to verify the following items that may not be shown on the plans, but must be removed, relocated, altered, or modified to accommodate the demolition and new construction work associated with this project: a. Existing electrical equipment and devices. b. Existing branch circuits and electrical feeders. c. Existing telephone service conduit, cabling, and equipment. d. Existing Fire Alarm and Detection System. e. Existing in -floor devices and conduit. 2. Include in Bid Proposal, the costs associated with: a. Removing all existing electrical devices and equipment not scheduled for reuse. b. Relocating, or maintaining service to, existing electrical equipment or devices that must remain operational, and not scheduled for removal. c. Modifying and re- supporting existing branch circuits, feeders, and raceway that must remain in service. d. Removing existing branch circuits, feeders, and raceway not scheduled for reuse. e. Modifying, relocating, and re- supporting existing telecommunications service conduit, cabling, and equipment that must remain operational. f. Removing all existing in -floor devices, and removing the associated conductors back to the point of service. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate and install blockouts in construction as work progresses. Do not interfere with reinforcing steel. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install electrical work as indicated, in accordance with the general requirements specified in this Section, and in accordance with the specific requirements specified in the other Division 26 Sections. B. General Equipment Installation Requirements: 1. Install electrical equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions unless specified otherwise. 2. Maintain minimum equipment clearances indicated. C. Cutting and Patching: 1. Cutting, patching and core drilling required to accomplish the work under this Division shall be performed by the General Contractor, limited in scope to only that which is necessary to accomplish the new work. 2. The cost for all cutting, patching and core drilling done by the General Contractor to accommodate the electrical work shall be bome by the electrical subcontractor. Include a cost allowance in the Electrical Bid. 3. Furnish cutting, patching, equipment curb or base requirements to the General Contractor well in advance of work. 260013 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260013 — ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 4. Cutting of structural members shall be done only with Architect approval. 5. Saw cut or core drill openings in concrete. D. General Requirements for Outlet Locations: 1. Outlet locations shown are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify exact location before installation. 2. Check outlet location with the Architectural, Interior, Plumbing, Mechanical, and Display Casework Drawings, and coordinate with the various other affected trades to assure no conflict exists between the electrical outlets and work of other trades. 3. Where indicated for mounting on columns, all outlets, including telephone, sensor, and data communications boxes, shall be mounted on the centerline or symmetrical about the centerline of the column face. 4. The Owner reserves the right to make reasonable changes in outlet locations without additional expense. E. General Anchorage Requirements: 1. Make no attachments which will impair the integrity of structural members. 2. Do not support work from any acoustical ceiling suspension system, HVAC, plumbing, or sprinkler system components. 3. Comply with Section 014500 requirements for attachment into steel decking. F. General Requirements for Racks, Stands, and Supports: 1. Provide all racks, stands and supports for equipment and work as required. 2. Unless specified or indicated otherwise in other Division 26 Sections, fabricate racks and supports from steel angle or channels cut to fit neatly. Weld or bolt securely into place. 3. Design, attach, and anchor racks, stands and supports to resist vertical and lateral loads required by Code, including seismic. 4. Install racks as close to ceiling structure as possible. Racks that run through upper storage areas shall be run tight to structure to allow for 7' -6" head room on upper level. 5. Verify location of sprinkler piping, ductwork and plumbing piping and fully coordinate installation of light fixtures with other trades prior to installation of racks. G. Firestopping: Specified in Section 078400. H. Replace all fireproofing damaged or removed during the course of electrical work to maintain the fire resistive ratings. I. Provide all blockouts, bucks, inserts, anchors and racks required for electrical work. J. Identification and Labeling: 1. For each panel schedule included in the drawings, equip each of these distribution and branch circuit panel with a typewritten directory accurately indicating rooms and /or equipment being, served; insert in a clear plastic sleeve inside the door. Also provide one photocopy of the as -built Panel Schedule from the drawings folded and inserted behind the typed panel directory. Note all disconnects in switchboard as main disconnect #1, etc., or as to the panel or equipment they serve. Labels shall be installed at least one month before remodel completion. 2. Branch Circuits: Make use of all standard colors on branch circuits. Identify emergency circuits in red throughout. Where groups of different systems junction in a common box, group each cable with its own system and identify, using tags or identification strips. Label cover plates with circuit numbers. 3. Provide tag for each conductor in panels, gutters, wireway, and boxes to identify conductor and circuit number. 4. Label each J box with circuits contained, on the inside face of the J box cover in finished areas and on cover in unfinished areas. 5. 3 -Phase Systems: On all 3 -phase systems, identify each phase at all terminals using code markers. 6. Disconnects and Control Stations: Mark all disconnects and control stations controlling remote equipment to identify the device being controlled. Marking shall be engraved lamacoid with minimum 1/2" white letters on a black background. Write circuit numbers inside the disconnect or control stations noting circuit contained. 260013 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260013 — ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 7. Switchboards and Panels: Identify all switchboards, distribution panels, lighting and power panels, contactors, relays, motor starters, disconnects on main panel boards, etc., with engraved lamacoid nameplates fastened to the equipment with epoxy adhesive. Nameplates shall be 1/8 ", 5 -ply lamacoid with 1/4" white letters on black background, (white letters on a red background for equipment on an emergency circuit). Nameplates shall be visible when equipment door is closed. Information on the label shall include switchboard, panel, etc., designation, voltage and conductor insulation color coding in accordance with NEC 210.4, (d). 8. Contactors and Relay Bases: Provide 3/8" black letters with white background labels to identify each contactor by contactor number and each relay by contactor number served by the relay. 9. At least one month prior to remodel completion fold and insert in the plastic sleeve provided for the panel directory a copy of the As -Built panel schedule for all new and existing panels. Panel schedule shall show the list of contactors associated with each panel. 3.4 CONDUIT CLEANING A. After conduit has been installed, conduit shall, be cleared of debris, moisture, and cleaned. B. Conduit shall be tested for obstructions and flattening by pulling a mandrel of appropriate size through the conduit. C. Cleaning of conduit shall be performed by drawing a brush with stiff bristles and a swab through each conduit. Perform swabbing until conduit is clean and dry. • 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust all voltage taps on transformers for an optimum operating level. B. Adjust all auxiliary systems for optimum performance. C. Within 15 days prior to date of substantial completion, re- torque all bolted wire connections in panels and switchboards, in compliance with applicable NEC requirements. Record date, connection location, and torque applied. D. Adjust all light fixture beam patterns as directed by the Owner. E. Measure building electrical service voltage and report measurement to the Architect. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During the course of construction, and again approximately 3 weeks prior to Substantial Completion, verify the following for proper operation, and conduct tests, as indicated. 1. Check ground system. 2. Check all motors for proper rotation. 3. Test the emergency generator system for code compliance, and Fire Marshall approval. 4. Check all emergency lights, receptacles and power connections for proper operation while on generator power. 5. Ground fault interrupter on the service entrance equipment. 6. GFCI receptacles. 7. Verify transformer secondary voltages. 8. Tests as required by jurisdictional authorities as prerequisite to Certificate of Occupancy. 9. Tests as required under other Division 16 specification Sections. B. Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) — Measure VL -L and VL -N for each phase at the input and output of the installed UPS and submit written test documentation to Architect and ISG Project Manager for: 1. Normal operation. 2. On emergency generator. 3. With service circuit breaker switched off. C. Except as otherwise approved by the Owner, all testing shall be performed outside of normal working hours. Coordinate scheduling of tests with the Owner. D. At project turnover measure and record system voltage (VL -L, VL -N) for all three phases at service entrance and at all new and existing transformer secondaries. Submit record to Engineer. 260013 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260013 — ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 3.7 CLEANUP A. Leave all equipment clean and ready for use. Protect all equipment from damage during construction. Leave in new appearance. All enclosures (i.e., switchgear, electrical panels, disconnects, contactors, etc.) shall be vacuumed to remove all dust and debris. Wipe faces of all panels, contactors, etc., so they are free of dirt and touch up paint where marred. Equipment shall be protected during construction from water, dust and debris. Equipment not protected shall, be replaced at Electrical Contractor's expense. B. Remove labels, paint, plaster, dirt, etc., from the fixtures, equipment and piping. 3.8 SPECIAL STORE OPENING SERVICES • • A. Provide services of the electrical job foreman at the site, full -time, for the party prior to store reopening day, and for the first three days of public store operation to assure continuous operation of all electrical equipment. Foreman's time shall be based on 16 ' hours per day on the day of the party and 12 hours per day on the three days following. END OF SECTION • • • • • • • • • 260013 -7 07/21/08 • • NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Requirements for installation of wiring and conduit systems. B. Related Sections: 1. 012200 — UNIT PRICES: Unit prices for revised quantities of selected light fi xtures. 2. 012300 — ALTERNATES: Refer to Section 012300 for alternate involving work of this section. 3. 024119 — Selective Structure Demolition. 4. 255500 — INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF HVAC. 5. 260013 — ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS. 6. 281600 — INTRUSION DETECTION. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. E. SUBMITTALS F. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300, 017700 and 260013 as applicable. G. Submit schedule of panel groups. Submit within 30 days after electrical subcontract award. H. Transformer Attachment Details: Submit proposed details and locations for support and bracing of all transformers. Details shall bear designing engineer's stamp. I. Feeder Routing: Submit shop drawings showing the locations of all horizontal feeder pathways, all feeder pulling boxes, and all floor penetrations. J. Closeout Submittals: 1. Submit documentation that hose testing has been performed on all conduit penetrations through waterproof membranes and exterior building envelope. Include location, time, and date of test, results, and remedies, as appropriate. 2. Submit thermographic testing report. 3. Submit "As -Built Drawings" including Electrical Plans, Single Line, Power Riser, and Panels Schedules within 30 days of acceptance. Indicate all field modifications and actual existing conditions discovered during construction. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Rated Systems: Maintain the integrity of fireproofing materials and systems and of rated partitions and floors at all electrical penetrations. B. Thermographic Testing Survey: 1. Performed only by one of the following: a. Colbert Infrared Services, 929 19 Avenue Seattle, WA 98122 (Telephone 206/568 -4431; 1- 800/800 -8178; or fredc @thermaltrend.com); contact Fred Colbert. b. Snell Thermal Inspections, 288 East Plaza, Suite B199 Eagle, ID 83616 (Telephone 208- 863 -8381; FAX 208/938- 9692); contact Fred Bartel. C. Seismic Design: 1 Provide anchorage and bracing of all electrical components to meet the seismic requirements. Seismic bracing and anchorage shall be subject to Owner paid inspections. 2. Transformer anchorage shall be designed by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the state where the project is located. 3. Correct all bracing and anchorage systems determined to be non - compliant by the Owner's Structural Engineer, or furnish structural calculations verifying compliance from a Contractor paid structural engineer licensed to practice in the state where the project is located. 260500 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with work of DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION and other applicable waterproofing installation for sealing around subgrade conduit penetrations. 1.4 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT, RACEWAY, AND WIREWAY A. Conduit Materials: 1. Rigid Steel: Standard weight rigid steel conduit; mild steel pipe; hot - dipped galvanized or sherardized. Finish inside and outside of the conduit with a protective coating. Couplings, elbows, bends, etc., shall be subject to the same requirements as for rigid steel conduit. 2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Cold- rolled steel tubing with a zinc - coating on the outside and a protective enamel coating on the inside; ETP or approved. Fittings shall meet the following requirements: a. Same finish and materials as EMT. b. Approved by the Underwriter's Laboratories. c. Listed as concrete -tight with insulated throat. d. Compression -ring, rain -tight and concrete - tight. e. EMT set screw type connectors shall be all steel one -piece concrete tight with insulated throat. 3. Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit: Galvanized steel with continuous copper content or separate copper conductor and extruded polyvinyl covering and with water -tight connectors. 4. Flexible Conduit: Galvanized steel with continuous copper content or separate copper conductor. Fittings screw wedge type. 5. Manufactured Flexible Wiring System: (Furnished by Owner installed as work of this Section.) a. Manufacturer: Lightolier /Genlyte (Contact Rob Eiring; 206/527- 9707). b. Single circuit, 2 -wire with ground or two circuit, 3 -wire with ground flexible wiring system consisting of distribution box, cables, lighting cables, extender cables with all components required for a complete and operating system. Cables shall be MC cable containing #12 AWG solid copper conductors with 90 °C insulation. The flexible wiring system shall be rated 120 volt or 277 volt as indicated on the Drawings. c. All components shall be UL listed. 6. Rigid PVC Conduit: High impact polyvinyl chloride, Schedule 40, meeting minimum requirements of NEC. Fittings PVC solvent weld type. B. Surface Raceway: Include all couplings, elbows, and boxes. Size to accommodate required number of conductors. Wiremold, or approved equal. C. Wireway: 1. NEMA I lay -in wireway of size indicated. 2. Arrange wireway cover for removal, hinging and locking closed by captive type fasteners. 3. Provide with necessary fittings, with or without knock -outs, with solid cover where passing through partitions. 4. PVC wireway may be used for limited voltage systems where not installed in environmental air plenums. 2.2 BOXES A. Lighting Outlet Boxes: 1. Hot - dipped galvanized, 4 inch octagon. 2. Furnish with extension and plaster rings for conditions. 3. Furnish with proper depth for partition thickness. 4. Furnish with proper fittings to support and attach lighting fixtures. 260500 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 5. At incandescent fixtures and other ceiling mounted devices in lay -in acoustical tile ceilings, furnish bar hangers for anchorage to ceiling construction members which will not interfere with tile removal. B. Switch and Receptacle Boxes for Concealed Wiring: Hot - dipped galvanized; 4 inches square and a minimum depth of 1 -1/2" unless otherwise indicated; furnish bar hangers for metal stud partitions; furnish with suitable extensions and plaster rings. C. Boxes for 277 Volt Switches on Opposite Phases: Gang- switch type with barriers between switches. D. Pull and Junction Boxes: Code -sized galvanized steel boxes provided with plain blank removable covers held in place with screws unless otherwise indicated. E. Conduit Bodies: Cadmium- plated conduit fittings, cast ferrous metal type; obround series, with sharp clean threads. 2.3 WIRE AND CABLE A. Wire and Cable for 600 Volts and Below: Single conductor, soft drawn copper with 600 volt insulation, UL listed. 1. For Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type THHN, THWN, XHHW OR XHHN. 2. Size: Wire size #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Wire size #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid. Use no wire smaller than #12 AWG, except as follows: a. Smaller size wire may be used only where specifically indicated. b. No. 14 AWG may be used for pilot control and signal circuits. 3. Size conductors to limit voltage drop to NEC requirements. B. Color Coding: Color code all conductors in accord with NEC as follows (unless AHJ requires differently): 1. Color code all wiring. 2. Use the following colors in lighting and power wiring: 120/208 Volt 277/480 Volt Phase A Black Brown Phase B Red Orange Phase C Blue Yellow Neutrals White Gray 3. Color coding of ends only will be acceptable for feeder phase and neutral conductors. C. Low Voltage Cable: Refer to individual Sections for cable specifications and color of outer jacket. 2.4 WIRING DEVICES A. Each type of wiring device shall be the product of a single manufacturer and shall be similar in appearance. B. Receptacles and switches shall be of specified colors. Project shall contain devices only as scheduled below. C. Receptacles shall utilize solid brass straps. Device Type Rating Hubbell No. Leviton No. Cooper No. General Duplex 20A/125V HBL 5352 5362 5362 GFI Duplex (5 ma trip) 20A/125V HBL GF5362 6898HG7899 VGF20 Tamperproof Duplex 20A/125V HBL 8300SG TR8300 8300SGIA Isolated Ground Duplex 20A/125V HBL IG5362 8300IG IG5362 Isolated Ground Single 20A/125V HBL IG5361 8310 IG IG5361 Switch — SPST 20A/120 -277V CS1221 1221 -2 2221 AC 260500 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Device Type Rating Hubbell No. Leviton No. Cooper No. Switch — three way 20A/120 -277V CS1223 1223 -2 2223 AC Switch — four way 20N120 -277V CS1224 1224 -2 2224 AC Switch — keyed 20A/120 -277V HBL 1221 + 1222 -2L 2221 -L AC KEY Switch — momentary 20A/120 -277V HBL 1557 1257 1995 contact AC Switch — w /pilot light on 20A/120 -277V HBL 1221 PL 1221 -PLR (red)120V 2221 -PL w /load on with pilot light AC (red) 1201221 - 7PLR(red)277V Switch — with lighted 20A/120 -277V HBL 12211L 1221 -PLC (clear)120V 2221LTV toggle AC (clear) 1221- 7PLC(clear)277V D. Coverplates: 1. Interior (Typical): Specification Commercial grade thermoplastic (not nylon thermoset), unless specified otherwise; colors as scheduled, where not scheduled, furnish ivory color against light finishes, dark brown against dark brown finishes. 2. Exterior: Weather resistant; die -cast zinc, with self closing cover; non - corroding stainless steel springs and rubber gasket; bronze color. Cover shall provide weatherproof protection when receptacle is in use per NEC 410 -57. E. Color Schedule: 1. Provide device and coverplate colors in accordance with the "Electrical device and Coverplate Schedule" in the Architectural Schedules section of the Project Manual. 2. Where colors are not specified provide ivory device /ivory coverplate against Tight finishes; brown device /brown coverplate against dark finishes. 3. Exposed Junction Boxes. Blank ivory coverplate. 4. Primed or Fire Taped Walls: Ivory device /ivory coverplate. 5. Espresso Storage: Ivory device /ivory coverplate. 6. Display Windows: Black device /black coverplate. 7. Millwork/Casework: Brown device /brown coverplate on dark stained items; ivory device /ivory coverplate on Tight stained items. 8. I.G. Receptacles: Orange device /orange coverplate. 9. Sales floor ceilings: White device and white coverplate. 10. Mirrored Columns: Ivory device /chrome coverplate. F. 208V, 1 and 3 phase Receptacles: NEMA number as noted on drawings. G. Flush Floor Box - With Receptacle: Walker 880 Flush Floor Box with duplex receptacle. Provide 887B cast iron box at slab -on -grade and 885B stamped steel box at above - grade. Provide 895TC carpet flange in carpeted areas and 895T flush tile flange in stone or tile floors. H. Flush Two -Gang Floor Box : Walker 880CM2 Omnibox, shallow cast iron box: 1. Piano: with 827C tile flange, duplex receptacle, 828R brass duplex coverplate and 828GFITC brass coverplate for microphone. 2. Personal Touch: With 827B carpet flange, duplex receptacle, 828R brass duplex coverplate and 828GFITC brass coverplate for telecommunications devices. Device bezel furnished under 270000. I. Flush Three -Gang Floor Box: Walker 880CM3 Omnibox, shallow cast iron box with 837C tile flange, 829CK -1 coverplate for telecommunications and (2) 829CK -3/4 coverplates for power and other. Provide conduit connectors for cashwrap feeds. J. Flush Floor Box — Single Service: Walker 881 Ratchet -Pro PVC Flush Floor Box with 896CK -3/4 brass carpet coverplate flange for power or low voltage cable feed. K. Flush Floor Box — Dual Service: Walker 881 Ratchet -Pro PVC divided flush floor box with 897CFFTCBS brass furniture feed coverplate for power and low voltage cable feed. 5" minimum concrete pour required at box. 260500 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL L. Poke - Through Device - Concealed Below Cashwraps or Casework: Walker RC7AFFTCBK furniture- feed black poke thru assembly with power and low voltage cable conduit adapters. M. Poke - Through Device — with Receptacles and Telecommunications Devices: Walker RC7ATJTCBS brass colored poke thru assembly with prewired 20 A duplex receptacle and two Ortronics TracJack mounting bezels. N. Wiremold: 1. V2400 plugmold multi outlet system with NEMA 5 -20R receptacles as indicated on the Drawings. Install as noted on the Drawings with all fittings, end caps, entrance plates, and other accessories as required for a complete installation. Color: Ivory with Ivory devices. In display windows, have painted flat black with black devices. O. Switches for Overhead Coiling Doors: Furnished under Section 083323. P. Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensor: Watt Stopper Inc. #W -500A, W -1000A or W -2000A with power and slave packs as indicated on the Drawings. Q. Dimmer Switch: 1. Incandescent: Lightolier Momentum MP1000 -X series. Color to match other devices. 2. Fluorescent: Leviton IPX12 -7AW wallbox dimmer. Color to match other devices. R. Timer Switches: 1. Electronic Timer Switch — Leviton 6124H 24 hour electronic programmable. Color to match other devices. 2. Rotary Timer Switch — Marktime 0 — 12 hour as noted on drawings. 2.5 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS A. General: 1. Manufacturer: Match Existing. All electrical distribution equipment shall be by a single manufacturer. 2. Provide distribution equipment as noted on drawings and described herein. Panels shall be flush or surface mounted as noted on drawings. 3. Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosure for interior equipment and NEMA Type 3R enclosure for exterior equipment. Refer to plans for locations. 4. Panels shall contain all circuits noted on drawings. Bussing shall be as shown on drawings. 5. Each branch circuit panel shall have a door and lock, keyed alike. 6. Panels shall be braced to wall and fastened to floor. 7. New switchboards and panelboards shall be configured to fit space shown on the Drawings. 8. Circuit breakers serving air conditioning, FIT units, heating and refrigeration equipment shall be UL listed as HACR type. B. Main Switchboard: 1. Existing to remain. C. Distribution Switchboard: 1. Existing to remain. D. Distribution, Lighting and Power Panels: Distribution, lighting and power panels shall be equal to GE, Type AE for 480/277VAC SBO for 208/120VAC distribution and Type AQ for 208/120 VAC or approved equal. Bracing of bussing is shown on one -line diagram. Panels shall be installed in freestanding switchboard enclosures, surface mounted or recess mounted as, indicated in the drawings. Each panel shall have a hinged door, with locks keyed alike. E. Free Standing Group Mounted Panels: 1. Provide new or modifications to the panelboards as indicated on the drawings and as specified. 2. The panelboards shall be designed, built and tested in accordance with applicable portion of the latest editions of NEMA PB -2 and Underwriters Laboratories No. UL 891 and the latest requirements of the NEC. Sections and devices shall be UL- listed and labeled. 3. Control wiring, necessary to fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the panelboard shall be furnished when required. Control wire leaving the panelboard shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips. 260500 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 4. Cable connectors shall be tin - plated aluminum and UL listed for copper cables. The connectors shall be mechanical type lugs, for short circuit ratings of 100,000A or less. Short circuit ratings above 100,000 shall have compression lug. 5. Panelboard current ratings including devices shall be based upon operation in a 25 °C room ambient. 6. Panels mounted in group mounted panels shall be equal to GE type AE for 480/277 VAC bolt on breakers and type AQ or SBO 240 VAC bolt on 3 phase 4W. 7. Provide physical barrier between all emergency and non - emergency power sections. 8. Provide index label holder permanently attached to the inside face of the panel cover. Index shall be 1,3,5,2,4,6 format, and shall note what each circuit serves. F. Overcurrent Protective Devices: 1. Main Service Disconnects: a. For all new service disconnects provide factory assembled, fully rated insulated case circuit breakers for individual mounting. See drawings for size, voltage characteristics and interrupting rating. b. Provide ground fault protection meeting UL requirements for service on ground fault systems. Ground fault relays shall have adjustable sensitivity from 200 to 1200 amps and adjustable time delay. Provide a clear plastic cover over GFP device with a lead wire seal for tamper protection. Seal cover after final setting of device at turnover. Provide monitor with lamp to indicate relay operation. Provide test and retest control switches. c. Provide phase failure protection (PFP) by means of a relays to trip overcurrent protective device upon the loss of one phase, phase reversal or phase unbalance, after an adjustable time delay. PFP device shall not trip breaker upon total loss of all three phases. Provide indicator lights external to the unit to confirm relay control power is energized. 2. Feeder and Branch Circuit Breakers: a. Provide factory- assembled molded case circuit breakers for switchboards, panelboards; and for individual mounting. Provide breakers of amperage, voltage and RMS interrupting rating shown, with permanent thermal trip and adjustable instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. b. Construct with overcenter, trip -free, toggle type operating mechanisms with quick -made, quick -break action and positive handle indication. c. Construct breakers for mounting and operation in any physical position and in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. d. Provide with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AUCU rated, of proper size to accommodate conductors specified. 3. Disconnect Switches: Disconnect switches shall be heavy duty, horsepower rated safety switches, fused or nonfused, in NEMA -1 enclosures or 3R, enclosures, rated at 250 volts or 600 volts. Refer to plans for indication of fused or nonfused switches. Furnish rain tight where noted. 4. Fuses: Where new fuses are required they shall be provided as follows: Fuses in main switchboard main section 601 amperes and larger shall be Class L, Bussman type KRP -C -SP Low Peak. Fuses 600 amperes and smaller shall be Class RK1, Bussman "Low Peak" dual element. Fuses shall be of uniform type and color throughout. G. Interrupting Rating: Switches, panelboards, circuit breakers and fusible switches shall be fully rated and labeled per NEC 240 -83. The rated system shall be UL recognized and components shall be marked with the interrupting rating by the manufacturer. Each new or relocated panel shall be rated the same or higher than the upstream serving panel's interrupting rating. H. Boxes: Boxes shall be made of Code gage steel heavily galvanized and painted, with a hinged door or screwed coverplate. I. Provide labeling for panelboards as specified in Section 260013 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS. 2.6 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS A. Manufacturer: Match Existing. All electrical distribution equipment shall be by a single manufacturer. B. Description: 1. Air cooled, 3 -coil, two winding type 480- 208/120V wye, 60 cycle or as indicated. 260500 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 2. KVA rating as indicated. 3. Rated sound level equal to or below NEMA maximums. 4. 3 Phase Transformers(30 KVA and Above): a. Four 2 -1/2% FCBN taps and 2 above b. Suitable for indoor service. c. Arranged for wall mounting or suspension from structure as indicated. d. Insulation: Class H with average temperature rise not exceeding 150 °C based on 40 °C ambient at full load. 5. 3 Phase Transformers (below 30 KVA): Class B, F, or H insulation and two 5% FCBN taps. 6. Impedance of transformer shall meet NEMA standard. 2.7 MOTOR STARTERS A. Manufacturer: Same as switchgear. B. Manual Motor Starters: Single phase fractional horsepower, 1 HP maximum NEMA Type I general purpose enclosure, GE CR 101 Series or equal. C. Magnetic Motor Starters: 1. Full voltage, non - reversing, across - the -line type rated in compliance with NEMA sizes and horsepower ratings. 2. Starters size 5 and smaller shall have double break silver alloy contracts. Starters size 6 and larger shall employ single break contacts. • 3. Each starter shall include "HAND- OFF - AUTO" selector switch, 120 volt coil, 100 VA control transformer and spare auxiliary interlock contacts, GE CR 306 and CR 386 Series or equal. 4. Starters shall include overload relay with 3 overload heaters for 3 phase motors. Overload heaters shall be sized per NEC and based on motor requirements indicated on motor nameplate. 2.8 REMOTE CONTROL LIGHTING CONTACTOR A. Lighting contactors: Contactors shall be Cutler- Hammer A202 magnetically latched. Provide an IDEC RH1B- U -AC24V control pilot relay as described on the Drawings and connect to EMCS. 1. 30 AMP, 4 pole: Cutler- Hammer A202K1 DAM 2. 30 AMP, 8 pole: Cutler- Hammer A202K1 GAM 3. 30 AMP, 12 pole: Cutler - Hammer A202K1 KAM 4. 300 AMP, 3 pole: Cutler- Hammer A202K5CAM B. Install contactors in existing contactor panels. If no contactor panel exist or panels are full, provide a new panel to house the additional contactors for that panel group. Locate contactor panel in same vicinity as panel group. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Conduit Support Components: 1. Inserts shall be Grinnell Fig. 282, Code Devices, Inc., No. 1 or equal. 2. Beam Clamps: Suitable for structural members and conditions. 3. Rods: Galvanized steel or cadmium - plated threaded rods; 1/4" diameter minimum. 4. Trapeze Hangers: Steel City No. B -900, Unistrut No. P -1000, or equal. B. Hanger Fasteners: 1. Provide inserts or fasteners to attach hangers to structure. 2. Attachment to metal roof deck may be by means of pre - punched tabs, pre - punched holes or with screws in sides of ribs or toggle bolts in bottom of ribs. 3. Conform to general anchorage requirements specified in Section 260013. 4. Do not use concrete nails in masonry walls. 5. Obtain approval from Structural Engineer for the use of drilled or explosive driven inserts in precast - prestressed concrete construction. Install inserts as recommended by Structural Engineer. C. Sleeves: Rigid steel or styrene plastic conduit sized to accommodate work passing through. Do not use plastic sleeves in fire rated walls or plenum spaces. D. Firestopping: As specified in Section 078400. 260500 -7 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL E. Pull -in Lubricant: Powdered soapstone or Minerallac Pull -In Compound or approved; do not use cable pulling lubricant compound containing petroleum or other products which may deteriorate insulation. F. Insulating Tape: Approved electrical plastic or self- curing laminated rubber type. G. Bridle Rings: Caddy #4BRT #32 /RC -200 or equal. Sized as needed to support required number of cables in pathway. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Place inserts in adjacent construction as necessary to support electrical work. Set flush with surface. Install a reinforcing rod through the opening provided in the concrete inserts. B. Place sleeves and blockouts in adjacent construction as necessary to receive electrical work. 3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Install metallic conduit system for the connection of all outlet boxes, disconnects, junction boxes, panelboards, cabinets, etc., as indicated on the drawings. B. Routing: Coordinate space and installation requirements for electrical work indicated diagramatically on the drawings. Follow routing shown for lines as closely as practicable. Make runs parallel with the lines of the building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize access for other installation and repairs. C. Conduit subjected to rough usage shall be removed from the premises upon notice. D. Conduit shall be kept dry and free of water or debris with approved pipe plugs or caps. Care shall be given that plugs or caps are installed before pouring of concrete. Thoroughly clean and dry out conduits prior to conductor installation. E. In suspended ceilings support conduit runs from structure, not ceiling supports system. Keep minimum 12" above suspended ceiling. F. Conduits, where they enter panelboards, pull boxes, or outlet boxes, shall be secured in place by galvanized locknuts and bushings; one locknut outside and one locknut inside of box with bushing on conduit end. Tighten locknuts against the box without deforming the box. All bushings shall be of the insulation type. Bushings shall have the insulating material permanently fastened to the fittings. G. All conduit stubs shall have bushed ends. H. Conduit run through STOCK areas shall be run tight to structure to allow for minimum 7' -6" headroom. I. Conduit Applications: 1. Rigid galvanized steel conduit may be used in all locations. Where conduit is in contact with ground, vapor barrier or corrosive environment provide galvanized, PVC coated conduit with hot - dipped threads meeting NEMA RN.1 -1989 Standard 2.1. OCAL, Inc. Blue Conduit. 2. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) may be used in all above grade, dry and non - corrosive environments where not exposed to hard abuse. See section 260013 for restrictions. 3. PVC Conduit may be used underground, below slab on grade or in concrete slabs. Where used in concrete, transition to RGS or EMT prior to exit. Where used for telecommunications cabling use large radius bends. 4. Flexible Conduit: a. Flexible conduit shall be used for connection of motor terminal boxes to conduit stubs, connection of control equipment requiring piping (such as solenoid valves, pressure controls, aquastats, pneumatic - electric relays, etc.), connection of vibration dampened transformers, and connection of lighting fixtures and moveable equipment to adjacent junction boxes, and sprinkler tamper & flow switches. b. Where motors are mounted on sliding bases, the flexible connection shall be of sufficient (minimum 12 ") length to allow full travel of motor or base. c. Liquid - Tight flexible conduit shall be used in wet locations. 5. MC Cable — See Section 260583. 260500 -8 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL J. Conduit Installed in Above Grade Composite Floor Slabs: 1. Conduit shall be 3/4" diameter. 2. Conduit installed in floor slabs shall not be run in flutes of steel deck. 3. Conduit run parallel to flutes shall be run a minimum of 3 flutes from girder lines and sheer studs. 4. One and one -half inches concrete cover shall be maintained over conduit installed in slabs. 5. Conduit Crossovers: a. Locate a minimum of 2' -0" from the nearest beam. b. Bend conduits and space crossovers as necessary to maintain top elevation of each conduit layer no more than 2" above top of metal deck. 6. Space parallel runs minimum 2" O.C. K. Penetrations Through Other Construction: 1. Penetrations Through Exterior Envelope: a. Where conduits pass through exterior concrete walls, ceilings, or footings below grade, make the entrance watertight by providing pipe sleeves in the concrete with 1/2" minimum clearance around the conduit; caulk with oakum and sealant, or by means of a conduit entrance seal; O.Z. Type FSK or equal. b. Where core drilling and sleeve or conduit installation is performed after installation of below grade waterproof membrane. Seal joints to maintain integrity of watertight envelope, in accordance with the requirements of the membrane manufacturer. c. Prior to concealment, hose test all conduit penetrations through exterior building envelope, above and below grade. Verify seal is free from water penetration. 2. Provide seals in conduit passing through refrigeration equipment per NEC. 3. Conduits that penetrate rated wall or floor assemblies shall be fire stopped to maintain the rating of the assembly. Firestopping is specified in Section 078400. 4. With the exception of conduit which penetrates roofing within 24 inches of the equipment to which it is connected, all conduit at roof level shall be run below the deck. Do not embed in roof, insulation system. L. Bending: Make field bends with standard tools and equipment manufactured especially for this purpose. M. Pull Wire: Install a pull wire in all empty conduits. N. Running Threads: 1. Use of running threads is prohibited, and where some such device is necessary, use split coupling, O.Z. Type SP Erickson coupling or equal. 2. Where watertight conduit installation is required, use watertight conduit unions. O. Separation: Maintain a minimum separation of 6" between conduits and hot water lines. P. Stubs: Locate accurately. Note these by dimension on record drawings. Q. Supports: 1. Provide independent support for all conduit. 2. In both horizontal and vertical conduit runs, place supports at maximum 10' intervals, within 3' of a bend, and at every outlet or junction box. 3. Do not use perforated strap hangers to support conduit. 4. Limit load on a single hanger to 25 pounds maximum. 5. Multiple Runs: a. Where a number of conduits are to be run exposed and parallel with each other, group conduits and support by trapeze hangers. b. Fasten hanger rods to structural members with suitable beam clamps or to overhead structural floor deck with concrete inserts. Comply with Section 014500 requirements for attachment to composite metal deck. c. Clamp each conduit to the trapeze hanger with conduit clamps. 6. Single Runs: a. Where conduits are run individually, support by approved pipe straps, secured by means of toggle bolts on hollow masonry; lead expansion shields and screws or standard preset load inserts in concrete or solid masonry; machine screws or bolts on metal surface; and wood screws or sheet metal screws on wood construction. 260500 -9 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL b. Conduits installed exposed on the surface in damp locations or in refrigeration areas shall be provided with clamp backs under each conduit clamp to prevent accumulation of moisture around the conduits. R. Mechanical Equipment: Where conduit penetrates the electrical compartments of mechanical equipment, seal around conductors in conduit. 3.3 CONDUCTORS A. Pulling -In: 1. Thoroughly blow -out or vacuum out and clean each conduit run and floor box before pulling -in conductors. Install no wires or cables until incomplete construction which might damage insulation has been completed. 2. Conduit runs and floor boxes shall be free of water and debris. 3. Use no mechanical means of pulling unless approved otherwise. 4. Lead end lengths in cabinets or pull and outlet boxes shall be of sufficient length to maintain proper spacing of connections or splicing. 5. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, pull box or cabinet. Splices will not be permitted in any panel or disconnect. 6. After conductors have been installed, provide protection to ensure that conduit and boxes remain free of water and debris. B. Splices: 1. Splices shall join conductors with an electrically and mechanically secure connection. 2. Splices and taps for smaller than #6 AWG wire shall be made with insulated conical spring -type connectors. 3. Splices and taps for #6 AWG wire and larger shall be made with compression connectors with prestretched insulation to equal insulation of wire being used. 4. Splices will not be permitted in any panel or disconnect. C. Insulating Tape: Apply tightly with a minimum of 3 half - lapped layers. D. Conductors in Panels: Neatly group and form conductors in panels, switchgear, and terminal cabinets in a manner to fan into terminals with regular spacing by using tie wraps. E. Label conductors as specified in Section 260013. 3.4 MANUFACTURED FLEXIBLE WIRING SYSTEMS A. Manufactured flexible wiring systems shall be installed in compliance with NEC 604. B. Manufactured flexible wiring systems shall be supported independently from structure in compliance with NEC 350-4. Do not support from ceiling support wires and do not interfere with acoustical ceiling tile removal. 3.5 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING A. Drawings: Drawings accompanying specifications indicate general direction and routes of branch circuit home runs. Continue all home runs to panel as though routes were completely indicated. Install branch circuit wiring in home runs exactly as shown on Drawings. Conduit shall be run concealed wherever possible. Verify location of all exposed conduit with Architect before installation. Homeruns shall not be combined. B. Branch Circuit Wiring: Install branch Circuit wiring with identical (white) neutrals and color -coded phase wires; splice with pressure type connections. Tape joints with covering or rubber tape equal in thickness to conductor insulation followed by outer covering friction tape of vinyl tape equal to Scotch #33. C. Electrical Boxes: 1. Set all outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes and device boxes flush with finish surface and straight and true; plates and covers true and plumb, touching the surrounding surface on all sides. 2. Electrical boxes above ceiling shall be accessible when ceiling is removed. 3. Device boxes in walls to be two gang with single gang mud ring to match thickness of GWB. 260500 -10 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 4. Securely fasten electrical boxes independent of structure, accurately aligned with flush surfaces of walls and ceilings, with conduits entering boxes at right angles. Secure to metal studs with 4 sheet metal screws. 5. Device boxes in GFRG columns shall be securely supported from the floor and /or structural column and installed so that faceplate will be flush against GFRG surface. D. Wire Sizing: Use no wire smaller than #12 AWG for lighting or power wiring, except where specifically indicated on the Drawings. E. Wire Size - Size homerun conductors per the following table: Length of run to panel Wire size Circuit size 0' to 100' #12 AWG 20 amp 100' to 150' #10 AWG 20 amp Greater than 150' #8 AWG 20 amp 3.6 JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A. Install pull and junction boxes as shown, or as necessary to facilitate pulling of wire and to limit the number of bends to meet code requirements. Boxes located in public spaces shall be subject to review by the Architect. B. Boxes shall be independently supported from structure and be permanently accessible. Install to face of finished surface when recessed. C. Boxes of less than 100 cu. in. capacity shall comply with requirements for outlet boxes; larger boxes shall comply with requirements for cabinets, except covers may be the same metal thickness as the box, secured by not less than four machine screws. D. Furnish cast metal boxes with gasketed covers in damp or exposed locations and as otherwise shown. E. Secure conduits to boxes with single locknut and a bushing inside the J box, or by a minimum of five threads in conduit hubs. F. The drawings do not necessarily show every pull or junction box required. The Contractor is permitted to add, at his expense, boxes deemed desirable, subject to approval of location by the Architect. G. Paint boxes for emergency lighting red in color. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF DEVICES A. Provide all wiring devices as indicated on the drawings, described herein, or as necessary for a complete job. B. Outlets: Flush mount outlets, straight and plumb, heights as fellows unless indicated etherwice -on the drawings. Dimensions are to centerline of device. 1. Switches: 48 inches above floor or just above wainscot. Verify height of wainscot before installing switches. 2. Receptacles and Telephone Outlets: 18 inches above floor, unless over equipment or counters, or as otherwise indicated. Where shown on mirrored columns, install outlet box to the face of the mirror so the yoke of device does not press against the mirror. 3. Refer to Electrical Drawings for note regarding mounting receptacles in wood or carpet base. 4. Install receptacles with ground slot facing up. C. Occupancy Sensors: Install at same height as light fixtures. Adjust sensitivity and time delay as directed by Owner. 3.8 SERVICE INSTALLATION A. Refer to notes and floor plans for additional requirements and details. 260500 -11 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 3.9 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. General: 1. Bond electrical services, electrical systems and other metallic systems as required by code. 2. Grounding electrode conductors shall be stranded copper and shall be protected against physical damage. 3. Provide an equipment grounding conductor in every raceway. Provide copper conductors in all branch circuit raceways. Provide copper or aluminum conductors in feeder raceways to match phase conductor material. Run grounding conductor inside same raceway as circuit conductors. 4. Provide communication systems service grounding to building steel in accordance with NEC 800. 3.10 TRANSFORMER INSTALLATION A. Provide brackets, platforms, supports, rods and angle iron for transformer mounting. Comply with seismic requirements specified in Section 260013. See 260500 "Submittals". B. Maintain clearances above panel groups per NEC. C. No floor mounting of transformers is permitted. D. Vibration Isolation: 1. Provide rubber -in -sheer vibration dampeners and integral vibration dampeners for all transformers. 2. Use flexible steel conduit for external wiring connections. 3.11 ABANDONED CABLE A. Contractor shall be responsible for the demolition, removal and disposal of all existing abandoned conduit and cabling and infrastructure throughout the areas of construction per NEC 2002 Article 800 and as identified on the contract drawings. Abandoned cable shall be defined as any conduit and cabling that is not terminated at both ends at a connector or other equipment and is not identified for future use with a tag. 3.12 PRE -BID SURVEY A. Prior to BID, this contractor shall allow time for, and participate in, an on -site survey of existing conditions in order to understand the scope of work for demolition of abandoned cable. 3.13 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE INSTALLATION A. Open Cable Support installation: 1. This contractor provides all supports for cables specified in this section. 2. Cable supports shall be spaced no further than 5' -0" apart. 3. Provide all additional cable management products, sleeves or conduit raceways as required to protect exposed cabling and complete the installation of cables in a neat workmanlike manner. 4. Floor penetrations shall be at columns, exterior walls or equipment rooms. 5. Cable supports shall be installed as tight to underside of deck as possible using a rigid support method (i.e.: threaded rod, beam clamps, etc) do not use ceiling wire. 6. Do not support cables from ductwork, sprinkler piping, water piping, waste piping, conduit, or other system supports. 7. Provide independent separate wire management for cabling of each low voltage cabling system furnished under this specification section. B. Cable Installation: 1. Separation: Maintain the following separation between cables, other system cables and other building systems: a. One (1) foot from fluorescent lights. b. Four (4) foot from motors and transformers c. Three (3) foot from hot water piping or other mechanical equipment. d. One (1) foot from electrical conduits, other system cables, and electrical equipment. 2. Cables shall be bundled using plenum rated ties 5' -0" on center (at mid - span). 3. Remove the minimum amount of cable insulation required to complete that cable termination. 4. Cable below 10' -0" AFF shall be in conduit or run -in stud cavity. 260500 -12 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 5. Low voltage cables shall be run exposed as "open cable" in ceiling spaces and ceiling plenums. 6. Low voltage cables shall be run parallel or at right angles to building structural framework. Do not run cables diagonally across ceiling space. 7. Run low voltage cables in continuous runs from termination locations at equipment or outlet locations; splices are not permitted. Label cables at each termination. See drawings for label designations. 8. Fire seal around all cables running through rated floors and walls in accordance with requirements of Section 078400. 9. Install cables per manufacturer's recommendations including but not limited to maximum tensile loading and maximum bend radius. 3.14 DATA/VOICE CONDUITS A. Provide conduit for data /voice cables as indicated on the drawings. B. Leave pull wire in all empty telephone conduit. C. Mark conduit stub outs with "D ". D. Conduit stub outs shall have a bushing on the conduit stub. Cut stubs off within 2 inches of wall surfaces. 3.15 SECURITY TELEVISION CONDUITS (FTV & PTZ) A. Provide conduit for security camera cables as indicated on the Drawings. B. Mark conduit stubouts with FTV or PTZ. C. Leave pull cord in conduit runs or stubs. 3.16 BURGLAR ALARM AND DETECTION AND FIRE ALARM CONDUIT SYSTEM A. Provide conduit for alarm cables as indicated on the Drawings. Provide cover plates for all boxes to match surrounding surfaces. B. Mark alarm junction boxes and conduit stub outs with security alarm or fire alarm. C. Leave pull cord in conduit runs or stubs. Label each pull cord, noting location. D. Conduit stubouts shall have a bushing on the conduit stub. Cut stubs off within 2 inches of wall surface. 3.17 SOUND AND INTERCOM CONDUIT SYSTEM A. Provide conduit for sound and intercom cables as indicated on the Drawings. Provide cover plates for all boxes to match surrounding surfaces. B. Mark junction boxes and conduit stub outs with "Sound ". C. Leave pull cord in conduit runs or stubs. Label each pull cord, noting location. D. Conduit stubouts shall have a bushing on the conduit stub. Cut stubs off within 2 inches of wall surface. 3.18 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS A. Provide wiring, conduit, switches and boxes as required to make final connection to all miscellaneous equipment and machinery furnished and set in place by others or under other Divisions of these specifications, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Illuminated signage. 2. Fire annunciation system. 3. HVAC equipment. 4. Display casework electrical components. B. Provide all conduit and low voltage wiring required to activate HVAC controls, and energy management and control systems components installed by other Sections. Refer to Section 230900 and 255500 for controls and EMCS requirements. 260500 -13 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL C. Provide installation, conduit, couplers, pull strings and all connections for the following equipment furnished under sections 274133, 274139 and 274143: 1. Speaker backboxes at all wallboard (GWB) ceilings. (Section 274139) 2. Speaker backboxes at the Escalator well. (Section 274139) 3. Volume Control Cabinets (VCC). (Section 274139) 4. Intercom Equipment Cabinet backcans. (Section 274139) 5. Video riser surface mounted terminal cabinet. (Section 274143) 6. Men's Shoes MATV equipment cabinet backcan. (Section 274143) D. Refer to drawings for equipment and device locations. 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Thermographic Testing: 1. Approximately 3 weeks prior to Remodel Completion (after all track heads have been replaced or relocated), perform thermograph survey of every termination made in branch circuit panels, disconnect switches, dry type transformers, emergency generator, automatic transfer switch, and main distribution panels. The cost of inspection and re- inspection, if required, shall be a part of the electrical subcontract. 2. At the time of the survey, make available electricians to assist in the survey by removing and replacing panel covers, and correcting anomalies discovered during the survey. Assume that this work will be done on premium time. 3. Corrections and reinspections shall be made at the time of survey wherever feasible. Anomalies not corrected at the time of the original survey shall be corrected before Store Opening. 4. Replace equipment found to be defective during the survey. 5. Reinspection is required for each item not corrected at the time of the original inspection with verification that the anomaly was corrected. 6. Thermographic Inspection Report: a. List the tape clock time, equipment or panel, anomaly location, ambient temperature, measured temperature, temperature rise, breaker rating, measured load in amps, percent load, and probable cause. b. List anomalies with photo of each anomaly and note correction taken or required. c. Submit final report after correction of all anomalies. 7. Affix a label to each tested item affirming successful completion of test. Label shall indicate date of survey and name and phone number of testing agency. END OF SECTION 260500 -14 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260583 — METAL CLAD FLEXIBLE CABLE - COPPER PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal clad (MC) cable with copper conductors. 2. MC connectors. B. Related Sections: 1. 012300 — ALTERNATES: Refer to Section 012300 for alternate involving work of this section. 2. 260013 — ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS. 3. 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to all work of this Section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. E. Perform work of this Section under provisions of Section 012300 - ALTERNATES. F. REFERENCES • G. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 83 - Standard for Thermoplastic Insulated Cables. 2. UL 1569 - Standard for Type MC Cables. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Sections 013300, 017700 and 260013 as appropriate. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for cable and connectors, including construction details and UL "E" number. C. Shop Drawings: Submit floorplans to define extent of cable trays, and location of gutters and wireways. D. Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use, if any. E. Test Reports: Submit UL test report for MC cable. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal clad cable shall be constructed in strict accordance with UL 1569. The cable shall bear the UL label and manufacturer's "E" number. B. Code Compliance: Comply with the following sections of the NEC (NFPA 70 /ANSI): 1. Article 334, Metal Clad Cable. 2. Article 250 F, Types of Equipment Grounding Conductors. 3. Article 300- 22(b), Ducts or Plenums Used for Environmental Air. 4. Article 318, Cable Trays. 5. Additionally, the use and installation of Metal Clad cable shall comply with all requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. Manufacturer: Experienced in the manufacturer of products specified in this Section with minimum 5 years experience. D. Acceptable Sizes for MC Cable: 12/2 through 12/9; 10/2 through 10/ 9 and shall contain copper conductors only, no aluminum allowed. 1.4 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 260583 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260583 — METAL CLAD FLEXIBLE CABLE - COPPER PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CLAD CABLE A. Furnish one of the following, or approved equal: 1. "Corra Clad" by Interflex, Division of Coleman Cable. 2. AFC Cable Systems Inc., New Bedford, Massachusetts. 3. "Armorlite" by Alf lex, Long Beach, California. B. Metal Clad Cable: 1. Conductors: Copper; solid. 2. Insulation: Thermoplastic (THHN) or equivalent; voltage rating 600V; temperature rating 90 °C. 3. Armor: Aluminum; corrugated or smooth tube; continuous sheath or interlocking type. 4. Jacket: None unless otherwise indicated. 5. This specification recognizes only MC cable; BX, AC, and /or other types of cable are not acceptable. 6. Cable used to serve isolated ground receptacles or item served from isolated ground panels shall contain both an 'isolated ground wire and an equipment ground wire. Each isolated ground circuit shall have its own individual isolated ground wire. 7. Cable serving dedicated neutral circuits shall contain an individual neutral for each circuit. 8. Cable shall be fire rated, 1 hour minimum or higher as required by specific installation area, UL listed, rated for use in cable tray, and for use in environmental air plenums. 9. Cable shall contain a separate neutral for every 3 circuits. 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Manufacturer: One of the following, or approved equal: 1. Appleton. 2. Crouse - Hinds. 3. Electroline. 4. Regal. 5. Thomas & Betts. B. Furnish only UL listed MC connectors manufactured for MC cable; "Romex" and "BX" connectors are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. C. Take special care to prevent damage to fireproofing during cable installation work. 3.2 WIRING METHODS A. Uses Permitted: 1. Concealed dry interior locations. 2. Above accessible ceilings. B. Uses Not Permitted: 1. Wet locations, corrosive locations, in concrete or below grade. 2. Where subject to Physical damage. 3. Exposed in ceiling spaces of stock rooms and recessed within flute of pan decking. 260583 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260583 — METAL CLAD FLEXIBLE CABLE - COPPER 3.3 INSTALLATION A. MC cable may be used for branch circuiting less than 30 amps except where not permitted in wiring methods. B. Install cable in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in strict accordance with NFPA 70, Article 334. C. Use solid conductor for branch circuits 12 AWG and smaller. D. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. E. Use conductor'vot smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. F. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits. G. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere 120 V branch circuits longer than 75 feet. H. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere 277V branch circuits longer than 150 feet. I. Protect exposed cable from damage. Replace cable which proves to have faulty wiring. This replacement shall be to remove faulty cable and replace on exact path with new cable. Abandoning existing and only pulling new is not acceptable. Repair, repull, and restrap all MC cable determined by the Owner to be poor installation. J. Bend cable per NEC, Article 334. K. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor. L. Grounding: All cable shall contain a green wire ground. The jacket shall not serve as the only grounding means. M. Connectors shall be firmly secured to the cable, but not overtightened; connectors shall be firmly attached to the metal boxes. N. When using homerun cable for circuiting on sales floor, junction box to convert to branch cable runs shall be labeled "homerun box ", shall show all circuit numbers contained, shall be mounted at structure, and shall be mounted in the sales floor area above an accessible ceiling area. O. Cutting of cable shall be performed using equipment exclusively designed for such use; Thomas & Betts or equal. Knives, hacksaws, bending to break, dikes, pliers, wire cutters or other similar methods shall not be used. P. Cable shall be labeled as it enters the panel, at junction boxes where homerun cables becomes branch cable, and at branch terminations using permanent cable markers by Tyton or Burndy. Q. Suspension: 1. Cable shall be strapped tight to underside of decking where practical. 2. Cable shall have rigid, independent suspension and shall not be tied to ceiling grid suspension system, plumbing piping, or sprinkler piping. Comply with Section 014500 requirements for attachment into steel deck. 3. Cable shall be grouped separately from low voltage cable systems. 4. Support cable every 6 feet, maximum. 5. Cable shall be strapped every 6' -0', at each turn, and within 12 inches of all junction boxes using cable straps, not ties. 6. Bundling: Install no more than 4 cables together in a single bundle (except where run in cable tray). 7. Cable may be installed using suspended cable tray as manufactured by Mono -point or B -line at the Contractor's option. Contractor shall inform Owner, in writing, if cable tray is to be used and shop drawings showing routing shall be submitted for approval before work begins. MC cable in cable tray shall be strapped individually at locations as required by code and upon entering and leaving cable tray. R. Routing: 1. Bending radius shall be approximately 12 times the external diameter of the metal sheath. 260583 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260583 — METAL CLAD FLEXIBLE CABLE - COPPER 2. Routing of the cable shall follow the orthogonal grid of the building structural elements of the building, such as beams and purlins. 3. Cable in ceilings shall run as tight to structure as possible, and in no case (with the exception of drops) Tess than 12 inches above accessible ceilings. 4. MC cable shall convert to wire and conduit before entering elevator shaft, machine rooms, stock rooms, and before becoming exposed to public view areas. 5. Isolated ground circuits and normal ground circuits shall be run in separate cables. 6. Cable shall be installed using bushings or bushed fittings. END OF SECTION 260583 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260586 — ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum building wire. 2. Termination of aluminum conductors. B. Related Sections: 1. 012300 — ALTERNATES: Refer to Section 012300 for alternate involving work of this section. 2. 260013 — ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS. 3. 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. E. Perform work of this section under provisions of Section 012300 — ALTERNATES. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B800 - 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy Wire for Electrical Purposes - Annealed and Intermediate Tempers. 2. B801 - Concentric - Lay- Standard Conductors of 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy for Subsequent Covering of Insulation. B. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 44 — Thermoset Insulated Wires and Cables. 2. 83 - Standard for Thermoplastic Insulated Cables. 3. 486B - Standard for Aluminum Wire Connectors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Sections 013300, 017700 and 260013 as appropriate. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code Compliance: Comply with the following sections of the NEC (NFPA 70 /ANSI): 1. Article 110 -14 Electrical Connections. 2. Article 225 -10, Wiring on Buildings. 3. Article 318- 2(a)(1), Wiring Methods. 1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ALUMINUM CABLE A. Furnish one of the following, or approved equal: 1. Alcan. 2. Southwire. 3. Stabiloy. B. Properties 1. Conductors: 8000 Series aluminum alloy compact stranded. 2. Insulation: Thermoplastic (THHN or XHHW). 3. Acceptable Sizes: #1 AWG through #750 MCM. 260586 -1 7/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 260586 — ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. C. Take special care to prevent damage to fireproofing during cable installation work. 3.2 WIRING METHODS A. Use aluminum wire for all feeders 100 amps and larger with the exception of HVAC units. B. Pulling -in: 1. Thoroughly blow -out or vacuum and clean each conduit run before pulling conductors. 2. After conductors have been pulled provide protection to ensure that conduits remain free of water and debris. C. Termination of Conductors: 1. Use only pressure -type connectors (compression type) for aluminum tees, splices, taps and terminations. Comply with manufacturers installation requirements. Provide AL7Cu type for 75 °c and AL9Cu for 90 °c applications. 2. Installing tools and dies of hexagonal or circumferential type made by the connector manufacturer shall be used for the installation. Tooling with color coded or die /connector coding systems for inspection purposes is preferred. Use installing tools with cycling mechanism which ensures full compression. Connectors shall comply with UL 486B. 3. Terminal lugs with bolting pads shall be tin - plated for low contact resistance. 4. Apply a liberal amount of anti - oxidant compound prior to termination. END OF SECTION 260586 -2 7/21/08 LIGHTING ORDER FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (025) NEW LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE - Washington Square (025) Dated 07/21/2008 • FIXTURES ,MPS • PURCHASE LAMPS GROUP TYPE MAKE 8 CATALOG NUMBERS REC VOLTAGE LAMP TYPE PER REMARKS FIXTURE MAKE LIGHTOLIER _________ STYLE MATCH EXISTING 3- F0178S01 %P1EC0 2'z7 RECESSED FLUORESCENT WITH AIR RETURN AND LOL AX MODEL. DPAIG18LF320. 277.03 — LAMPS INSTALLED 3 HEAT EXTRACT OSRAM BALLAST SEE NOTES 81 82, 03, ACCESSORY AND 04 • MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE 1- 50PAR3OUCAP/SPUNFL25 LOL B MODEL HOUSING 8600 LAMPS SEPARATE 1 ROUND RECESSED DOWNLIGHT DAMP LABEL SEE NOTES N1 AND 83 ACCESSORY TRIM B7705CL MAKE. LIGHTOLIER STYLE• - - ^ - - -- 1- CF32DT /E/IN /830 COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLIGHT WITH OSRAM LOL B1 MODEL. HOUSING 6132BU SYL LAMPS SEPARATE 1 OTP2X26132/42 UNIVERSAL VOLTAGE BALLAST SEE ACCESSORY TRIM 8021CCLW NOTES tl1, tl2. tl3 AND tl4 • MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE 1- CF42OT /E/IN /830 COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLIGHT WITH OSRAM LOL B3 MODEL HOUSING 7142BU SYL LAMPS SEPARATE 1 OTP2X26/32/42 UNIVERSAL VOLTAGE BALLAST SEE ACCESSORY TRIM 8022CCLW NOTES 81 82, 83, AND tl4 MAKE. LIGHTOLIER STYLE 1- CF42DT /EIIN/830 DIMMABLE COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLIGHT SEE LOL B3D MODEL HOUSING 7142BU2MX _ --- - - LAMPS SEPARATE 1 NOTES 81 82. 03, AND 04 FURNISHED WITH ADVANCE VEZ ACCESSORY. TRIM 8022CCLW 1742 MARK X ARCHITECTURAL DIMMING BALLAST MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE LOL B5 MODEL HOUSING C3LVE2 (277) 277 1- 37MRI611RNVFL60 /0 ROUND RECESSED EMERGENCY DOWNLIGHT FIXTURE NAED code 58837 SEE NOTES 41. 112 AND 113 ACCESSORY TRIM C3MRPDWH MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE 1- 5OPAR3000AP /IR/NFL25 SIMILAR TO TYPE 'B' FIXTURE EXCEPT WITH 277/120V LOL B7 MODEL HOUSING B600 LAMPS SEPARATE 1 STEP - DOWN TRANSFORMER SEE NOTES 81 AND 83 ACCESSORY TRIM B7705CL TRANSFORMER 7997 \ \F0805P212CC8 \Store Planning 7/24/2008 9 32 AM #k#k# -1 LIGHTING ORDER FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (025) LAMPS PURCHASE GROUP TYPE MAKE S CATALOG NUMBERS REC VOLTAGE LAMP TYPE PER REMARKS FIXTURE MAKE CHARLES LOOMIS REM 05925 _ __________ OWNER FURNISHED PUBLIC TOILET WALL SCONCE CAI(P0) 01 MODEL 129-186682-313B 1-40W CANDELABRA 1 REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR MOUNTING LAMPS INCLUDED HEIGHT SEE NOTE 91 ACCESSORY CANDLESTICK SCONCE MAKE.KOZO LIGHTING ITEM 95801 OWNER FURNISHED BEAUTY STUDIO WALL SCONCE 1.75W ALAMP CAI(P0) D2 MODEL GISELLE SERIES LUCE SCONCE LAMPS SEPARATE 1 REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT SEE NOTE 61 ACCESSORY MAKE. CHLORIDE STYLE FIXTURE PROVIDED BY MODEL 'SYMMETRY SERIES IY OEGA.1 OR EGA-2 CONTRACTOR. EC F LIGHTALARMS' GALAXY' LED 1 9XLD OR 2XLD•WG•WLP SURFACE MOUNTED EXIT LIGHT COMPLY WITH U L 924 ------------------------------------ - - - - -- MOUNTING AS INDICATED ON PLANS GREEN LENS ACCESSORY COLOR SEE NOTE 07 MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE. 204' RECESSED FLUORESCENT. TWO LAMPS WITH LOL M MODEL DPA2G24LS27241NV•NA•VOI 2•FO32B00/XPBCO 2 OSRAM OHE2X32/UNV ISL LOW BF BALLAST 24 -CELL SEMI __- . -_ —_ -- LAMPS INSTALLED ACCESSORY- SPECULAR LOWER SEE NOTES 91, 92 03 AND 04 MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE 2 -2 X4' RECESSED FLUORESCENT FIXTURES. TWO LAMPS 4- F032B30/XP/ECO EACH, SIMILAR TO TYPE - M' EXCEPT MAIN - M - FIXTURE LAMPS INSTALLED OSRAM OHE4X32IUNV ISL LOW BF BALLAST LOL MM MODEL. MAIN DPA2G24LS272•UNV•NC•VOS 4 CONTAINS OS WHICH SERVES BOTH MAIN - M - & SUB - 5 - FIXTURES SEE SUB DPA2G24LS232•LB•V08 NOTES 01, 92. 83, 84 AND 012 MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE (1) 4 STRIP FLUORE SCENT FIXTURE, 1 LAMP WITH OSRAM LOL 0 MODEL SW4S132- HPF- UNV•NA 1•F032 /830 /XP/ECD 1 pHE 1X32/UNV ISL LOW BF BALLAST SEE NOTES 01, 02 93, LAMPS SEPARATE ACCESSORY 88, AND 09 MAKE. LIGHTOLIER STYLE (1) 8 STRIP FLUORESCENT FIXTURE. 2 LAMPS WITH LOL 02 MODEL SWBT172- HPF•UNV•NA 2- F032B301%P/ECO 2 OSRAM OHE2X321UNV ISL LOW BF BALLAST SEE NOTES LAMPS SEPARATE ACCESSORY 01, 92. 93.98. 09. AND 912 MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE (1) 8 STRIP FLUORESCENT FIXTURE. 2 LAMPS WITH (1) LOL 03 MODEL. MAIN•SWBT172•HPF•UNV•NB•IH1 3•F032B30/XP/ECO 3 OSRAM OHE3X32IUNV ISL LOW BF BALLAST AND (1) 4' SUB __. LAMPS SEPARATE FIXTURE, 1 LAMP WITH NO BALLAST TOTAL LENGTH 12 SUBSW4S132-HPF- LB•T91 SEE NOTES 01, 92 03 08 09, AND 012 MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE (1) 8 STRIP FLUORESCENT FIXTURE WITH (1) OSRAM LOL 04 MODEL MAIN•SW8T172- MPF•UNV•NC -IG9 4- FO32B30/XP/ECO 4 OHE4X32/UNV ISL LOW BF BALLAST AND (1)8 SUB WITH LAMPS SEPARATE NO BALLAST TOTAL LENGTH 16' SEE NOTES 91, 92, 93, SUBSW8T132•HPF•LB496 08, 99, AND 612 7/24/2008 9 32 AM \ \ F0805P2)ZCC81SIore Planning\ kk4144 LIGHTING ORDER FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (025) • PURCHASE OTT LAMPS GROUP TYPE MAKE 8 CATALOG NUMBERS RECD VOLTAGE LAMP TYPE PER REMARKS FIXTURE • MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT TRACK INSTALL W/ CLIP FOR --- - - - - -- T-BAR INSTALLATION 8 CUP FOR GWB MOUNTING SEE LOL P MODEL LIGHT TRACK 9188WH NOTE 81 8' NOMINAL TRACK MEASURES T -9' EXACT ACCESSORY. LENGTH INCLUDED WITH ONE 56430WH DEAD END COVER MAKE UGHTOLIER STYLE. LOL MODEL LIVE END FEED PROVIDE ONE PER FEED POINT AT GWB CEILING 9148WH LOCATIONS SEE NOTE 81 ACCESSORY MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE LOL MODEL. MINI - COUPLER PROVIDE AT EACH B' LIGHT TRACK JUNCTION WHERE 9149WM FEED POINTS DO NOT OCCUR SEE NOTE 81 ACCESSORY MAKE, LIGHTOLIER STYLE. LOL MODEL -r CONNECTOR PROVIDE AT EACH - r CONNECTION OF TRACK AT ACT 8151/8111 CEILING LOCATIONS IN DRESSING ROOMS SEE NOTE 81 ACCESSORY MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE LOL MODEL VARIABLE ANGLE CONNECTOR PROVIDE AT EACH CORNER CONNECTION ON SALES 915315/11 FLOOR PERIMETER TRACK, IN DRESSING ROOMS, AND ON ACCESSORY CORNERS AT GWB CEILINGS ONLY SEE NOTE 81, MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE LOL MODEL IN -LINEI•L' CONNECTOR FEED PROVIDE AT EACH CORNER CONNECTION OF TRACK AT 9155WM ACT CEILING LOCATIONS SEE NOTE 81 ACCESSORY MAKE. LIGHTOLIER STYLE LOL MODEL GRID CEILING CLIPS 9189WH PROVIDE THREE PER 8' LENGTH OF TRACK, SEE NOTE 81 ACCESSORY MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE LOL MODEL SINGLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED 91961NN PROVIDE ONE PER FEED POINT AT ACT CEILINGS WHERE SINGLE DIRECTION FEED IS REQUIRED SEE NOTE 81 ACCESSORY MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE LOL MODEL DOUBLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED PROVIDE ONE PER FEED POINT AT ACT AND GWB 9186WM %1 CEILINGS WHERE DOUBLE DIRECTION FEED IS REQUIRED ACCESSORY SEE NOTE Planning\ 7/24/2008 9.32 AM #l=-3 LIGHTING ORDER FORM • Nordstrom — Washington Square (025) LAMPS PURCHASE E TYPE MAKE & CATALOG NUMBERS EC VOLTAGE LAMP TYPE PER REMARKS GROUP R FIXTURE MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE — --- - - - - -- PROVIDE ONE SINGLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED WITH LOL P1 MODEL SINGLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED 9099WH ONE 120W POWERTRIP CURRENT LIMITER AT ACT AND GWB CEILINGS WHERE INDICATED BY '1 SEE NOTE 01 ACCESSORY. CLD120WH POWER TRIP MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE PROVIDE ONE SINGLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED WITH LOL P2 MODEL SINGLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED 9099WH ONE 300W POWERTRIP CURRENT LIMITER AT ACT AND .. GWB CEILINGS WHERE INDICATED BY .p2- SEE NOTE 01 ACCESSORY. CLO300WH POWER TRIP MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE PROVIDE ONE SINGLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED WITH LOL 1 MODEL. SINGLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED 9099WH ONE 600W POWERTRIP CURRENT LIMITER AT ACT AND GWB CEILINGS WHERE INDICATED BY Y5' SEE NOTE 01 ACCESSORY CL0600WH POWER TRIP MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE -- — ---- - - - - -- PROVIDE ONE SINGLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED WITH LOL P7 MODEL SINGLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED 9099WH ONE 900W POWERTRIP CURRENT LIMITER AT ACT AND GWB CEILINGS WHERE INDICATED BY •P7' SEE NOTE 01 ACCESSORY CLD900WH POWER TRIP MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE. — " - " "" PROVIDE ONE DOUBLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED WITH TWO 120W POWERTRIP CURRENT LIMITERS AT ACT AND LOL P1 D MODEL DOUBLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED 9033WH GWB CEILINGS WHERE INDICATED BY'P1D' SEE NOTE ---------••- _________ 01 ACCESSORY (2) CLDI20WH POWER TRIP MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE PROVIDE ONE DOUBLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED WITH LOL P2D MODEL DOUBLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED 9033WH TWO 120W POWERTRIP CURRENT LIMITERS AT ACT AND GWB CEILINGS WHERE INDICATED BY 'ND" SEE NOTE ACCESSORY (2) CLD300WH POWER TRIP 01 MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE P5D - PROVIDE ONE PER FEED POINT AT ACT CEILINGS LOL P5D MODEL DOUBLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED 9033WH WHERE INDICATED BY '1 WHERE SINGLE DIRECTION FEED IS REQUIRED SEE NOTE 01 ACCESSORY (2) CL0000WH POWER TRIP MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE P7D • PROVIDE ONE PER FEED POINT AT ACT CEILINGS LOL P7D MODEL DOUBLE DIRECTION CANOPY FEED 9033WH WHERE INDICATED BY 1.70' WHERE SINGLE DIRECTION _ _ _ FEED IS REQUIRED SEE NOTE 01 ACCESSORY (2) CLD900WH POWER TRIP 7/24/2008 9 32 AM \ \F0805P22CC8 \Store Planning\ LIGHTING ORDER FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (025) PURCHASE LAMPS GROUP TYPE MAKE 8 CATALOG NUMBERS RECC VOLTAGE LAMP TYPE PER REMARKS FIXTURE \ \ F0805P2\ZCC8 \Store Planning - 7/24/2008 9 32 AM LIGHTING ORDER FORM Nordstrom - Washington Square (025) LAMPS PURCHASE GROUP E TYPE MAKE 8 CATALOG NUMBERS R E C VOLTAGE LAMP TYPE PER REMARKS FIXTURE ■ 7/24/2008 9 M A 32 \ \F0805P2\ZCCB \Store Planning\ #tk AM LIGHTING ORDER FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (025) PURCHASE CITY LAMPS GROUP TYPE MAKE & CATALOG NUMBERS REC'D VOLTAGE LAMP TYPE PER REMARKS FIXTURE MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE 48• TWO LAMP STRIP FLUORESCENT FIXTURE WITH LOL T2 MODEL SW4S2J2•HPF- UNV-NA "' " - " - - "' 2- F032/830/ %P/ECO OSRAM OME2X37/UNV ISL LOW BF BALLAST SEE NOTES LAMPS SEPARATE 2 81 • 02 83 #4. 08. AND tl12 PROVIDE OSRAM ACCESSORY F032/850/XP /ECO (5000K LAMPS) AT TAILOR/ALTERATIONS "__ " "'""' ROOM ONLY MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE (1) 8 STRIP FLUORESCENT FIXTURE, 4 LAMPS WITH (1) 4- F032/830/ %P/ECO OSRAM OHE4X32/UNV ISL LOW BF BALLAST SEE NOTES LOL T4 MODEL SW8T272•HPF- UNV•NC LAMPS SEPARATE 4 81 82 83 84 88 AND 012 PROVIDE OSRAM ACCESSORY F032 /850/XP/ECO (5000K LAMPS) AT TAILOR/ALTERATIONS ROOM ONLY MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE• 1fO321830IXPSIECO 4B" ONE LAMP STRIP FLUORESCENT FIXTURE WITH LOL T5 MODEL SW4S132•HPF•UNV -ND LAMPS SEPARATE 1 OSRAM OHEIX32/UNV ISH HIGH BF BALLAST SEE NOTES ACCESSORY NI, 02, 03, N4, tl8, AND 812 MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE LOL 2- F032/830/%PS /ECO (U 8' STRIP FLUORESCENT FIXTURE, 2 LAMPS WITH (1) T6 MODEL SW8T172- HPF•UNV•NO LAMPS SEPARATE 2 OSRAM OHE2X32/UNV ISH HIGH BF BALLAST SEE NOTES ACCESSORY tlt, 02, 83, 84, 88, AND 812, MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE 1 04' RECESSED FLUORESCENT WITH 8 -CELL SEMI LOL �f MODEL VRA7GBLW272•UNV- NA•VO4 LAMPS INSTALLED 2 SPECULAR LOWER AND OSRAM OHE2X32NNV ISL LOW ACCESSORY' BF BALLAST GRID CEILING SEE NOTES t11 82. AND tl3 MAKE LIGHTOLIER ------ -- 2.1'04 RECESSED FLUORESCENT FIXTURES. 2 LAMPS STYLE EACH. SIMILAR TO TYPE If EXCEPT MAIN •M FIXTURE 4- F032 /830/XP/ECO LOL VMS MODEL MAIN- VRAIG8LW272- UNV- NC•VOS LAMPS INSTALLED 4 CONTAINS (1) OSRAM OHE4X32/UNV ISL LOW BF BALLAST SUB- VRAIG8LW272- LB•V013 WHICH SERVES BOTH MAIN - M• AND SUB - S" FIXTURES GRID CEILING SEE NOTES NI, N2, tl3, AND 1112 7/24/2008 9 32 AM \\F0805P22CCB \S(ore Planning( AW#8Ji-7 LIGHTING ORDER FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (025) LAMPS P GROUP E TYPE MAKE & CATALOG NUMBERS REC VO LAMP TYPE PER REMARKS FIXTURE MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE _____ 24 - TWO-LAMP STRIP FLUORESCENT FIXTURE WITH LOL V MODEL SW25217- XPF- NA 2- F017/830/ %P/ECO 2 �I OSRAM OHE2%37/UNV ISL LOW BF BALLAST SEE NOTES LAMPS SEPARATE 41, 42. tl3. AND 88 ACCESSORY MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE _ 24 ONE -LAMP STRIP FLUORESCENT FIXTURE WITH LOL V1 MODEL SW25117•HPF•UNV -NA 1- FO17 /830/%PS /ECO 1 OSRAM OHE1%32NNV ISN NORMAL BF BALLAST SEE LAMPS SEPARATE NOTES81.82,63 AND 88 ACCESSORY MAKE LIGHTOLIER 36' TWO-LAMP STRIP FLUORESCENT FIXTURE WITH STYLE. OSRAM OHE2 %32JUNV ISL LOW BF BALLAST MOUNT LOL Z MODEL SW3S225•HPF•UNV -NA 2-F0251830/XP/ 2 FIXTURE TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF MEZZANINE LAMPS SEPARAATE TE STRUCTURE BETWEEN STRUCTURE JOISTS SEE NOTES ACCESSORY 41. 92, 43. AND a9 MAKE LIGHTOLIER STYLE 2-36' FLUORESCENT FIXTURES WITH 2 LAMPS EACH LOL ZMS MODEL. MAIN•SW3S225•HPF4INV•NC•IHS 4 - F025/830/XP/ECO SIMILAR TO TYPE Z' EXCEPT WI MAIN OSRAM OHEIUNV LAMPS SEPARATE ISL LOW BF BALLAST IN 'MAIN-SUB' WIRING SYSTEM SEE SUB- SW3S225.HPF•LB4H8 NOTES 111, 62, 43. 49. AND 412 MAKE ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS, INC STYLE 05900 2- FT24011830 COMPACT FLUORESCENT SCONCE FOR THREE -WAY CAI(PO) CC MODEL 2335.36 1800 LUMENS 2 MIRROR SATIN NICKEL FINISH 38' LONG OSRAM OTP2X39 -- -- --- - °-- ------ --- -- -- --- °---- -- -' -- -- --- --' - --- LAMPS INCLUDED 24T5HOn1NV PSN BALLAST SEE NOTE 81 ACCESSORY MAKE SEA GULL LIGHTING STYLE. 05860 4.625 100 WATT 4 BULB CHROME STRIP LIGHT SOCKETS SPACED 8' ON CAI(PO) CC1 MODEL 4333 -05 (100G40/W /RP.120V Med Lamp) 4 CENTER METAL FIN CHROME ON STAINLESS STEEL LAMPS SEPARATE 120V ACCESSORY 7/24/2008 9 32 AM \ \F0805P21ZCC8 \Store Planning\ 0-8 LIGHTING ORDER FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (025) PURCHASE LAMPS GROUP TYPE MAKE 8 CATALOG NUMBERS REC VOLTAGE LAMP TYPE PER REMARKS FIXTURE MAKE LIGMTOLIER STYLE LOL MP MODEL 6190WH OWNER FURNISHED MONO -POINT TRACK FIXTURE SEE NOTES El e3 NS, AND EID ACCESSORY MAKE CYLINDRIX STYLE NCE MTV MODEL CYLRJ •70•MM•E- WT- 120.CL•NF .CL -WT• 120 3-CDM -Tm Mn li MaslerColor 3 RECESSED ACCENT ADJUSTABLE DOWNLIGHT SEE SN(WT)•CB LAMPS INCLUDED NOTES El AND #3 ACCESSORY 7/24/2008 9.32 AM \ \F0805P2\ZCCB \Store Planning\ 4-9 LIGHTING ORDER FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (025) LAMPS PURCHASE E TYPE MAKE 8 CATALOG NUMBERS REVD VO LAMP TYPE PER REMARKS FIXTURE MAKE STYLE. COSMETICS DISIGNER PENDANT CAI(PO) DPCS MODEL ACCESSORY (ITEM 05905) MAKE. STYLE MENS CLOTHING DISIGNER PENDANT CAI(PO) DPMC MODEL ACCESSORY (ITEM 05977) MAKE --- Lampin9 40Wad candelabra lamp STYLE SALON SHOES DISIGNER PENDANT 05975-Candeher Lamps 8 CAI(PO) DPSS MODEL 8- 40B10C/DUBLr2pk -120V Cand ACCESSORY Lamp Zang T. Chandelier Lamps (ITEM 05975) MAKE. STYLE WOMENS SHOES DISIGNER PENDANT CAI(PO) DPWS MODEL ACCESSORY (ITEM 05987) 7/24/2008 9 32 AM \ \F0805P2\ZCCS\Slore Planning\ ####p -1 0 LIGHTING ORDER FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (025) PURC GROUP E TYPE MANE 8 CATALOG NUMBERS REVD VOLTAGE TAMP TYPE PER REMARKS FIXTURE — MAKE. Lampmg 90Waa candelabra lamp STYLE. T.B D DISIGNER PENDANT ° x5073- Candeber Lamps CAI(PO) DPtbd MODEL. 12 -40810C/DL/BL/2pk.120V Cand 12 . ---- •• -- •-- ---•- -- ..- - - - - - -- Lamp ACCESSORY. Double Dos EQau Chandelier (ITEM 05973) - -• — Lamps \\F0805P22CC84Store Planning\ 7/24/2008 9 32 AM LIGHTING ORDER FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (025) LAMPS PURCHASE GROUP TYPE MAKE 8 CATALOG NUMBERS EC'D VOLTAGE LAMP TYPE PER REMARKS FIXTURE LOL LIGHTOLIER CAI(PO) CALLISON(P URCHASE ORDER) NCE NORTH COAST ELECTRIC SPARE BALLAST TYPE A FIXTURES OHE2X49DL/UNV ISN•SC (49429) SPARE BALLAST TYPE U FIXTURES OHE2X32T8IUNVIISL SC (49863) _ SPARE BALLAST TYPE UMS FIXTURES OHE4X32T8IUNVIISL SC (49867) SPARE BALLAST TYPE 131 FIXTURES OTPII2XCF UNV PM (51798) SPARE BALLAST TYPE B3 FIXTURES OTPII2XCF UNV PM (51798) GENERAL NOTE: SEE ATTACHED LIGHTING NOTES. 7/24/2008 9 32 AM \ \F0805P2\ZCC8 \Store Planning\ ##### -12 • LIGHTING NOTES Nordstrom = Natick Mall (531) 1. OWNER FURNISHED LIGHT FIXTURE, OWNER FURNISHED LAMPS CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE AND PROVIDE COMPLETE INSTALLATION OF FIXTURE, LAMPS. LIGHT TRACK MOUNTING AND CONNECTION COMPONENTS TO RENDER FIXTURE FULLY OPERATIONAL. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY VOLTAGE OF ALL BALLASTED FIXTURES. 3. MANUFACTURERS LABELS SHALL NOT BE VISIBLE FROM THE FLOOR FOR ALL LIGHT FIXTURES. 4. PROVIDE 0 DEGREE START BALLAST FOR ALL EXTERIOR BALLASTED FIXTURE. 5. TYPE "J" AND "MP" LIGHT FIXTURE SHALL BE MOUNTED MINIMUM 14" AND MAXIMUM 22" AWAY FROM VERTICAL WALL FOR AIMING OF LAMP TO ILLUMINATE ARTWORK. 6. NOT USED IN THIS PROJECT. ' 7. EXIT SIGNS TO BE MOUNTED +8 " -0" A.F F UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. PROVIDE ALL DIRECTIONAL ARROWS, DOUBLE FACEPLATES, OR BLANK FACEPLATES AS REQUIRED TO CLEARLY IDENTIFY PATH OF EGRESS. IN 2 -LEVEL STOCK AREAS USE SWIVEL -BALL MOUNTING WHERE BELOW 8' -0" 8. CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS FOR LIGHT FIXTURE TYPE "0 ", "02 ", "03 ", "04 ", "T2 ", "T4 ", AND "V" AT LIGHT COVE OR STOCK ROOMS SHALL RUN CONCEALED IN CHASSIS OF STRIP LIGHT FIXTURE WHENEVER POSSIBLE 9. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE MOUNTING LOCATION OF ALL LIGHT FIXTURES WITH UPPER LEVEL STRUCTURAL SYSTEM, AND THE MECHANICAL, SPRINKLER AND PLUMBING CONTRACTORS PRIOR TO START OF WORK. VERIFY LOCATION OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, MECHANICAL UNITS, DUCTWO A. LIGHTS IN CONFLICT WITH DUCTWORK SHALL BE MOUNTED AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE BELOW DUCTWORK, MINIMUM HEIGHT +7' -0" A.F.F. B. LIGHT FIXTURES IN BACK ROOMS WHICH ARE OPEN TO STRUCTURE OF FLOOR ABOVE SHALL BE INDIVIDUALLY CHAIN SUSPENDED OR CHAIN SUSPENDED USING UNISTRUT BACK SUPPORT IN CONTINUOUS ROWS. WHENEVER POSSIBLE MOUNT FIXTURES AT A UNIFORM HEIGHT 12" ABOVE HIGHEST HANG C. AT BACK ROOMS WITH UPPER LEVEL STRUCTURE, SURFACE MOUNT LIGHT FIXTURES TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF UPPER LEVEL DECKING BETWEEN PURLINS. D ALL LIGHT FIXTURES AT UPPER LEVEL SHALL BE SURFACE MOUNTED TIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF METAL DECKING OF FLOOR ABOVE. E. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES IN STOCK ROOMS TO BE LOCATED AS TO NOT OBSTRUCT SPRINKLER HEAD SPRAY PATTERNS. F PROVIDE FLEX CONDUIT WHERE POSSIBLE TO AVOID CONDUIT BENDS AT UPPER AND LOWER LEVEL STOCK ROOM STRUCTURAL BEAMS AND SUPPORT. 10. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE LOCATED AS TO NOT OBSTRUCT SPRINKLER HEAD SPRAY PATTERNS PER NFPA 11. NOT USED IN THIS PROJECT. 12 PROVIDE EXTENTION OF BALLAST INTERCONNECT WIRING IN CONDUIT BETWEEN "MAIN "AND "SUB" OF TYPE "MMS" AND "ZMS" FIXTURE WHENEVER FIXTURES ARE NOT MOUNTED END -TO -END. 260656 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 265000 — LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Light fixtures, light tracks, and lamps. 2. Components required for installation of fixtures and tracks. 3. Coordination and inventory management of Owner furnished fixtures and lamps. 4. Transportation of Owner furnished fixtures from the Owner's warehouse to the site. 5. Light fixture installation, connection, and tamping. 6. Light track installation and connection. B. Related Sections: 1. 012200 — UNIT PRICES: Unit prices for revised quantities of selected light fixtures. 2. 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL: Pre - manufactured wiring system. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to all work of this section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Work of this section includes requirement for Contractor to define quantity counts and provide inventory management of Owner furnished light fixtures, Tight tracks, and lamps. Contractor shall install all light fixtures, light tracks, lamps, and provide associated mounting and connection components. B. Refer to the Lighting Order Form (LOF) for the required light fixtures, light tracks, and lamps. Contractor shall maintain accurate quantity counts of all light fixtures, light track, and lamps throughout duration of Project. SUB - CONTRACT AWARD WILL NOT OCCUR UNTIL LOF IS COMPLETE AND SUBMITTED TO THE OWNER. C. Install Tight fixtures required for the Project. D. Refer to the Tight fixture schedule for light fixtures and lamps that shall be ordered, furnished, and installed by the Contractor. Other light fixtures and light tracks are ordered by the Owner based on the Contractor defined quantities. E. Light fixtures in the Cafe and associated kitchen areas are Owner furnished and will be under a separate Contract; refer to the Restaurant drawings for requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300, 017700 and 260013 as applicable. B. Product Data: 1. Owner will furnish product literature for Owner furnished light fixtures and light tracks. Data will be issued to Contractor prior to receipt of bids for lighting; coordinate requirements accordingly. 2. After award of electrical sub - contract, submit complete product literature for Contractor and Owner furnished light fixtures, light tracks, and lamps. C. Quantity Statements and LOF Submittals: Comply with provisions of Article in this Section titled "Light Fixture Procurement ". D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Include manufacturers' manuals showing parts identification numbers and service requirements for Contractor furnished light fixtures. 2. List name, address, and phone number of local supplier for fixtures and lamps. 3. Include description of brand and wattage of lamps. 4. Include final copy of LOF. 265000 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 265000 — LIGHTING 5. Owner shall provide product literature in electronic format for all Owner furnished Tight fixtures, light tracks, and lamps to Contractor. Contractor shall combine all Owner and Contractor furnished information into Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.4 LIGHT FIXTURE PROCUREMENT A. Quantity Statements: 1. Prepare quantity statement for each type of Tight fixture, Tight track, and lamp. Quantities required shall be referred to as Contractor defined fixture quantities. Contractor defined fixture quantities for Owner procurement shall be indicated on LOF. 2. Copy of the LOF is bound in Project Manual. Electronic version of the LOF will be furnished by the Architect. 3. Make submittals in accordance with the following requirements: a. Accuracy of the Contractor defined Tight fixture quantities shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, including initial counts and all updates to the quantity counts generated by Owner revisions. Costs for additional light fixture not accounted for in an LOF shall be borne by the Contractor. Contractor shall bear cost for return shipment of spare fixtures not used where fixture quantities were based on Contractor counts. Refer to Article 1.2, paragraph B. b. Awarded sub - contractor shall complete and submit all information on the electronic version of the LOF. Incomplete LOF will be returned for resubmittal. c. Indicate all Contractor defined fixture quantities. Quantities indicated by any other means or using a modified LOF form will require form to be returned for resubmittal. d. Contractor defined fixture quantities shall be used by the Owner to determine and order final quantities of Owner furnished fixtures required for this Project. In addition to Contractor fixture quantities, the Owner may furnish extra fixtures for maintenance stock. e. Revisions to the Contractor defined fixture quantities shall be provided for each Owner generated revision. Revisions to Contractor defined fixture quantities not indicating PR, ASI, or CCD number, or thorough description of quantity revision will require form to be returned for resubmittal. f. Maintain an up to date version of the LOF, including revisions to the contractor fixture quantities throughout the duration of the Project. Specific revisions to the LOF shall be submitted with each PR, ASI, and CCD i.e. fixture type, net quantity revision, new total quantity required. Email revision to Owner's Lighting Coordinator. Do not submit entire LOF for PR revisions. g. A complete up -dated copy of LOF shall be emailed to the Owner monthly with each pay request. h. PAY REQUESTS WILL ONLY BE CONSIDERED IF AN UPDATED LOF IS ATTACHED. B. Installation Components: Contractor shall provide all mounting components and connection components required for installation of Contractor and Owner furnished light fixtures and Tight tracks. C. Inventory Management: -- 1. With each transaction of Owner furnished light fixtures, light tracks, and lamps to and from Owner's warehouse, Contractor shall complete a Receiving Document and /or a Light Fixture Check -Out Form. Copies of these forms are bound in the Project Manual, Volume 2. Electronic versions of these forms will be furnished by Architect. 2. Contractor shall comply with the following procedures for inventory management: a. Owner's Lighting Coordinator: Patti Embry 1700 Seventh Avenue, Suite 700 Seattle, WA 98101 Phone: (206) 303 -4305 Fax: (206) 303 -4319 b. Fax copies of all packing slips, Receiving Documents, and Light Fixture Check -Out Forms to the Owner's Lighting Coordinator. 265000 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 265000 — LIGHTING c. Lighting Check -In: 1) Check -In all light fixture, Tight tracks, and Tamp shipments at the warehouse, copy all packing slips, and complete a Receiving Document. 2) Check to ensure all incoming shipments of Owner furnished light fixtures, light tracks, and lamps match the packing slips, the PO Schedule, and the LOF. Indicate type and quantity inconsistencies on Receiving Document. 3) Check for any damaged products. Indicate damaged product on the Receiving Document. d. Lighting Check -Out: Check -out all Tight fixtures, light tracks, and lamps removed from the warehouse and complete a Light Fixture Check -Out Form. Fax copies of form each week. e. Product Organization: Organize all Owner furnished Tight fixtures, light track, and lamps by type in such a way as to allow easy access and to facilitate the inventory process by the Contractor and the Owner's. Lighting Coordinator. f. CONTRACTOR SHALL FAX COPIES OF ALL PACKING SLIPS AND RECEVING DOCUMENTS TO OWNER'S LIGHTING COORDINATOR WITHIN 24 HOURS OF RECEIPT OF SHIPMENT. 3. Responsibility and disposition of Owner furnished fixtures after delivery to the Owner's warehouse shall be in accordance with Section 015000. D. Pre -Award Meetings: 1. Each electrical sub - contract bid shall include a complete copy of the LOF as prepared by the Electrical Sub - Contractor. Contractor shall submit 4 copies of each Bidder's LOF to the Architect within 3 days after receipt of bids. 2. Pre -Award Meeting No. 1: a. Schedule within 5 days after receipt of bids. b. Review of preliminary LOF provided by the Electrical Sub - Contractor. Agenda to be determined by the Contractor. c. Attendance: Owner, Architect, Architects Electrical Consultant, General Contractor, selected electrical sub - bidders. 3. Pre -Award Meeting No. 2: a. Schedule within 5 days after Pre -Award meeting No. 1. b. Review of final LOF. Agenda to be determined by the Contractor. c. Attendance: General Contractor, selected electrical sub - bidders, the Architect, the Architect's Electrical Consultant, the Owner's Project Coordinator, and the Owner's Lighting Coordinator. d. Within 5 days after the pre -award meeting, the Contractor shall transmit 4 copies of the final LOF. Owner furnished fixture quantities will be based on this submittal. E. Connection Requirements: Installer shall coordinate connection requirements with fixture manufacturers prior to bid. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes: Comply with requirements of the Jurisdictional Code Authorities. B. Verify ceiling construction prior to ordering fixtures to suit ceiling conditions. C. Verify fluorescent fixture voltage for ordering fixtures with proper ballast voltage. D. Verify all custom color or custom finish fixtures with Owner. E. Verify dimensions of all Owner furnished Tight fixtures to confirm fixtures are of same dimensions indicated in the submittals 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with provisions of Section 016000. B. Contractor shall use the fixture type as main reference for all light fixtures. As prearranged with the fixture manufacturer, all Owner furnished fixtures will be delivered with the fixture type indicated on each light fixture and light track carton. 265000 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 265000 — LIGHTING C. Prior to Store turnover, Contractor shall compile all spare Tight fixtures and Tight track in a safe location, develop a complete inventory packing list of all spare fixtures, and prepare fixtures for shipment. Packing list shall be delivered to Owner's Lighting Coordinator prior to turnover. 1.7 BENEFICIAL USE A. Coordinate scheduling of light fixture installation, connection, and Tamping at Sales Floor ceiling and light coves to facilitate review of finish mock -ups. 1.8 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. In addition to ballast required for the Project, Contractor shall define the quantities required for the following spare ballasts using the LOF. Spare ballasts shall be furnished by Owner for Owner furnished fixtures. a. Two spare ballasts for Type A fixtures. b. Four spare ballasts for Type U fixtures. c. Four spare ballasts for Type UMS fixtures. d. Two spare ballasts for Type B1 fixtures. e. Four spare ballasts for Type B3 fixtures. 2. At Store turnover deliver the spare ballasts to the Store Maintenance Manager and store at the job site where directed. These spare components shall be placed in a separate container and marked accordingly. 1.9 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES - GENERAL A. Light Fixtures: 1. Refer to the LOF for requirements. 2. Fixtures to be furnished by the Owner are indicated in the LOF. 3. Where lamps for Owner furnished fixtures are indicated to be Owner furnished, they will be furnished separately for installation under this section. B. Fabrication: Materials shall be adequately rigid and of sufficient mechanical strength to prevent distortion before, during and after installation. 2.2 INCANDESCENT, FLUORESCENT, AND HID LIGHT FIXTURES A. General: As indicated on the LOF; all light fixtures, except for Type F exit light shall be furnished by the Owner. B. Manufacturers and Types: As scheduled in the LOF. C. Light Fixture Mounting and Connection Components: 1. Mounting and connection components are not provided by Owner. 2. Provide mounting bars, anchors, plates, backing, and other associated devices to suspend or mount fixtures from structure or to substrate indicated. 3. Provide pendant or surface mounted fixtures with required mounting devices, accessories, including but not limited to, hickeys, stud extensions, ball aligners, chain, canopies and stems; mounting heights as directed. 4. Except for AFC pre- manufactured wiring system specified under Section 260500, provide connection components, including, but not limited to, ballast interconnection wiring for main /sub light fixtures, fixture connections, and feed points. D. Fluorescent and HID fixture wiring and components shall be sized and rated in accordance with ballast secondary ratings. 265000 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 265000 — LIGHTING 2.3 LIGHT TRACKS A. General: As indicated on the LOF; all light tracks shall be furnished by the Owner. B. Fixtures: Fixtures and lamps for installation on Tight tracks will be furnished and installed by the Owner. C. Light Tracks: Owner will furnish tracks complete with, but not limited to, feed points and canopies, in- line connectors, flexible connectors, mounting clips, and end caps. Contractor shall indicate all required feed points and canopies, in -line connectors, flexible connectors, mounting clips, and end caps on the LOF. D. Additional light track clips: Contractor shall provide labor to fifty (50) additional light track mounting clips (Lightolier #9189). Clips shall be mounted after Tight track and track head installation are complete (approximately three weeks before store opening) at locations as directed by the Architect. E. In many instances in existing stores, new lighting track is to be installed in areas where it may cross existing recessed track lighting. Every attempt has been made in the drawings to accommodate the additional canopy end feeds and components necessary to break the track runs at these locations. Contractor shall provide all components necessary to install complete al new lighting track including breaking the track runs at existing track locations. 2.4 LAMPS A. General: Unless noted otherwise in the LOF, all lamps shall be furnished by Owner. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS A. Mounting and Connection Components: Provide all components and accessories required for installation of Contractor and Owner furnished light fixtures and light tracks. B. Earthquake Wire: Annealed steel wire, #12 gage minimum (where applicable). 2.6 FLUORESCENT LIGHTING BALLASTS A. Ballasts: 1. Manufacturer: Osram Sylvania, Motorola or Triad MagneTek. 2. Type: 10% THD. 3. Fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be high frequency electronic type, operating lamps at a frequency of 20kHz or higher with no detectable flicker and shall comply with State and Federal efficiency standards. 4. Ballasts shall comply with FCC and NEMA limits governing radio frequency interference and applicable ANSI and IEEE standards regarding harmonic distortion and surge protection. 5. Ballasts shall be high power factor, 90% or above, with a sound rating of A, and shall bear UL and ETL labels. P+ 6. Ballasts shall be designed for parallel lamp connections and shall be matched to T -8 (265ma) 1, 2, 3, or 4 lamp configurations or T -12 (430mA or 800mA) 2 or 4 lamp configurations. 7. Ballasts shall be provided with capability to properly start at temperatures where fixture is installed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures to permit removal from below and to gain access to outlet or pre -wired fixture box. B. Connect recessed fixture to boxes with flexible conduit and fi xture wire as specified in Section 260500. Write circuit numbers on side of recessed fluorescent fixtures. C. Install 2x2 fluorescent fixtures in sales areas on each floor level oriented with lamps in the same direction. 265000 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 265000 — LIGHTING D. Mount recessed fluorescent ceiling fixtures in suspended ceiling with exposed T -bar grid system, support from ceiling T -bar grid structure and secure thereto. E. Install fixture housings rigidly and adjust for neat flush fit with the ceiling or other finished mounting surfaces. F. Coordinate preparation and installation of fixtures installed in suspended acoustical ceilings with 095113. G. Mount and connect adjoining lengths of light track, and make all electrical power supply connections of light track. H. All recessed light fixtures with doors required to open for relamping shall be installed so that door swings away from light track mounted adjacent to light fixture. I. Install lamps at time of fixture installation; except as otherwise noted. Re- secure all lamps in sockets that are factory pre - installed in fixture. Lamps may be loosened during shipping. J. Install lenses, reflectors, side panels, louvers, and other components necessary to complete fixture installation, leaving fixtures in proper operating condition. Install louvers, lenses, and reflectors using clean white gloves. Remove all fingerprints, dirt, dust, etc. and leave in like -new condition prior to turnover. K. Protect light track and lighting fixtures prior to painting of ceilings and coves. Provide clear sheet polyethylene at light fixtures having parabolic louvers at time of installation to protect fixtures from dust and paint overspray. Cut sheeting 6 inches larger on all sides to assure total protection. Replace with new all louvers, lenses and reflectors contaminated with paint. The removal of paint and paint overspray is not acceptable due to damage caused to the reflective surfaces. L. Coordinate installation and painting of trim rings of recessed incandescent fixtures mounted in gypsum board and other similar hard surface ceilings with Section 099000. Furnish the trim rings to Section 099000 for field painting prior to installation. M. Field modification to the light track will be required when the light tracks pre - punched attachment points do not align with the ceiling grid. Field modification will generally occur when the track is mounted perpendicular or 45 degrees to the ceiling grid. Where this occurs the Contractor shall install light track mounting clips at maximum of 3' -6" on center and maximum of 6" from end of field cut light track. Every section of light track regardless to length shall be supported by light track mounting clips. Field drill light track for installation of mounting clips as required to achieve maximum spacing of mounting clip supports. Start light track at first pre - drilled attachment point adjacent to canopy feed. N. Exit signs indicated in areas open to the public such as Sales, Dressing rooms, Entries, etc., shall be ceiling mounted whenever possible. Exit signs indicated in non - public areas such as stock rooms, exit corridors, etc., shall be either ceiling or wall mounted. All relocated light fixtures shall be removed, handled and reinstalled with white gloves. Before reinstallation clean and relamp. Reballast if existing ballast failing. O. Provide seismic bracing, where applicable, as follows: 1. Mount fixtures and Tight track straight and secure using earthquake wire and seismic clips to comply with applicable code requirements. 2. Install minimum of 2 earthquake wires for each recessed fluorescent fixture and each 8 foot section of light track; connect wires to the structure. 3.2 RELAMPING AND REBALLASTING A. Replace defective ballasts with new throughout the construction until phase turnover. Contractor shall maintain the extra quantities of spare ballasts for Owner's maintenance purposes; refer to Article 1.8. Contractor shall use the LOF after ballast replacement to restock defined inventory quantities of spare ballasts. B. Replace defective or burnt out lamps throughout the construction until phase turnover. Replacement lamps for Owner furnished fixtures will be furnished by the Owner. 265000 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 265000 — LIGHTING 3.3 CLEANUP A. Immediately prior to the time of Store turnover, clean fixtures and lamps, free from dust and other contaminants. Replace chipped or broken parts. B. Remove protective coverings from light fixtures, lenses, louvers, and reflectors. C. Remove protective polyethylene sheeting used to protect fixtures from dust and paint overspray. D. Replace all louvers, lenses and reflectors which have gotten paint on them. END OF SECTION 265000 -7 07/21/08 • NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 270000 — COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Installation, termination, labeling and testing of cables, device outlets and distribution panels for the following: 1. Structured Telecommunication cabling system. 2. Wireless LAN system. B. Demolition of abandoned cable and resupport of existing to remain cable. C. Related Sections: 1. 012200 — UNIT PRICES: Unit price for special store opening services. 2. 260013 — ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS: Electrical Record Drawings. 3. 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL: Installation of sleeves for cable penetrations through floors, shafts and walls; providing conduit and outlet box systems with pull wire; floor boxes and poke through devices. D. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this section. E. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000. 1.2 DATA AND VOICE COMMUNICATIONS CONTRACT WORK A. General: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for the installation as indicated, in accordance with general provisions of specifications and the Contract Drawings. 2. Report percentage of work completed on a monthly basis. 3. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades. 4. Provide all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation, whether or not specifically indicated in the Contract Documents. 5. Provide all floor penetrations, floor sleeves, conduit raceways, wall penetrations, etc. not shown on the electrical plans but needed for the routing of cabling provided herein. 6. Provide labor for work area patch cord installation at designated workstations. 7. Provide labor for equipment patch cord installation at patch panel to Ethernet switch port. 8. Provide labor for voice patch cord installation at horizontal patch panel to voice cross - connect patch panel in MC and HC. 9. Provide labor and materials for voice cross - connect between existing PBX field and new voice wiring blocks in MC. 10. Provide labor for testing horizontal and backbone cabling. 11. Provide firestopping. 12. Provide labor for relocation of existing Wireless LAN Access Points and Antennas. 13. Provide Telecommunications grounding and bonding. 14. Provide NEC compliant open cable support system for all existing -to- remain telecommunication cabling. 15. Removal and disposal of all abandoned cable. 16. Recable and reconnect existing LAN equipment as shown on drawings. 17. Provide cutover support to Owner as deemed necessary during all phases of the construction. Contractor shall plan for this work to occur after normal business hours. 18. Verify and document locations and labels of all existing voice and data devices. B. Provide complete installation for Structured Telecommunications Cabling System including but not limited to: 1. Category 5e UTP horizontal cables. 2. Category 3 multipair backbone cables. 270000 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 270000 — COMMUNICATIONS 3. Work area telecommunication outlets. 4. Wall mounted voice outlets. 5. Equipment mounting racks and rack enclosures. 6. Category 5e modular patch panels. 7. Data and Voice Category 5e patch cords 8. Wire management panels. 9. Sound, Paging, Telephone interface cabling. 10. Field testing. 11. Patch cord installation. 12. Conduit floor sleeves, conduit and supports required for installation of all cabling. 13. Wireless LAN installation. 14. Firestopping. C. Purchasing 1. Purchase all materials from Graybar Seattle per Nordstrom /Graybar National Price Agreement. Contact Nordstrom Graybar National Account Representative or Graybar Customer Service Representative at 800/933 -4849. 2. Provide complete inventory takeoff indicating price breakdown of materials and handling fees. D. Work and materials by others (NIC) include: 1. Furnishing and installation of computer hardware and related networking software and equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Sections 013300, 017700 and 260013 as appropriate. B. Submit complete, at one time. Partial submittals will not be considered. C. Product Data: 1. Submit in booklet form with data arranged under basic categories; i.e., LAN System. Include a typewritten index with dividers and identifying tabs between sections and references to Section of the Specifications. 2. Submit 6 product data booklets with the item or model to be used clearly marked, showing ratings where appropriate for approval and coordination. 3. Submit the resumes and certifications of all technicians and the project manager who will support this project. 4. The certifications shall include: a. Structured Cabling and termination equipment installation certifications for copper and optical fiber connectivity and cabling. b. Approved manufacturer classes satisfactorily completed. D. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings of communications cabling pathway system, floor sleeves and raceway. 2. Drawings shall show exact routing of all a. Category 5e horizontal cables throughout the building. b. Voice and data intrabuilding backbone cables between MC and HC's. 3. Shall identify all raceways, conduit sleeves or cable management equipment used to route and protect cables. 4. Indicate type and quantity of cables included in each pathway segment. 5. Verify pathways for Category 5e data cables do not exceed the maximum cable length of 295 feet (90 meters). 6. All shop drawings shall be generated using a CAD program. 7. Submit shop drawings for approval and coordination. E. Test Reports: Submit 4 copies of complete reports of all testing performed to the General Contractor, with copies to the Architect's Electrical Engineer two weeks prior to Store Turnover. Include final copy in each 0 & M Manual. 270000 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 270000 - COMMUNICATIONS F. Record Drawings: Keep a complete set of all Electrical Drawings in jobsite office for showing actual installation of cable and equipment. 1. Use this set of Drawings for no other purpose. 2. Where any material, equipment or system component is installed differently from that shown, indicate difference clearly and neatly using ink or indelible pencil. 3. Prior to project completion, submit record set of Drawings to the Architect. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation Standards: Cable installation shall comply with the following: 1. NEC® 2005: National Electric Code®, 2005. 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568 -B.1 -2001. Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. Part 1: General Requirements (Approved April 2001). 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568- B.1 -1: Addendum 1 - Minimum 4 -Pair UTP ScTP Patch Cable Bend Radius (July 2001). 4. ANSUTIA/EIA- 568- B.1 -2: Addendum 2. - Grounding and Bonding Specifications for Screened Balanced Twisted -Pair Horizontal Cabling. 5. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568- B.1 -3: Supportable Distances and Channel Attenuation for Optical Fiber Applications by Fiber Type (July 2003). 6. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568- B.1 -4: Recognition of Category 6 and 850nm Laser - Optimized 50/125pm Multimode Optical Fiber Cabling (July 2003). 7. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2 -2001: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling (Approved April 2001) 8. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568- B.2 -1: Addendum 1 - Transmit Performance Specifications for 4 -Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 (June 2002). 9. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568- B.2 -2: Addendum 2 (December 2001). 10. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568- B.2 -3: Addendum 3 - Additional Considerations for Insertion Loss and Return Loss Pass /Fail Determination (March 2002). 11. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568- B.2 -4: Addendum 4 - Solderless Connection Reliability Requirements for Copper Connecting Hardware (March 2002). 12. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568- B.2 -5: Addendum 5 - Corrections to TIA/EIA- 568 -B.2 (January 2003). 13. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568 -B.3 -2000: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standards (Approved March 2000). 14. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568- B.3 -1: Transmission Performance Specifications for 50/125pm Optical Cables (April 2002). 15. TIA- 569 -B: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces (October 2004). 16. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 606 -A. The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications infrastructure of Commercial Building (May 2002). 17. ANSI/TIA/EIA -J- STD - 607 -A. Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications (October 2002). 18. ANSI /EIA/TIA -758 - Customer Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard (August 2004). 19. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 526 -14 -A -1998 - Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant - OFSTP -14A. 20. TIA -598 -C - Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding (January 2005). B. Materials: 1. All materials shall be U.L. labeled where labeling is normally visible. 2. Equipment shall be regularly catalogued items of the manufacturer and shall be supplied as a complete unit in accordance with the manufacturer's standard specifications with any optional items required for proper installation unless otherwise noted. 3. Material shall be delivered to the site in the original packing. C. Codes: Comply with the governing requirements indicated in Section 260013. D. Pre - Installation Conference: In accordance with Section 013119. 1. Schedule a conference a minimum of 10 calendar days prior to beginning work of this section. 270000 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 270000 — COMMUNICATIONS 2. Agenda: Clarify questions related to work to be performed, scheduling, and coordination. Identify date for completion of riser cross connects. 3. Attendance: Communications Cabling Contractor, General Contractor, Architect, Owner's representatives, and other parties affected by work of this section. 4. General Contractor will coordinate all scheduled meetings with Nordstrom ISG Project Manager. E. Approved Installers: Note: Each installer shall list name of project manager and field installer Name: Cochran Address 626 SE Main, Portland, Oregon 97214 Phone (503)- 234 -6564 Contact Brad Morton Email: bmortoncochraninc.com Name: ComNet Communications, LLC Certification: Address: 15249 N. 59th Avenue, Glendale, AZ 85306 Phone: 602 - 978 -7496 Contact: Karen Walsh Name: Christenson Electric Address: 111 SW Columbia, Suite 480, Portland, OR 97201 Phone: (503) 419.3300 Contact: Jon Holcomb Email: jon.holcombe Name: Dynalectric Address 5805 SW Hood Avenue, Portland, OR 97239 Phone (503) 226-6771 Contact Wayne Gnesenauer Email: woriesenauer portland.com Name: EBS Econotel, Business Systems, Inc. Certification: Address 15 Circle St., East Providence, RI 02916 Phone 401 - 435 -4900 Contact Carol Ann Hurley Name: Henkels & McCoy, Inc Certification: Certified Installer Plus -Gold Address 506A Stump Road, Montgomeryville, PA 18936 Phone 800 - 622 -5577 x1895 Contact Mr. Rich Henkels Name SER Communications Certification: Certified Installer Plus Address 24650 Sherwood, Center Line, MI 48015 Phone 586- 427 -1051 Contact Ms. Jenny Omell Name Spencer Technologies Certification Address 640 Lincoln Street, Worcester, MA 01605 Phone 847 - 296 -3916 Contact Ms. Pamela Kazackas 1.5 CONSTRUCTION PHASING AND SCHEDULING A. All work shall be scheduled and completed in compliance with the General Contractor's construction - phasing plan. B. The existing data /voice MC and HC's are scheduled to remain unless otherwise noted. The existing MC and HC shall remain operation at all times. 270000 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 270000 — COMMUNICATIONS C. Care should be taken during demolition of walls and pathways to preclude damage to existing cables that are required to maintain store operations. D. Work, such as cable pulling and pathway installation shall be required in areas outside the scope of the current phasing schedule. Plan for this work to occur in these areas after normal business hours to avoid interference with normal store operations. Plan for this work to occur in areas that are not cleared from merchandise, displays, stock, etc., and that will require preparation time to properly protect such obstacles. E. Contractor shall provide cut over support as deemed necessary to support all phases of the construction. Plan for this work to occur after normal business hours. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Deliver maintenance materials to the Owner under provisions of Section 017700. B. Order patch cords at beginning of project to ensure timely delivery. C. Modular Patch Cords with No Boot: Provide the following quantities, lengths, and colors. Item # Cable length Color Quantity Part Number System 1 3' -0" Red 10 each Ortronics, OR- MC5E03 -02 LAN 2 5' -0" Red 30 each Ortronics, OR- MC5E05 -02 LAN 3 7' -0" Red 85 each Ortronics, OR- MC5E07 -02 LAN 4 9' -0" Red 30 each Ortronics, OR- MC5E09 -02 LAN 5 3' -0" Purple 10 each Ortronics, OR- MC5E03 -07 POS 6 5' -0" Purple 75 each Ortronics, OR- MC5E05 -07 POS 7 7' -0" Purple 175 each Ortronics, OR- MC5E07 -07 POS 8 3' -0" Blue 10 each Ortronics, OR- MC5E03 -06 Voice Digital 9 5' -0" Blue 75 each Ortronics, OR- MC5E05 -06 Voice Digital 10 7' -0" Blue 75 each Ortronics, OR- MC5E07 -06 Voice Digital 11 7' -0" Gray 50 each Ortronics, OR- MC5E07 -08 Voice Analog 12 5' -0" Orange 12 each Ortronics, OR- MC5E05 -03 Wireless LAN 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. B. Provide Ortronics NetClear® Manufacturer's warranty for structured cabling system. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 OPEN CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEM A. Provide Caddy "CableCat" #CAT21 wide base J -hooks cable supports for cable bundles up to 40 cables and "CableCat" #CAT32 for up to 70 cables. B. Provide Caddy CAT #425 saddle supports for cable bundles greater than 70 cables. C. Provide open cable supports for each system to comply with Part 3. D. Provide plenum rated cable ties. Panduit, Part No: PLT2S -C702Y or equal. E. Provide yellow spiral wrap for routing cable within casework from floorbox to outlet box. Panduit, Part No. T50F -C4Y. 270000 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 270000 — COMMUNICATIONS 2.2 LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) INFRASTRUCTURE A. Category 5e Horizontal Cable: 1. Berk -Tek, Part No.:10032060 a. UL listed type CMP; 24 -AWG, four twisted pairs, solid copper conductors with yellow jacket. B. Category 3, Voice Intrabuilding Backbone: 1. Berk -Tek, Part No. 10032036 (25 pair) or Berk -Tek, Part No. 10032122 (50 pair) a. UL listed type CMP, 24 -AWG solid copper conductors with blue plenum rated fluropolymer jacket. 2. Provide multi -pair cables from voice cross - connect patch panels in each HC to wall mounted cross - connect blocks in MC as indicated on the drawings. C. Communication Outlets: Where indicated on drawings, data and voice jacks shall share a common outlet. 1. Category 5e Modules: Provide 8 position — 8 conductor non -keyed modules wired in accordance with EIA/TIA T568B PIN configuration standard to terminate Category 5e UTP cables as specified herein. a. Category 5e module, color: electric ivory: Ortronics Part No.: OR- TJ5E00 -13. 2. Flush Mounted Outlets: a. 6 -Port Faceplate, color: electric ivory: Ortronics Part No.: OR- 40300545 -13 b. Category 5e module, color: electric ivory: Ortronics Part No.: OR- TJ5E00 -13. c. Blank modules as needed, color: electric ivory: Ortronics Part No.: OR- 42100002 -13 (kit of10) 3. Surface Mount Outlets: (Cashwraps) a. Provide surface mount outlet box in color electric ivory, Ortronics Part No.: OR- 40300185- 13. b. 6 -Port Faceplate, color: electric ivory: Ortronics Part No.: OR- 40300545 -13 4. Low Profile Surface Mount Outlets for Wireless LAN and Command Post locations a. Provide low- profile two -port surface mount outlet boxes in color electric ivory. b. Ortronics Part No.: OR- 40400054 -13. 5. Wall Phone Outlets: a. Faceplate kit with Category 5e module. 1) Allentel Part No.: AT630B -8 6. Column Outlets a. Where indicated on drawings, provide 6 -port flush face plate in color black to match column, Ortronics Part No.: OR- 40300545 -00 b. Category 5e module, color: black: Ortronics Part No.: OR- TJ5E00 -00. c. Blank modules as needed, color: black: Ortronics Part No.: OR- 42100002 -00 (kit of10) 7. Flush Floorbox Outlets: a. Tracjack Device Bezel: Walker # MAB6TJ. b. RJ -45 Cat 5e module: Ortronics #OR- TJ5E00. c. Blank modules as needed: Ortronics #OR- 42100002 (kit of 10). d. Mount in floorbox flange. 8. Identification: Provide identification icon tabs for each RJ -45 module at the communications outlet and patch panel as follows: a. Red: Ortronics Part No.: OR40322200 for all LAN data locations. b. Purple: Ortronics Part No.: OR- 40327200 for all POS data locations. c. Blue: Ortronics Part No.: OR- 40326100 for all digital voice cross - connects at the patch panels in the MC and HC and digital voice locations at the communications outlet. d. Gray: Ortronics Part No.: OR- 40328100 for all analog voice locations at the communications outlet and analog voice cross - connects at the patch panels in the MC and HC. D. Equipment Racks: Equip as detailed on the Drawings and as follows: 1. Racks for PBX, Patch Panels, and Switches: a. Provide racks as indicated on Drawings for rack mounted connecting hardware and Owner furnished equipment. Racks shall be assembled at 19 inches wide x 7' -2" tall. 1) CPI Part No. 46353 -503. 270000 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 270000 — COMMUNICATIONS 2. Vertical cable management panel: a. CPI Part No. 11729 -503. (6" wide) b. CPI Part No. 12096 -503. (3.65" wide) 3. Horizontal cable management panel: a. Ortronics Part No.: OR- 808044915. (Standard) b. Ortronics Part No.: OR- 60400129. (1 RU) 4. Distribution Rack Grounding: CPI Part No.: 08009 -001; furnish ground terminal block for each rack. Racks shall be grounded using stranded #6 AWG green insulated copper conductor. Furnish all required bonding material and hardware, and bond to building grounding electrode subsystem at building electrical service entrance. 5. Power Protection Strips: a. CPI Part No.: 12853 -706. Provide as indicated on Drawings. 6. Cable Management Straps: Ortronics Part No.: OR- 70700079 -00. Furnish 50 straps total. E. Category 5e Modular Patch Panels: 1. Ortronics Part No.: OR- PHD5E6U48 High- Density 48 -port Category 5e patch panel; units are modular to 110 printed circuit board style patch panels. Furnish quantities required to terminate UTP horizontal cables indicated on the Drawings for the MC and HCs. F. Category 5e Non -Keyed Modular Patch Cords: Quantities and lengths as scheduled in PART 1, shall be delivered to Owner, minus those installed. 1. Install patch cords in accordance with Nordstrom ISG patch chord installation list provided by the ISG project manager. G. 110 Series Wiring Blocks: 1. Provide wiring blocks constructed of fire retardant molded plastic with color -coded horizontal index strips that secure and organize 25 -pairs each. The wiring blocks shall accommodate 22 through 26 AWG cable size conductors and shall be suitable for installation on terminal backboards as shown on the drawings. Provide 110 blocks as shown on drawings. Use five (5) C -4 clips and one (1) C -5 clip on station 110 blocks for terminating. 2. At the MC provide 110 series connecting hardware and wire management for horizontal cabling interconnects and cross - connects. a. Provide 300 pair block with legs, Ortronics Part No.: OR- 30200007. b. Provide 110 jumper trough with legs, Ortronics Part No.: OR- 30200140. c. Provide 4 pair 110C connecting blocks, Ortronics Part No.: OR- 30200109. d. Provide 5 pair 110C connecting blocks, Ortronics Part No.: OR- 30200110. e. Provide designation kit with stripholders for horizontal cabling, Ortronics Part No.: OR- 70400272. 2.3 SURGE SUPPRESSION A. Furnished and installed under Section 260500, Article 2.4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: GENERAL A. Open Cable Support installation: 1. This contractor shall furnish and install all supports for cables specified in this section. 2. Cable supports shall be spaced no further than 5' -0" apart. 3. Provide all additional cable management products, sleeves or conduit raceways as required to protect exposed cabling and complete the installation of cables in a neat manner. 4. All floor penetrations shall be at columns, exterior walls or in equipment rooms. 5. Cables shall be supported at height of bottom flange of structural beams using a rigid support method i.e., threaded rod, beam clamps, etc. 6. Do not support cables from ductwork, sprinkler piping, water piping, waste piping, conduit, ceiling wire, or other system supports. 7. Provide independent support system for each low voltage cabling system. 270000 -7 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 270000 — COMMUNICATIONS 8. Use saddle type fabric supports for major pathways and J -hooks or saddle supports for minor pathways. Do not exceed recommended fill capacity of supports. B. Cable Installation: 1. All cables shall be bundled using plenum rated ties 5' -0" on center (at mid - span). 2. Separation: Maintain the following distances between cables, other system cables and other building systems: a. One (1) foot from fluorescent lights. b. Four (4) feet from motors and transformers c. Three (3) feet from hot water piping or other mechanical equipment. d. One (1) foot from electrical conduits, other systems cables or other electrical equipment. 3. Remove the minimum amount of cable insulation required to complete that cable termination. 4. Remove a maximum of % inch of factory installed 'cable twist' for Category 5e. 5. All cable below 10' -0" AFF shall be in conduit or run in stud cavity. 6. All low voltage cables shall be run exposed as "open cabling" in ceiling spaces and ceiling plenums. 7. All low voltage cables shall be run parallel or at right angles to building structural framework. Do not run cables diagonally across ceiling space without written authorization by the Architect's Electrical Engineer. 8. Run all low voltage cables in continuous runs from termination locations at equipment or outlet locations; splices are not permitted. Label all cables at each termination. See drawings for label designations. 9. Fire seal around all cables running through rated floors and walls in accordance with requirements of Section 078400. 10. Install cables per manufacturer's recommendations including but not limited to maximum tensile loading and maximum bend radius. 11. Velcro straps shall be utilized in the MC and inside HC enclosures for all cable bundling. Tie wraps shall be prohibited in the telecommunication rooms. 12. Leave spare pull string with every outlet installed. 13. Provide services loops of the following lengths for horizontal cables above racks and outlets. a. Equipment Racks (MC /HC) — 10 feet b. Work Area Outlets — 5 feet c. Wireless LAN Access Points — 50 feet maximum. Note: Total horizontal cable length including service loop shall not exceed 295 feet. 14. Horizontal cable service loops shall be a neatly coiled loop of proper bend radius. Service loop at Work Area outlets shall be coiled in ceiling space above outlet. Service loops at equipment racks shall be bundled neatly in cable tray above HC enclosures and MC racks. 3.2 INSTALLATION: COMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE A. Category 5e Horizontal Cables: 1. Maximum cable lengths to be 295 feet (90 m) including service loop. Provide all necessary installation materials, tools and equipment to perform insulation displacement type terminations at all communications outlets, patch panels and 110 punch -down blocks. 2. Support and secure cables at patch panels using rear cable management bracket supplied with panel. 3. Install stuffer caps on each workstation outlet and patch panel port after cable has been terminated on 110 IDC. B. Installation - Voice Communications System 1. Install Category 3, multi -pair voice backbone cables utilizing an independent open cabling pathway from the horizontal cabling and optical fiber cabling. 270000 -8 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 270000 — COMMUNICATIONS 2. In each HC and the MC, terminate the category 3 multi -pair backbone cables on the voice cross - connect patch panels indicated on the drawings. Contractor shall terminate two cable pairs on each 8- position modular jack of the patch panel. Using the T568B termination designation, the Contractor shall terminate the cable pairs on Pair 2, Orange (Pins 1 and 2) and Pair 3, green (Pins 3 and 6). On the last 12 ports (37 -48) on the last voice patch panel, the two cable pairs shall be terminated on Pair 1, blue (Pins 4 and 5) and Pair 3, green (Pins 3 and 6) for analog handsets. The analog ports will require analog icons and analog labels denoting that ports 37-48 are for analog handsets only. 3. For each voice cross - connect, provide the appropriate color icon at each patch panel port at the HCs and MC. 4. For each of the voice locations identified by Nordstrom ISG, include the installation of the Category 5e patch cord from the station patch panel to the voice backbone patch panel at the MC and HCs. Assume 150 devices for bidding purposes. 5. For each of the voice locations identified by Nordstrom ISG, include the installation of the patch cord from the telephone to the workstation outlet. The Owner shall provide the patch cord. 6. For each voice location identified by ISG, include the installation of cross - connects from existing PBX cross - connect field to new voice cross - connect field in the MC. Assume 250 devices for bidding purposes. 7. Use green /white, white /green, orange /white, white /orange 2 pair cross - connect wire for cross - connects from the existing PBX cross - connect field and the new voice cross - connect field in the MC. 8. Use blue /white, white /blue 1 pair cross - connect wire for analog cross - connect from the existing PBX cross - connect field and the new voice cross - connect field in the MC. 9. Cross - connects shall be completed as per construction schedule. C. Racks And Enclosures: 1. Freestanding equipment racks and enclosures shall be protected free of all dust, debris and other environmental elements during construction until substantial completion walk - through. 2. Each rack, enclosure shall have a dedicated #6 AWG ground wire to a grounding busbar or building ground as defined by NEC. 3. Secure racks and enclosures to floor using rack installation kit. 3.3 SOUND AND PAGING A. Existing to remain. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM Relocate, recable and reconnect wireless LAN at outlets as indicated on drawings. Reuse existing surface mount outlet box and patch cord. B. Access Point/Antenna (Owner Provided) Installation 1. Install all Access Points /Antennas at locations shown on the Contract (Construction) Drawings. 2. Install Access Points in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Access Point configuration completed by Owner. C. Category 5e UTP cable installation 1. Sales Floor Access Point Locations a. Install one category 5e UTP cable from the serving MC /HC and terminate with a category 5e plug. b. A 50 -foot service loop shall be coiled in the ceiling space above the Access Point without exceeding the manufacturer's bend radius. 2. Stock Room Access Point Locations a. Install one category 5e UTP cable from the serving MC /HC and terminate with a category 5e module. b. Install the module in a Surface Mount Interface Box mounted adjacent to the Access Point. c. A 50 -foot service loop shall be coiled in the ceiling space above the Access Point without exceeding the manufacturer's bend radius. 270000 -9 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 270000 — COMMUNICATIONS 3.5 LABELING A. General: 1. All labels shall be permanent labels produced by a labeling machine. 2. Labeling information will be reviewed at Pre - Install Meeting. B. Cabling 1. Install labels on all cables at each end. 2. All labels shall be located within 6 inches of cable termination and placed so they can be easily read. 3. Each cable shall be labeled with the following: telecommunication closet prefix rack number, patch panel number, and port number. Example: M- 2 -1 -01 (for MC) and H1- 1 -1 -01 (for HC1). C. Communications Outlet Labeling: 1. Label each device plate with cable designation. 2. Each communications outlet will be labeled with the following telecommunication closet prefix rack number, patch panel number, and port number. Example: M- 2 -1 -01 (for MC) and H1- 1 -1 -01 (for HC). D. MC and HC Rack Labeling: 1. Identify each freestanding rack in the MC and each HC enclosure with engraved lamacoid nameplates fastened to the equipment with epoxy adhesive. Nameplates shall be 1/8 ", 5 -ply lamacoid with 'A" white letters on black background. E. Patch Panel Labeling 1. Category 5e Modular Patch Panels a. 48 -port modular patch panels shall be labeled with sequential numbering starting with "PP #01" for the topmost patch panel and moving downward to the bottom of the rack. Patch panel labels shall be affixed to the left hand side of the patch panel. 2. Voice Cross - Connect Patch Panel a. Voice cross - connect patch panels shall be labeled sequentially starting with "VPP1" for the topmost voice cross - connect patch panel and moving downward to the bottom of the rack. Patch panel labels shall be affixed to the left hand side of the patch panel. F. 110 Wiring Block Labeling: 1. Provide color coded 110 designation strips and label strip with voice cross - connect patch panel number (e.g. VPP1) and indicate the position on the 110 block for each of the ports on the voice cross - connect patch panel (e.g. 1 — 24.) G. Access Point Labeling: 1. Access Point cables shall be labeled at both ends in accordance with Communication Outlet Labeling. 3.6 TESTING A. Test procedures shall be as described by the TIA/EIA- 568 -B: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Parts 2 and 3 and TIA/EIA- 526 -14 -A -1998 - Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant - OFSTP -14A. B. Permanent Link Testing shall be completed on all horizontal (station) cables. C. Submit test reports to the General Contractor 2 weeks prior to Store Turnover. Test reports shall be provided electronically in an Adobe Acrobat (PDF) format. D. Category 5e Cable Testing: 1. All wiring shall be certified to meet or exceed the specifications as set forth in TIA/EIA-568B for Category 5e requirements for permanent link. 2. Field Testing shall include the following parameters for each pair of each cable installed: a. Store number and name. b. Test equipment manufacturer and model number. c. Cable I.D. The test sheets will be in numerical order by cable ID. 270000 -10 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 270000 — COMMUNICATIONS d. Date of test. e. Wire map (pin to pin connectivity and polarity check) i.e. near 12345678, far 12345678. f. Length (in feet). g. Insertion Loss. h. Near End Crosstalk (NEXT). i. Power Sum Near End Crosstalk (PSNEXT). j. Equal -Level Far End Crosstalk (ELFEXT). k. Power Sum Equal -Level Far End Crosstalk (PSELFEXT). I. Return Loss. m. Delay Skew. n. Attenuation to Crosstalk ratio (ACR). o. DC Resistance per 100M/328 feet. p. Impedance. q. Capacitance. 3. Record test results for each cable and turn over to the General Contractor two weeks prior to Store Turnover. Correct malfunctions when detected, and re -test to demonstrate compliance. Note: Test equipment shall be a Type Ile cable. E. Voice Backbone Testing: 1. All wiring shall be certified to meet or exceed the specifications as set forth in TIA/EIA -568B for Category 3 requirements for permanent Zink. Certifications shall include the following parameters for each pair of each cable installed: a. Store number and name. b. Cable I.D. The test sheets will be in numerical order by cable ID. c. Date of test. d. Wire map (pin to pin connectivity and polarity check) i.e. near 12345678 -far 12345678. e. Length (in feet). f. Impedance. g. Attenuation. h. DC Resistance per 100M/328 feet. 2. Record test results for each cable and turn over to the General Contractor two weeks prior to Store Tumover. Correct malfunctions when detected, and re -test to demonstrate compliance. 3.7 EXTENDED PRODUCT WARRANTY & APPLICATIONS ASSURANCE REGISTRATION A. The Extended Product Warranty covers all Ortronics and Ortronics- approved products used in the cabling system. B. The Applications Assurance is a warranty on the performance of the system and inherently includes the Extended Product warranty on all Ortronics and Ortronics- approved products used in the cabling system. C. Once the project is complete and all testing has been done in accordance with Section 3, the project must be registered and approved by Ortronics to initiate the warranty. D. The Telecommunication Contractor must submit the following to Ortronics: 1. Warranty Registration Form 2. Bill of Materials 3. Test results in electronic form for the copper systems. (Note: Hard copies will not be accepted.) E. Once the submitted materials are reviewed, the Telecommunications Contractor will be notified in writing of acceptance or rejection. If the project is accepted, the contractor will receive a letter of acceptance, a copy of the signed Warranty Registration Form and a warranty certificate for the Owner. F. The Telecommunication Contractor shall forward the signed Warranty Registration Form and warranty certificate to the Nordstrom ISG Project Manager. 270000 -11 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 270000 — COMMUNICATIONS 3.8 ORTRONICS CERTIFICATION A. All field technicians who work independently at any given time during the project shall have a minimum of one -year experience on completed telecommunications projects of like magnitude and complexity. Field technicians with Tess than one year experience shall always work together with a field technician who has a minimum of one -year experience on completed telecommunications projects of like magnitude and complexity. A minimum of 50% of the field technicians working at the job site shall have completed an Ortronics Installer Technician Training course. Provide copies of certification for each technician as part of the Product Data submittal. B. All technicians performing the termination of optical fiber connectors shall have a minimum of two years experience on completed telecommunications projects of like magnitude and complexity and shall have completed an Ortronics Fiber Optic Training course. Provide copies of certification for each technician as part of the Product Data submittal. 3.9 ABANDONED CABLE AND DEMOLITION A. Contractor shall be responsible for the demolition, removal and disposal of all existing abandoned telecommunications cabling and infrastructure within areas affected by construction per NEC 2002 Article 800 and as identified on the contract drawings. B. Telecommunications cabling and infrastructure shall include but not limited to, face plates, surface mount devices, RJ11 modules, RJ45 modules, horizontal UTP cabling, copper and optical fiber backbone infrastructure, RG62 coaxial cabling, shielded POS cabling, ADO outlets, ADO termination blocks, innerduct, cabling support systems, equipment racks, horizontal and vertical wire management, equipment shelving, ladder tray, dedicated communications surface raceway, 110 and 66 blocks, rack mount and surface mount fiber cabinets and other related passive infrastructure. C. Contractor shall salvage all ADO outlets, telecommunications equipment racks, patch panels, horizontal and vertical wire management and optical fiber connectivity being demolished. These items shall be returned to the Owner unless directed by the Owner to be disposed of by the contractor. All other telecommunications passive infrastructure shall be disposed of by the contractor. D. Provide blank cover plates for demolished flush mount outlets, surface mount boxes and junction boxes. E. Provide (2) pull strings in each vertical conduit riser sleeves at the completion of demolition of existing cabling. F. Prior to bid, this contractor shall allow time for, and participate in, an on -site survey of existing conditions in order to understand the scope of work for demolition of abandoned cable. 3.10 EXISTING CABLE RESUPPORT A. Contractor shall be responsible for providing proper NEC compliant support for all existing -to- remain telecommunication cabling in areas affected by construction. B. Existing -to- remain telecommunication cabling shall include but is not limited to POS cabling scheduled to remain, UTP horizontal cable serving existing voice and data telecommunication outlets and multi -pair UTP and optical fiber backbone cable between HC's and the MC that is not abandoned. C. Prior to BID, this contractor shall allow time for, and participate in, an on -site survey of existing conditions in order to understand the scope of work for adding support for existing -to- remain cabling in areas affected by construction. D. D- Rings, and cable tie mounts shall be prohibited unless approved by the Electrical Engineer prior to installation. E. Maintain and resupport all existing analog and POTS voice circuits including but not limited to: 1. Energy Management Control System (EMCS) 2. UPS Shipping Machines. 3. Postage Meter 4. Security System 270000 -12 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 270000 — COMMUNICATIONS 5. Loss Prevention Room 6. Electric Meter 7. Fire Alarm 8. Freight and Passenger Elevators 9. Escalator Diagnostics 10. Console (Communications Room) 11. Sound and Paging Systems 3.11 DOCUMENTATION OF EXISTING DEVICES A. Verify and document the locations and labels of all existing voice and data workstation devices, patch panels, and termination blocks on existing telephone backboards and in the MC. B. Tone, tag and label any existing devices without labels. For bid purposes only include the cost to tone, tag and label 200 existing ports. 3.12 CLEANUP A. Leave all equipment clean and ready to use. Protect all equipment from damage during construction. Leave in new appearance. All enclosures shall be vacuumed to remove all dust and debris. Wipe all racks and enclosures so they are free of dust. Equipment not protected shall be replaced at the contractor's expense. END OF SECTION • 270000 -13 07/21/08 OPTICAL FIBER TEST FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (057) Remodel MULTI MODE Optical Fiber Attenuation Test BUILDING /ROOM # CABLE MFGR ACCEPTABLE CABLE TYPE RANGE CABLE SPAN 850NM CABLE LENGTH 1300NM MAKE OF TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER CABLE REEL ID# MODEL OF TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER CABLE # CONNECTOR JOB # TYPE CONNECTOR QUANTITY TESTER TESTER A B DATE NET LOSS A >B NET LOSS B >A AVERAGE LOSS WAVELENGTH WAVELENGTH WAVELENGTH FIBER FIBER 850NM 1300NM 850NM 1300NM 850NM 1300NM VISUAL VISUAL # COLOR PASS PASS • CUSTOMER I DATE 270813 7/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 274133 — AUDIO EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. High quality independent stereophonic music playback in BP department sales areas. 2. House and local paging in BP department sales area. B. Related Sections: 1. 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL: Raceways, floor outlet boxes, flexible conduit, and pull wires. 2. 274136 — VIDEO EQUIPMENT: Primary music source furnished by others and installed in this contract. 3. 274139 — MUSIC, PAGING, AND INTERCOM EQUIPMENT: Main store paging access into Brass Plum sound system. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000 — PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data submittals and shop drawings in accordance with requirements of • Section 013300 — SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. B. Record Drawings: Furnish in accordance with Section 017700 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. 1. Operations Manuals: Include a record of all typical control settings, locations of all remote volume controls, as -built block and physical wiring diagrams for all systems, and a list of cable identification codes. 2. Provide complete tagging and labeling of all communication lines at the main equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Approved Installers: 1. DMX, Seattle, WA (800- 223 -2822. 2. Leibold Communications, Inc., Seattle, Washington. Contact: Nick Leibold (206/286- 8981). 3. Muzak, Seattle, Washington (800/331 -3340; 206/633- 3000). 4. ECI Communications Corporation, Boca Raton, FL. Contact Claire Tsickritzis (561- 416 - 5880). B. Workmanship: Professional quality, best commercial practice, accomplished by persons experienced in the techniques and industry standards. C. Standby: Installer shall have qualified technicians available within one hour's notice for repair or service as needed for a 72 hour period during the opening of each department. D. Communication: Installer shall notify the Contractor immediately of any critical needs for electrical power or incidental raceways effecting completion of the system within the normal time schedule. 1.4 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Cable: 1. Speaker Cable: West Penn 25225 16AWG 2 conductor, stranded and jacketed, for plenum condition. 2. Microphone Cable: West Penn 25359 20AWG 2 conductor shielded with external pair, stranded and jacketed, for plenum condition. 274133 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 274133 — AUDIO EQUIPMENT 3. Bridle Rings: Caddy #4BRT32 /BC -200, or equal. B. Equipment Rack: 1. Cabinet: Middle Atlantic DWR2122 22" deep with VFD21 vented locking front door. 2. Blank Panels: Middle Atlantic PBL Series, textured black. Provide quantities as necessary to fill unused spaces. 3. Vent Panels: Middle Atlantic EVT Series, textured black. Provide quantities necessary for adequate amplifier cooling. 4. Rack Shelf: Middle Atlantic U3. Furnish 1 for PC music server to be laid on side. 5. Rack Fan: Middle Atlantic QFAN 115V 4.5" fan with guard. Furnish 2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide all devices as indicated on the plans, described herein, or as necessary for a complete job. Exercise all due care in handling of materials prior to installation. B. Cable Pulling: 1. A pull -wire will be found in all raceways as provided by the electrical subcontractor. 2. Pull all cable in all raceways, rigid, EMT and flexible conduit, exercising all due care to avoid damage to the cable in handling. 3. Brass Plum surface mounted speakers are connected 8 OHM and require individual home runs to selector switch in sound system console. 4. Coordinate with work of Section 095113 — ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS for number and placement of precut tile sections. 5. Coordinate with work of Section 099000 — PAINTING AND COATING for painting of speaker baffles. 6. Provide all terminations necessary for installation of speakers. 7. Bundle excess cable at each speaker location and ensure that the baffle seats firmly to the ceiling tile upon completion. 8. Ensure uniformity regarding visible screw head alignment on baffles where applicable. C. Loudspeaker Assemblies — Surface Mount: 1. Establish downward angle of speakers in manner that will minimize spillover into adjacent departments. D. Electronics: 1. Mount cashier microphone at one end of cashier stand closest to back wall. E. Equipment Cabinets: 1. Relocate BP equipment cabinet as indicated on drawings. 2. Provide sufficient lengths of cable, neatly bundled, to allow for movement of cabinet and equipment for service. 3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP A. See Section 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL for all low voltage cable installation requirements. B. Group and neatly bundle cables according, to type and route from source to termination in a uniform manner throughout all equipment housings and at all equipment locations. Take care not to break the insulation or deform the cable by harness supports. C. Do not group high and low or medium level audio cable together. D. Do not install power distribution wiring adjacent to signal or audio cables E. Neatly shorten power cords from individual equipment to power outlet strips to the proper length. F. Terminate audio and control wires in crimp -on lugs at terminal strips or with other approved devices. 274133 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 274133 — AUDIO EQUIPMENT G. Ground System: 1. The technical ground systems shall be of the "true" type with a main single tie point brought to the building ground. 2. Connect all equipment in a particular system to the main building ground at only one point. H. Firestop all penetrations through rated walls and floors, using fire barrier system specified in Section 078400 — FIRESTOPPING. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Tests: At the completion of the installation, perform all tests necessary to insure proper completion of the installation. Demonstrate correct operation of the system to the Architect, the Electrical Engineer, and Owner or his agent at the time of completion. 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS A. Furnish the following equipment for installation by the Electrical Subcontractor: 1. Equipment Cabinet backcan. 3.5 OPERATION INSTRUCTION A. At a time mutually agreeable between the Installer and the Owner, prior to the opening of each department, provide demonstration and instruction to the Owner's employees on the use of the stereo system. B. Obtain written acknowledgment of instruction to owner's employees at the time of instruction. C. Provide follow up instructions as needed prior to store opening. END OF SECTION 274133 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 274136 — VIDEO EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Video record and playback systems. 2. TV Distribution system. 3. Schedule of equipment locations. B. Related Sections: 1. 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL: Raceways, junction boxes, floor outlet boxes flexible conduit and power outlets. 2. 274133 — AUDIO EQUIPMENT: Audio distribution of stereo source programming. 3. 274143 — MASTER TELEVISION ANTENNA: Satellite dish, broadband antenna and mounting system. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this section. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. DBS TV distribution system includes appropriate signal amplification; splitting network and outlets, ready for connection to SATV source, with outlet locations as indicated. Refer to Section 274143 — MASTER TELEVISION ANTENNA for distribution components. B. Video playback system includes video player unit located in fixture, cashier stand or stock room; color TV mounted in custom fixture. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data submittals and shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300 — SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. B. Record Drawings: Furnish in accordance with Section 017700 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. 1. Operations Manuals: Include a record of all typical control settings, as -built block and wiring diagrams for all systems, additional instructions as necessary to describe complete system operation and a list of cable identification codes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Approved Installers: 1. DMX, Seattle, WA (800- 223 -2822. 2. Leibold Communications, Inc., Seattle, WA. Contact: Nick Leibold (206/286- 8981). 3. Muzak, Seattle, WA (800/331 -3340; 206/633 - 3000). 4. ECI Communications Corporation, Boca Raton, FL. Contact Claire Tsickritzis (561- 416- 5880). B. Workmanship: Professional quality, best commercial practice, accomplished by persons experienced in the techniques and industry standards. C. Standby: Installer shall have qualified technicians available within one hour's notice for repair or service as needed during a seventy -two hour period during the opening of each department. D. Communication: Installer shall notify the Contractor immediately of any critical needs for electrical power or incidental raceways effecting completion of the system within the normal time schedule. 1.5 SCHEDULING A. Deliver training system components, and video head cleaning cartridge to the Owner at Store turnover. 1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. 274136 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 274136 — VIDEO EQUIPMENT PART 2 - GENERAL 2.1 TV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM A. Distribution Amplifier: Refer to satellite system amplifier in Section 274143 — MASTER TELEVISION ANTENNA. B. RF Coaxial Cable: West Penn 25841 RG -6 /U type for plenum condition. C. Audio Cable: West Penn 25292 20 AWG with one pair shielded, jacketed for use in return air plenum. D. Component Video and Stereo Audio Cable: West Penn 258265 AWG tinned copper, flexible, miniature coaxial for plenum condition. 2.2 VIDEO COMPONENTS A. Televisions: 1. Type 15A LCD, 15 inch TFT LCD Monitor: Sharp LC15SH7U with Peerless SP730P articulating arm wall mount bracket for SHOE SHINE only 2. Type 20A LCD, 20 inch LCD Screen; Sharp LC20S7U with Peerless ST630 wall mount bracket. 3. Type 20B LCD, 20 inch 16:9 LCD Screen, Sharp LC19D45U with Peerless SF632 wall mount bracket. 4. Type 26A LCD, 26 inch TFT LCD HDTV monitor, Sharp LC26D43U with Peerless SF632 wall mount bracket. 5. Type 32A LCD, 32 inch TFT LCD HDTV monitor, Sharp LC32D44U with Peerless SF640 wall mount bracket. 6. Type 42A LCD, 42 inch 16 x 9 format LCD, display with built -in speakers at bottom: Sharp LCC42454U with Peerless SF650 wall bracket. B. DVDNCR Hi -Fi Stereo DVD Player and Video Cassette Recorder: 1/2 inch VHS format; Sony SLVD380P. C. DVD Professional Hi -Fi Stereo DVD Player: Pioneer DVDV5000. D. (BPVD) BP Video Display: Sales Floor Custom Projection System. 1. VGA Video Signal: Furnish West Penn 258265 26 AWG tinned copper, flexible, miniature coaxial cable for plenum condition. 2. RS232 Serial Cable: Furnish home run from each video projector platform to the video source. Use West Penn 25292 20 AWG with one pair shielded cable for plenum condition. E. DBS Satellite Receiver (DBS) specified in Section 274143 — MASTER TELEVISION ANTENNA. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Video Head Cleaning Cartridge: ALLSOP 61000 wet system; furnish 1. B. DVD Lens Cleaner: ALLSOP 23321 ultra pro lens cleaner; furnish 1. C. Bridle Rings: Caddy #4BRT32 /BC -200, or equal. D. Equipment Shelf: Lowell FS1816. Furnish one for each DBS receiver and DVDNCR. E. Component video and stereo audio distribution amplifier, 1x10: Kramer VM100CA. F. VGA -UXGA & Audio UR Distribution Amplifier: Kramer VP200NA 440 MHz RGBHV video bandwidth, one input two output. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Outlets: Install in MEN'S SHOES, COLLECTORS, BP BEDROOM and as indicated on Drawings. B. Cable Pulling: 1. Pull -wires in raceways are provided under Section 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. 2. Pull all cable with due care to avoid damage to the cable. 274136 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 274136 — VIDEO EQUIPMENT 3. Neatly dress out connecting cables and power cords from monitors to the ceiling. C. Connect distribution system to SATV source. See Section 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL for all low voltage cable installation requirements. D. Install televisions and DVDNCR units in casework as directed at location indicated on the Drawings. E. Install monitors and televisions in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. F. Coordinate location and requirements for BP video projector electrical and support system. G. Firestop all penetrations through fire rated walls and floors as specified in Section 078400 — FIRESTOPPING. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Field Tests: At the completion of the installation, perform all tests and adjustments necessary to ensure optimum operation of the installation. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Prior to Store opening, at a time mutually agreeable between the installer and the Owner, provide demonstration and instruction to the Owner's employees on the use of the TV and video system. B. Obtain written acknowledgment of instruction to Owner's employees at the time of instruction. C. Provide follow -up instruction as necessary prior to Store opening. 3.4 SCHEDULE LOCATION / TV VCRNCP /DVD NOTES DEPARTMENT (Quantity) (Each) BP 42A LCD DBS, DVDNCR Wall mount LCD video screen. Install DBS BEDROOM receiver and DVDNCR on surface mount equipment shelf above the BP sound system equipment cabinet. Connect composite video and audio L/R output of DBS receiver to AN input of DVDNCR. Connect AN composite video and audio L/R output of DVDNCR to "AV1" input of LCD video screen. Connect DVD -BP VGA video and audio UR output from dist. amp to video screen. Use screen remote control to switch between video sources. MEN'S SHOES 32A LCD DBS (2), Install DBS receivers and DVDNCR at location (2) DVDNCR (2) indicated on plans. See SATV Riser diagram for connection details. WOMEN'S 20A LCD DVDNCR (2) Video tower fixture, one 20 inch LCD screen APPAREL (2) and DVDNCR. Two complete systems. COSMETICS 20B LCD DVD Install LCD screen at locations indicated on (6) plans. Locate DVD player and distribution amplifier where indicated on plans. Connect stereo audio and component video output of amplifier to LCD screens. COSMETICS 26A LCD DVD Install LCD screen in landscape /horizontal position in casework. Connect DVD player to LCD screen using component video and stereo audio signal. COLLECTORS 15A LCD (3) DBS (3), Install DBS and DVDNCR on shelves in DVDNCR (3) stockroom. Connect audio and video to screen(s). END OF SECTION 274136 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 274139 — MUSIC, PAGING AND INTERCOM EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Background music, paging, intercom, and customer address systems, including wiring, hardware and other required parts for final connection of all miscellaneous equipment and devices provided by others. B. Related Sections: 1. 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL: All raceways, volume control outlet boxes, junction boxes, flexible conduit and floor outlet boxes, provided by the Electrical Contractor. 2. 274133 — AUDIO EQUIPMENT: BP system. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000 — PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Main Store Background Music and Paging System: 1. Background music and paging and signaling to all customer areas of the store. 2. Paging and signaling zone for all employee areas of the store. 3. STUDIO music system. B. Shoe Department Intercoms: 1. Provide at WOMEN'S SHOES, MEN'S SHOES, and CHILDREN'S SHOES. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data submittals and shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300 — SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. B. Record Drawings: Furnish in accordance with Section 017700 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. 1. Operations Manuals: Include a record of all typical control settings, locations of all remote volume controls, as -built block and wiring diagrams for all systems, and a list of cable identification codes. 2. Provide complete tagging and labeling of all communication lines at the main equipment console and the intercom equipment locations as part of Record Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Approved Installers: 1. DMX, Seattle, WA (800- 223 -2822. 2. Leibold Communications, Inc., Seattle, Washington. Contact: Nick Leibold (206/286- 8981). 3. Muzak, Seattle, Washington (800/331 -3340; 206/633 - 3000). 4. ECI Communications Corporation, Boca Raton, FL. Contact Claire Tsickritzis (561 - 416- 5880j. B. Workmanship: Professional quality, best commercial practice, and accomplished by persons experienced in the techniques and standards found in this industry. C. Field Tests: At the completion of the installation, perform all tests necessary to insure proper completion of the installation. Demonstrate correct operation of the system to the Contractor, Architect, and Owner or his agent at the time of completion. D. Standby: Installer shall have qualified technicians available within one hour's notice for repair or service as needed during 72 hour period before and following each phase opening. E. Communication: Installer shall notify the Contractor immediately of any critical needs for electrical power or incidental raceways effecting completion of the system within the normal time schedule. 274139 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 274139 - MUSIC, PAGING AND INTERCOM EQUIPMENT F. Contractor shall perform a balancing walk -thru to rebalance the entire sound system at the completion of system installation. Walk -thru shall be comprehensive to include all speakers and all sub - systems that are new and all existing components in the store not included in the new scope of work. Contractor shall identify any components of the existing sound system not fully operational and notify the Architect in writing to provide opportunity for corrective action prior to project completion. 1.5 SCHEDULE A. Paging system shall be operational at all times throughout remodel. 1.6 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Standard Loud Speaker Assemblies (Type S1): 1. In Suspended Acoustical Ceiling Tile: a. Back boxes: Quam ERD8. b. T -Bar supports: Quam SSB2. c. Speakers: QUAM 8C10PAX. d. Baffles: Quam BR8WS. e. Speaker transformer shall have 1/4 -watt taps. Quam TBL70. 2. In Gypsum Wallboard Ceiling in Employee Areas: a. Backbox: Lowell CP -87. b. Speakers: QUAM 8C10PAX. c. Baffles: Quam BR8WS. d. Speaker transformer shall have 1/4 -watt taps. Quam TBL70. 3. Stock Room and Corridor Baffles: Lowell LCB8. 4. Stock Room and Corridor Speakers: QUAM 8C10PAXTBL70. 5. Paging - talkback Horns: Fourjay 20570T. 6. Stairwell Speakers: Fourjay 20570T. 7. Equivalent products from Lowell, Quam and Atlas Sound are acceptable for loudspeaker assemblies. B. Sales Floor Loud Speaker Assemblies (Type S): 1. Acoustical Ceiling Assemblies: Posh SP5T10 with Quam SSB2 tile bridge support. Quam ERD8 backcan and Lowell WB8 grille. 2. In Gypsum Wallboard Ceilings: a. Backbox: Lowell CP -810. b. Speakers: Posh SP5T10. c. Baffles: Lowell modified grille WB8. C. Hard Aisle Zone 6.5 -inch Loud Speaker Assemblies: 1. Back Boxes: SpeakerCraft ASM90508. 2. Speaker Assemblies: SpeakerCraft CRS6 ONE ASM86611 (Type S3). 3. Speaker Transformer: SpeakerCraft TRN762. 4. Sound Enclosure Extension Wing: Speakercraft WNG90700. D. Volume Controls: 1. Remote Priority Volume Controls: auto - transformer attenuators except where indicated. Lowell Model 25LVCPA, 50LVCPA or 100LVCPA commensurate with Toad, or equivalent model by Atlas Sound 2. Sales Floor Zone Volume Controls: Lowell Model 25LVCPA, 50LVCPA or 100LVCPA commensurate with Toad, or equivalent model by Atlas Sound. 274139 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 274139 — MUSIC, PAGING AND INTERCOM EQUIPMENT E. Electronics: 1. Background Music and Paging: a. 15t Floor, 2 Floor Aisle Power Amplifier: Shall be channels one and two of the two channel amplifier with minimum output capability of 250 watts RMS per channel with Tess than .05% THD measured at 1kHz, 20 -20 kHZ solid state, rack mounted, VU meter, 70V line output with output protection device; QSC model CX302V; furnish 1. F. Paging Microphone: Shure Model 515SB -G18X. Refer to Drawings for quantity. G. Intercoms and Wireless Paging: 1. WOMEN'S' SHOES, SALON SHOES AND BRASS PLUM SHOES: Furnish Aiphone TD -12H/B system. Quantities and locations indicated on the Drawings. 2. CHILDREN'S SHOES and MEN'S SHOES: Furnish Aiphone TD -6H /B system. Quantities and locations shown on the Drawings. H. Cable Requirement: 1. Control -audio cable shall be two pair 18 AWG, Teflon insulated, Teflon or Kynar jacketed, West Penn 25244 or equal. 2. Distributed audio cable shall be two conductor, 18 AWG, Teflon insulated, Teflon or Kynar jacketed, West Penn 25224 or equal. 3. Shielded microphone cable with switch pair shall be two pair, 20 AWG with one pair shielded, jacketed for use in return air plenum. West Penn 25359. 4. Shielded microphone cable shall be one pair, 20 AWG shielded, jacketed for use in use in return air plenum. West Penn 25292. 5. Shielded intercom cable shall be 8 conductor, 22 AWG shielded, jacketed for use in return air plenum. West Penn 253271. 6. Wire: U.L. listed and classified NEC Section 725 -2 (b) Class 2 and 3 for use in air ducts and plenums. 7. Bridle Rings and Beam Clamps: Caddy #4BRT32 and BC -200, or equal. 8. Acoustical ceiling securing clip for use in point to point speaker cabling. Caddy EC311. For use with single cables running from speaker to speaker only. I. Cover Plates: Ivory plastic, except volume controls stainless steel. J. STUDIO Music System: 1. Sharp XLUH242 mini system or equivalent. 2. Speaker Assemblies: Posh SS5.0 5.25" speaker in sealed drawn steel enclosure with tile bridge support. Furnish 2. 2. Cable: 18 AWG, Teflon insulated, Teflon or Kynar jacketed, West Penn 25224 or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Furnish all devices as indicated on the drawings, described herein, or as necessary for a complete job. Exercise all due care in handling of materials prior to installation. B. Cable Pulling: 1. A pull -wire shall be found in all raceways as provided under Section 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. 2. Pull all cable to avoid damaging the cable. 3. Use of the Caddy EC311 support clip is limited to point to point cable runs connecting same zone speaker assemblies. Use of the clip to support multiple cables is limited to routing to and from a single speaker for an incidental length and at each speaker drop. This method requires approval by local authority. C. Loud Speaker Assemblies - Recessed Ceiling: 1. Coordinate with the ceiling subcontractor regarding the number and placement of precut tile sections. 2. Coordinate with the Architect and painting subcontractor regarding the painting of speaker baffles. 274139 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 274139 — MUSIC, PAGING AND INTERCOM EQUIPMENT 3. Provide speaker assemblies and install all connectors and junction box cover plates as provided by the electrical subcontractor. 4. Bundle excess cable at each speaker location and insure that the baffle seats firmly to the ceiling tile upon completion. 5. Ensure uniformity regarding visible screw head alignment on baffles where applicable. 6. Tap sales floor and dressing room music /page speaker transformer to match existing condition. D. Surface Mount Hom Speakers and Paging - Talkback Horns: Provide outlet boxes for mounting of the horn speakers and paging - talkback horns. Outlet boxes shall be securely and independently fastened to the structure. 3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP A. In all areas requiring surface wiring, care should be taken to securely fasten the cable to the structure using nylon cable ties and clips and provided at maximum 5' -0" intervals. Do not attach to conduit, sprinkler, or water piping. B. Enclose all Splices in Metal Junction Boxes: 1. Cable for paging /talkback speaker system shall be shielded. 2. Gather and insulate shields at speakers. Do not tie shield to system or chassis ground. C. Refer to Section 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL for all low voltage cable installation requirements. D. Do not group high and low or medium level audio cable together. E. Do not install power distribution wiring adjacent to signal or audio cables. F. Neatly shorten power cords to the proper length from individual equipment to power outlet strips. G. Terminate audio and control wires in crimp -on Tugs at terminal strips or with other approved devices. H. Ground System: 1. The technical ground systems shall be of the "true" type with a main single tie point brought to the building ground. 2. Connect all equipment in a particular system to the main building ground at only one point. I. Firestop all penetrations through rated walls and floors as specified in Section 078400 — FIRESTOPPING. 3.3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS A. Furnish the following equipment for installation by the Electrical Subcontractor: 1. Speaker backboxes at all wallboard (GWB) ceilings. 2. Speaker backboxes at the Escalator well. 3. Volume Control Cabinets (VCC). 4. Intercom Equipment Cabinet backcans_ 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Prior to completion of each phase at a time mutually agreeable between the installer and the Owner, provide demonstration and instruction to the Owner's employees on the use of the system. B. Obtain written acknowledgment of instruction to Owner's employees at time of instruction. C. Provide follow up instruction as needed prior to completion of each phase. 3.5 EXISTING CABLE RESUPPORT A. Contractor shall be responsible for providing proper NEC compliant support for all existing -to- remain Music, Paging and Intercom cabling throughout the building in it's entirety. Existing -to- remain cabling shall be defined as any existing Music, Paging and Intercom cabling that is not abandoned. B. Prior to BID, this contractor shall allow time for, and participate in, an on -site survey of existing conditions in order to understand the scope of work for adding support for existing cable. 274139 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 274139 — MUSIC, PAGING AND INTERCOM EQUIPMENT 3.6 ABANDONED CABLE A. Contractor shall be responsible for the demolition, removal and disposal of all existing abandoned Music, Paging and Intercom cabling and infrastructure throughout the building in its entirety per NEC Article 800 and as identified on the contract drawings. Abandoned cable shall be defined as any Music, Paging and Intercom cabling that is not terminated at both ends at a connector or other equipment and is not identified for future use with a tag. B. Music, Paging and Intercom shall include but is not limited to, all speaker cable, volume control cable, microphone cable and intercom cable. 3.7 PRE -BID SURVEY A. Prior to BID, this contractor shall allow time for, and participate in, an on -site survey of existing conditions in order to understand the scope of work for demolition of abandoned cable. END OF SECTION 274139 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 274143 — MASTER TELEVISION ANTENNA PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Satellite dish antenna systems. B. Related Sections: 1. 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL: Raceways, floor outlet boxes, flexible conduit, and pull wires. 2. 274133 — AUDIO EQUIPMENT: BRASS PLUM system. 3. 274136 — VIDEO EQUIPMENT: Primary music source furnished by others and installed in this contract. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this section. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Work of this section includes complete installation of a synchronous stationary dual- frequency antenna system with non - penetrating roof mount, connected and fully operational. B. Work of this section includes all modifications to roofing required for a complete installation, including sealing of penetrations, placement protection boards at foot pads, protection, and repair of damage. C. Satellite DBS remote receiver locations for MEN'S SHOES, COLLECTORS, BP BEDROOM and as indicated on drawings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data submittals and shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300 — SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. B. Product Data: 1. Indicate configuration, dimensions, weight, assembly, mounting requirements, and electrical connections. Include mounting and positioning instructions for adjustment and maintenance. C. Record Drawings: Furnish in accordance with requirements of Section 017700 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. 1. Operations Manuals: Include a record of all typical control settings, as -built block and wiring diagrams for all systems, and a list of cable identification codes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Approved Installers: 1. DMX, Seattle, WA (800- 223 -2822. 2. Leibold Communications, Inc., Seattle, Washington. Contact: Nick Leibold (206/286- 8981). 3. Muzak, Seattle, Washington (800/331 -3340; 206/633- 3000). 4. ECI Communications Corporation, Boca Raton, FL. Contact Claire Tsickritzis (561- 416 - 5880). B. Workmanship: Professional quality, best commercial practice, accomplished by persons experienced in the techniques and industry standards. C. Standby: Installer shall have qualified technicians available within one hour's notice for repair or service as needed for a 72 hour period during the opening of each department. D. Communication: Installer shall notify the Contractor immediately of any critical needs for electrical power or incidental raceways effecting completion of the system within the normal time schedule. 1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700 — CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES. 274143 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 274143 — MASTER TELEVISION ANTENNA PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ANTENNA SYSTEM A. Antenna: 1. Satellite Dish: Winegard DS4062 compact 24 -inch parabolic reflector and Perfect Vision PVALNBFD LNB with dual polarity, dual output for multiple DSS satellite receiver hookups. 2. DBS Antenna Mounting System: Baird B6 -18 non - penetrating, flat roof mount ballast frame and protection pad for DSS satellite antenna. B. Electronics: 1. Basic Satellite Receiver: DirecTV D11 receiver (DBS). 2. Satellite System Amplifier 20 -24dB Gain: Channel Master 52241FD. 3. 4 Way Multiswitch: Channel Master 6214IFD. 4. 8 Way Multiswitch: Channel Master 62281IFD. C. Equipment Console and Accessories: 1. Cable: UV rated RG6U coaxial cable. West Penn 841 or equivalent Belden part. Use dual RG6U for interconnection of system amplifier and multiswitch. Use of dual RG11 cable is allowed for distances exceeding RG6U capacity. Belden 1523A. 2. Bridle Rings: Caddy #4BR32 /BC -200, or equal. 3. Surge Arrestor: Provide for antenna leads coming into building from DBS LNB. NACE CTSP -F in -line coaxial surge protector. 4. Voltage Blocking Coupler: NACE VBC. 5. 2 Way Splitter, 10 -2150 MHz, one leg power passive. Blonder Tongue LPD2P. 6. DBS line amplifier, 13dB gain. Channel Master 5113IFD. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. See Section 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL for all low voltage cable installation requirements. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND DEMONSTRATION A. At the completion of the installation, perform all tests and adjustments necessary to ensure optimum operation of the installation. Demonstrate correct operation of the system to the Architect, and Owner or his agent at the time of completion. END OF SECTION 274143 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 281600 — INTRUSION DETECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Complete burglary alarm and detection system including wiring, contacts, devices, panels, backboxes and wireway. B. Section Includes: Modifications and additions to an existing burglary alarm and detection system including wiring, contacts, devices, panels, backboxes and wireway. C. Related Sections: 1. 255500 — INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF HVAC. 2. 260013 — ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS. 3. 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. 4. 283100 — FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM. D. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to work of this section. E. Substitutions: Substitution of products and specified installer will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000 and subject to approval by the Owner. F. Separate Contract: Monitoring and maintenance of alarm system will be furnished by the Owner, under separate contract. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit 5 copies of manufacturer's product data sheets for the alarm system equipment noting location of each piece of equipment, size, wiring requirements and schematic wiring diagram of equipment. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit plans of each floor indicating wiring requirements, note each device and equipment location. 2. Include 1/4 inch scale drawings showing layout of all equipment in the Employee Services Area (ESA). Submit one complete, comprehensive drawing showing Security, Fire Alarm and all Miscellaneous equipment. 3. Submit riser diagram showing wiring from each device to the panel in (ESA). Each piece of equipment shall be shown on shop drawings noting product number, size of backbox, mounting height and burglar alarm point and call -out. 4. Submit a list of annunciator messages for approval. 5. Shop drawings shall be original and show only the burglar alarm system. D. Closeout Submittals: At the end of the project, submit a CD -ROM, along with the O &M submittal, containing the entire software program for the Bosch Security panel and the Hirsch access control system. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Ordinances: Comply with applicable codes and ordinances. Obtain and pay for permits. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. The installer shall have at least 5 years of successful installation experience on similar projects and shall be properly licensed by both Hirsch Electronics and Bosch, Inc. Provide certification from both manufacturers. 2. The installer's field foreman shall have completed training at both Hirsch and Bosch factory training classes. Provide copies of training certificates with submittals. This foreman shall be on site whenever work is performed on these systems. 281600 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 281600 — INTRUSION DETECTION 3. The subcontractor for work provided under this section shall also be the system installer. Cable installation may be subcontracted, but system component installation, final connections, programming, and system testing shall be performed by the Burglar Alarm and Detection System subcontractor. 4. The installer shall have a permanent 24 hour phone number for emergency repair. C. System Purchase: Unless otherwise specified, this system shall be purchased, not leased. 1.4 SEQUENCING /SCHEDULING A. Alarm perimeter system shall be maintained completely operational during the project or the expense of additional security guards incurred due to lack of perimeter alarm systems shall be paid for by the contractor. Contractor shall notify Nordstrom in advance of any interruptions to system operation required to complete work. B. Complete alarm system test two weeks before each project phase turnover and walk through with Nordstrom and Engineer during project phase punch. C. Alarm company shall have representation on twice monthly basis at Owners /Architects /Contractors meeting after contract award. 1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Main Building System: Revise to reflect revisions made to Fine Jewelry as part of this remodel. 1. Existing Burglar Alarm Panel to remain. Provide new typed, updated index. 2. Add door alarm contacts (AC) as indicated on the plans. 3. Add Glass Break Sensors (BG) as indicated on the plans. 4. Add Hold -Up Alarms (HUA) as indicated on the plans. All hold -up alarms (except Store Manager desk) shall be monitored 24 hours a day at a Central Monitoring Station. Store Manager's desk shall alarm locally only. B. Interior System: 1. Provide ceiling mounted 360 degree Panoramic PIR Motion Detectors where indicated on first floor Sales Floor. 2. Existing Interior System comprising "Interior Keypad" and Interior Motion Detectors (PIR) located at the escalators to remain. C. Counting Room System: 1. Existing Counting Room System comprising keypad, safe contacts, door contacts and motion detector located inside the Counting Room to remain. D. Fine Jewelry System: 1. Provide a Bosch command center keypad mounted within Fine Jewelry casework for individual audible and visual annunciation of the Fine Jewelry Safe door alarm contact, Fine Jewelry casework glass door contacts and Fine Jewelry sales area glass break detector. 2. Provide door alarm contacts at Fine Jewelry casework glass doors. 3. Provide a door alarm contact at the Safe door. 4. Provide a ceiling mounted glass break sensor. 5. Provide one hold up alarm button in casework adjacent to cash register. E. Communications Room System: 1. Existing Communications Room System comprising keypad for all burglar alarm systems to remain. F. Hirsch Access Control System: 1. Existing Hirsch Access System to remain. 281600 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM - WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 281600 - INTRUSION DETECTION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BURGLARY ALARM SYSTEM A. Equipment shall be UL approved. B. Manufacturer Contact Numbers: 1. Bosch, Inc.: (800) 538 -5807 2. Hirsch Electronics: (949) 250 -8888 3. Alarm Controls Corporation: (800) 645 -5538 4. Altronix Corp.: (718) 567 -8181 5. Bosch Security Systems: (888) 289 -0096 6. Dimango Doorbell: (800) 366 -7235 7. Epson Printers: Available through Bosch, Inc. and Hirsch Electronics 8. Locknetics: (860) 584 -9158 9. The H.R. Kirkland Co., Inc.: (800) 247 -2303 10. Rutherford Control International Corp.: (800) 899 -5625 11. Sentrol (GE Industrial): (800) 247 -9447 12. GE /Sentrol: (888) 437 -3287 13. USP: USPHealth.com 14. George Risk Industries (G.R.I): (800) 445 -5218. C. Security System: Existing to remain. 1. Bosch Command Center Keypad: a. Type: Bosch "D1255" or match existing. b. Command center keypads shall consist of a local audible and visual warning device at the keypads and interface with the existing Panel for central station monitoring. 2. Alarm Contacts: a. Doors in Stud Walls: Recessed contacts - GE Security #1078. b. Doors in Pre -Cast: Surface contacts - GE Security #2500. c. Public Area Coiling Doors: 1 GE Security 1075 with 1923 magnet. d. Receiving Coiling Doors: GE Security #2302 with magnet included. e. Compactor Door: GE Security #2500. f. Safe Doors: GE Security #2700. g. Operable Windows: GE Security #1078. h. Fine Jewelry Casework Glass Doors: George Risk Industries (GRI) 505 Series. 3. Glass Break Sensors: GE Security "ShatterPro III, Model 5812 NT." 4. Hold -Up Buttons: USP Model No. HUB2B; finger type, latching, double pole double throw, screw terminations, with key reset. 5. Motion Detectors (P.I.R.): a. Wall Mounted - Broad Coverage: Provide a Bosch DS308EA with B328 Gimbal Mount. b. Ceiling Mounted - Broad Coverage: Provide a Bosch ISN- CC1 -50W. c. Ceiling Mounted - 360 Degree Coverage: Provide a Bosch DS939 Panoramic Detector for First Floor Sales Area coverage as shown on drawings. 6. Electric Door Hardware /Strikes will be provided under Section 087100. Strikes shall be 24VDC, continuous duty. 7. Wiring: Provide plenum rated cable and /or cable in conduit. Cable shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific application used. 8. Wiring Support: Caddy #4BRT32 -BC -200 for open cabling. See Section 260013 for conduit requirements. 2.2 DOOR ACCESS SYSTEM A. Hirsch Control Panel: Existing to remain. Revise to reflect revisions made to Fine Jewelry as part of this remodel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Furnish and coordinate location requirements for conduit installed as a part of Section 260500. 281600 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 281600 — INTRUSION DETECTION B. Provide wiring to all components and devices specified in this section. C. Alarm transmission signal shall be by an integral Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) in the Bosch Panel. D. Open Cable Support Installation: 1. Provide all supports for cables specified in this section. 2. Cable supports shall be spaced no further than 5 feet apart. 3. Provide all additional cable management products, sleeves or conduit raceways as required to protect exposed cabling and complete the installation of cables in a neat workmanlike manner. 4. All floor penetrations shall be at columns, exterior walls or equipment rooms. 5. Cable supports shall be installed as tight to underside of deck as possible using a rigid support method (i.e.: threaded rod, beam clamps, etc) do not use ceiling wire. 6. Do not support cables from ductwork, sprinkler piping, water piping, waste piping, conduit, or other system supports. E. Cable Installation: 1. Cables shall be bundled using plenum rated ties 5 feet on center (at mid - span). 2. Maintain the following distances between cables and other building systems: a. One foot from fluorescent lights. b. Four foot from motors and transformers. c. Three foot from hot water piping or other mechanical equipment. d. One foot from electrical conduits or other electrical equipment. 3. Remove the minimum amount of cable insulation required to complete the cable termination. 4. All cable below 10' -0" AFF shall be in conduit or run in stud cavity. 5. All low voltage cables may be run exposed as "open cable" in ceiling spaces and ceiling plenums. 6. Low voltage cables shall be run parallel or at right angles to building structural framework. Do not run cables diagonally across ceiling space. 7. Run low voltage cables in continuous runs from termination locations at equipment or outlet locations; splices are not permitted. Label cables at each termination. See drawings for label designations. 8. Fire seal around all cables running through rated floors and walls in accordance with requirements of Section 078400. 9. Install cables per manufacturer's recommendations including but not limited to maximum tensile loading and maximum bend radius. F. Raceways: Provide floor penetrations, raceways, wall penetrations, etc. not shown on the electrical floor plans but needed for the installation of cabling specified. 3.2 CONTINUITY TESTING A. Tests of wiring for proper connection, continuity and resistance to ground. The minimum allowable resistance between any two conductors or between conductors and ground is 10 megohms as checked by a megger after all conduit, conductors, detector bases, etc. have been installed, but before the detector devices are plugged into the base or end -of -line devices installed. B. Submit completed Cable Continuity Test form before Systems Testing begins. 3.3 EXISTING CABLE RESUPPORT A. Contractor shall be responsible for providing proper NEC compliant support for all existing -to- remain security cabling throughout the areas of construction. Existing -to- remain cabling shall be defined as any existing burglar alarm or Hirsch system cabling that is not abandoned. B. Prior to BID, this contractor shall allow time for, and participate in, an on -site survey of existing conditions in order to understand the scope of work for adding support for existing cable. 281600 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 281600 — INTRUSION DETECTION 3.4 ABANDONED CABLE A. Contractor shall be responsible for the demolition, removal and disposal of all existing abandoned security cabling and infrastructure throughout the areas of construction per NEC 2002 Article 800 and as identified on the contract drawings. Abandoned`cable shall be defined as any security cabling that is not terminated at both ends at a connector or other equipment and is not identified for future use with a tag. B. Security cabling shall include but is not limited to, all burglar alarm and Hirsch system cable. 3.5 PRE -BID SURVEY A. Prior to BID, this contractor shall allow time for, and participate in, an on -site survey of existing conditions in order to understand the scope of work for demolition of abandoned cable. 3.6 FIELD TESTS A. At the completion of the system, notify the Architect/Engineer, and test the newly installed devices with the existing system for proper function. Instruct Owner in operation of system. Make all corrections to system at time of test. Test system with Architect /Engineers as many times as required for system to function properly. 3.7 SYSTEMS TESTING A. General: 1. System shall be fully operational and Initial Programming shall be complete before Systems Testing begins. 2. Test all points and all devices. 3. Alarm Contacts shall have both parts of device permanently installed. Shorting of wires or use of magnets is not acceptable. 4. Glass Break devices shall be tested using a glass break tester designed for use with the specific device installed. 5. Hold -Up Alarms shall be permanently connected and have sufficient extra cable length to allow for future mounting to desks without requiring disconnection from the system. They do not have to be mounted to desks at time of testing. 6. Provide Record Drawings on site during testing. Testing will be verified against the Record Drawings. 7. The System Installer shall furnish all testing materials and instruments. 8. The Testing Punchlist furnished by the Architect shall be completed before Store Turnover. 9. System re- testing will occur until all Punchlist and corrective items have been completed. All re- testing shall be made at the Installer's expense, including Architects and Engineers fees, travel expenses, and other costs directly associated with the additional testing. B. Test Phases: 1. Preliminary Testing: Performed by the System Installer using Schedules furnished on Contract Documents. System Installer shall sign -off on test forms before General Contractor testing is scheduled. 2. General Contractor Testing: Performed by the General Contractor using Schedules furnished on Contract Documents. General Contractor shall sign -off on test forms before Engineer's testing is scheduled. 3. Engineer's Testing: Performed by the Architect and Engineer using Schedules furnished on Contract Documents. General Contractor, Electrical Contractor, and System Installer are required to be present. Two persons familiar with system are required to be present. Testing shall not be scheduled until System Installer and General Contractor completed test forms are received. A Testing Punchlist will be provided from this test. Any additional Engineer Testing will be performed at the Installers cost. 4. Authority Having Jurisdiction Testing — This test shall occur after the Engineer's Testing. Perform all testing required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction as necessary to secure full building occupancy certification. 5. Nordstrom Security: Performed with Nordstrom Security Manager present. System Installer is required to be present. 281600 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 281600 — INTRUSION DETECTION 3.8 SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING AND INSTRUCTION A. Sequence of Operation — Security System: 1. The main security panel can be armed and disarmed by entering a valid code into the Bosch D1255 keypad located on the panel in ESA. 2. The panel cannot be armed if the alarm systems for the Fine Jewelry and Counting Room are in the disarm mode. The security systems for both the Fine Jewelry and Counting Room must be armed prior to arming the main security panel. 3. After arming the panel, a person has a limited time to exit the building through the employee entrance. The exit delay time countdown is adjustable between 20 and 160 seconds. When the panel is in the armed mode and a point of protection is violated the alphanumeric annunciator displays the point I.D. number and the panel will register the zone as being in alarm and will transmit an alarm signal to the central station. 4. When the panel is in the disarmed mode and one of the perimeter points of protection (fire exits and roof hatch) that has been programmed for "day mode" is violated, a tone will sound and an event will display on the alphanumeric annunciator located in ESA. The printer will also record the event alarm point and print the I.D.# of the point in alarm. This information is for use by the store security staff and the signal is not transmitted to the central station. 5. Counting Room and Fine Jewelry Systems: a. The system consists of a D1255 command center alarm control panel to allow monitoring of alarms, trouble conditions, and openings and closings b. The alarm control panel is armed and disarmed by entering valid code into the Bosch D1255 keypad located inside the room. The system has an adjustable time delay countdown of 10 to 80 seconds to allow time to disarm the system after entry into the protected area or time to leave the protected area after arming the system. Set at 30 seconds at Fine Jewelry, 15 seconds at Counting Room. c. In the armed mode a violation of any point of protection will cause an alarm signal to be transmitted, via the main control panel in ESA, to the central station. d. The system has the capability to be armed with a faulty zone bypassed. This must be done by a person with an authorized passcode. e. Whenever a hold -up button is activated the alarm panel will transmit an alarm signal to the central station whether the system is armed or disarmed. f. In Fine Jewelry,the photoelectric sensor at the main entry will active a chime in the workroom to alert personnel that someone has entered the sales area. There shall be an override switch to silence the chime when it is not needed. This system is not part of the security system. B. Sequence of Operation — Door Access System: 1. The main access to the building is through the employee entrance. When the proper code is entered into the scramble keypad, located outside the employee entrance, the model 8 releases the electric door strike for a predetermined time period to allow entry to the building. The alarm contact on the employee door is shunted by the model 8 controller for the same time period as programmed for the "door unlock" time. The shunting of the alarm contact allows access to portions of the building without disarming the main system. 2. Housekeeping can enter the building in the manner described above and by entering the proper code in a Bosch D1255 keypad located on the wall inside the employees entrance the can disarm the PIR detectors covering the escalators. A local annunciator lights in ESA to indicate the PIRs have been disarmed. The housekeeping crews can work inside the building while leaving the alarm systems for the building perimeter, Fine Jewelry and Counting room armed. 3. To place the PIRs back into the alarm circuit a distinctive arming code must be entered into the same Bosch D1255. 4. A secondary entrance to the building is through the receiving door. When the proper code is entered into the Hirsch digital keypad, located outside the receiving door, the model 8 releases the electric door strike for a predetermined time period to allow entry to the building. The alarm contact on the receiving door is shunted by the Hirsch model 8 for the same time period as programmed for the "door unlock" time. 281600 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 281600 — INTRUSION DETECTION 5. Store personnel may shunt the alarm contacts on the receiving overhead doors and the receiving man -door by entering the proper codes into the keypad located at each door. When these doors are shunted a local annunciator lights in ESA to indicate the doors have been shunted and removed from the alarm system. The doors are placed back into the alarm system by entering a distinctive arming code into the same keypad used to shunt the doors. The scramble keypads at the receiving overhead doors also operate the doors to open, and close with the keycode input. Local annunciators light in ESA to indicate the door contacts are shunted for the man -door and both overhead doors. 6. Motorized Loading dock door scramble pads: provide one Hirsch DS47L keypad adjacent to each roll -up door at the receiving dock (2 total) to shunt out the door alarm and to enable the three position push- button door controller for a period of one minute to open /close/ or stop the door. After one minute the push -button door controller will be disabled until the access code is re- entered. Provide one DTLM interface unit. Provide green /red status LED lights in ESA to indicate alarm shunt status. 7. A key operated switch located on the wall near the dumpster is used to shunt the dumpster door to allow access to the dumpster by housekeeping. A local annunciator lights at the keyswitch and in ESA to indicate the door contacts are shunted. 8. The two employee entrance, employee accessible entrance and receiving man -door outside doors can also be unlocked by pushbutton door release switches in ESA, LP and Communications. The door release switches should shunt the door alarm contacts for 15 seconds if the system is armed. 9. Entry to the Counting Room and the Telecommunications Room is obtained by entering the proper code into the scramble keypad located outside the door. The opening of the door starts the time delay alarm circuit because the door alarm contact has been opened. The alarm must be disarmed within 30 seconds or an alarm signal will be transmitted to the central station. 10. The Hirsch keypad in the ESA room is used for programming the Model 8 Controller. C. System Programming: 1. System shall be fully operational and Initial Programming shall be complete before Systems Testing begins. System Initial Programming shall be as shown on the Burglar Alarm System Schedule, the Hirsch Access Control Schedule, and the Miscellaneous Alarm and Intercom System Schedule. 2. Additional programming shall be required after Nordstrom Security Manager assumes control of building. Provide (2) days of non - concurrent on -site coordination and programming services with Nordstrom Security Manager. Installer's On -Site Foreman shall be present. D. Turnover Walk- Through: 1. Provide (1) day on -site instruction and coordination for Owner's Turnover Walk- Through. Installers On -Site Foreman shall be present. END OF SECTION 281600 -7 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON • SECTION 282300 — VIDEO SURVEILLANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for the cable portion of the security video system as indicated, in accordance with provisions of the Contract Documents. 2. Coordination with other trades. 3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, provide all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices, incidental to, or necessary for, a sound, secure and complete installation. 4. Addition of new security TV camera cables at locations identified on the drawings. 5. Relocation of existing security TV camera cables at locations identified on the drawings. 6. Re- support of existing -to- remain security TV cables which pass through areas of construction and exposed back -of -house areas to comply with NEC requirements. 7. Contractor site survey to understand scope of existing work for demolition and re- support of cabling. 8. Provide conduit sleeves at existing floor penetrations where cabling currently is passing through un- sleeved openings. Coordinate disconnection of all active camera cabling with store Loss Prevention Manager prior to start of work B. Related Sections: 1. 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL. C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this section. D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000 and subject to the approval by the Owner's Regional Loss Prevention Manager, Corporate Loss Prevention Manager, and the Architect. E. Separate Contracts: Existing camera removal, reinstallation and terminations by Owner. Coordinate two weeks in advance with store. The Owner's Corporate Loss Prevention Manager will contract separately for new Pan Tilt Zoom System Cameras, including backboxes, face plates, cable connectors, terminations, and receiver assemblies, and new fixed TV cameras, mounting brackets, cable connectors, terminations, video monitors and signal conditioning equipment. 1.2 CODES, ORDINANCES AND STANDARDS A. Comply with the requirements of the following codes, ordinances and standards: 1. State and local codes, rules, regulations and ordinances. 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) latest edition as amended or supplemented by the local authority having jurisdiction. 3. Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standards pertaining to television cameras and monitors. 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) safety standards pertaining to television equipment and accessories. 1.3 PERMITS, INSPECTIONS AND FEES A. Obtain all permits required and pay all fees for permits and inspections. B. Furnish Owner with written evidence of final inspection and acceptance by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data and Shop Drawings: 1. Submit within 30 days from award of contract; transmit in one package. Three copies of the submittal shall be retained, one each by Nordstrom Corporate Loss Prevention, Architect and the Electrical Engineer. 282300 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 282300 — VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 2. Product Data: Submit minimum of 6 copies of manufacturer's product data sheets for each type of cable and product specified herein. 3. Shop Drawings: Submit a reproducible drawing and one print of each floor plan indicating all new cable routing through building, including quantity and type of each cable. Show existing PTZ (power) backboards and camera room. C. Test Data: Submit complete documentation for all continuity tests performed on installed security video cables. Check for opens and shorts. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials shall be new, in original cartons or shipping crates and shall have a UL label whenever available. B. The manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of cable for similar types and capacities required by this project for not Tess than 5 years. C. The installer shall have at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with installation work similar to that required for this Project. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Contact Nordstrom Corporate Loss Prevention at 206 - 303 -2625 prior to start of work. B. The systems shall have passed all acceptance tests and be completely ready for the equipment installation 3 weeks before Store Turnover. 1.7 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1.8 PURCHASING A. Furnish and install all cables as described in this section. Order cables from: Dyan Clancy dclancy @adt.com 925 - 899 -7300 925 - 837 -0500 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PAN TILT ZOOM (PTZ) A. Description: This Security Video System subcontractor shall furnish and install all cables as described herein. B. Composite Cable: Provide plenum rated PTZ multi- conductor composite cable as indicated on the Drawings. Cable shall be Sensormatic #74PCS1000W. Note, for all of the Sensomatic Cable Part #s the 1000 indicates the cable length of 1000 feet, and is also available in 500 and 250 feet. C. Video Cable: Provide plenum rated RG59 /U coaxial video cables as indicated on the Drawings. Cable shall have 22AWG solid copper center conductor and shall be Sensormatic #74V1000PW. D. Data -A Cable: Provide plenum rated twisted pair data cables as indicated on the Drawings. Cable shall be (1) twisted pair, 22AWG stranded tinned copper and shall be Sensormatic #74DS1000PW. E. Data -B Cable: Provide plenum rated control cable.as indicated on the drawings. Cable shall be 3 conductor, 18AWG shielded and shall be Belden 88770. F. Equal cable products manufactured by Sensormatic, Belden, Comscope or Westpenn may be submitted. G. Bridle Rings: Caddy #4BRT32 /BC -200, or equal. H. Raceways: Panduit Type E slotted wall duct #E4x4LG6 with #C4LG6 cover. I. Bridle Rings: Caddy #4BRT32 /BC -200, or equal. 282300 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 282300 — VIDEO SURVEILLANCE J. Raceways: Panduit Type E slotted wall duct #E4x4LG6 with #C4LG6 cover. 2.2 FIXED TV CAMERA SYSTEM (F.T.V.) A. Description: This Security Video System subcontractor shall furnish and install all cables as • described herein. B. Video Cable: Provide plenum rated RG59 /U coaxial video cables as indicated on the Drawings. Cable shall have 22AWG solid copper center conductor and shall be Sensormatic #74V1000PW. C. Power Cables: Provide plenum rated power cable as indicated on the drawings. Cable shall be 2 conductor, 18AWG stranded tinned copper and shall be Sensormatic #74P1000PW. D. Equal cable products manufactured by Sensormatic, Belden, Comscope or Westpenn may be submitted. E. Bridle Rings: Caddy #4BRT32 /BC -200, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Open Cable Support Installation: 1. Provide supports for cables. 2. Space supports no further than 5' -0" apart. 3. Provide all additional cable management products, sleeves or conduit raceways as required to protect exposed cabling and complete the installation of cables in a neat workmanlike manner. 4. Floor penetrations shall be at columns, exterior walls or equipment. rooms. 5. Cable supports shall be installed as tight to underside of deck as possible using a rigid support method (i.e.,: threaded rod, beam clamps, etc) do not use ceiling wire. 6. Do not support cables from ductwork, sprinkler piping, water piping, waste piping, conduit, or other system supports. B. Cable Installation: 1. Cables shall be bundled using plenum rated ties 5' -0" inches on center (at mid - span). 2. Maintain the following distances between cables and other building systems: a. One foot from fluorescent lights. b. Four feet from motors and transformers c. Three feet from hot water piping or other mechanical equipment. d. One foot from electrical conduits or other electrical equipment. 3. Cable below 10' -0" AFF shall be in conduit or run -in stud cavity. 4. Low voltage cables shall be run exposed as "open cable" in ceiling spaces and ceiling plenums. 5. Low voltage cables shall be run parallel or at right angles to building structural framework. Do not run cables diagonally across ceiling space. 6. Run low voltage cables in continuous runs from termination locations at equipment or outlet locations; splices are not permitted. Label cables at each termination. See drawings for label designations. 7. Fire seal around cables running through rated floors and walls in accordance with requirements of Section 078400. 8. Install cables per manufacturer's recommendations including but not limited to maximum tensile loading and maximum bend radius. 9. Suspend spare cable loop 12" above ceiling grid for easy access. C. Raceways: Provide floor penetrations, raceways, wall penetrations, etc. not shown on the electrical floor plans but needed for the installation of cabling specified. Install Panduit wall duct surface mounted directly to wall or backboard. D. Terminations and final connections to electronic equipment will be provided by Nordstrom Camera Installer. 282300 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 282300 — VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 3.2 TESTING A. Provide recorded data supporting continuity testing of each video cable. Replace all damaged and defective cables. 3.3 LABELING A. Clearly label each cable at each end with a tag using Panduit self — laminating laser labels or equal. See drawings for ID descriptions. 3.4 EXISTING CABLE RESUPPORT A. Contractor shall be responsible for providing proper NEC compliant support for all existing -to- remain security TV cabling passing through an area of construction. Existing -to- remain cabling shall be defined as any existing Security TV cabling that is not abandoned. B. Security TV cabling shall include but is not limited to all cable installed to serve FTV (Fixed TV) cameras and PTZ (Pan Tilt Zoom) cameras. C. Prior to BID, this contractor shall allow time for, and participate in, an on -site survey of existing conditions in order to understand the scope of work for adding support for existing cables. END OF SECTION 282300 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 283100 — FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. All labor, materials, tools, equipment, appurtenances, and services as necessary for modifications and extensions of the existing FA notification system as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents. 2. Coordination with other trades. B. Related Sections: 1. 210000 — FIRE SUPPRESSION: Water flow and other supervisory switches. 2. 230013 — MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS: Electrical equipment and wiring responsibilities; coordination; scheduling. 3. 237000 — CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT: Duct detector housing installation. 4. 255500 — INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF HVAC. 5. 260013 — ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS. 6. 260500 — COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL: Conduit, wiring, electrical power connection, and detectors. 7. 274139 — MUSIC, PAGING, AND INTERCOM EQUIPMENT. 8. 283173 — FIRE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM RECORD OF COMPLETION FORM. 9. 283176 — FIRE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM INSPECTION AND TESTING FORM. C. Separate Contracts: The Owner's Regional Security Manager has already contracted separately for the monitoring and /or maintenance of fire annunciation system. D. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions, and Division 01 specification sections apply to work of this section. E. Substitutions: Substitute products will not be considered. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Comply with the requirements of the following Codes, Ordinances and Standards as amended or supplemented by the local authority having jurisdiction: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC), latest edition. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), latest edition. a. 72 - National Fire Alarm Code, latest edition. b. 101 - Life Safety Code. 3. Title III of the Americans with Disabilities Act as it relates to fire alarm systems. 4. ANSI A17.1, Safety Code, for Elevators and Escalators. 5. All local and state codes and requirements. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Control Equipment: Existing to remain with components as indicated in plans. B. System Operation: 1. Activation of each signal initiating device causes the following to occur: a. The signal output activates either an ALARM, SUPERVISORY, or TROUBLE contact for operation of a central station transmitter. b. Audible signal in the Fire Alarm Control Panel and all remote alphanumeric annunciators. c. Illuminate specific zone light on control /annunciator. d. Fire alarm signals automatically lock in at the fire alarm control panel until manually reset at the control panel and originating device is returned to normal. e. Display the device label, time of occurrence and condition of the device on the fire alarm control panel's alpha- numeric display. 2. Activation of an ALARM signal from any alarm initiating device shall cause the audible /visible notification appliances to operate throughout the building. 283100 -1 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 283100 — FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 3. Duct smoke detectors in the HVAC system and fire smoke dampers shall initiate shut -down of their respective HVAC units through hardwired connections. The duct smoke detectors shall also signal the fire alarm system and shall cause a general alarm. 4. A ground or open on a detector loop or alarm circuit activates trouble light and audible signal at the control unit. A trouble signal shall be transmitted to the Central Station. Ground or open circuit faults shall not cause false alarms. 5. Loss of 120 volt normal building power to the control unit activates trouble light and audible signal at the control unit and sends trouble signal to be transmitted to the Central Station. 6. Operation of a silencing switch on the fire control panel shall silence the audible trouble signal. a. Trouble light remains illuminated until trouble condition is corrected. b. Restoration of system to normal causes trouble buzzer to sound until silencing switch has been returned to normal. 7. A keyboard entry at the control panel shall bypass horn /strobe circuits during an alarm condition. Operation of this feature shall cause the trouble signal transmitter contacts to operate and remain in the abnormal condition until the system has been restored to normal. a. Horns /strobes are disabled. b. Alarm Tight remains illuminated until the alarm condition is corrected and the panel is reset. c. Restoration of system to normal shall cause the trouble signal to sound until the silencing switch is reset to normal. 8. Keyboard entry at the control panel shall bypass signal outputs to door holders, fire alarm signal transmitter, and supervisory signal transmitter. Bypassing outputs shall cause the trouble signal transmitter contacts to operate and remain in the abnormal condition until of the switches have been restored to normal. 9. Electromagnetic door holders shall remain released until the control unit is manually reset. Motorized rolling doors shall remain in the down position until the control unit is manually reset, or the signal from the alarm system has been overridden by a key operated switch at the door. 10. Elevator recall shall be initiated by smoke detectors located at passenger elevator lobbies and freight elevator landings and within machine rooms and shafts; provide dry contact closure signals to associated machine room for elevator control subcontractor's use; contact closure to activate by alarm signal as designated on Zone List. 11. Smoke Dampers: Program system to lock dampers in the closed position upon activation. Dampers shall not automatically reset when system resets. Provide a manual key- switch at the main system panel for manual reset of all smoke dampers. 1.4 PERMITS, INSPECTIONS AND FEES A. Obtain required permits and pay fees for permits and inspections. B. Furnish Owner with written evidence of final inspection and acceptance by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Modify by adding or deleting devices as indicated in plan. Modify input and output capability, reprogram, and increase battery back -up to accommodate changes. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance with Sections 013300 and 017700 as applicable, and as follows. B. Do not order equipment or start work until submittals have been approved by the Architect, including comments by the Architect's Electrical Engineer and the Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. C. Within 30 days after award of contract, submit 2 sets of product data sheets and shop drawings to the Architect for distribution to the Architect's Electrical Engineer and the Owner's Fire Protection Consultant. Each submittal shall be complete. D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheets of the alarm system equipment noting location within assemblies, size and wiring requirements for each item of equipment. Indicate selection and quantity of modular components that make up the items of equipment such as control /annunciator. Indicate compliance with Underwriter's Laboratories listing requirements, FM approval requirements, and with Local Authority Having Jurisdiction as required. 283100 -2 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 283100 — FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM E. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit plans of each affected floor indicating new wiring requirements for each required new cable in conduit run, including wiring and riser diagrams. Submit scale plan and wall elevation of Package Security Room (or Employee Service Room) or room where FA system currently resides. Identify new and existing equipment, device function, manufacturer and Part No. Any new required notification power supplies and batteries shall be located on the same wall as existing FA control equipment. Identify new 120V emergency circuit providing power to new notification power supply. Identify the type of cable in conduit used in locations requiring plenum and riser rated cable. Provide detailed construction drawings of custom fabricated components. 2. Show equipment and materials to be provided for this particular installation. Non - project - specific drawings are not acceptable. Shop drawings shall be fully detailed showing battery, dimensions, construction, mounting details and equipment assemblies. Drawings shall show annunciator layouts. 3. Existing zones shall remain. Provide programming Matrix for any new initiating device zones. Each new initiating device shall have a unique zone per device if the existing system is programmed as such. Otherwise program new or relocated device into the existing zone of where the new device will reside. F. Following submittal review by the Owner's Consultants and correction of deficiencies, with resubmittals and review as necessary, submit the drawings and product data to the local jurisdictional authorities (Fire Marshal, Building Official). Revise as appropriate and resubmit corrected drawings for final review. G. Calculations: Submit new battery calculations to modified existing system and voltage drop calculations for new notification appliance circuits. The minimum voltage (at each appliance) shall be 10 percent above the minimum operating voltage for that appliance. The starting voltage shall be the terminal voltage when the system is operating from batteries as the secondary source. H. Closeout Submittals: 1. Maintain a set of shop drawings on the job site, with revisions, acceptance and exception notations kept up to date. 2. At completion of work comply with the requirements of Section 017700, deliver the following to the Architect: a. Shop drawings, instruction sheets, catalog cuts, control diagrams, instructions, bulletins, and pertinent information required for proper operation of each item furnished under this specification. b. Riser diagram showing conduits, junction boxes, terminal cabinets, cables and devices, with conduit numbers indicated. c. Record Drawings showing conduits, wire marking, and color codes for each conductor. 3. Final Record Drawings shall be the previously accepted submittal drawings, corrected to actual as -built conditions. 4. Testing Report: Refer to paragraph Testing Report under 3.0 Execution. 5. Submit a CD -ROM, along with the O &M submittal, containing the entire software program for the alarm system. 6. Submit sequence of operation prior to final testing. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials shall have a UL label, shall be FM approved, and shall have evidence of approval by the Local Authority having Jurisdiction as required. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. The installer shall be NICET Level II and/or State certification and have at least 5 years of successful installation experience on similar projects and shall be properly licensed. 2. The subcontractor for work provided under this section shall also be the system installer. Cable installation may be sub - subcontracted, but system component installation, final connections, programming, and system testing shall be performed by the fire annunciation system subcontractor. 3. The installer shall have a 24 hour phone number for emergency repair. 283100 -3 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 283100 — FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM C. Installer shall be factory trained by the fire alarm control panel equipment manufacturer in the system being installed and shall provide evidence of such at the time of the bid. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. In order to provide protection for the store and contents, complete all work and required testing and correction of deficiencies noted by 45 days before Store Opening. B. Coordinate with Division 15 for furnishing of smoke detectors. 1.8 WARRANTY A. All components, parts and assemblies supplied by the manufacturer shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of five years following acceptance. Warranty service shall be provided by a trained specialist of the equipment manufacturer. 1.9 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Control Equipment: One of the following (no substitution): 1. Siemens / Cerberus MXL. 2. EST EST -3. 3. Fire Control Instruments 7200. 4. Notifier NFS -640. B. Devices, appliances, and wiring shall be selected from those compatible with the control equipment and acceptable to the manufacturer of the control equipment. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Control Panel: 1. Existing to remain. Automatic Heat Detectors: Existing to remain. C. Automatic Smoke Detectors: 1. Existing to remain. Fire / Smoke Dampers: Existing to remain. E. Sprinkler water flow switches, post indicator valve supervisory switches, and gate valve supervisory switches are existing to remain. Provide wiring, modems, circuits, and connections to terminals for ALARM, SUPERVISORY, and TROUBLE signal indications for each new, modified or currently unmonitored device. F. Magnetic Door Holders: Provide power and activating wiring and connections as required. Coordinate requirements with Section 087100 — DOOR HARDWARE. G. Fire Alarm Activated Rolling Doors: Existing to remain. H. Device back boxes shall be metal and capable of accepting conduit and fittings for the wiring system. 2.3 POWER SUPPLY A. 120 volt, single phase AC. The power supply for all new or modified equipement is from the emergency circuit, supplied by commercial power and the emergency generator. 2.4 CONDUCTORS A. 120 VAC and Power Supply Connections: Copper; 12 gauge minimum, THW or THWN. B. All low voltage cable shall be UL listed type NPLFP solid multi- conductor cable. C. Notification Appliance Circuits use 14 gauge minimum, Initiating Device Circuits and Signaling Line Circuits use 18 gauge minimum. Cable shall be shielded when recommended by the manufacturer. Use larger wire sizes when recommended by equipment manufacturer, or necessitated by current demand. 283100 -4 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 283100 — FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 2.5 FIRE ANNUNCIATOR ZONES A. Existing annunciator zones shall remain. Each new initiating device shall have a unique zone per device if the existing system is programmed as such. Otherwise program new or relocated device into the existing zone of where the new device will reside. Provide all additional equipment and reprogramming to accommodate new zones. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install components as shown on the Electrical Drawings. Fire alarm equipment shall be arranged to fit in the space shown on the wall elevations of the LP. B. Open Cable Support Installation: 1. This contractor shall furnish and install supports for cables specified in this section. 2. Cable supports shall be spaced no further than 5 feet apart. 3. Provide additional cable management products, sleeves or conduit raceways as required to protect exposed cabling and complete the installation of cables in a neat workmanlike manner. 4. Floor penetrations shall be at columns, exterior walls or equipment rooms. 5. Cable supports shall be installed as tight to underside of deck as possible using a rigid support method (i.e.: threaded rod, beam clamps, etc) do not use ceiling wire. 6. Do not support cables from ductwork, sprinkler piping, water piping, waste piping, conduit, or other system supports. 7. Provide independent separate wire management for cabling of each low voltage cabling system. Systems are defined by specification section. C. Cable Installation: 1. Cables shall be bundled using plenum rated ties 5 feet on center (at mid - span). 2. Maintain the following distances between cables and other building systems: a. One foot from fluorescent lights. b. Four foot from motors and transformers c. Three foot from hot water piping or other mechanical equipment. d. One foot from electrical conduits, electrical equipment and other systems cables. 3. Remove the minimum amount of cable insulation required to complete that cable termination 4. Cable below 10' -0" AFF shall be in conduit or run -in stud cavity. 5. Low voltage cables shall be run exposed as "open cable" in ceiling spaces and ceiling plenums. 6. Low voltage cables shall be run parallel or at right angles to building structural framework. Do not run cables diagonally across ceiling space. 7. Run low voltage cables in continuous runs from termination locations at equipment or outlet locations; splices are not permitted. Label cables at each termination. See drawings for label designations. 8. Fire seal around cables running through rated floors and walls in accordance with requirements of Section 078400. 9. Install cables per manufacturer's recommendations including but not limited to maximum tensile loading and maximum bend radius. D. Connect to waterflow indicators and valve supervisory devices. Make necessary adjustments for sensitivity and retard time on waterflow indicators and adjust valve supervisory devices as needed. E. Provide conduit, fittings, wire and cable for the fire alarm annunciation system and associated control wiring in accordance with this section and Sections 260013 and 260500. Install cable when permitted by Code. Use conduit only when required by Code. Provide conduit that is required but not shown on the Electrical Drawings. F. Install cover plates on J- boxes. Paint covers red and permanently label covers noting zone(s) and device(s) being served. G. Raceways: Furnish and install floor penetrations, raceways, wall penetrations, etc. not shown on the electrical floor plans but needed for the installation of cabling specified herein. 283100 -5 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 283100 — FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM H. Power Supplies: Install all system and indicating circuit power supplies in a central location adjacent to or above the FACP. Do not distribute power supplies throughout the building. 3.2 PRELIMINARY TESTING (TEST 1) A. Prior to the acceptance inspections and testing the Installer shall "pretest"; all new initiating devices, 10% of the existing devices on affected initiating loops, and 100% of notification loops of the fire alarm system. This will assure that equipment is properly installed and functioning in accordance with the plans and specifications and original design. The installer shall test each phase of work with the general contractor one week before the phase is complete. Correct any deficiencies before the phase areas are turned over to the contractor. Test after hours and coordinate with the store before proceeding. B. Request for Acceptance Inspection and Testing will not be approved until the following items have been completed and sent to the Architect: 1. Preliminary testing has been completed including copy of the completed "Inspection and Testing Form" indicating testing results for all points tested. See copy of this form in this specification section. 2. Submittal of updated shop drawings indicating "As- Built" conditions. 3. A completed "Record of Completion" form. See copy of this form in this specification section. 3.3 ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION AND TESTING (TEST 2) A. General Requirements: 1. Four weeks prior to Store Turnover conduct an Acceptance inspection. Test to be witnessed by the Architect, the Electrical Engineer, the Owner's Fire Protection Consultant, and the Owner's Security Manager and performed before final jurisdictional testing. All parties shall be present to witness the same test. 2. The inspection and tests shall include operation of initiating devices and verification of annunciation, testing of supervised circuits, and operation of alerting devices. 3. The installation will be checked against the Record Drawings. 4. The Installer shall furnish testing materials and instruments. 5. Prior to the test the installer shall provide all witnessing parties a copy of the "Inspection and Testing Form" that includes alarm, supervisory and control points listed individually with zone and address numbers for each point. 6. A punch list will be developed by the Project Engineer of Record. Installer shall correct punch list items within 15 working days. 7. There will be a reinspection of punch list items and any other items necessitated by corrective work. 8. If, in the opinion of the Owner, Architect, or Electrical Engineer, and Owner's Fire Protection Consultant additional reinspections are necessary to assure compliance with the Contract, they shall be made at the Installer's expense, including fees, travel expenses, and other costs directly associated with the additional inspection. 9. A complete computer printout shall be generated via the fire alarm control panel output during the Acceptance and Inspection test. Contractor shall provide a copy of the test printout to all witnessing parties at the conclusion of the test. 10. A complete printout shall be generated at the UL Central Monitoring station of all signals received during the "Inspection and Acceptance Test. Contractor shall provide a copy of the test printout to all witnessing parties at the conclusion of the test. B. Tests shall include: 1. Tests of wiring for proper connection, continuity, and resistance to ground. The minimum allowable resistance between any two conductors or between conductors and ground is 10 megohms as checked by a megger after conduit, conductors, detector bases, etc. have been installed, but before the detector devices are plugged into the base or end -of -line devices installed. 2. Operation of system control and indicating components in accordance with factory recommended procedures. 3. Tests of each detector, waterflow indicator, and valve supervisory device in accordance with the factory recommended procedures to include correct operation of auxiliary functions, as noted on the FIRE ANNUNCIATION ZONE SCHEDULE. 283100 -6 07/21/08 NORDSTROM — WASHINGTON SQUARE (057) REMODEL TIGARD, OREGON SECTION 283100 — FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 4. Test and check sound level of alerting devices. 5. Check each new initiating device and 10% of the initiating devices on affected existing loops to see that device designations are properly displayed at the Control /Annunciator and remote annunciator units. C. Provide written documentation to the Architect that all punchlist items have been corrected prior scheduling Final Inspection and Testing by the Local Building or Fire Authority. 3.4 FINAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING (TEST 3) A. Two weeks prior to Store turnover, conduct an inspection in the presence of Local Building or Fire Authority as necessary to secure full building occupancy certification. B. The Installer shall furnish all testing materials and instruments. C. If, in the opinion of the Owner, Architect, or Electrical Engineer, additional reinspections are necessary to assure compliance with the Contract, they shall be made at the Installer's expense, including fees, travel expenses, and other costs directly associated with the additional inspection. D. Perform additional tests as directed by the local building or fire authority. 3.5 TESTING REPORT A. Submit to the Architect a complete Testing Report within one week of completion of testing. Provide four(4) copies. Testing report shall include the following: 1. A completed "Record of Completion" form, signed and dated. Include all modifications required by the Fire Marshal. 2. A completed "Inspection and Testing" form, signed and dated. Include all modifications required by the Fire Marshal. 3. Fire Marshal's Acceptance test form, dated and signed by Fire Marshal at completion of Acceptance Test. 4. Fire alarm system print out of the actual fire alarm test indicating all points tested, signals received at the fire alarm panel, and sensitivity readings for all smoke detectors. 5. Print out from the UL Central Monitoring station of all signals received during the "Inspection and Acceptance Test. B. Copy of complete TESTING REPORT shall be included in the O &M Manual. 3.6 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A. Provide a written sequence of operation for the existing fire alarm system including changes in design from the remodel for use by the Owner. B. Describe, in layman's terms, the operation of all equipment covered by this system (i.e., fans, roll -up doors, HVAC units, etc.) C. Describe the grouping of initiating devices into zones. D. Describe the grouping of zones into alarm /supervision points on the transmitter. E. Describe the interface with EMCS and any other systems. F. Describe how to silence panel, acknowledge alarm, scroll through alphanumeric display, reset panel, etc. G. Submit the document to the Architect/Engineer for approval and make revisions as requested. H. Place approved sequence of operation in fire system cabinet enclosure. Include copy in the O &M Manual. END OF SECTION 283100 -7 07/21/08 FIRE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM RECORD OF COMPLETION FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (057) Remodel Record of Completion Name of Protected Property: Address: Rep. of Protected Property (Name /Phone): Authority Having Jurisdiction: Address /Phone Number: 1. Type(s) of System or Service: NFPA 72, Chapter 3 — Local If alarm is transmitted to location(s) off premise, list where received: NFPA 72, Chapter 3 — Emergency Voice /Alarm Service Quantity of voice /alarm channels: Single Multiple: Quantity of speakers installed: Quantity of speaker zones: Quantity of telephones or telephone jacks included in system: NFPA 72, Chapter 4 — Auxiliary Indicate type of connection: Local energy: Shunt: Parallel Telephone: Location and telephone number for receipt of signals: NFPA 72, Chapter 4 — Remote Station Alarm signal received at: Supervisory signal received at: NFPA 72, Chapter 4 — Proprietary If alarms are retransmitted to public fire service communications center or others, indicate location and telephone number of the organization receiving the alarm: Indicate how alarm is retransmitted: NFPA 72, Chapter 4 — Central Station The Prime Contractor: Central Station Location: Means of transmission of signals from the protected premise to the central station: McCulloh Multiplex One -Way Radio Digital Alarm Communicator Two -Way Radio Others 283173 -1 7/21/08 FIRE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM RECORD OF COMPLETION FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (057) Remodel Means of transmission of alarm to the public fire service communications center: a. b. System location: • Organization Name /Phone Representative Name /Phone Installer Supplier Service Organization Location of Record (As- Built) Drawings: Location of Owner's Manuals: Location of Test Reports: A contract, dated for test and inspection in accordance with NFPA Standards No.(s) , dated , is in effect. 2. Record of System Installation. (Fill out after installation is complete and wiring is checked for opens, shorts, ground faults, and improper branching, but prior to conducting operational acceptance tests.) This system has been installed in accordance with the NFPA Standards as listed below, was inspected by on , includes the devices listed below and has been in service since NFPA 72, Chapters 1 3 4 5 6 7 (circle all that apply) NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 760 Manufacturer's Instructions Other (specify): Signed: Date: Organization: 3. Record of System Operation: All operational features and functions of this system were tested by on and found to be operating properly in accordance with the requirements of: NFPA 72, Chapters 1 3 4 5 6 7 (circle all that apply) NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 760 Manufacturer's Instructions Other (specify) Signed: Date: Organization: 4. Alarm Initiating Devices and Circuits (Use blanks to indicate quantity of devices.) MANUAL a) Manual Stations _ Noncoded, Activating Transmitters Coded b) Combination Manual Fire Alarm and Guard's Tour Coded Stations 283173 -2 7/21/08 FIRE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM RECORD OF COMPLETION FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (057) Remodel AUTOMATIC Coverage: Complete: Partial: a) Smoke Detectors Ion _ Photo b) Duct Detectors Ion _ Photo c) Heat Detectors FT RR FT /RR RC d) Sprinkler Water Flow Switches: Transmitters _ Noncoded, Activating _ Coded e) Other (list): 5. Supervisory Signal Initiating Devices and Circuits (Use blanks to indicate quantity of devices.) GUARD'S TOUR: a) Coded Stations b) Noncoded Stations Transmitters c) Compulsory Guard Tour System Comprised of Transmitter Stations and Intermediate Stations Note: Combination devices recorded under 4(b) and 5(a). SPRINKLER SYSTEM: a) Coded Valve Supervisory Signaling Attachments b) Valve Supervisory Switches Transmitters c) Building Temperature Points e) Site Water Temperature Points f) Site Water Supply Level Points ELECTRICAL FIRE PUMP: a) Fire Pump Power b) Fire Pump Running c) Phase Reversal ENGINE - DRIVEN FIRE PUMP: a) Selector in Auto Position b) Engine or Control Panel Trouble c) Fire Pump Running ENGINE - DRIVEN GENERATOR: a) Selector in Auto Position b) Control Panel Trouble c) Transfer Switches d) Engine Running OTHER SUPERVISORY FUNCTION(S) (SPECIFY) 6. Alarm Notification Appliances and Circuits Quantity of notification appliance circuits connected to the system: Types and quantities of alarm notification appliances installed: a) Bells Inch b) Speakers c) Horns d) Chimes 283173 -3 7/21/08 FIRE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM RECORD OF COMPLETION FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (057) Remodel e) Other: f) Visible Signals Type with audible without audible g) Local Annunciator 7. Signaling Line Circuits: Quantity and Style (See NFPA 72, Table 3 -6) of signaling line circuits connected to System. Quantity: Style: 8. System Power Supplies a) Primary (Main) Nominal Voltage: Current Rating: Overcurrent Protection: Type: Current Rating: Location: b) Secondary (Standby): Storage Battery: Amp -Hour Rating: Calculated capacity to drive system, in hours: 24 60 Engine- driven generator dedicated to fire alarm system: Location of fuel storage: c) Emergency or Standby System used as backup to Primary Power Supply, instead of using a Secondary Power Supply: Emergency System described in NFPA 70, Article 700. Legally Required Standby System described in NFPA 70, Article 701. Optional Standby System described in NFPA 70, Article 702, which also meets the performance requirements of Article 700 or 701. 9. System Software a) Operating System Software Revision Level(s): b) Application Software Revision Level(s): c) Revision Completed by: (name) (firm) 10. Comments: (signed) for Central Station or Alarm Service Company (title) (firm) Frequency of routine tests and inspections, if other than in accordance with the referenced NFPA Standard(s): System deviations from the referenced NFPA standard(s) are: (signed) for Central Station or Alarm Service Company (title) (date) 283173 -4 7/21/08 FIRE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM RECORD OF COMPLETION FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (057) Remodel Upon completion of the system(s) satisfactory test(s) witnessed (if required by Authority Having Jurisdiction): (signed) Representative of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (title) (date) 283173 -5 7/21/08 FIRE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM INSPECTION AND TESTING FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (057) Remodel Inspection and Testing Form DATE: TIME: SERVICE ORGANIZATION PROPERTY NAME (USER) NAME: NAME: ADDRESS: ADDRESS: REPRESENTATIVE: OWNER CONTACT: LICENSE NO.: TELEPHONE: TELEPHONE: MONITORING ENTITY APPROVING AGENCY CONTACT: CONTACT: TELEPHONE: TELEPHONE: MONITORING ACCOUNT REF. NO.: TYPE TRANSMISSION SERVICE [ ] — McCulloh [ ] — Weekly [ ] — Multiplex [ ] — Monthly [ ] — Digital [ ] — Quarterly [ ] — Reverse Priority [ ] — Semi - Annually [ ] — RF [ ] — Annually [ ] — Other (Specify) [ ] — Other (Specify) PANEL MANUFACTURER: MODEL NO.: CIRCUIT STYLES: NO. OF CIRCUITS: SOFTWARE REV.: LAST DATE SYSTEM HAD ANY SERVICE PERFORMED: LAST DATE THAT ANY SOFTWARE OR CONFIGURATION WAS REVISED: ALARM INITIATING DEVICES AND CIRCUIT INFORMATION QTY OF CIRCUIT STYLE MANUAL STATIONS ION DETECTORS PHOTO DETECTORS DUCT DETECTORS HEAT DETECTORS WATERFLOW SWITCHES SUPERVISORY SWITCHES OTHER: (SPECIFY) ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES AND CIRCUIT INFORMATION QTY OF CIRCUIT STYLE BELLS HORNS CHIMES STROBES SPEAKERS OTHER: (SPECIFY) NO. OF ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUITS: ARE CIRCUITS SUPERVISED? [ ] YES [ ] NO 283176 -1 7/21/08 FIRE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM INSPECTION AND TESTING FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (057) Remodel SUPERVISORY SIGNAL INITIATING DEVICES AND CIRCUIT INFORMATION QTY OF CIRCUIT STYLE BUILDING TEMP SITE WATER TEMP SITE WATER LEVEL FIRE PUMP POWER FIRE PUMP RUNNING FIRE PUMP AUTO POSITION FIRE PUMP OR PUMP CONTROLLER TROUBLE GENERATOR IN AUTO POSITION GENERATOR OR CONTROLLER TROUBLE SWITCH TRANSFER GENERATOR ENGINE RUNNING OTHER: (SPECIFY) SIGNALING LINE CIRCUITS Quantity and style (See NFPA 72, Table 3 -6) of signaling line circuits connected to system: Quantity Style(s) SYSTEM POWER SUPPLIES a. Primary (Main): Nominal Voltage Amps Overcurrent Protection: Type Amps Location (Panel Number): Disconnecting Means Location: b. Secondary (Standby): Storage Battery: Amp -Hr Rating Calculated capacity to operate system, in hours: 24 60 Engine- driven generator dedicated to fire alarm system: Location of fuel storage: TYPE BATTERY [ ] Dry Cell [ ] Nickel Cadmium [ ] Sealed Lead -Acid [ ] Lead -Acid [ ] Other (Specify) _ c. Emergency or standby system used as a backup to primary power supply, instead of using a secondary power supply: Emergency system described in NFPA 70, Article 700 Legally required standby described in NFPA 70, Article 701 Optional standby system described in NFPA 70, Article 702, which also meets the performance requirements of Article 700 or 701. 283176 -2 7/21/08 FIRE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM INSPECTION AND TESTING FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (057) Remodel PRIOR TO ANY TESTING NOTIFICATIONS ARE MADE: YES NO WHO TIME MONITORING ENTITY [ ] [ 1 BUILDING OCCUPANTS [ 1 [ 1 BUILDING MANAGEMENT [ ] [ 1 OTHER (SPECIFY) [ ] [ 1 AHJ (NOTIFIED) OF ANY IMPAIRMENTS [ ] [ ] SYSTEM TESTS AND INSPECTIONS TYPE VISUAL FUNCTIONAL COMMENTS CONTROL PANEL [ 1 [ 1 INTERFACE EQUIPMENT [ 1 [ 1 LAMPS /LEDS [ 1 [ 1 FUSES [ 1 [ 1 PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY [ 1 [ 1 TROUBLE SIGNALS [ 1 [ ] DISCONNECT SWITCHES [ 1 [ ] GROUND FAULT MONITORING [ ] [ ] SECONDARY POWER TYPE VISUAL FUNCTIONAL COMMENTS BATTERY CONDITION [ ] LOAD VOLTAGE [ 1 DISCHARGE TEST [ 1 CHARGER TEST [ 1 SPECIFIC GRAVITY [ 1 TRANSIENT SUPPRESSORS [ 1 REMOTE ANNUNCIATORS [ 1 [ 1 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES AUDIBLE [ ] [ 1 VISIBLE [ 1 [ 1 SPEAKERS [ ] [ 1 VOICE CLARITY [ 1 INITIATING AND SUPERVISORY DEVICE TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Insert System Annunciation Schedule Device Descriptions and Auxiliary Functions from plans. DEVICE VISUAL FUNCTIONAL FACTORY MEAS. LOC. & TYPE CHECK TEST SETTING SETTING PASS FAIL S/N [ 1 [1 [] [] [1 [1 [1 [] [] [1 [1 [] [1 [1 [] [1 [] [1 [1 [] [1 [1 [1 [] COMMENTS: 283176 -3 7/21/08 FIRE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM INSPECTION AND TESTING FORM Nordstrom — Washington Square (057) Remodel VISUAL FUNCTIONAL COMMENTS EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT PHONE SETS [ ] [ PHONE JACKS [ ] [ OFF -HOOK INDICATOR [ ] [ ] AMPLIFIERS(S) [ ] [ ] TONE GENERATOR(S) [ ] [ CALL IN SIGNAL [ ] [ SYSTEM PERFORMANCE [ ] [ VISUAL DEVICE SIMULATED OPERATION OPERATION INTERFACE EQUIPMENT (SPECIFY) [ ] [ ] [ ] (SPECIFY) [ ] [ ] [ (SPECIFY) [ ] [ ] [ SPECIAL HAZARD SYSTEMS (SPECIFY) [ ] [ ] [ (SPECIFY) [ ] [ ] [ (SPECIFY) [ ] [ ] [ SPECIAL PROCEDURES: COMMENTS: ON /OFF PREMISES MONITORING: YES NO TIME COMMENTS ALARM SIGNAL [ ] [ ALARM RESTORAL [ ] [ ] TROUBLE SIGNAL [ ] [ ] TROUBLE RESTORAL [ ] [ ] SUPERVISORY SIGNAL [ ] [ ] SUPERVISORY RESTORAL [ ] [ NOTIFICATIONS THAT TESTING: IS COMPLETE YES NO WHO COMMENTS BUILDING MANAGEMENT [ ] [ MONITORING AGENCY [ ] [ BUILDING OCCUPANTS [ ] [ OTHER (SPECIFY) [ ] [ THE FOLLOWING DID NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY: SYSTEM RESTORED TO NORMAL OPERATION: DATE: TIME: THE TESTING WAS PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE NFPA STANDARDS. NAME OF INSPECTOR: DATE: TIME: SIGNATURE: NAME OF OWNER OR REPRESENTATIVE: DATE: TIME: SIGNATURE: 283176 -4 7/21/08